Building a culture of research integrity with leadership commitment and support networks

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Jul 21 2026

Institutions can help responsible research practice thrive by supporting their researchers and providing the right conditions. In a special blog series, we draw on interviews with institutional research integrity experts from various regions to explore how integrity is experienced in practice, and what it takes to sustain it across a fragmented research landscape. In this final blog, we explore how the commitment of leadership and systemic institutional support can create and sustain a culture of research integrity.

In the previous blogs in this series on institutional research integrity, we first explored the landscape of integrity to understand the context in which institutions are working today to uphold and advance integrity. In the second blog, we focused on the gap between what training teaches and what incentives reward and considered how institutions can contribute to minimising this gap.

In this blog, we investigate the role of leadership commitment and support networks throughout institutions in nurturing a positive integrity culture. For responsible research practice to thrive, institutions need multi-layered support systems that cover policy, leadership, local guidance, and lifecycle support.

Leadership sets the tone and policies that define expectations around research integrity. This is in turn echoed through the institution through embedded support networks that give researchers contextual, discipline-specific guidance. These local integrity-champions model practical decisions and practices in labs and research sites, but they also support integrity offices with disciplinary knowledge when integrity cases arise.

As with the first two blogs in the series, we draw here on our conversations with Jonas Åkerman, Research Integrity and Ethics Coordinator, Ethics Support Function at Stockholm University, Sweden, Daniel Barr, Principal Research Integrity Advisor at RMIT University, Australia, Rod Bates, Former Research Integrity Officer at Nanyang Technological University (NTU), Singapore, and Lauran Qualkenbush, Senior Director for Research Integrity and Training and Research Integrity Officer at Northwestern University, United States and founding member of the Association of Research Integrity Officers.

“Understanding what's happening in research and how researchers do research enables us to support integrity and to engender a culture of responsible ethical research.” - Daniel Barr, Principal Research Integrity Advisor at RMIT University, Australia

Visible leadership in support of integrity makes a difference

Leadership commitment is not just a slogan. This commitment means that institutional integrity work is properly resourced, visible and valued, and able to influence research practice. For the creation of a good institutional integrity culture, the willingness of “leadership at the executive level to think about research integrity and ethics, but also then support it in real terms, is very important,” according to Daniel Barr.

These “real terms” in which leadership can support research integrity can range from staffing and securing integrity roles, treating data stewardship as infrastructure rather than an afterthought, and sustaining investment in research support services like repositories, licensing guidance, and trainings. High-level integrity expectations translate into day-to-day practice when leadership commits to integrity through strategy, policies, and sustained institutional support.

“Culture comes from the top down,” says Lauran Qualkenbush, and there are “many layers to the culture.” Leadership sets the tone and policies, while support networks embedded across the institution and in different settings turn those signals into day-to-day decisions in departments, labs, and project teams.

Embedded support networks: Integrity guidance where research happens

Most researchers, Jonas Åkerman observes, are aware of integrity issues and consider them, but “they need guidance and help, not just interpreting the rules individually, but also finding a good balance and managing the complexity of the whole.” By offering guidance and practical assistance, embedded support networks can help researchers effectively handle integrity issues throughout their work.

Centralised integrity offices can find it challenging to reach every discipline or lab culture alone, when they are themselves external to those everyday research practices. The challenge of translating integrity training and institutional policies into research practices and culture is already substantial. Taking this translation a step further requires having integrity champions acting from within.

Research integrity advisors that “champion these conversations in their local schools or areas,” as Daniel Barr explains, bring integrity into everyday practice and establish the conditions for it to be upheld. Integrity champions that are “locally” embedded where research is conducted complement training and policies and help translate institutional and leadership commitment to integrity.

The importance of discipline-specific support in addressing research integrity concerns

Beyond modelling integrity-positive practices to their peers, these local supporters also help integrity officers with domain knowledge to complement their general expertise about integrity. This could be required when institutional integrity specialists address an integrity concern.

Rod Bates explains that receiving assistance from disciplinary experts when addressing integrity issues is important. The collaboration of these experts is based on the general understanding throughout the institution that “integrity is important.”

Having distributed networks that support research integrity throughout the institution creates a culture of responsible research practice that upholds integrity. These disciplinary integrity champions offer researchers discipline-specific guidance and also support the institutional integrity office with their topical expert input, as needed to address integrity concerns. 

In this environment, there are more chances to identify and address confusion, conflict, or poor practice in early stages, as well as the commitment to solving issues when they surface in later stages. These support networks extend the reach, credibility, and responsiveness of the central integrity office and the commitment of the leadership throughout the institution.

Institutions in support of a research integrity culture

Institutions shape research integrity culture by what they resource, what they reward, and what they make practical. An integrity culture hinges on the accumulated effect of leadership commitment and embedded support.

In this blog series, we explored the integrity challenges of the complex landscape of modern research. We learned how everyday pressures and misaligned incentives can pull researchers away from responsible practice. And we recognised how institutions can create and nurture a culture in which research integrity thrives. Working in concert with other players across the research ecosystem, institutions make research integrity a lived reality, not just an ideal.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

How gold open access helps researchers expand their global impact

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon Jul 20 2026

A new Springer Nature white paper on the impact of China’s gold open access (OA) articles explores how publishing openly can help research travel further. This blog offers practical insights into how openness, collaboration, and publishing choices can broaden the visibility and use of your work.

The white paper 'Open for impact: China’s gold open access boosting global innovation and supporting the Global South’ analyses China’s rapid growth in gold OA publishing and examines how this research is being cited, downloaded, and used internationally, with a particular focus on its impact in the Global South.  

The findings point to the role OA can play in supporting wider readership and citation by making research immediately available. They further underline how international collaboration can also support the reach and impact of open research. Openness, collaboration, and publishing choices can all influence how far research travels.

How open access can help your research travel further

The volume and impact of articles published gold OA by authors from China has risen substantially in recent years. The two-year citations of these articles (citations received within two years of publication) rose from 1.8 million for OA articles published in 2020 to 2.8 million for those published in 2022, an increase of 55%. But where these citations come from is just as telling as how many citations these articles attract.

Nearly 40% of citations to gold OA articles published by authors from China in 2022 came from publications with no authors in China. In other words, a substantial share of the research citing these articles was produced entirely outside China, indicating that the work is being used beyond the domestic research community of the original authors. For researchers more broadly, this shows how OA can help research become more visible to readers outside their immediate institution, country, or existing networks of its authors.

Increasing the visibility of research beyond academia with gold open access

Publishing OA can also make your research more visible to audiences beyond academia, including policymakers, practitioners, innovators, and the wider public. Indeed, the white paper shows that China’s gold OA articles are attracting substantial Altmetric attention, which tracks mentions in news coverage, policy documents, patents, social media, and other online sources.

China’s gold OA articles published in 2022 achieved a combined Altmetric Score of 703,000, increasing by 26% compared to 2020. Articles published in 2024 had already reached 510,000 despite having had less time to accumulate attention.

“OA helps make research accessible; collaboration can strengthen its relevance, networks, and potential readership across regions.”

Removing barriers to make your research accessible to audiences worldwide

Access is a precondition for impact. No matter how relevant a piece of research is, readers cannot use and build on it if they cannot easily access it. When you publish your research gold OA, you remove that access barrier by making the final published article immediately available online. It is then easier for readers in regions with access barriers to find, read, and build on your research.

This access point is reflected in one of the clearest patterns observed in the white paper: the difference between the use of OA and non-OA articles in the Global South. In Springer Nature hybrid journals that published more than 10 OA articles from China between 2020 and 2022, OA articles received 5.2 citations from the Global South per article, compared with 2.7 for non-OA articles, meaning 92% more citations for OA. These OA articles also received more than 4.8 times as many downloads per article in the Global South.

OA Articles' Impact © Springer Nature 2026

Collaboration can amplify the effects of openness and extend the reach of your research

Combining open publishing with collaboration can also contribute to the reach of publications. The white paper analyses the growth of China’s collaboration, showing that gold OA articles co-authored by researchers in China and the Global South increased from 11,000 in 2020 to 19,000 in 2024, representing an average annual growth rate of 15%. These collaborations were associated with strong citation impact. Gold OA articles co-authored by researchers in China and the Global South generated 195,000 two-year citations for articles published in 2020, rising to 303,000 for articles published in 2022.

More importantly, the collaborations benefited not only the Global South, but China as well. In 2022, co-authored gold OA articles between China and the Global South received 16.1 two-year citations per article, compared with 5.1 for all Global South gold OA articles and 9.9 for all China gold OA articles.

This suggests that openness and collaboration can work together. OA helps make research accessible; collaboration can strengthen its relevance, networks, and potential readership across regions. For researchers, the broader lesson is that impact can be strengthened when openness is combined with meaningful international collaboration.

The importance of where you publish: Citation advantage with Springer Nature gold OA

Publishing open access is an important step in increasing the visibility of research, but where you publish can also influence who discovers and engages with your work. Case studies presented in the white paper suggest that where research is published can influence how widely it is used.

For example, gold OA articles from China's top 20 institutions published in 2022 in Springer Nature journals generally received more citations from researchers in the Global South than the broader market average for gold OA articles. The University of Chinese Academy of Sciences, for example, recorded 4.7 Global South citations per gold OA article in Springer Nature journals, compared with 2.7 across all publishers.

The citation advantage is visible across a selection of disciplines analysed in the white paper. In each research area examined, China’s gold OA articles published in Springer Nature journals received more citations from the Global South per article than the market average.

What researchers can learn from the impact of China’s OA

Your research can have greater influence when it is easier to access and to discover, and when it is connected to the communities that can use it. The white paper shows that gold OA helps research move across disciplines and regions.

Openness can provide a foundation for greater visibility and stronger international engagement, while international collaboration can extend reach. Combined with informed decisions on where to publish, your work can reach more readers, generate discussion, and create real-world impact.

Explore the white paper: Open for impact: China’s gold open access boosting global innovation and supporting the Global South. And to maximise your work’s reach, consider publishing your next article open access with Springer Nature.

Related content:  

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest! 

Building the infrastructure for open science: A conversation with Carole Goble

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri Jul 10 2026

This is the seventh and final blog post in our series in which researchers share their experiences with open science practices, and reflect on the impact that sharing open data, code, and protocols can have.  

Carole Goble is Professor of Computer Science at the University of Manchester and a leading figure in open science, FAIR data, and research infrastructure. A co-author of the FAIR Principles and co-founder of the UK Software Sustainability Institute, she has spent nearly three decades building the tools, platforms, and collaborations behind transparent, reusable research. We spoke with her about why infrastructure, incentives, and culture must evolve together. 

Can you briefly introduce yourself and your area of expertise?  

My specialisms are semantic technology, metadata, computational workflows, and disrupting scientific communication through open science. For over a decade I've been joint Head of Node of ELIXIR-UK, the UK's national Node for ELIXIR, the European research infrastructure for life science data. We have 31 organisations in the UK, while ELIXIR spans 22 countries across Europe and coordinates the management and sustainability of life science data. 

I'm a co-author of the FAIR Principles and a founding partner of the European Virtual Institute for Research Software Excellence. I’ve spent much of my career developing open science infrastructure, including FAIRDOM-SEEK, myExperiment, and its successor, WorkflowHub. Until recently I was co-lead of Health Data Research UK, and I serve on the G7 Open Science Working Group as the UK expert. 

How did you first become interested in open science practices, and what motivated you to adopt them?  

“The Human Genome Project showed that science at scale depends on bringing data together and sharing it openly.” 

                                          Carole Goble

I began my career in health data, which isn't open at all, and moved into bioinformatics in the late 1990s. The life sciences have a long history of sharing results in databases for the common good. The Human Genome Project showed that science at scale depends on bringing data together and sharing it openly. 

That set up an obvious question: why not approach everything this way? Through the 2000s there was real momentum, alongside a deeper question about whether scholarship is just about publishing papers. More and more information was becoming available, and people were doing more analysis with computers and software, but almost none of it survived beyond publication; it disappeared the moment it went into the paper. So how could we introduce living papers that share the underlying analysis and data? 

That's when I started myExperiment, a way to share your workflows and analysis. The idea that we should share how we did something took off, not just to pass on know-how, but to show transparently how the work was done. This ties into research integrity and reproducibility: there was a bit of a reproducibility crisis at the end of the 2000s. People publish papers, but how can you stand behind what they did if they haven't shared the data or analysis behind it? 

These aren't new ideas, they go back a long way, but I became part of a community that drove the push for transparency, reuse, and recognising the value of artefacts beyond the written narrative: data, software, standard operating procedures. A lot of my work was in the biosciences because they were so open to it. 

Have you ever faced any particular challenges or barriers in undertaking open science practices?  

The barriers aren't technical. Brian Nosek's Strategy for Culture Change pyramid sums it up, though it has one flaw: the shape implies a hierarchy, with policy tiny at the top and infrastructure broad at the bottom, as if you build it in layers. I don't think that's right. It's really a series of interconnected circles because you have to work on all of them at once to move the needle. Policy isn't enough on its own, you need the infrastructure that lets things be shared, the skills that make it easy, and the incentives that give me a reason to make my work not just available but genuinely reusable. Making something available is easy; making it reusable is not. 

We see this constantly: counterfeit sharing, where you say you've shared something but haven't because there isn't the metadata for anyone to use it. That's why we push so hard on the FAIR aspects. Then there's something less like sharing than flirting: just enough metadata to interest you, but not enough to reuse anything. So, you approach the people who created it, take them to dinner. Eventually they say, ‘Yes, we can work together, and you can put me on your paper’ because the paper is still the currency. 

It's easy to say something is open, but how open is it really? People still operate on incentive models built around authorship rather than reuse and citation, and they're genuinely bad at citing, whether it's data, software, or credit for the people who did the work. That feeds the same problem. You have to make it normative. That's the top of Nosek's pyramid: it becomes standard practice. 

There's one piece missing from his pyramid: usefulness. He has possible, usable, mandatory, normative - but not useful. All the infrastructures I've built are still going. We keep trying to kill off myExperiment, it's so old and we've got WorkflowHub now, but people still use it. I still see papers published around it because it's useful. The challenge is fitting the pieces together: getting policy pushed through, the incentives right, perceptions shifted. It's hard, and that includes publishers as much as funders. The funders are actually pretty good. It's the publishers who could play a bigger role. 

Is there a particular success story or example you’re proud of that illustrates the benefits of open science?  

WorkflowHub and FAIRDOM have been great successes for sharing a particular kind of software, and because the infrastructure itself is open, people set up their own instances. Another is the TeSS training portal, a central hub for life sciences training, and an example of both shared software and shared practice. The platform underneath it was taken up by high-energy physics, CERN in particular, and by other countries: Australia, Canada, the Netherlands, Sweden, each reusing it for their own training. Now we've come together in a European Commission–funded programme to build a single shared platform: instead of each running our own instance, we run one shared service. That's the mTeSS-X project

This is what happens when you make things open: other people, organisations, countries, and disciplines reuse them and work with you to deliver. That matters when nobody funds training portals. Everyone says training and skills matter, but you can never get the money. This is where open proves its worth collectively. 

How has open science shaped collaboration, sustainability, and real-world impact throughout your research and educational work? 

“The benefits [of open science] are enormous. Organisations feel part of the team, which keeps the work going, and working openly lets you sustain what you do: the more platforms we develop, the more people use them and the more momentum you build.” 

                                                                      Carole Goble 

My entire career is built on it. We're serial collaborators who've built everything jointly. ELIXIR as a whole has around 300 organisations across its 22 countries, open working on a scale that's hard to imagine. The benefits are enormous. Organisations feel part of the team, which keeps the work going, and working openly lets you sustain what you do: the more platforms we develop, the more people use them and the more momentum you build, not just in how research becomes open, but in finding new income streams. To be blunt, when the chips are down in one country, another steps in to help. 

My measure of importance is impact. Did it make a difference? Could people share their workflows and collaborate around their data? If so, that's a success. Think about it the other way: you publish a paper, nobody cites it, what's the point? You've added a line to a CV. There has to be something that actually comes out of it. 

If we'd just done it in our own little bubble, who would know about it? Who would join us to develop it? We wouldn't have had the adoption, sustainability, innovation, or collaboration. We wouldn't have been part of ten Horizon Europe projects right through Brexit, when the UK wasn't even associated with it. Think how many people saw their careers end because the funding dried up. We carried on. That's a testament to our open practices. 

Are there any gaps in support or resources about open science you’d like to see addressed?  

The UK has shown remarkable foresight. It funded the Software Sustainability Institute in 2010, and the eScience Programme led by Tony Hey, started around 2000, is twenty-five years old now. That programme laid the foundations for much of today's eScience activity, for the work I’ve done, and for many of the national digital research infrastructures now being built across the physical sciences, biosciences, and beyond. The European Commission has been enormously helpful too. So, the funders have genuinely driven this; they've had the vision. 

I'd like the publishers to be more engaged. Picture four corners. The funders are one, and they often engage. The communities are another, and they’re very engaged. Then the institutions, even more conservative than publishers: they only change when forced from outside, and that force usually comes from publishers and funders, because institutions respond to money and fame. The fourth corner is the publishers. They hold the fame ticket, and the ticket to access and reuse: can I get the method and the data? If publishers had more of a voice in how we sustain the resources that archive that data, we might build more impetus to hold funders to continued support. 

So, we could get far more from publishers and institutions than we currently do. We could also achieve much more with a systemic way of managing our open research infrastructures. At the moment, they're funded piecemeal. We're still using an early-twentieth-century funding model to sustain international infrastructures, and that's a big problem. 

What advice would you give to researchers considering open science practices, and what misconceptions need to be challenged? 

If you're thinking about making things available, I'd first ask: are you reinventing something that already exists? Do you really need to build it? What's the cost of reuse? The second is to find out what support your organisation offers to prepare your data and software for reuse. It takes time and resources, so build it in from the start. There's no point pretending it's all easy and free. It isn't, but the payoffs in collaboration and citation are big, and there's plenty of evidence that papers people can access get cited more. So, build it into your processes and make it normative but expect to resource it or to push your organisation to. 

If you do nothing else, stick it in a database and put it on GitHub. Use an electronic lab notebook, anything that makes it a bit better. Don't just say, ‘No, I won't do it at all.’ We need to train up the next generation and build these skills within institutions — because institutions are where researchers live. 

Remember that FAIR doesn't mean open. It means accessible. You can be FAIR without making everything available. It's also not free: everything has to be paid for, and somebody carries the cost. Another misconception is that if something's open it can't be worth anything. Actually, it's worth a great deal. Open software powers industry. OpenUK has good data on how much UK business depends on open infrastructure. Open data is what powered AlphaFold. If that data hadn't been available, AlphaFold would be an algorithm pootling around in a corner. Open data drives this new generation of AI-driven research, and it's hugely valuable. 

One final point: open needs to be protected. Making it open doesn't mean people can steal it. Open also carries a responsibility of citizenship. Without it, we get a tragedy of the commons. In fact, we've already entered one, where people exploit open resources for their own gain. Open is vulnerable if it isn't protected. It's for the public good, so don't just expect it to still be there. Don't take it for granted. 

Learn more about open science and sharing research data, code and protocols & methods openly.


Carole Goble © Springer Nature

Carole Goble, Professor, School of Computer Science, University of Manchester, UK 

Carole Goble is Professor of Computer Science at the University of Manchester and a leading figure in open science, FAIR data, and research infrastructure. A co-author of the FAIR Principles and co-founder of the UK Software Sustainability Institute, she has spent nearly three decades building the tools, platforms, and collaborations behind transparent, reusable research. Professor Goble serves on the G7 Open Science Working Group as the UK expert.  


Related content:

  • Open science conversations: 
  1. Building trust through transparency: An open science conversation with Geir Kjetil Sandve 
  2. Open science, altruism and impact: An interview with clinical geneticist Zornitza Stark
  3. Bioinformatician Johannes Koester on embodying the spirit of open science 
  4. How to do science that matters: Computational biologist Casey S. Greene on purpose-driven open science practices 
  5. Open science before it had a name: An interview with molecular biologist Steven Henikoff 
  6. From code to chemistry: A conversation with Connor W. Coley on open science practices and reproducible AI research
  •  Best practices for transparency and reuse: 
  1. How to share your research protocols and methods openly 

  2. How to share your research code openly 

  • Supporting open science practices: 
  1. Why share your research data? 

  2. Why sharing protocols matters 

  3. Why sharing your code matters 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest

Creating an institutional research integrity culture: It takes more than training

T
The Link
By: undefined, Thu Jul 9 2026

Research integrity is essential for maintaining trust in research, but sustaining this integrity requires efforts in a complex landscape. Institutions have a key role to play by fostering a culture that supports responsible research in practice. In a special blog series, we draw on interviews with institutional research integrity experts from various regions to explore how integrity is experienced in practice, and what it takes to sustain it.

In this second blog of the series, we explore the gap between integrity training and research practices and discuss how institutions can reshape incentives to make training more meaningful in everyday research practices.

In the first blog of this series, we mapped the complexity of today’s research integrity landscape. With insights from institutional integrity experts, we recognised the importance of collaboration, communication, and trust for the work of institutions with publishers and funders to advance and maintain research integrity. Turning inwards to the institutions themselves, in this blog we explore their efforts to cultivate a research integrity culture that endures, with the backdrop of day-to-day pressures that sometimes pull researchers away from good practice.

For the insights in this blog and the other in the series, we draw on our conversations with Jonas Åkerman, Research Integrity and Ethics Coordinator, Ethics Support Function at Stockholm University, Sweden, Daniel Barr, Principal Research Integrity Advisor at RMIT University, Australia, Rod Bates, Former Research Integrity Officer at Nanyang Technological University (NTU), Singapore, and Lauran Qualkenbush, Senior Director for Research Integrity and Training and Research Integrity Officer at Northwestern University, United States and founding member of the Association of Research Integrity Officers.

When research practices contradict institutional integrity training

Institutional research integrity experts point out that although institutions support researchers through training, this training can come into tension with research practices. When everyday research practices clash with integrity education, this can undo the efforts to train and maintain research integrity standards. What supervisors communicate in their labs “sets culture,” as Lauran Qualkenbush explains, even if it contradicts what she teaches in research integrity classes.

Researchers are hardly motivated against good integrity practice. On the contrary: “The vast majority of researchers want to conform to good research practice,” says Jonas Åkerman. “The problem is that they are challenged by features in this ecosystem that incentivise them to sometimes compromise.”

This is an important reminder for institutions that invest time and resources in training: What happens after the training can be just as important. The workflows and environment in which researchers work, the patterns of supervision, and the pressures of assessment shape how things are done in practice.

“Research will always be competitive, but we can take away some of the negative incentives, set positive incentives, and provide researchers with guidance and the best possible conditions for good research practice.”
- Jonas Åkerman, Research Integrity and Ethics Coordinator, Ethics Support Function at Stockholm University, Sweden

Encouraging good research practice through institutional support and services

Telling researchers what good practice entails is not enough to operationalise a research integrity culture. Institutions need to also work actively to counter the “features in the ecosystem” Åkerman mentions, that motivate researchers to take shortcuts. Indeed, many pressures are outside the realm of influence of institutions, but identifying where they can meaningfully support researchers is vital.

For instance, the two main research integrity challenges as identified by the integrity experts we spoke with, authorship and data, could be opportunities for targeted intervention by institutions. Supplying researchers with compliance checklists guiding them on how to maintain research integrity in authorship and data management is a good start. But institutions can consider ways to offer additional services addressing these issues and encouraging good practice throughout the research cycle. These could mean the difference between training and guidance that is external to researchers’ practice and offerings that can be implemented in these practices.

The problem with ‘box ticking’ training that the integrity experts raised was also identified in a global survey by Springer Nature on research integrity training. In the white paper titled ‘Surveying the provision of research integrity training around the world,’ researchers expressed concern that the training they were offered was not tailored to the immediate needs of their research practice. The white paper suggests that more training is not necessarily the solution: For complex issues (such as data sharing), researchers may best be served by access to specialists rather than be expected to develop these specialist skills themselves.

Supporting research assessment reform to realign incentives

Incentives are a daily behavioural driver. When success is measured primarily through speed and publication metrics, it can create conditions where research integrity issues become more likely.

Prioritising quantity over quality is a reward structure that can incentivise shortcuts and corner cutting. “A lot of the misconduct is carried out because people need more citations, more publications,” Rod Bates says.

Research assessment for hiring, promotion, or funding has long been challenged for its evaluation practices and the need for more holistic approaches to researcher contributions. While reforming research assessment requires action from stakeholders across the research community, institutions can consider how they support reform initiatives within their own processes, and strengthen researchers’ understanding of the importance of transparency, reproducibility, and data stewardship beyond more traditional success signals.

Creating conditions that incentivise responsible research

Jonas Åkerman describes incentives as the “simple but impossible” problem. Institutions can’t remove competition from research, but they can remove some of the most damaging pressures and add positive incentives by “providing researchers with guidance and the best possible preconditions” to do responsible work.

Creating these counter incentives does, however, require resources. With “genuine funding” for responsible research, Daniel Barr claims, institutions would be able to assist researchers directly and also resource the support teams around them that help with practical aspects of responsible research.

Institutions don’t necessarily need to establish new scorecards for these positive incentives. Libraries often offer services that are preconditions to research integrity like data support, repository guidance, or metadata and licensing advice. More broadly, institutions can enable practical conditions that make responsible work more achievable: allocate time for researchers to adopt relevant good practices, ensure support is visible and normalized, and set clear expectations around transparent and open sharing of data, methods and outputs, in line with reproducibility and integrity standards.

How can institutions make research integrity the default rather than the exception?

Research integrity training is essential, but we must recognise that it cannot alone compete with contradictory incentives, signals, and culture. Institutions have the power to create an environment that elevates integrity training into responsible research practice and culture through targeted, strategic actions.

Some insights emerge from our conversations with institutional integrity experts:

  • Make research integrity a meaningful part of everyday decisions:
    Responsible practice expectations can be incorporated into hiring, promotion, and internal funding criteria. When these expectations are communicated throughout the institution, they signal the value of integrity.
  • Design support to pre-empt errors that are later complex to address:
    Strategically embedding practical and simple support throughout the research lifecycle where issues tend to arise later, such as authorship clarifications, contribution statements, data deposit checklists, and clear pathways to seek out support on specific issues.
  • Invest in tools, systems, and people to bridge between research integrity ideals and daily practices:
    Investing in practical support that can help researchers apply training in their day-to-day work, such as data management platforms, repository guidance, authorship templates, and access to specialist advice.
  • Equip supervisors and local leaders to become research integrity champions:
    Lab heads and principal investigators set culture and example for their researchers. They should be supported not only with policy and rules, but also with practical tools such as templates, escalation routes, and coaching that can make these figures into integrity facilitators and ambassadors.

These efforts require strong and committed leadership. In the next and final blog of this series, we explore what this leadership commitment looks like in practice, and how institutional support networks can support research integrity where research actually happens. Stay tuned.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

From discovery to decision: How pharma and biotech teams can close the research access gap

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Jul 7 2026

For pharma and biotech research and development (R&D) teams, access to scientific research now shapes the speed, accuracy, and direction of innovation.

To better understand how organisations are navigating these challenges, Springer Nature surveyed 300 pharma and biotech professionals across North America and Europe. The findings reveal that as research demand continues to accelerate, access pathways have struggled to keep pace, creating friction across workflows that depend on fast, reliable scientific insight.

Explore key insights from the report and how organisations are reducing research friction to move from discovery to decision-making with greater confidence.

Research access is under pressure from every direction

Scientific literature is now fully embedded in daily workflows, with survey data revealing that 81% of pharma and biotech professionals access scientific research weekly or daily. Yet, as research demands grow, access is being shaped by wider structural pressures rather than isolated issues.

The research shift from reference material to core infrastructure

Researchers now rely on scientific literature from experimental design and validation through to interpreting results. It also underpins regulatory and compliance documentation, where accurate evidence is essential for approvals and submissions.

Beyond the lab, research supports strategic R&D decisions and competitive intelligence, with researchers using published findings to:

  • Track therapeutic progress
  • Identify emerging opportunities 
  • Understand market positioning

Research access now functions more like operational infrastructure than a discretionary resource, similar to cloud platforms or essential laboratory equipment.

Why fragmented discovery slows scientific progress

Despite this reliance, discovery remains fragmented. There is no single route to scientific content, with researchers moving between:

  • Publisher platforms, such as Springer Nature Link 
  • Open access (OA) repositories 
  • Institutional library systems 
  • General search engines, including Google Scholar and PubMed 
  • Emerging AI tools  

This often creates repeated switching between systems, duplicated search effort, and uneven access experiences. For startups and cross-institutional teams, inconsistent subscription coverage adds further friction, turning discovery into a multi-step process rather than a seamless workflow.

Research demand is growing, but access inequality persists

Access also remains uneven. The Springer Nature survey reveals that while 65% of researchers highly value subscriptions, 26% report having no access, and only 12% rely on personal subscriptions. This reflects more than a pricing challenge. It highlights a wider organisational capability gap that most strongly affects:

  • Startups
  • Scaling biotech firms
  • Smaller or distributed research teams

As a result, some of the environments driving the highest research demand continue to face the greatest access limitations.

What the data reveals about access, speed, and trust

Survey insights from pharma and biotech professionals reveal a few clear patterns:

1. Speed to knowledge is now a core R&D constraint

Limited access to literature can slow progress at multiple stages of the pipeline, including:

  • Delaying patent filings 
  • Weakening IP positioning 
  • Reducing the ability to act early on emerging science 

It also affects clinical development. Delays in accessing key studies can slow trial design decisions and regulatory readiness. In competitive research environments, even small bottlenecks can affect commercial advantage.

2. Paywalls and fragmented access reduce productivity 

When researchers encounter paywalls or gaps in coverage, work rarely stops. Instead, time shifts toward:

  • Tracking down alternative versions of papers
  • Contacting colleagues
  • Relying on informal sharing networks

These workarounds interrupt active research workflows, particularly during literature reviews and analysis phases. They can also increase compliance risk when content is accessed outside formal systems.  

3. Discovery fragmentation creates a “cognitive tax”

Fragmentation creates more than operational friction. It also increases cognitive load. Researchers move between multiple platforms, logins, and search tools, often repeating the same queries across different systems. 

They also spend time confirming whether sources are complete, current, and credible. This ongoing validation slows momentum and diverts high-value scientific time away from interpretation and experimentation. 

4. Trust in quality remains the anchor

Even as AI tools and open platforms become more common, trust remains the deciding factor. In fact, the survey found that 47% of researchers prioritise content quality above all other considerations. 

Peer-reviewed journals continue to be the most trusted source, particularly in regulated environments where accuracy matters. Researchers remain cautious about unverified outputs, especially when decisions affect clinical or regulatory outcomes — reinforcing the importance of trusted research ecosystems.

How organisations can close the research access gap

As research workflows grow more complex, pharma and biotech professionals can take a more strategic approach to research access by:

Reframing access as a performance lever

Faster access to trusted literature can help R&D teams:

  • Make stronger decisions
  • Minimise delays across development pipelines
  • Respond more quickly to emerging scientific developments

This also changes how organisations evaluate ROI. The value extends beyond content access alone and includes reduced risk, faster validation, and improved research velocity. Organisations that align access strategy with pipeline goals and competitive priorities are often better positioned to maintain momentum in competitive markets.

Building scalable research foundations early

Fragmented access can quickly become a barrier for startups and growing biotech firms as teams expand. Establishing consistent, centralised access early helps create more stable research workflows and reduces reliance on disconnected sharing networks or informal access routes.

It also gives smaller organisations a stronger research capability from the start. In lean environments, efficient access can help teams compete more effectively alongside major players.

Reducing fragmentation and compliance risk

Consistency across global and cross-functional teams is increasingly important for larger pharmaceutical organisations. Standardised access pathways can reduce duplicated effort, support collaboration, and limit reliance on unofficial sharing channels.

Integrating research access into wider governance and compliance frameworks also strengthens operational resilience. Amid evolving regulatory expectations, trusted access systems are an essential aspect of research integrity and long-term efficiency.

Why hybrid access models are emerging as the practical standard

Open access repositories support broad discovery and accessibility. Researchers often rely on OA content during early-stage exploration, interdisciplinary scanning, and initial literature reviews. It helps teams engage with a wider scientific conversation and identify emerging developments more quickly.

Subscription-based access remains essential for deeper research and higher-stakes decision-making. In areas such as drug discovery, clinical development, and regulatory preparation, researchers depend on validated, peer-reviewed evidence and comprehensive journal coverage to support confident analysis and reduce risk.

Creating a more connected approach to research discovery

For corporate R&D teams, the focus is moving away from choosing one model over another. More effective workflows combine the reach of open access with the depth, consistency, and trust of subscription-based research.

As AI-enabled discovery tools continue to evolve, this balance is becoming even more important. Accelerated discovery here can support innovation, but trusted evidence remains central to compliance and research quality.

Closing the gap between discovery and decision-making

Fragmented systems and inconsistent access continue to slow progress at critical moments across the R&D lifecycle. Closing that gap requires more connected research environments built around efficient discovery workflows and reliable data foundations. This shift is essential for ensuring that faster discovery is matched by trusted, high-quality scientific evidence.

Read the full report to explore the survey findings and trends shaping the future of research access in pharma and biotech.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

From publications to policy: The impact of research towards achieving the SDGs

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri Jul 3 2026

Springer Nature, in cooperation with Overton, has published a report ‘From publications to policy: The impact of research towards achieving the Sustainable Development Goals’. The report explores where, when and how SDG research is cited in policy, offering a new perspective on the relationship between science and real-world decision making.

This infographic distils the key insights from the report, offering a visual snapshot of the main findings and recommendations.

Infographic: From publications to policy: The impact of research towards achieving the Sustainable Development Goals

From pub to policy Infographic © Springernature 2026

We invite you to explore the infographic, download it, and share it with your network.

For a deeper dive into the full analysis and recommendations, we encourage you to read the report. 


Related content: 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest

Making the Most of ONOS: Practical Guidance for India’s Research Community

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Jul 2 2026

The Government of India’s One Nation One Subscription (ONOS) is a significant step towards democratising access to scholarly knowledge across the country. By enabling nationwide access to high-quality research literature, the initiative strengthens India’s research ecosystem and supports the country’s ambition to become a global leader in science and innovation.

As a participating publisher, Springer Nature is proud to support ONOS, helping unlock high-quality trusted research for millions of students, faculty members, and researchers across India’s universities and research institutions, supporting India’s continued rise on the global research stage.


India’s momentum was the focus of our Global Pulse report in 2025, which highlights the country as a top three global research contributor with rapidly growing high-impact output. As India’s research profile continues to strengthen, expanding access must be accompanied by efforts to build the skills, confidence and best practices needed to achieve high-quality publications. To support this goal, Springer Nature launched the ONOS Researcher Connect webinar series, a programme designed specifically for India’s researcher community. The series covers topics ranging from navigating research platforms and understanding research metrics to research ethics, responsible AI use, and scientific writing. Drawing on insights from nine sessions and participation from over 14,000 researchers across India, this case study highlights practical guidance for researchers at every stage of the research lifecycle.

About ONOS

Launched in 2025, ONOS provides nationwide access to over 13,000 scholarly journals from over 30 global publishers. In its first phase (to December 2027), more than 6,500 government universities, research centres, and higher education institutions across India benefit from full-text access for all their students, researchers, and faculty.

The programme also includes support for open access publishing. A centrally managed Article Processing Charge (APC) fund of ₹150 crore (approximately €18 million) per year enables eligible researchers to publish in 400+ selected fully open access journals, helping expand the visibility and accessibility of Indian research.

Making the most of ONOS: Navigating the latest research

As highlighted in the Global Pulse report, India’s growing contribution to high-impact research makes staying current more important than ever. Through ONOS, researchers can access a wide range of Springer Nature content, including the Nature portfolio (with backfiles dating to 1997) as well as journals from Springer, Palgrave, Adis and other Nature-branded titles.

During the webinar series, experts shared practical strategies to help researchers navigate and use these resources effectively:
 

  • Refine searches with targeted keywords: Using advanced search filters (such as subject, article types, and date ranges) can help quickly narrow broad results and surface the most relevant research.
  • Set up alerts for journals and articles: Alerts ensure researchers receive notifications when new research is published in their field, helping them stay up to date.
  • Engage with wider research communities: Platforms like our Researcher Communities, Springer Nature blogs like The Researcher’s Source, and newsletters like Nature Briefing provide additional perspectives on developments across disciplines and insights into life in research.

Strengthening research integrity and good practice

As India’s research ecosystem expands, maintaining high standards of research integrity is essential. Research integrity is not only about avoiding misconduct, it is fundamental to building trust, credibility, and long-term impact for scientific work.

Across the global research landscape, common concerns raised during publication review processes include:

  • Image irregularities
  • Data concerns
  • Plagiarism
  • Peer review manipulation
  • Authorship disputes

To address these challenges, the webinar series emphasised key principles:
 

  • Agree authorship early: Clarifying roles and contributions at the start of a project can prevent misunderstanding later.
  • Cite responsibly and avoid plagiarism: Accurate citation and careful paraphrasing ensure that previous work is appropriately acknowledged.
  • Maintain clear and transparent data records: Well documented methods datasets strengthen reproducibility and trust in research findings.
  • Follow journal policies carefully: Reviewing author guidelines and ethical standards before submission helps ensure a smooth publication process.

How to write and publish scientific research effectively

Publishing research remains a key milestone in the academic journey. Several sessions in the series focused on helping researchers prepare manuscripts effectively and navigate the publishing process, including journal selection and the responsible use of AI in research workflow.
 

  • Selecting the right journal: Matching your manuscript with the most appropriate journal is an important first step. Tools such as Springer Nature’s Journal Finder can help identify relevant journals based on your manuscript title, abstract, and keywords. Researchers should also review a journal’s aims, scope, and editorial guidelines, and check practical information such as policies and publication model – for example, some fully open access journals are included in ONOS, meaning you may be eligible for APC support.
  • Write clearly and effectively: A well-structured manuscript helps communicate research more effectively. Clear organisation - from introduction and methods through to discussion and conclusions - ensures readers and reviewers can easily follow the research narrative.
  • Use AI responsibly: Artificial Intelligence tools are increasingly used in research workflows. For example, to support language editing or summarisation. While these tools can improve efficiency, they should never replace original thinking, critical analysis, or ethical responsibility. Researchers should always follow the AI policies of their chosen journal and remain transparent about the tools used.

Increasing the reach and impact of research

As the Global Pulse explores, India’s growing share of highly cited and high-impact research reflects not only rising output but also increasing global engagement and influence.

To maximise the reach and impact of their work, researchers should consider:
 

  • Enhancing discoverability: Publishing in well-indexed journals and using clear titles, abstracts and keywords helps ensure research reaches the widest possible audience.
  • Monitoring research impact through multiple metrics: No single indicator (like Journal Impact Factor) can fully capture the influence of research, quality or impact. Considering a range of article-level metrics, including citations, usage statistics, and altmetrics, provides a more comprehensive view of how research is being read, shared, and applied.

Supporting researcher development in India

Springer Nature’s ONOS Researcher Connect webinar series, facilitated by our Account Development team in India and supported by expert speakers from across the organisation, has already engaged more than 14,000 researchers in India.

We noted in the Global Pulse report that India’s research landscape is dynamic and diverse, spanning leading research universities, emerging institutions, and specialised research centres. Initiatives that combine expanded access with targeted training and support play an important role in helping researchers navigate publishing pathways, strengthen research practices, and maximise the global visibility of their work.

Feedback from participants reflects the value of these efforts:

“Thank you so much for the nice initiative. You are the first publisher to conduct such training out of ONOS publishers. I am happy to see this wonderful initiative by Springer Nature to familiarize Researchers and Library professionals with your rich content.”


Recordings from all nine webinars are available on YouTube, and researchers can also join the conversation through our LinkedIn community to stay informed about future ONOS training and engagement opportunities.

Explore more insights into India’s growing global research impact in Springer Nature’s Global Pulse Report 2025.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest!

Open for impact: What China’s OA growth shows about the future of global research

T
The Link
By: undefined, Thu Jul 2 2026

Recent years have seen rapid rise in the number and reach of gold open access (OA) articles from China. A new white paper explores how gold OA publishing is increasing the visibility and reach of China’s research globally, and how this growth benefits China and its international partners, particularly in the Global South.

Insights from the white paper demonstrate what institutions and libraries should consider for their OA strategies to maximise growth, visibility, and reach for their researchers’ work. In this first blog of a two-part series, we explore how gold OA is reshaping the global research exchange, and where collaboration with the Global South is driving shared value. 

Research is increasingly published openly, making it more accessible worldwide and contributing to wider global usage and citation. The Springer Nature white paper 'Open for impact: China’s gold open access boosting global innovation and supporting the Global South’ focuses on how China’s rapid expansion in gold OA publishing is supporting broader visibility, engagement, and collaboration. It provides Chinese and global institutional decision-makers with a strategic view of how OA can be leveraged to reshape future research. 

The OA landscape in China: Growing uptake and shifting attitudes

Over the past five years, the volume of gold OA articles has increased significantly, reflecting a broader shift towards immediate access across the global research landscape. China’s OA output is a particularly strong example of this trend. Its gold OA output grew from 154,000 articles in 2020 to 295,000 in 2024, reflecting a strong annual growth rate of 18%, well above the global average of 7%.  

This growth is accompanied by shifting researcher attitudes. A 2024 Springer Nature survey of over 1,500 researchers in China found that 55% were feeling more positive about OA than two years earlier, indicating that researchers are increasingly valuing the visibility and discoverability that open publishing can offer. 

How China’s OA research is used and cited globally

The average number of citations for China’s gold OA publications is rising significantly alongside the growth in OA output. Two‑year citations (citations received within two years of publication) rose from 1.8 million in 2020 to 2.8 million in 2022, a 55% increase.  

For institutions, citation performance is an important indicator of how widely research is being used and referenced in the global community. Because some research assessment and global ranking methodologies use citation-based indicators, growing citation levels can also help institutions evidence the reach and influence of their research. 

Rising citation levels of OA publications signal that increased accessibility is influencing the visibility and use of research globally. When we look at which countries are citing China’s OA articles, we find that the impact of these articles is indeed global.  

P_Citations rate_new © Springer Nature 2026

The white paper shows that nearly 40% of citations to China’s 2022 gold OA articles come from publications without authors in China. 19% of the citations come from articles with an author in another country in Asia, while 18% have an author in Europe and 11% have an author in North America. This spread of citations across regions highlights the global reach of China’s OA research, showing that it is being used and referenced well beyond its country of origin. 

Measuring reach beyond academia 

Downloads and citations in formal academic publications are not the only measures of research impact today. Institutions can also use alternative metrics to understand how research is being discussed and shared beyond academic literature. Altmetric data provide this additional perspective, tracking attention from sources such as traditional media, patents, policy documents, social media, and other online platforms. 

For institutions, this kind of data can complement citation and download figures by showing where research is attracting attention beyond academic publishing. In the case of China’s gold OA articles, the white paper shows strong levels of Altmetric attention, while also noting the limits of the metric: Chinese social media platforms are not tracked, and policy and news mentions are dominated by international and English-language sources.  

Against that backdrop, the figures are notable. China’s gold OA articles published in 2022 reached an Altmetric Score of 703,000, increasing by 26% compared to 2020. 2024 articles have already reached 510,000, close to the 558,000 score for 2020 articles despite having had less time to accumulate attention.

Disseminating openly accessible knowledge in the Global South

Broadening access to knowledge across the Global South is part of China’s strategic goal to support global development. Gold OA articles from China published in 2022 generated 1.53 million citations from publications outside China, including 742,000 from the Global South, representing 19% of the total citations. This suggests that researchers in the Global South are not only accessing China’s OA research, but also actively using and building on it in their own research.  

Gold OA is a key impetus behind increased impact and wide dissemination in the Global South. Between 2020 and 2022, the OA articles China published in Springer Nature hybrid journals have almost twice the number of citations per article as non-OA articles: 5.2 Global South citations per OA article in comparison to 2.7 for non-OA articles. The OA articles also have over 4.8 times more downloads per article in the Global South. This demonstrates how open access can substantially increase the reach and impact of research. 

P_OA articles citations_new © Springer Nature 2026

What institutions can learn from China’s OA growth

As these insights show, gold OA can expand the reach of research by making it easier to discover, access, cite, and build upon across borders. China’s rapid growth in OA highlights how increased accessibility can strengthen global research exchange, support wider engagement, and make research more visible internationally, particularly in relation to partners in the Global South. 

For institutions and libraries, these findings underline the importance of aligning publishing strategies with goals around visibility, impact, and international collaboration. They also point to the value of sustained support for gold OA, including dedicated funding, researcher engagement, and advocacy around the benefits of publishing openly. 

Some practical steps institutions can take to position their researchers within a more connected and globally engaged research ecosystem include raising awareness of the benefits of OA among their researchers, supporting gold OA publications, and recognising open outputs and international reach within research assessment and promotion criteria. Institutions can also strengthen the visibility of their research by highlighting high-impact OA collaborations, particularly in areas connected to global challenges and the Sustainable Development Goals.

The white paper offers a deeper look at China’s OA growth, global citation patterns, Altmetric attention, and engagement with the Global South. It also explores how impact is shaped not only by openness, but by publishing choices, including where and what institutions publish, and more. It provides useful context and insights for institutions looking to strengthen the visibility, use, and global relevance of their research.

Read the white paper: Open for impact: China’s gold open access boosting global innovation and supporting the Global South.

Related contents:

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

From code to chemistry: A conversation with Connor W. Coley on open science practices and reproducible AI research

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Jul 1 2026

This is the sixth blog post in our series in which researchers share their experiences with open science practices, and reflect on the impact that sharing open data, code, and protocols can have.   

Connor W. Coley is Associate Professor of Chemical Engineering, Electrical Engineering, and Computer Science at the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT). His research focuses on how data and automation can be used to streamline discovery in the chemical sciences. As a tenured professor, he is closely engaged in open science practices in both his own research and that of his students. Professor Coley has contributed to several Nature journals, with recent publications including A geometric foundation model for enzyme retrieval with evolutionary insights and Electron flow matching for generative reaction mechanism prediction.  

We spoke with Professor Coley about his work and perspective on open science, particularly the importance of sharing code that is accessible, usable, and reproducible for the progression of the field. 

Can you briefly introduce yourself and your research area?  

The research that we focus on in the group relates to the development of AI and other computational methods to help the design, synthesis, and analysis of small organic molecules for the most part. We build a lot of open source computational tools that have relevance to the synthesis of new molecules and their design, in particular for the pharmaceutical and chemical industries. 

How did you first become interested in open science practices?  

“Projects and contributions that are open source and reproducible allow people to understand what was done, how to reproduce it, and how to build on it.” 

                                                                                              Connor W. Coley 

There wasn't a particular defining moment. Towards the end of my undergraduate studies and into graduate school, I benefited greatly from projects and contributions that were open source and reproducible, allowing me to understand what was done, how to reproduce it, and how to build on top of it. When I read research articles that weren't released with corresponding open source code, but they were described in a method, it would present this very clear barrier to understanding and reproducing what was done. 

What open science practices do you use? 

We want to make sure that all the research we do is freely available. Sometimes that will mean publishing open access, so prioritising journals that have policies that let us do that. With our grants, there are some journals where publishing open access is rather expensive, and we don't always opt for that choice, but we will preprint almost every publication we have at the time of submission. We will preprint it typically on arXiv, so there's at least a version of record that is fully open that anyone can access. 

What motivated you to adopt these practices?  

I would say an appreciation for how much I benefited from accessible, reproducible tools when I was learning. During my PhD, I worked on some automation equipment and control software that built a lot upon MATLAB and LabView. Those are commercial environments for code development; LabView being common in laboratory automation for graphical programming workflows.  

That was part of a collaboration with Novartis, and we translated those platforms to Novartis for them to use internally for their research. I recall how much of a barrier it was to ask them to purchase a single site licence to be able to use the software that ran this platform, so having a commercial barrier to simply trying out research tools and products is something that I've tried to avoid in my own research more recently. That's why I'm very thankful that the language of choice for much of the research that we do is Python. We build on a lot of open source libraries and toolkits, and I think the open ethos has become much more ingrained in the field in the past few years. 

Have you faced any challenges or barriers in undertaking open science practices?  

We do a lot of research with statistical learning tools that learn from experimental data sets, and so we benefit greatly from training and deploying such tools with proprietary data sets. These may be commercial data sets that we license, for example, from CAS/SciFinder, and it's natural that in those agreements, we are not able to fully publish and redistribute the underlying data sets. 

That's very reasonable, but it does mean that occasionally, when we are pursuing different research questions, we have to make difficult choices about whether to use a data set we know can be open and reproducible versus a data set we believe to be of higher quality. Data set curation is very laborious and expensive, and there's reasons why that intellectual property lies with the people it does, but it poses a little bit of tension in when we choose to work with different data sets, knowing that it can't be fully reproducible like it could be with other data sets. 

Is there a particular success story or example you’re proud of that illustrates the benefits of open science?  

“You know that the research contributions you're putting out into the world are actually being adopted and used.” 

                                                        Connor W. Coley 

Quite often when we publish a new computational method, we'll receive a series of communications from colleagues in industry, from large pharma companies to biotechs, expressing interest in the tools, and so we get to feel that response from the community. I can imagine a situation where you preprint a method and there's no feedback from the community, except maybe a few months later you get some citations, but in this very much open science practice, you know that the research contributions you're putting out into the world are actually being adopted and used. 

I would also say that making sure your publications and methods are open source increases the number of people who are able to read, compare, and benefit from them. It's great for the field. We've encountered plenty of situations where we're unable to compare to a method someone else has published; maybe because it's inadequately described and it's not open source, or it's explicitly commercial and proprietary and their licence forbids comparison. By making your methods open, you become a part of the community. Maybe you become a row in a table that's used for comparisons in the future. It enables faster development in the field overall. 

A question we get asked frequently is about the intellectual property we might seek for the methods we develop. Patenting is a complicated landscape for some of these algorithmic contributions. Copyrighted software that is licenced commercially could be a revenue source for the lab, institution, and me personally, but I think the greater impact on the field offsets those incentives for me. 

It also shapes the kinds of collaborations we pursue. It makes the work we do more visible and attracts interest from folks in pharma who are very eager to work with us. One tangible example is a consortium we have at MIT called the Machine Learning for Pharmaceutical Discovery and Synthesis Consortium. This is a partnership between MIT and currently 9 pharmaceutical and chemical companies, and there's a commitment that the outputs of this sponsored research be made available, open, and pre-competitive. Not only that, but I'd say peers express appreciation. Certainly, student trainees from other groups around the country and the world express appreciation, frequently, about our approaches to open science. 

Are there any gaps in support or resources about open science you’d like to see addressed?  

One aspect of open science is making sure that the information being shared and published is in a form that can be easily read, adapted, and benefited from. There are some fields where deposition of crystal structures, for example, of inorganic molecules is mandated in the CSD, or you're expected to deposit protein structures in the Protein Data Bank. But in most other fields for other types of data, there aren't really any clear guidelines or expectations around the structure it should be in or the repositories they should be placed in. 

Several years ago, a few of us in the field created the Open Reaction Database to try to help define what is a useful data structure for capturing information about chemical reactions in a clear, systematic way, with the hopes that down the line, when data of synthetic organic transformations is published, it will be maximally beneficial for people that train models on that data or want to search it more easily. This is very domain- and field-specific, but I'd say that many scientific practices lack well-defined data structures, and that sort of heterogeneity impedes some text and data mining applications that would otherwise be enabled. 

I greatly appreciate when journals are by nature free to read and free to publish. When journals are diamond open access, that's a very big draw for me as an author. 

What advice would you give to researchers considering adopting open science practices?  

“Reproducibility is a necessary element of solid scientific contributions and so having your methods and code be fully reproducible through open access software is the best way to make a contribution to the field that others can truly benefit from.” 

                                                                                  Connor W. Coley 

There are almost no downsides to preprinting. It's a great way to increase the reach of your papers to receive additional feedback even during the stages of peer review or in informal ways for software, code, and machine learning-focused contributions.  

Reproducibility is a necessary element of solid scientific contributions and so having your methods and code be fully reproducible through open access software is the best way to make a contribution to the field that others can truly benefit from. 

There's also a very big difference between making your code available and making your code accessible, usable, and reproducible. It is true that when we open source software code, we do so with the expectation that there will be work required to respond to issues on GitHub to help people use the software in the way it was intended. That is one thing about publishing open source methods: you sign yourself up for a little bit of additional maintenance of that resource. Whereas for a publication you don't do that; once the publication is accepted, you're essentially done. We have to keep in mind from the beginning of a project that we're signing ourselves up for greater visibility, and maybe greater scrutiny, but that's part of how we share our work. 

I don't know how true this is, but I feel like there is a perception perhaps that sometimes open science comes at the expense of maintaining a competitive advantage in a crowded research field. People might think if they make their code available, someone will quickly improve upon it, or if they make their data set available, people will show that a different modelling approach does better on the same data set. There might be a reluctance to enable those direct comparisons that might be unflattering, but I do think ultimately this is how the field progresses. I just believe it's so inherent to how we need to do science. That should outweigh any fear of embarrassment. 

Learn more about open science and sharing research data, code and protocols & methods openly.


Connor W Coley © Springer Nature
Conor W. Coley, PhD, Associate Professor of Chemical Engineering, Electrical Engineering, and Computer Science, Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT) 

Connor W. Coley is the Class of 1957 Career Development Professor and an Associate Professor  at MIT. The Coley Research Group works at the interface of chemistry and data science to develop models that understand how molecules behave, interact and react. 

Dr. Coley earned a bachelor of science degree in chemical engineering from the California Institute of Technology in Pasadena, California and a master of science degree in chemical engineering practice and Ph.D. in chemical engineering from the Massachusetts Institute of Technology in Cambridge, Massachusetts. He completed postdoctoral work at the Broad Institute of MIT and Harvard in Cambridge, Massachusetts. 


Related content:

  • Open science conversations: 
  1. Building trust through transparency: An open science conversation with Geir Kjetil Sandve 
  2. Open science, altruism and impact: An interview with clinical geneticist Zornitza Stark
  3. Bioinformatician Johannes Koester on embodying the spirit of open science 
  4. How to do science that matters: Computational biologist Casey S. Greene on purpose-driven open science practices 
  5. Open science before it had a name: An interview with molecular biologist Steven Henikoff 
  6. Building the infrastructure for open science: A conversation with Carole Goble 
  •  Best practices for transparency and reuse: 
  1. How to share your research protocols and methods openly 

  2. How to share your research code openly 

  • Supporting open science practices: 
  1. Why share your research data? 

  2. Why sharing protocols matters 

  3. Why sharing your code matters 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest

What Hay Festival reminded me about science, art and public connection

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Tue Jun 30 2026

I recently had the pleasure of attending Hay Festival for a conversation that brought together several of the things I care about most: books, science, public dialogue and the transformative power of the arts.  

Hay-on-Wye is a remarkable setting for a science conversation. At first glance, a literary festival might seem an unusual place to discuss psychobiology, epidemiology, biomarkers or health policy. But that is precisely what made the event so powerful. Surrounded by readers, writers, artists, thinkers and curious members of the public, science felt not separate from culture, but deeply embedded within it. 

I was there on behalf of Springer Nature for the John Maddox Conversation, a set piece lecture sponsored by Nature and dedicated to sharing scientific ideas with passion and clarity.  

John Maddox, Editor-in-Chief of Nature for 22 years, believed strongly in the importance of scientific thought in public life. His years at Nature spanned extraordinary advances, from the moon landings and modern computing to IVF and the growing recognition of climate change. He understood that science changes the world not only through discovery, but through explanation, challenge and public engagement. 

I spoke with Professor Daisy Fancourt for this year’s Conversation, a leading scientist who epitomises the spirit of the John Maddox Conversation. She is Professor of Psychobiology & Epidemiology and Head of the Social Biobehavioural Research Group at UCL and one of the most highly cited scientists in the world. Together we discussed her bestselling book The Art Cure: The Science of How the Arts Transform Our Health. 

Her work explores the evidence that art and cultural participation can influence health and wellbeing in measurable ways. We spoke about music, reading, performance, visual art and creative practice; about stress, loneliness, resilience, pain, ageing and cognitive reserve; and about the challenge of communicating complex science without simplifying it beyond recognition. 

What stayed with me most was the way the conversation moved between evidence and experience. Daisy’s book is powerful because it does not ask readers to choose between data and feeling. It recognises that art can produce deeply human, goosebump-inducing moments, while also showing that those experiences can be studied rigorously through neuroscience, physiology, psychology and behavioural science. 

One key takeaway for me was that good science communication starts with respect: respect for the evidence, and respect for the audience. It is not about making science smaller. It is about making it more reachable. The best communicators invite people in through stories, examples and language that connect with everyday life, while still preserving nuance and uncertainty. 

A second takeaway was the importance of crossing disciplinary boundaries. The relationship between art and health cannot be understood through a single lens. It involves biological mechanisms, psychological responses, social connection and behaviour. It requires quantitative and qualitative methods, as well as openness between disciplinary communities that do not always share the same language, conferences or journals. At a time when many of our biggest challenges are complex, from mental health to ageing to climate change, that kind of connection is not optional, it is essential. And long-form formats, the book, are a key part of creating and delivering that connected content.  

The third takeaway was about access. If arts and culture can support health, wellbeing and belonging, then they cannot be treated as luxuries. Questions about who gets to participate, who feels welcome, who can afford access and how arts are valued in education and public policy become health questions too. The false divide between “arts people” and “science people” begins early, and it limits all of us.  

Events like this matter. A literary festival creates a different kind of public space for science. People arrive ready to listen, question, connect and be surprised. They may not come as specialists, but they come with curiosity. In that room, the discussion was not only about the science of art; it was itself an example of science becoming part of culture. 

For publishers, researchers and communicators, the lesson is clear. We need to meet the wider public where meaningful conversations are already happening. Science communication is not only about broadcasting findings. It is about building trust, making knowledge usable, and showing why research belongs in public life. 

I left Hay reminded that art and science are not opposing forces. Both are ways of paying attention to the world. Both can change how we understand ourselves and one another. And when they meet in public, they can do something even more powerful: they can help people feel that knowledge is not distant but shared. 


Related Tags:

Community and trust matter more than ever on social media

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Jun 30 2026

78% of researchers use social media for work - but a fragmented landscape means community and trust matter more than ever.

How researchers use social media is evolving rapidly - and our 2025 survey of over 10,000 academics highlights just how fragmented, yet vital, these platforms have become for the research ecosystem. In a series of blogs, we will explore how researchers can navigate these changes.

At a high level, social media is no longer only a peripheral tool for academic work and networking. It is increasingly central to discovery, communication, and collaboration. Nearly four in five researchers (78%) use social platforms to discover research content and news, making it the single most important activity across all regions and career stages.

Yet where, and how, this happens is shifting. 

A concentrated yet fragmented landscape 

Despite the proliferation of platforms, a few key players now dominate. ResearchGate (78%) and LinkedIn (62%) remain the core work platforms, functioning as anchors for professional identity, networking and discovery.  

At the same time, more informal channels are rising. WhatsApp, in particular, has seen explosive growth, now used by 47% of researchers for work and increasingly for collaboration, sharing research, and promoting one’s findings. A surprising development, and the platform seeing the greatest gain in the last year for work use (+22pp (percentage points) YoY), was YouTube (also at 47%), signalling the increase in video content as a dominant source of news. These spaces are quickly becoming key for informal knowledge exchange and learning. 

This signals an important shift: academic exchange is no longer confined to formal platforms. Instead, it is happening across a mix of structured, format-diverse networks, and private, community-driven spaces. Regional differences further reinforce this fragmentation, with researchers in Africa, Central Asia, and the Middle East often relying more heavily on messaging platforms, while North America and Europe remain more selective.  

The decline of shared public spaces 

At the same time, some long-standing platforms are losing ground. The use of X (formerly Twitter) has dropped significantly (-10 pp YoY), alongside declining activity and engagement. The reasons are telling: researchers cite a loss of community, reduced relevance, and concerns about politicisation. When trust in the platform or its community erodes, researchers disengage. 

“It is not just platform features that matter - it is the quality of the community and the trust within it. The decline of what was once known as “Academic Twitter” reflects a broader shift in platform dynamics. Publisher’s need to respond to these changes and maintain a strong presence where their audience is and ensure that trusted knowledge is amplified amid the increasing polarisation”.

Tina Harseim, Director of Social Media and Employer Brand at Springer Nature

Trust and misinformation: a growing barrier 

Perhaps the most important finding is the growing impact of trust on researcher behaviour. Two-thirds of respondents agree that untrustworthy content reduces how much they rely on social media for research discovery.  

This has clear implications. Social media remains essential for the academic discourse - over 75% believe it will become increasingly important for science communication - but it is also contested. Researchers are actively filtering what they see, where they engage, and what they share. Almost half also report hesitating to participate due to concerns about negative or hostile responses.

Community as the foundation of impact 

In this environment, community is emerging as the defining factor for success. Platforms that thrive - whether ResearchGate, LinkedIn, Bluesky or WhatsApp - do so because they enable meaningful connections: sharing papers, discussing methods, and building relationships.  

"Nearly two years ago, we started on Bluesky to build a community that does exactly this. Since then, we have seen steadily increasing engagement and higher-quality conversations that reflect what we experienced on X a decade ago. However, achieving the same reach remains more challenging in today’s increasingly fragmented social media landscape"

Tina Harseim, Director of Social Media and Employer Brand at Springer Nature

Importantly, community is not just about engagement; it is about authenticity and therefore increased trust. Researchers are more likely to participate in spaces where content is credible, discussion is constructive, and professional norms are upheld. 

What this means for researchers 

For researchers and the wider academic community, the takeaway is clear: social media still offers enormous value, but only when used intentionally. 

  • Go where your community is: platform choice matters less than who is there 

  • Prioritise trust over reach: credible engagement beats visibility alone 

  • Contribute with purpose: as short-form, algorithm-driven content competes for attention, thoughtful, evidence-based contributions matter more than ever. Community quality is shaped by participation


In an age of misinformation, visibility alone is not enough. The real opportunity lies in cultivating trusted communities; spaces where research can not only be discovered, but understood, debated, and advanced. 

Because ultimately, the future of social media in science communication will not be defined by platforms, but by the quality of the communities we build within them. 

The data from this survey has been made open access for anyone who would like to use it. You can find it on Figshare here

Interested in hearing more? We'll be releasing more insights and data from our social media surveys. Sign up to The Researcher's Source newsletter to be the first to read them.



Tina Harseim, Director of Social Media and Employer Brand at Springer Nature

Tina Harseim

Tina is based in our Berlin office and leads the company’s global social media strategy. Her role encompasses establishing best practices and guidelines for effective and responsible social media use, as well as amplifying the brand’s voice across platforms. With a background in Media Science and over 15 years of experience in communications and branding, she also drives Springer Nature’s employer brand strategy. As co-lead of the Employer Brand Ambassador Programme, she empowers colleagues to build their personal brands and authentically showcase the company’s culture, values, and mission.


Related content:

What's changing in AI & research integrity - reflections from WCRI 2026

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Mon Jun 29 2026

Highlights on the technological trends, trust and transparency from the 9th World Conference on Research Integrity, Vancouver

Last month I had the opportunity to attend WCRI 2026 in Vancouver, joining colleagues from across the research integrity community to step back and reflect on how research integrity is evolving. As part of my role at Springer Nature, many of the conversations felt familiar, echoing challenges we’re already working on, while also offering additional perspectives on where things may be heading. 

AI was inescapable; not as a novelty, but as a thread running through almost every session I attended. What struck me most was how the conversation has matured.  Fewer people are now asking whether AI is changing research integrity, almost everyone now accepts that it is. The more interesting question, and the one that dominated the sessions I found most valuable, is what a meaningful, coordinated response could look like.  

One of the clearest signals of this shift came from the inclusion of sessions focusing on the development of AI-based detection systems that identify large volumes of submissions or analyse peer review activity for unusual patterns (we’re developing similar systems at SN). The scale of the challenge, and the need for responses that can operate systemically rather than case by case, was a consistent theme across the conference. 

Alongside this, specific integrity challenges highlighted how quickly the landscape is evolving. One widely discussed finding, from an analysis of BMJ Group journals, showed that just 5.7% of authors disclosed any AI use, even when they were required to. While many authors appear to be using these tools to improve writing, the gap between use and disclosure is hard to ignore.  It’s something we recognise too from our own work, and it highlights the need for clearer, more consistent guidance. 

Other sessions focused on the difficulty of identifying AI-generated or manipulated content. A pre-conference bioimaging workshop, for example, invited participants to distinguish genuine microscopy images from AI-generated ones, demonstrating how challenging this is in practice and how quickly generative technology is advancing.  

Throughout the conference, discussions reinforced that continuously updated detection systems, training and human expertise will all be needed to address these challenges effectively. 

In response to these pressures, there is a growing emphasis across the community on developing more coordinated approaches. The conference’s Focus Track (working toward a Global Reporting Standard for AI Disclosure in Research, supported by COPE and STM) felt particularly timely. The ambition is to produce what has been named the Vancouver Standard: a shared framework for AI disclosure that works across disciplines and publication cultures (more about this in Chris Graf’s opinion piece in Research Professional News). It is an initiative that will benefit from broad engagement across the research community. 

These discussions closely reflect work already underway at Springer Nature. Within the Research Integrity group, and particularly in the Prevention team, we have been developing approaches that align with many of the trends discussed at WCRI. One area of focus is the growing issue of hallucinated or unverifiable references. To address this, we have been working collaboratively across the company to expand our irrelevant reference detector towards detecting hallucinated or unverifiable references above a certain threshold. As with all AI-supported approaches, human oversight remains essential, particularly given the risk of false positives. We continue to refine our approach, taking care to improve accuracy, while carefully mitigating these risks.  

Alongside this, our work is increasingly centred on large-scale, data-led analysis that includes identifying patterns of misconduct through analysis of author networks and identifying peer-review duplication, which aren’t visible in a single submission.  This shift, from case-by-case investigation to system-level insight is helping to strengthen preventive measures and respond more effectively at scale. 

It was also encouraging to see colleagues from Springer Nature contributing directly to these discussions. Research integrity advisor Manisha Wardhwa emphasised the importance of not jumping to conclusions when assessing potential AI misuse, highlighting the need to look carefully at the metadata and carry out thorough investigations. Ed Gerstner addressed a related but equally important issue: the growing gap between how researchers are assessed and how they would prefer to be assessed, and the role that reform could play in shaping research culture. Together, these contributions highlighted the continued importance of careful judgement, support and education in strengthening research integrity and preventing misconduct. 

A plenary session on AI ethics added another important dimension, highlighting the need to consider global perspectives. Speakers Dr Titilola Olojede and Dr Retha Visagie reflected on the risks of developing AI ethics from a single cultural viewpoint, and the importance of accounting for differences in access, education and research contexts worldwide. 

What I found most encouraging at WCRI was a shared willingness to move beyond diagnosing challenges towards taking action. While tools are improving and policy frameworks are beginning to take shape, the conference reinforced that one of the most complex parts of this work is ensuring that researchers at every career stage and every part of the world can engage meaningfully with these developments and that the norms we build are ones they recognise as their own. 

If there is one overarching takeaway, it is that safeguarding the scholarly record will depend on how effectively we connect these efforts globally.  The challenge now is less about recognising risks, and more about aligning responses across systems, organisations and regions. Without that alignment, even the best tools and policies will fall short. 

Learn more about Springer Nature’s approach to research integrity here

Institutional perspectives on strengthening research integrity through collaboration

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon Jun 29 2026

Safeguarding research integrity is a shared responsibility across institutions, publishers, and funders, but the landscape of research integrity is complex and approaches vary. As integrity issues become more challenging, institutions are asked not only to enforce standards, but to foster a culture that supports responsible research in practice. In a special blog series, we draw on interviews with institutional research integrity experts from various regions to explore how integrity is experienced in practice, and what it takes to sustain it across a multi-stakeholder research landscape.

This first blog explores the current landscape through contributions from our contributing experts, highlighting the challenges they face and the role of communication and trust in navigating them.

Research institutions are at the centre of the integrity landscape, responsible for upholding research integrity through prevention, guidance, and, when needed, training. But they do so within a complex, interdependent system that also includes publishers, funders, and other stakeholders, making effective coordination, communication, and trust essential.

We spoke with institutional integrity experts from various regions to learn about their work: and to gain insight into how institutions can best navigate the integrity landscape:

  • Jonas Åkerman, Research Integrity and Ethics Coordinator, Ethics Support Function at Stockholm University, Sweden
  • Daniel Barr, Principal Research Integrity Advisor at RMIT University, Australia
  • Rod Bates, Former Research Integrity Officer at Nanyang Technological University (NTU), Singapore
  • Lauran Qualkenbush, Senior Director for Research Integrity and Training and Research Integrity Officer at Northwestern University, United States and founding member of the Association of Research Integrity Officers

In this blog, the first of a three-part series, we explore the current integrity landscape and how collaboration and communication help institutions navigate it. These insights set the foundation for the next pieces in our series, which look more deeply at integrity culture, incentives that undermine integrity, and the meaningful role of leadership in making responsible research the norm.

“Research integrity is extremely important, and the challenges are only going to get greater.” - Rod Bates, Former Research Integrity Officer at Nanyang Technological University (NTU), Singapore

Challenges of the current integrity landscape

Research integrity challenges are not new, but the way they surface, escalate, and get resolved has changed markedly in recent years. Cases are becoming more complex, increasingly cross institutions and national boundaries, and are shaped by rapidly evolving technologies, incentives, and expectations.

From our conversations with institutional integrity experts, we map the central issues they face in today’s research integrity landscape: persistent integrity challenges, inconsistent responses across the ecosystem, and fast-evolving emerging challenges.

Persistent challenges of research integrity: Authorship and data

Authorship disputes seem to be among the most frequently encountered integrity concerns that continuously surface across institutions and regions. “Authorship is a difficult river to navigate wherever you are, whatever stage you’re at,” Daniel Barr explains. Norms vary widely between disciplines, institutions, and countries, and expectations often remain unwritten or assumed rather than explicitly agreed.

Research data management is likewise a persistent foundational challenge. Data, according to Barr, “is the gold of research,” but the work needed to manage, share, and preserve data is unevenly supported. And like authorship challenges, data practices vary not only across disciplines and between institutions, but also within them, shaped by differences in research groups, supervisory relationships, and organisational structures.

Navigating research integrity through widespread inconsistency

There is significant variation in how research integrity concerns are handled across the research ecosystem. Having worked with publishers, institutions, and funders on integrity concerns, Rod Bates says responses are “very mixed.”

Variance in the use of integrity-related terminology further complicates the efforts between multiple actors. Åkerman notes that terms can carry very different meanings across contexts, and decisions may read differently by international publishers or funders without contextualisation.

A fragmented system, with multiple funders and a patchwork of rules and requirements, makes is harder to manage research integrity concerns. Institutions working with multiple funding agencies navigate through different reporting thresholds, definitions, and training requirements, as Lauran Qualkenbush mentions.

Emerging risks unfold quickly

Artificial intelligence is evolving fast, and has been reshaping research integrity, from writing and authorship to detection and oversight.

Several interviewees describe how the rapid uptake of generative AI has outpaced both institutional policy frameworks and technical detection tools. Institutions, according to Lauran Qualkenbush, are “constantly playing catch up from a policy, compliance, and education perspective.” Establishing regulations is challenging when new practices and tools are evolving faster than norms, governance, and support mechanisms can adapt.

“There are many stakeholders to bridge across the system, and we have a common goal: We all care about the integrity of the scientific record. But we have to work together.” - Lauran Qualkenbush, Senior Director for Research Integrity and Training and Research Integrity Officer at Northwestern University, United States and founding member of the Association of Research Integrity Officers

Communication and trust: Key to handling research integrity effectively

When rules, terminology, and expectations differ across institutions, funders, and publishers, even well-intended actions can be misunderstood or delayed. The research integrity experts return to the same foundation for effective integrity work: clear communication, reliable points of contact, and relationships built on trust.

Direct communication speeds up alignment

Communication is repeatedly considered by research integrity experts as the most decisive factor in the success of collaboration. Qualkenbush is particularly explicit: “It’s all about communication.” She explains how verbal communication supports her interactions with publishers and enables progress where written, reserved communications might not suffice.

Direct and responsive communication enables contextualisation and helps to reduce uncertainty and misinterpretation, especially in sensitive cases where written communication can feel too committing and discourage open discussion.

Clear contact points make collaboration possible

Communication certainly also depends on knowing who to talk to. Åkerman stressed that “one thing that’s crucial is to have a clear contact point.” Without named roles or identifiable functions, even well-intentioned institutions can struggle to engage effectively. This engagement is essential for contextualising terms and decisions and managing the complexity of the research integrity landscape.

Trust accelerates resolution

With contacts to communicate with, relationships and trust develop and become the keys to effective collaboration. Barr observes that “when you’re in a trusted working relationship, things happen smoothly and quickly… it feels collegial and supportive.”

When trust is established, rapid and productive decision making is possible. It is an operational asset that shapes timelines, reduces defensiveness, and enables actors across the system to act with confidence.

Institutional efforts to sustain research integrity: Turning policies into practice

Our conversations with Åkerman, Barr, Bates, and Qualkenbush offered insights into research integrity as experienced by institutional practitioners: complex, uneven, and under pressure. This first blog focused on mapping that landscape and exploring the opportunities for improvement through better alignment and coordination across the system.

In the next blogs, we explore what institutions can do internally to cultivate a research integrity culture that endures. We discuss the gaps between training and practice, the role of incentives in shaping behaviour, and the importance of visible leadership commitment and embedded support networks (stay tuned).

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Science on the Hill highlights growing use of AI chatbots by teens

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Jun 24 2026

Artificial intelligence chatbots are quickly becoming part of everyday life for many young people. According to a Pew Research Center survey, nearly two thirds of U.S. teenagers have used an AI chatbot, with more than one in four using them daily. Notably, almost 12 percent of teens report turning to these tools for emotional support or advice.

These trends framed the conversation at the tenth annual Science on the Hillevent, held in April 2026 at the Rayburn House Office Building on Capitol Hill, Washington. The event brought together scientists, academics, and policymakers to explore how Congress and federal agencies can encourage innovation while safeguarding the public—particularly young people who are increasingly relying on digital tools for connection and support. 

Watch a recording of the event:


Panelists discussed the safety challenges posed by AI chatbots, especially when they are used during moments of vulnerability. Even systems informed by behavioral science can unintentionally provide misleading or harmful advice, raising concerns about their impact on young users’ mental health and social development, panelists shared. Speakers also examined whether heavy reliance on chatbots could affect children’s ability to form healthy, real‑world relationships. 

Another key theme was the gap between where teens are seeking help and how those tools are designed. Researcher participants stated that while general‑purpose platforms like ChatGPT are widely used, they are not built or evaluated as mental‑health supports. Panelists emphasized the importance of helping young people understand both the benefits and limitations of these tools, and of promoting access to evidence‑based, transparent digital resources that foster healthy connection. 

The discussion highlighted a range of potential congressional and federal actions, including regulatory approaches, incentives for responsible product development, and public‑private partnerships. Speakers stressed the need for clear guardrails—such as transparency and accountability standards—that protect users without slowing technological progress that could expand access to care. 

The event concluded with a near 1-hour long Q&A, underscoring strong interest among policymakers and staff in addressing AI’s rapidly evolving role in young people’s lives. Overall, the conversation reinforced the importance of thoughtful, science‑informed policy to ensure innovation in AI serves the public good while keeping safety front and center. 

Find out more and watch the recording of the Science on the Hill 2026 event ‘Help or Hype? How Kids Use AI Chatbots for Mental Health’


Related content: 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest

Open science before it had a name: An interview with molecular biologist Steven Henikoff

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri Jun 19 2026

This is the fifth blog post in our series in which researchers share their experiences with open science practices, and reflect on the impact that sharing open data, code, and protocols can have.  

Dr. Steven Henikoff is a molecular biologist and professor at the Basic Sciences Division, Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Centre in Seattle, WA; USA. He is also a Howard Hughes Medical Institute (HHMI) investigator and a member of the National Academy of Sciences. Among one of the first scientists to realise that computing and the internet could revolutionise biological research, he is the recipient of the 55th Lewis S. Rosenstiel Award for Distinguished Work in Basic Medical Research.  

His lab performs research in chromatin, nuclear dynamics, transcriptional regulation, chromosomes, centromeres and, most recently, cancer, developing experimental and computational tools for studying these processes. Having been actively involved in scientific research for over 50 years, Dr. Henikoff has been instrumental in shaping open science practices before ‘open science’ had a name.  

We asked Dr. Henikoff to share his experiences of these evolving practices and how they move the scientific enterprise forward. 

How did you first become interested in open science practices?  

“I first heard the term open science in the early 2000s, but it was really something many of us were doing well before that. When you work on methods, they're only really successful if someone else uses them” 


Steven Henikoff, PhD, Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Centre, Seattle, WA, USA 

I first heard the term open science in the early 2000s, but it was really something many of us were doing well before that. When you work on methods, they're only really successful if someone else uses them, so the focus for my own lab for a long time has been on methods. 

A few years after starting my lab with Fred Hutch, I came up with a method that I realised would be useful to many others to make clones for DNA sequencing, which was later dubbed the Erase-a-Base® System. In the early 1980s, my Erase-a-Base® method would allow someone to finish a project efficiently, whereas shotgun sequencing, which was the norm back then, always left holes that required wasteful redundancy or targeted methods to finish. This is where the open science of its day helped. My Erase-a-Base® method was commercialised as a kit. Kits for genomics were getting started back then before anyone ever heard about open science or online protocols, but the intention was similar. You make a protocol work in the hands of a novice user, that's the idea, and so that got me hooked on developing methods. 

What I first used Erase-a-Base® for was to complete the sequence of a fruit fly gene I'd been working on to understand its alternative RNA processing in two different protein isoforms, and I wondered why this first intron was so large. We’re talking about the early 1980s, and introns were only discovered in genes in pieces maybe several years before, so it was all new, but by searching the intron sequence in all six reading frames against the public protein sequence database, I discovered that there was a protein encoded on the opposite strand and determined that its sequence corresponded to a previously unknown Pupal Cuticle Protein gene. 

Now in the mid-1980s, this was the first example of a gene nested with an intron of another gene; something that later turned out to be quite common, not only in fruit flies, but also in us. The experience encouraged me to use six-frame translation to search DNA sequence databases for protein sequence homologies, which led to further unexpected discoveries and my interest over the long term in developing computational tools for genomics. This depended on researchers depositing their sequence into the GenBank DNA sequence database to make them publicly searchable by anyone around the world using the BLAST server. Whereas previously, I had to purchase floppy discs of GenBank, load them on my personal computer, and do the six-frame translation searches using a standalone program. 

But with the introduction of the BLAST server, anyone could do it from anywhere, and that's really open science to me. So, I got started way back when at the beginning of what we call genomics, which has really flourished. 

What open science practices do you use? 

Open access, sharing data, code, protocols, methods; that's the norm nowadays. For example, HHMI makes co-submission to bioRxiv and public release of data and code mandatory, and other funders are doing that as well. 

Publishing open access is recent relative to the early days of open science. I'd like to emphasise that online searchable databases really drove genomics beginning in 1990. Back then, once you sequenced the gene, the next step was to see if it matched anything known. You'd find the open reading frame in your sequence, then you'd search it against the protein database. If you get access to it, of course, and often, nothing would show up because the database was built on amino acid sequencing of proteins, and that was very low throughput. With automated Sanger DNA sequencing beginning in the late 1970s, that changed all that, and GenBank expanded rapidly with predictive protein sequences curated from public sequences. That was a major effort of the National Center for Biotechnology Information (NCBI), and they really deserve credit for promoting open science as we know it. It was well before publishers realised that open access could be a viable business model. NCBI was really pushing this since the late 80s, early 90s, so I’d like to give them a little plug because it's sort of forgotten. 

My own work grew from efforts to identify evolutionary relationships between proteins. With my wife Jorja, we developed computational tools such as the Blocks Database and the BLOSUM substitution matrices, now standard in tools like BLAST and FASTA. We also created public tools including SIFT, CODHOP, and SEACR. 

Beyond methods, I’ve been involved in open access publishing, co-founding Epigenetics & Chromatin in 2008 and later serving as field chief editor for Frontiers in Epigenetics and Epigenomics. 

What motivated you to adopt these practices? 

“You enable other people to use a method you develop, and it moves the scientific enterprise forward.” 

                                                                      Steven Henikoff, PhD, Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Centre, Seattle, WA, USA 

The examples I gave sort of illustrate this; you enable other people to use a method you develop, and it moves the scientific enterprise forward. For the journal editing side, it keeps me up to date with developments in the broader field beyond my own research interests and expands my scientific horizons, and that's helped my research, as well as my trainees and my staff. I enjoy learning interesting new science, as we all do, that otherwise would be unfamiliar. So, those are the other motivations. 

Have you ever faced any particular challenges or barriers in undertaking open science practices?  

The biggest barrier that I've run into in recent years is inertia. To try to get people to use our methods and use them correctly, that can be hard. The examples I'm thinking of here are CUT&RUN, CUT&Tag, and RT&Tag; these methods bear no relationship to what the standard has been in the field for chromatin profiling. As a result, the way you evaluate the data can be very different from what the field is accustomed to. 

Lessons we've learned from interacting with users have been incorporated into a Primer article invited by the editors of Nature Reviews Methods Primers and recently published. It's intended to be an authoritative guide for novice users and data analysis providers for this rapidly proliferating class of methods. 

Is there a particular success story or example you’re proud of that illustrates the benefits of open science?  

In the year 2000, we published a paper in Nature of Biotechnology describing a scalable method to screen for point mutations in populations of chemically mutagenised individuals, and we use something called Denaturing High Performance Liquid Chromatography. We call the method TILLING, which is also an acronym for Targeting Induced Local Lesions in Genomes. 

We first applied it to plants, hence the TILLING acronym. We detected missense mutations using this method, and they've been valuable for all kinds of studies. Our first application was for the model plant Arabidopsis thaliana, where we discovered induced mutations in DNA methyltransferase genes that we were studying. It worked so well that, together with my University of Washington (UW) colleague Luca Comai, we went on to grow many mutagenised Arabidopsis plants in a big UW greenhouse, and we sent the seeds to the Arabidopsis Biological Resource Center (ABRC). Researchers interested in particular genes would search our Codons Optimised to Discover Deleterious Lesions website, established by Fred Hutch computational biologist Elizabeth Green, and if users find likely deleterious mutations in any of the plants, they order the seeds from ABRC and do backcrossing of the genetics. 

In those days, farmers were reluctant to plant GMO crops, especially in Europe, but mutagenising seeds with chemicals, called mutation breeding, had long been routine in agriculture, so this created a demand for applying our TILLING technology to crop plants. With NSF support, we established programmes with collaborators for maize at Purdue, soybeans at Southern Illinois University, and for rice that was sponsored by the International Rice Research Institute in the Philippines. We also helped set up TILLING for nematodes and fruit flies, and we ran workshops at UW to teach TILLING to all comers. That was my favourite example. 

How does open science enable collaboration, feedback, and real-world impact in both research and education? 

With protocols.io, for example, if somebody asks a question, it gets us to do a little digging, so that’s kind of like a collaboration. I actually have one in my inbox right now asking for troubleshooting advice on our CUT&Tag-based modification for archival clinical samples. The person who asked the question includes a suggestion for protocol modification that I really hadn't thought of, so it is quite useful for getting us to think. 

There’s also something called the Science Education Partnership at Fred Hutch to teach high school teachers how to engage students in modern science. Students would do nanopore sequencing on microbes that they'd find in seawater, and DNA sequencing in high school is nothing special, but we want to know about genes, right? We want to know about information flows from DNA to RNA to protein, the central dogma of molecular biology that's been around for decades and decades, and what we find is that students don't really understand that. 

Our methods are based on looking at the transcriptional apparatus called RNA polymerase II, and as a result, by just doing the method, they learn about real information flows like that. The paper that we published is called Chromatin profiling for everyone: FFPE-CUTAC for the theory and practice of modern molecular biology. We’re training them in something that's going to be the future, not just DNA sequencing. 

Are there any gaps in support or resources in open science you’d like to see addressed?  

I’m going to soapbox a little bit. Most of the attention in cancer research has been for prevention, of course, and therapeutics. I hear a lot about that; a new drug for this, that, and the other thing. I think that the problem there, is to really do something in the laboratory that is going to be useful in the clinic for cancer research, is going to take millions and maybe investment by Pharma to support the clinical trials needed. This is a huge, huge cost, and it’s a gamble because most drugs actually fail. I just think that we as a scientific enterprise need to pay more attention to the diagnostics and not just do what is already set up because it’s a heavily funded industry. 

What advice would you give to researchers considering adopting open science practices? 

Look at what I've gotten out of it. It's been very useful and it's my job. Funders such as my employer, HHMI, promote that. Not all funders do that, but if you can find a funder who will give you the freedom to take advantage of open science, that's great. 

Learn more about open science and sharing research data, code and protocols & methods openly. 


Steven Henikoff © Springer Nature

Steven Henikoff, PhD, Professor, Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Centre, Seattle, WA, USA 

Dr. Steven Henikoff is a molecular biologist who studies the structure, function and evolution of our DNA molecules, or chromosomes. He also develops tools for comparing gene sequences, determining the arrangement of genes in living cells and understanding the biological functions of genes. Credited with helping build the infrastructure for analyzing the human genome, Dr. Henikoff was among the first to realize that computing and the internet could revolutionize biological research.  
He is also a Howard Hughes Medical Institute (HHMI) investigator and a member of the National Academy of Sciences, and the recipient of the 55th Lewis S. Rosenstiel Award for Distinguished Work in Basic Medical Research. 

Steven Henikoff has shared his own protocols on TILLING and Ecotilling in plants and animalsPredicting the effects of coding non-synonymous variants on protein function using the SIFT algorithmCell type–specific gene expression and chromatin profiling in Arabidopsis thaliana, targeted in situ genome-wide profiling with high efficiency for low cell numbers, Chromatin profiling with CUT&Tag, and Single-cell profiling of chromatin modifications with sciCUT&Tag by publishing them in Nature Protocols and posted various other protocols in the protocols.io repository. 


Related content:

  • Open science conversations: 
  1. Building trust through transparency: An open science conversation with Geir Kjetil Sandve 
  2. Open science, altruism and impact: An interview with clinical geneticist Zornitza Stark
  3. Bioinformatician Johannes Koester on embodying the spirit of open science 
  4. How to do science that matters: Computational biologist Casey S. Greene on purpose-driven open science practices 
  5. Building the infrastructure for open science: A conversation with Carole Goble
  •  Best practices for transparency and reuse: 
  1. How to share your research protocols and methods openly 

  2. How to share your research code openly 

  • Supporting open science practices: 
  1. Why share your research data? 

  2. Why sharing protocols matters 

  3. Why sharing your code matters 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest

Shaping the future of research integrity: lessons from the 9th World Conference on Research Integrity

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Thu Jun 18 2026

As questions about maintaining trust in science become more urgent, the 9th World Conference on Research Integrity (WCRI), held in Vancouver in May, brought together researchers, publishers, institutions and funders to examine the research landscape and the systems needed to support integrity.

Held every four years, WCRI convenes stakeholders from across the research ecosystem to consider what research integrity should look like in practice. While each conference addresses a specific theme, it has long taken a broad view of responsible research conduct. This year’s programme continued that approach, addressing both established integrity concerns and emerging challenges.

As Co-Chair of this year’s WCRI, and Chair of the WCRI Foundation, I was honoured to work with an exceptional Board, Programme Committee and colleagues from around the world to shape a programme reflecting the scale and urgency of these challenges. Across the conference, one message came through clearly: safeguarding research integrity is a shared responsibility.

This builds on WCRI’s role since its inception in 2007 in shaping global integrity practice.The Singapore Statement developed at the second WCRI in July 2010, remains a landmark example, setting out responsibilities for researchers and institutions that continue to inform practice today. Each subsequent conference has produced a statement defining shared expectations and guidance across responsible conduct, international collaboration, research assessment and global equity. 

This year’s conference focused on three themes: artificial intelligence, research security and Indigenous Knowledge Systems, with the themes illustrating how research integrity is increasingly shaped by complex, system-level challenges.  

The first theme explored both the opportunities presented by AI and the risks it poses for research integrity.AI can support the detection of misconduct but also enable the production of fraudulent papers. As its use grows, the need for clear, consistent and meaningful disclosure across journals, disciplines and institutions becomes more urgent. One important outcome of the 9th WCRI conference will be further work to develop the proposed Vancouver Standard,  supporting transparent disclosure of AI use in research. 

To bring an expert perspective, I asked Simone Culurgioni, Team Lead, Research Integrity (Prevention), who attended the conference, to share his reflections:  

“There is real momentum across the research community, including at Springer Nature, towards innovative, collaborative solutions that can keep pace with how quickly AI is transforming research. What started off as something quite new has quickly become part of everyday practice, and it’s clear we now need coordinated technological responses, greater transparency and human oversight to manage its risks.” 

The conference also discussed research security, highlighting the challenge of balancing the protection of sensitive information with the openness that drives scientific progress. A third strand of the 9th WCRI focused on Indigenous perspectives, encouraging reflection on how research integrity is understood across different ways of knowing, and reinforcing the need for frameworks that reflect the diversity of research cultures. These discussions point a broader shift: integrity challenges are increasingly systemic and require coordinated responses across the research ecosystem.   

The breadth of the programme was also reflected in Springer Nature’s contributions throughout WCRI, with research integrity colleagues' presenting insights from their work: Tim Kersjes, Head of Research Integrity, Resolutions, explored collaboration between publishers and institutions when investigating potential misconduct, as well as the use of retraction datasets in paper mill research. Senior Research Integrity Advisor Manisha Wadhwa shared case studies showing how metadata can help distinguish AI misuse from legitimate practice, while Integrity Manager Svetlana Kleiner highlighted workflows that can strengthen integrity in edited volumes.   

Springer Nature colleagues also examined broader issues, with Ed Gerstner, Director, Research Environment Alliances, focusing on research assessment, Robert Hilliker, Director, Library Relations on the role of librarians in promoting research integrity, and Deborah Sweet, Executive Vice President, Nature Portfolio, on the importance of editorial stewardship in safeguarding the scholarly record. These discussions reinforce that maintaining trust in research requires coordinated action across the ecosystem.  

I left the 9th WCRI conference with a clear sense that these conversations have come a long way and continue to gather pace. Safeguarding trust in research will depend on sustained collective effort and shared standards, and conferences like WCRI remain essential because they turn shared concerns into practical guidance. In the months ahead, I will continue to work closely with fellow committee members to carry these discussions forward and develop the Vancouver Standard.  

Beyond the conference, Springer Nature will continue contributing to collaborative initiatives including STM Integrity Hub, COPE and United2Act, as part of our commitment to publishing trusted, rigorous research. 

Watch our insights video for more reflections from Springer Nature colleagues who attended WCRI.  

Open access with Palgrave Macmillan: a guide for early career researchers

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Jun 17 2026

Publishing your first book or article is a milestone. How you choose to publish it shapes who reads your work and how far it travels.

For early career researchers in the humanities, social sciences, and business, open access (OA) offers a powerful way to reach a global audience from day one. As part of Springer Nature, Palgrave Macmillan publishes world-class research across books and journals, championing innovative formats for more than a decade.

In this blog, we explore how Palgrave Macmillan supports early career researchers as future leaders in their fields, helping them reach wider audiences. It will also guide you through the funding options available.

Strength in the disciplines that shape society

Palgrave Macmillan has a longstanding tradition of excellence in journal publishing, with more than 40 journals across the humanities, social sciences and business, all underpinned by rigorous peer review. Most are hybrid, so you can choose to publish your article OA at the point of acceptance. 

OA is a powerful driver of reach and impact. By publishing OA, you remove the paywall between your ideas and the people who want to read them, wherever in the world they are. The Journal of International Business Studies recorded 2.1 million downloads in 2025 – clear evidence that rigorous social science research finds a wide and engaged readership. 

Pioneering open access book publishing

Many people still think of OA as something for journal articles alone. But, early on, Palgrave Macmillan took a broader view. Back in 2013, it launched an OA option for monographs and Palgrave Pivots – its distinctive short-form format that sits between a journal article and a full-length book.

It was also a pioneer: one of the first major publishers to offer OA in the humanities and social sciences, and the first to offer the open Creative Commons (CC) licence that many funders now require. That move gave book authors the same freedom journal authors already enjoyed, to make their work free to read for everyone, everywhere, the moment it publishes.

Palgrave Macmillan's influence reaches beyond publication into wider public and policy debate. Its dedication to the UN Sustainable Development Goals shapes research on challenges from climate action to inequality, while campaigns such as Social Science Matters champion the value of these disciplines in public life.

One early landmark was Fungal Disease in Britain and the United States 1850–2000, the first OA monograph funded by the Wellcome Trust. The reach of OA books has grown enormously since then. On average, open access books attract around 10 times more downloads and 2.4 times more citations than non-OA titles, and they reach roughly 61% more countries.

Palgrave Macmillan’s most downloaded OA book of 2025 was The Suez Canal: Past Lessons and Future Challenges, which has gathered 706,000 downloads since it was published in 2023. Few subscription titles reach an audience of that size.

What you can publish open access

Open access at Palgrave Macmillan is not limited to one format. A single book processing charge (BPC) covers a wide range of works:

  • monographs
  • edited volumes and collections
  • textbooks
  • proceedings
  • protocols
  • major reference works
  • short-form books (Palgrave Pivots)
  • individual OA chapters within an otherwise non-open-access book

Whether you are writing a focused Pivot or a comprehensive edited volume, there is an open access route for it.

If you are weighing up whether an OA book is right for you, start with the Guide to Open Access Books for Palgrave Macmillan Authors. It is a practical, free resource that walks you through the process step by step, from licensing and funding to how readers will find your work.

Funding your open access publication

For many early career researchers, the biggest question is a simple one: how do I pay for it? But support is often closer than you think.

“This was my first time publishing an OA book but there was support for OA funding from my (now former) institution, Yale-NUS in Singapore. Given the book’s topic, and that several of the chapters address issues distinctive to the context of my higher education institution, the Dean of Faculty’s Office and the Educational Resources and Technology team came together to support OA.”

- Nancy W. Gleason, Editor of Higher Education in the Era of the Fourth Industrial Revolution


Institutions often rally behind a project they believe in. A conversation with your faculty office, library, or research support team is often the best first step.

So how do the costs work? For journal articles, an article processing charge (APC) usually applies when you publish OA in a hybrid or OA journal. Most Palgrave Macmillan journals are hybrid, so you decide at the point of acceptance whether to publish OA or via subscription – the choice stays in your hands. For books, a book processing charge (BPC) works in much the same way. In both cases, the fee covers the services that turn your manuscript into a polished, discoverable, and permanent record, from peer review and production through to distribution and long-term accessibility.

In practice, you rarely pay this charge yourself. Many researchers benefit from agreements between their institution and Springer Nature. Depending on the agreement, these can cover the full charge, offer a percentage discount, or contribute a fixed amount towards the cost. Funders frequently cover OA fees too. To check what applies to you for a journal article, visit any journal’s ‘Fees and funding’ page and select your institution. For books, a free funding and policy support team can help you find and apply for funding, so you needn’t work it out alone.

When you are ready to dig into the detail, explore the funding options for books and articles and find out more about pricing for books and journals. Together these resources explain how to find an agreement, approach a funder, and secure the support you need before you submit.

Where ideas travel further
 

“Your ideas deserve the widest possible audience.”

Open access is one of the most effective ways to make sure your research is read, cited, and built upon, especially early in your career when reach matters most. With Palgrave Macmillan, you can publish open access across both books and journals, backed by rigorous peer review and decades of experience in the humanities, social sciences, and business - so wherever your research sits, there is a home for it.

Ready to take the next step? Find out more about OA funding options with Palgrave Macmillan.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest!

Behind every great collection: why guest editors matter more than you think

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Jun 10 2026

When you’re choosing where to publish your research, quality matters, but so does who is shaping the conversation around your work. With collections, that responsibility sits with guest editors: experts who don’t just oversee submissions, but actively curate, guide, and safeguard the research within them. Their expertise helps ensure that every paper contributes meaningfully to a wider, high-impact body of work.

In this blog, we explore the critical role guest editors play in shaping successful collections, how they uphold quality and integrity, and why their involvement should matter to you as an author or future guest editor.

In our latest ‘Behind the Collection’ video interview, we go behind the scenes with Dr. Vasiliki Rahimzadeh, guest editor for the collection: Bioinformatics ethics and data privacy, from the BMC Bioinformatics journal. 

She shares what it really takes to build a collection, from shaping the idea, to guiding it through peer review, and beyond. Before you press play, here’s why this role matters, and why it should influence your next publishing decision. 

The invisible layer behind high-quality research

Every collection starts with a simple idea: bring together the most relevant research on a topic that matters now. Yet, turning that idea into something credible, cohesive, and impactful requires more than just a call for papers. It requires expert curation. 

Guest editors play a central role in this process. They define the scope of the collection, identify emerging topics, and invite contributions that move the field forward, not just add to it.  

Crucially, they also manage the editorial journey behind each submission. From selecting qualified peer reviewers to synthesising feedback and guiding authors through revisions, they help ensure that every paper meets the expected scientific standards.  

For you as an author, that means something important: your work is not just published; it’s positioned alongside research that has been actively curated for quality and relevance.

Safeguarding trust, not just content

Quality in academic publishing isn’t accidental, it’s safeguarded. In fact, guest editors are a critical part of that system. They work within a framework of shared editorial oversight, collaborating closely with journal editors and publishing teams to maintain rigorous ethical standards and robust peer review.  

This includes ensuring that submissions are assessed fairly, conflicts of interest are managed, and decisions are grounded in scientific merit. 

Across the industry, there’s increasing focus on protecting the integrity of guest-edited collections, because when managed properly, they strengthen, rather than dilute, journal quality.  

At Springer Nature, this approach is multi-layered. Guest editors are carefully selected for their expertise, trained on editorial policies, and supported throughout the lifecycle of a Collection. They work alongside experienced editorial teams to ensure that every article meets the same rigorous standards as any journal publication.  

For authors, this reinforces a key point: you can trust not only the platform, but the people shaping the research within it. 

From curation to impact: shaping the research agenda

Collections don’t just reflect the direction of a field; they help define it. By selecting themes, identifying research gaps, and bringing together diverse perspectives, guest editors actively shape the conversations happening in their discipline.  

This has a direct impact on visibility and reach. Well-curated collections make it easier for readers to discover research within a focused topic area, connecting your work with the audiences most likely to engage with it

And that’s why the role of the guest editor extends beyond editorial oversight: they act as connectors, curators, and champions for the research community.

Thinking about becoming a guest editor?

If you’re an established or emerging researcher, you might be asking a different question: 

Could I do this? 

Guest editing offers the opportunity to shape the direction of research in your field, bringing together collaborators, spotlighting emerging ideas, and building something that lasts beyond a single publication.  

It’s also a chance to develop editorial experience, expand your network, and elevate your visibility within your community. 

But as our video interview reveals, it’s also a role that comes with responsibility, balancing scientific leadership with editorial rigour, and vision with process. 

Go behind the scenes

So what does this role actually look like in practice?

  • How do guest editors decide which topics are worth building a collection around?
  • What does managing peer review really involve?
  • And what does success look like, beyond publication?

In our latest video, you’ll hear directly from a guest editor about their journey, what surprised them, what challenged them, and what made it worthwhile.

 


Whether you’re considering publishing your work in a collection, or thinking about leading one, this is your chance to see the process from the inside.

Final takeaway

  • Guest editors are key to collection quality → they curate, review, and guide submissions 
  • They safeguard research integrity → working within rigorous editorial frameworks 
  • They shape impact and visibility → defining topics and connecting research communities 
  • They offer a pathway for researchers → to lead, influence, and grow their careers 

If you are interested in becoming a guest editor or publishing your research in a Springer Nature Collection visit our new Collections hub to find out more.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Source Monthly Digest!

Transparency in R&D and reproducible research in practice — Expert perspectives (Part 2)

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Jun 9 2026

Reproducibility is widely recognised as a cornerstone of trustworthy research, shaped by the tools, standards and data that support it, as well as the everyday practices that make research transparent and traceable. Across R&D, there is a growing focus on turning high‑level principles into practical, repeatable ways of working.

As discussed in the first episode of this two‑part podcast series, building reproducibility at scale starts with strong cultural and digital foundations. In this second episode, our expert guests, Emma Ganley and Robin Padilla, shift the focus to what that looks like in practice, with a particular emphasis on transparency. They explore practical ways to improve transparency and how documentation, digital tools, publishing practices and incentives come together to support reproducible research in real‑world settings.

In this companion article, we take a closer look at why transparency plays such a central role and share practical ways researchers, institutions and publishers can embed it more consistently across the research lifecycle.

Why transparency is essential for reproducible research

Transparency supports reproducibility and enhances trust in science by enabling knowledge to be shared and ensuring open access to data. It is a vital thread of trust that connects researchers, infrastructure, policy, and support roles, including research organisations and publishers. In practical terms, it means showing others what you have done and how you did it.

“Doing maths at school, you were always asked to show your working. That should be standard practice in research,” Ganley says. Documenting methods and results at every step produces a comprehensive record for researchers, their peers, and future generations. It also supports self-correction as research evolves.

Done well, transparency becomes a powerful enabler of reproducibility. “Only by being fully transparent about the approaches taken can another group, or even the same group at a later time, reliably reproduce the work,” Ganley explains. She suggests keeping detailed records including step-by-step methodologies, complete descriptions of reagents, materials and equipment and troubleshooting notes.

Practical ways to improve transparency in research workflows

So, what does this look like in practice? At its core, transparency is built through simple, consistent habits that make it easier for others to understand and reproduce research:

  • Start documenting methods early: Capturing details as the research progresses helps ensure accuracy and completeness when drafting the manuscript.
  • Treat method documentation like writing a recipe: Capture every parameter, quantities, timings, temperatures, equipment settings, and any other details needed, for someone to follow the protocol exactly.
  • Build a habit of daily tracking: Record all process steps, optimisations, adjustments, unexpected interruptions, and variations as they happen. Even small tweaks can explain why a process succeeds or fails, and thorough documentation ensures those insights aren’t lost.

For R&D teams, transparency is increasingly a core part of research infrastructure. Supporting reproducibility at scale means enabling researchers with the right tools, integrated workflows and incentives, ensuring that clear documentation and open sharing are built into processes from the outset.

Digital tools and infrastructure for transparent research

These everyday practices are becoming easier to sustain as research environments evolve. Digital tools and infrastructures now play a central role in enabling transparency at scale. Ganley sets out the advantages of digital tools, including making information visible, processes consistent, and decisions traceable. “This makes sharing easy and ensures transparency is the default rather than an afterthought,” she says. Technical improvements, such as interoperability between platforms and the machine readability of content, further support these efforts.

With new technologies rolling out faster than ever, Padilla notes that “researcher behaviour, which long moved at glacial speeds, is being upended and quickly.” Developers building tools to support research need to maintain “tight and fast feedback loops” to understand which technologies are being adopted and for what purposes.

At the same time, the fundamentals remain the same: “Create new knowledge that can be reliably used by others, whether they are people or bots,” Padilla advises.

As digital tools evolve, transparency becomes closely linked to organisational infrastructure, requiring joined‑up systems, interoperable platforms and shared standards that allow information to flow seamlessly across the research lifecycle.

Advancing transparency across the research ecosystem

Building on these digital and organisational foundations, stakeholders across the research ecosystem play a key role in shaping how transparency is applied and incentivised. According to Ganley, the incentive for corporate stakeholders to be transparent is clear. However, she advocates for more incentives for academia, including changes in responsible research assessment and recognition of good practice, such as the UK’s Hidden REF initiative.

Ganley and Padilla see a cultural shift already taking shape, with journals increasingly requiring data availability statements, code deposits, and method sharing. Advancing transparency as a standard practice calls for coordinated effort across publishers and research community. In practice, this includes:

  • Establishing and upholding clear open research policies covering data, code, methods, and materials.
  • Enabling greater transparency in evaluation processes, including more open approaches to peer review.
  • Supporting upfront research design through mechanisms such as pre-registration and early-stage review.
  • Recognising and valuing a broader range of outputs, including null results, replications, robustness studies and supportive research.
  • Connecting tools and infrastructure to make it easier to follow open research best practices.
  • Providing training and guidance so researchers can apply these standards consistently in their day-to-day work.

These perspectives highlight how transparency connects individual practice with digital infrastructure and organisational strategy. As expectations evolve across academia and industry, embedding transparency into tools, workflows, and incentives will be key to scaling reproducibility in increasingly digital and interconnected R&D environments. In this way, transparency becomes more than a principle, it becomes a shared foundation for more reliable, collaborative and future‑ready research. To listen to the full podcast conversation with Emma Ganley and Robin Padilla click here or on the image below:

Transparency in R&D and reproducible research in practice (Part02) © Springer Nature 2026

This discussion builds on the themes explored in the first article and podcast episode, which examine the cultural shifts and digital foundations shaping reproducibility across the research ecosystem.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

How to do science that matters: Computational biologist Casey S. Greene on purpose-driven open science practices

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Jun 9 2026

This is the fourth blog post in our series in which researchers share their experiences with open science practices, and reflect on the impact that sharing open data, code, and protocols can have.  

Professor Casey S. Greene is the founding Chair of and a Professor in the Department of Biomedical Informatics at the University of Colorado Anschutz, as well as Director at the Colorado Center for Personalized Medicine. His lab applies computational methods to answer important questions in biology and medicine. He has extensive publishing experience, with articles published in Nature Portfolio journals, such as Latent spaces for tumour transcriptomesResponsible, practical genomic data sharing that accelerates research and Projecting genetic associations through gene expression patterns highlights disease etiology and drug mechanisms. As an advocate for high-quality science, Professor Greene encourages his research group to approach open science practices in a deliberate and meaningful way.  

We asked Professor Greene to share his perspective on how these practices enable better, more rigorous science that ultimately leads to “more tomorrows”, improving and extending people’s lives through research that others can build on. 

Can you briefly introduce yourself and your research area?  

I'm a computational biologist, and our lab focuses on developing machine learning methods for integrative genomics that help us make sense of mostly large-scale biological data, as well as some clinical data. We've worked in some foundational computational methods development and a lot on applications. We like to spend our time trying to ask the uncomfortable questions that folks sometimes don't ask about the limitations of the data, so there’s a lot of thought about how to design computational experiments. 

How did you first become interested in open science practices?  

“My interest isn't really open science; it's high-quality, rigorous science, and often that happens to be open.” 


Casey Greene, Founding Chair of and a Professor, Dept. of Biomedical Informatics, University of Colorado Anschutz; Director, Colorado Center for Personalized Medicine.

My interest isn't really open science; it's high-quality, rigorous science, and  that often happens to be open. I’ve spent a bunch of time talking about the Open Science Industrial Complex, and I think there is an approach to open science which is open first, science second. That can lead us astray. It's science first, rigorous is the goal and open is how we get there. 

When I started my postdoc, part of that involved the opportunity of picking up some work that was in progress in the lab. I'd try to do something and find someone else had already implemented it. It's not in the core library that we're using; it's in the version on their computer, so now I have to get that from them and then I have to integrate it with this version of the library that I inherited. We spent time basically redoing potentially avoidable work. I guess that's how I came to it first, focusing on version control, provenance, et cetera. When I started my group, that was the goal, and we've improved our practices over time in terms of our expectations of lab members. 

I also think I really like working with people, and there's a limit to the scale of who you can work with if you're going to be closed, even if you use good rigorous scientific practices. If you do this stuff in the open, there's just more opportunity for critique, feedback, and collaboration. I feel like you can do science better and faster if it's open. Not that it should be open just for the sake of it, where it looks open but you don't actually engage with anyone or even use rigorous practices. The rigour is more important than the open, but I think they go together. 

What open science practices do you use? 

Pretty much all our code is on GitHub. Some of that is public while we're working on it, though I don't require that. I do require the code to be public on GitHub at the time of publication. We use a pull request model. We also try to make sure the data is on an appropriate repository. For the work that we do, that's usually SRA or dbGaP, with controlled access depending on the human subject status of it. Sometimes there's not an appropriate repository, so we use things like Zenodo or Figshare. 

Every once in a while, there have been projects that feel like they're beyond the scale of the lab, so we'll actually run the entire project in the open intentionally to advertise it and say, ‘Hey, come here and pitch in.’ I think the ‘Open Paediatric Brain Tumour Atlas’ is an example of that. ‘Opportunities and obstacles for deep learning in biology and medicine’ is an example of that. It started with a tweet: ‘I'm kind of interested in reading the deep learning literature. We're going to start a review on GitHub,’ and ended up with 40-odd people writing a paper. 

What does open science look like in the day-to-day practices of your lab? 

Do you know the article ‘The Mundanity of Excellence’? I think open science is not a trend, but these everyday, disciplined practices. These practices let you do science where you might fail at something, but if you fail, you fail because of a good reason and you're not going to make the same mistake twice. You'll make a lot of new mistakes. So many new mistakes, but you don't make the same mistake twice. That’s the type of stuff that separates really good science from great science, and those practices often tend to be open. I think just doing that consistently and well can make the entire ecosystem stronger so that we can return more yield in health sciences; we can return more tomorrows to more people, and ideally doing that is going to be the type of thing that convinces society that, ‘Maybe we should continue to invest in this’. 

There are so many incredibly bright people in science. I am not going to be able to compete on that, but doing the simple stuff well? I can compete in that. You have to find what you're good at and be able to do small, frustrating things and make them not frustrating but a thing you enjoy doing, somehow that's my skill. The great thing about it is being able to find joy in the little stuff. This is why it was great to be able to post a preprint and have someone reach out and give you a comment because you can enjoy that. You can't control the outcomes, but you can control how you do it. That's how you do science that matters, science that other people can build on. 

What motivated you to adopt these practices?  

People like to make the career progression argument for open science, but I think it's actually negative for science as a whole. If we look at preprints, for example, there were a whole bunch of people who decided to argue that we should preprint because it's good for people's careers. I think that's exactly the wrong reason to preprint. I view the posting of a preprint as, ‘Hey, I want feedback on this before it's finalized. I want to hear from people’. I see it as a complement to peer review. 

At the end of the day, our goal as scientists is either to better understand the unknown or improve the lives of our fellow people. The more we bring the focus into ourselves and less about why we do what we do, the more we make bad decisions that are, at best, orthogonal to scientific progress and, at worst, directly contradictory to scientific progress. I would say focusing on career progression will almost always lead you astray. I think it's a lot easier to figure out what you believe and hope that there is an institution out there that values what you value. 

Have you ever faced any particular challenges or barriers in undertaking open science practices? 

This is a barrier, but a fully appropriate one. We do work on data that is from people, and I think there are real barriers to open science practices in the context of research on humans. I also think that those are completely appropriate barriers, so we have to figure out how to do that responsibly because with privacy, once it's lost, it's gone. To me, the biggest true barrier is that privacy is a non-renewable resource. That’s not a bad barrier, but it is something that we have to take exceedingly seriously. 

Is there a particular success story or example you’re proud of that illustrates the benefits of open science? 

For the deep learning review, we wrote it entirely on GitHub with this automatic rebuild process. We ended up writing a paper about the writing of the paper, and there was a lot of fun stuff we were able to do with that. We spun up the same thing in the context of COVID because there was a lot of research starting to come out, and we thought it'd be great if there was a place that could aggregate it. 

There are people I've worked with who I've never met in person because they came across something on GitHub. I've co-authored with people and only met them years later because we interacted on GitHub and ended up writing a paper together. For the Open Paediatric Brain Tumour Atlas, all the analysis happened online in the open, so there's a tonne of people who contributed to this project that I've never met before, but we've done analysis together. It's kind of delightful sometimes. 

Are there any gaps in support or resources about open science you’d like to see addressed?  

It's pretty hard to do things if you're not funded. I do think funding for the sake of open is a little odd. We should fund practices that advance science most effectively and efficiently. I think that has to always be the North Star: what's the underlying goal? 

Alex's Lemonade Stand Foundation, for example, have open as a review criterion. I like this policy very much, and I think the reason I like it is because it's very centred on the goal. The goal of resource sharing is to enable faster translation of research discoveries into cures for children with cancer. The goal is not open. The goal is not to help careers. The goal is to make sure fewer kids die of cancer, and then there’s the how. I like this type of approach. ‘We're doing this, here's why we're doing it’, but it's centred on not someone's career. It's centred on what helps kids with cancer not have cancer. 

Also, every time the National Institutes of Health come out with request for input on open science practices, I try to submit this, ‘You should do something like this.’ I think the more that it's box checking, the less effective it is.  I think a focus on the why and then using the why to drive the how feels like the right way to go. 

What advice would you give to researchers considering adopting open science practices? 

“Figure out what you want to do and what change you want to make in the world and then figure out what practices are best aligned with that, and I think you're going to find they're open.” 


Casey Greene, Founding Chair of and a Professor, Dept. of Biomedical Informatics, University of Colorado Anschutz; Director, Colorado Center for Personalized Medicine.

Figure out what you want to do and what change you want to make in the world and then figure out what practices are best aligned with that, and I think you're going to find they're open. For example, the last thing I want to do is have someone else start a project from ground zero if they could have started from some software that we wrote. I'd rather have them use that limited amount of scientific funding to make as much progress as they can make, and if they can start from something we did, they can get further faster. That is a win for everyone. 

Science is generally not a zero-sum game. Society decides where society will invest based on the yield of that investment, and I think most people want to live. I was talking to my daughter yesterday. We were driving back from the airport after dropping a colleague off, and she was asking me a bunch of questions like, “Why do you do what you do?’ I was like, ‘The person who we just dropped off, the work that they do means fewer children will die of cancer. That is what will happen’. What we do in science is ideally about people having more tomorrows. That is an incredible privilege. It is an incredible opportunity, and so keeping yourself grounded in your "why" and then figuring out how to go from that to choosing the right actions for you in your group. 

You’ve got to start with what gets you out of bed in the morning and why you do it because it is real hard sometimes to stay motivated, but if people are going to live happier, healthier lives, I think that has to be what guides you to decide the practices. There's just so much opportunity to make a positive difference in the world, and open science practices just follow from that. 

Learn more about open science and sharing research data, code and protocols & methods openly


Related content:

  • Open science conversations: 
  1. Building trust through transparency: An open science conversation with Geir Kjetil Sandve 
  2. Open science, altruism and impact: An interview with clinical geneticist Zornitza Stark
  3. Bioinformatician Johannes Koester on embodying the spirit of open science 
  4. Open science before it had a name: An interview with molecular biologist Steven Henikoff 
  5. Building the infrastructure for open science: A conversation with Carole Goble 
  •  Best practices for transparency and reuse: 
  1. How to share your research protocols and methods openly 

  2. How to share your research code openly 

  • Supporting open science practices: 
  1. Why share your research data? 

  2. Why sharing protocols matters 

  3. Why sharing your code matters 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest

More than a newsletter: how Nature Briefing brings researchers together

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon Jun 8 2026

Science is rarely solitary, even when reading happens alone, and we’re reminded of that every time we hear from Nature Briefing readers. One of the most striking patterns in feedback is how often Nature Briefing is shared, discussed and passed on, not as a nice-to-have, but as a practical tool for staying oriented in a fast-moving research world. Read on to hear how it helps researchers stay connected, curious, and up to date.

Why does that matter? Because time is scarce, attention is fragmented, and it’s harder than ever to separate signal from noise. Our job is to do some of that work with you: to surface what’s worth knowing, explain why it matters, and give you something you can carry into your own decisions and conversations. It’s not just that people read the Briefing, they use it. They quote it, debate it, teach with it, and rely on it as a daily touchpoint with what matters in research.

“Reading the Nature Briefing is the first thing I do when I get to the lab and turn on my computer every morning. I’ve recommended it to all my students."


 Jihane Homman-Ludiye, neuroscientist, Australian Regenerative Medicine Institute, Monash University 

Get Nature Briefing in your inbox 
P_057RT_NATBRIEF_300x170 px © Springer Nature 2026

Join researchers worldwide who start their day with a trusted filter for the most important science stories, curated by Nature editors. 

What you’ll get: 

  • A quick, readable daily roundup that saves you time 
  • Context and clarity, not just headlines 
  • Breadth across disciplines to spark new ideas 

Free to sign upSign up here.

Forwarded, printed, and talked about

Readers describe forwarding stories to colleagues, sending articles to friends and family, and bringing topics into lab meetings or teaching sessions. Some mention printing quotes or screenshots and keeping them in workspaces as reminders of curiosity and perspective. 

These small actions reveal something important: Nature Briefing doesn’t stay confined to one inbox. It becomes part of wider conversations. 

For you, that can look like a better lab discussion, a clearer way to explain your work to someone outside your field, or simply the relief of feeling caught up without having to chase dozens of tabs. When a story is easy to grasp and grounded in evidence, it’s easier to act on, and easier to share.

“I have been reading and relying on this digital publication for several years for the beautifully curated snippets of science news […] I share these widely with friends and family and have printed screenshots of many Quotes of the Day and posted them in my workspace”


Anonymous reader  

Trust makes it shareable

Sharing is partly social, but it’s also reputational. We hear that readers are more likely to forward something when they trust the judgement behind it, and when they feel confident it will be accurate, relevant and worth someone else’s time. 

That’s why we care so much about the Briefing’s editorial voice: clear without being simplistic, curious without being sensational. The goal is to give you confidence, that if you send something on, you’re passing along a fair, well-framed account of what’s happening and why it matters.

“Thank you all for being a steady beacon for the wonders of science and promoting awe in these challenging times. Nature Briefing is like my old reliable Nikon binoculars. Always there to help me see the wonders of the world and excite my brain with discoveries”


Anonymous reader 

A shared language for talking about science

Because Nature Briefing covers a broad range of topics and explains them clearly, it can give you a common reference point, even across disciplines, when you’re trying to make sense of a result outside your lane or talk about it with someone who doesn’t share your background. 

Several readers mention using stories from the Briefing to explain unfamiliar areas of science to others, or to spark interest beyond academia. In this way, the newsletter acts as a bridge between specialist knowledge and shared curiosity.

Belonging in a wide community 

Some readers tell us they feel part of a larger group: people around the world who care about science, accuracy and understanding. We don’t take that lightly — and we think it matters because research can be demanding and isolating, even in busy institutions. 

Especially for those working in challenging contexts or transitioning between career stages, the Briefing can offer continuity, a reminder that you’re still connected to the scientific conversation, and that your curiosity has a place to land each day. 

“I love the range of topics that you cover and the personal notes that you add at the end. It really makes me feel like we are part of something large community of people who are interested in "nature"!”


— Anonymous reader

A daily ritual, wherever you are

Many readers describe opening the Briefing as part of their routine: with a morning coffee, on a commute, between experiments, or at the end of a long shift. The consistency is part of the value, it turns “keeping up” into something manageable. 

That shared cadence creates a subtle form of togetherness: thousands of people encountering the same story on the same day, then taking it into their own conversations and decisions. Community doesn’t always require a forum, sometimes it starts with a common prompt.

Reader moments (in their own words)

The details vary, but the pattern is consistent: the Briefing travels.

  • “I forward one link a week to my lab group, it’s the easiest way to start discussion without adding another meeting.” 
  • “I use the Briefing to find a story outside my field, then I bring it into lectures as an example of how science connects.” 
  • “When I’m between roles, it keeps me feeling anchored to research, like I haven’t fallen out of the conversation.” 
  • “I send it to my parents sometimes. It helps explain why a new result matters without the jargon.” 

Keeping curiosity alive

Across all feedback, one idea surfaces again and again: wonder

Readers talk about delight, surprise, humour and moments of joy, things that are easy to lose sight of in professional environments driven by deadlines and metrics. For many, Nature Briefing helps keep curiosity alive, even on busy or difficult days.

“I greatly enjoy the Nature Briefing. My late husband was a brilliant man with a beautiful heart […]. The Briefings help me keep in touch with many topics that he and I used to discuss, and this connection is helping my heart heal.”


— Anonymous reader

Join a global community of curious readers

If you want a quick, trustworthy way to stay oriented, and something worth sharing when a story matters Nature Briefing is made for you. Sign up to join the Briefing community

Related Content

Nature Briefing: science stories curated by editors, not algorithms

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Jun 3 2026

Not all science newsletters are created equal. Researchers receive countless links to papers, press releases and headlines every week. Yet when asked what keeps them returning to Nature Briefing, many focus not on what is included, but how editorial decisions are made and communicated.

For Briefing readers, the value is straightforward: it helps you stay across the research that will shape your work, without having to trawl dozens of journals, preprint servers and press offices. It filters out the noise, adds just enough context to judge relevance quickly, and flags the papers and stories worth discussing, citing or sharing with colleagues.

“It’s a great balance of insightful and entertaining and gives me the info (and a fun break) that I’m looking for." 


 Tyler Arbour, biogeochemist, Center for Microbial Ecology and Technology, University of Ghent

Get Nature Briefing in your inbox 
P_057RT_NATBRIEF_300x170 px © Springer Nature 2026

Join researchers worldwide who start their day with a trusted filter for the most important science stories, curated by Nature editors. 

What you’ll get: 

  • A quick, readable daily roundup that saves you time 
  • Context and clarity, not just headlines 
  • Breadth across disciplines to spark new ideas 

It’s also free to sign up.

Why curation still matters

In an age of algorithms and automated feeds, human judgement remains valuable. Readers consistently mention trusting Nature Briefing because they believe stories are chosen with care, not popularity alone. 

They appreciate that the Briefing pulls from multiple sources, reflects a range of perspectives, and avoids sensationalism. Over time, that consistency builds confidence: readers feel they can rely on what’s included to be worth their attention.

“Your newsletter is a wonderful source of science news, and I appreciate your engaging writing style. I am also very fond of the way you summarize the stories you link to. […] You clearly invest more thought and work to deliver enough information to give me a good idea of the topic.”


Anonymous reader  

Summaries that do more than tease 

One detail readers highlight repeatedly is the quality of the summaries themselves.

Rather than simply repeating a headline or first paragraph, Nature Briefing provides context: what the finding is, why it matters, and how it fits into a broader conversation. For readers, this difference is significant. 

Several note that this thoughtfulness allows them to understand unfamiliar topics quickly, and makes the reading experience more rewarding, even when they don’t click through to the full article.

Respecting readers’ intelligence

Another reason readers trust Nature Briefing is tone. 

They describe feeling spoken to, not at. There’s an assumption of curiosity and intelligence, without jargon or oversimplification. That balance, accessibility without dilution, is something readers say they notice and value. 

This sense of respect plays a key role in long‑term engagement. Readers feel comfortable returning day after day, knowing they’ll be informed without being patronised.

Trust built over time 

Trust isn’t built by a single newsletter; it grows through hundreds of consistent editions. 

Many long‑time readers note that Nature Briefing feels familiar, reliable and consistent. Even as topics change, the editorial approach remains steady. That predictability becomes part of the value: readers know what they’re going to get. 

In a crowded communication landscape, that kind of relationship is rare, and easy to underestimate.

Nature Briefing is the only news I am opening these days. It’s a life saver. I always forward an article or two to family and friends.”


— Anonymous reader

Experience Nature‑edited science news

Sign up to Nature Briefing for trusted science stories carefully curated by Nature editors. 

Related Content

Reproducibility in R&D building trust and digital foundations — Expert perspectives (Part 1)

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Jun 2 2026

Reproducibility establishes credibility in research; it underpins innovation and collaboration and helps build science that stands the test of time. Research that is reproducible provides a solid foundation for trust‑based alliances between groundbreaking researchers and the professionals who support them across academia and industry.

As part of The Link’s ongoing focus on reproducibility, digital labs, and interoperable workflows, this podcast episode is the first of a twoepisode conversation with Emma Ganley, Director of Strategic Initiatives for protocols.io, and Robin Padilla, Director of Product Management at Springer Nature’s Digital Life Science Solutions. Across both episodes, they explore the reproducibility ecosystem, from abstract principles and theory to real‑world context and practical application.

In this episode, Ganley and Padilla reflect on the cultural shifts required to ensure that reproducibility becomes the expectation rather than the exception in science. They discuss the role of digital tools and FAIR (Findable, Accessible, Interoperable, Reusable) principles, share perspectives on the opportunities and limitations of AI, and explore what it will take to shape a more connected and reliable research ecosystem for the future.

Below, we’ve curated some of the key insights from this first episode. You can listen to the full podcast conversation down below. This conversation highlights:

  • Why reproducibility underpins trust across partnerships, regulation and translation
  • How digital tools and standardised workflows reduce risk, error and inefficiency at scale
  • What FAIR and AI‑ready data foundations mean for future‑proofing research

Why reproducibility underpins trustworthy science

“Reproducibility is an indicator of integrity and reliability,” says Ganley, “you’re building knowledge that lasts.” She likens research without reproducibility to a house without foundations: “It can look really impressive initially, even jaw-dropping, but unless it has really strong foundations, it may very well fall down over time.”

When research is transparent, stakeholders can collaborate with confidence, says Ganley, citing an example from healthcare: “When translated to clinical applications, reproducibility can have lifesaving results down the line. If it’s all reproducible, it will stand the test of time.”

Digital tools for reliable results at scale

Padilla discusses the “digital transformation of science” and the importance of embedding reproducibility into new processes. Nowadays, he explains, paper notebooks and handwritten records have been replaced by electronic lab notebooks (ELNs), laboratory information management systems (LIMS), and automated workflows. This supports reproducibility by making research more efficient and reducing mistakes, such as transcription errors, that could have a significant impact on results. “By having processes recorded in digital environments, you don’t have to worry about these things,” says Padilla.

Embedding reproducibility into everyday R&D workflows

Ganley shares her thoughts on the changes required to improve reproducibility in research. Stakeholders, such as publishers, researchers, funders, and policymakers, need to align around shared standards when it comes to open data, code, and protocols. “It’s important that reproducibility is embedded into workflows and protocols, so it becomes a standard practice,” she says. “It should not be a luxury item or an afterthought.” Fostering interoperability and reducing the number of discrete platforms that researchers use will also help to improve reproducibility: “We want everything to be joined up as much as possible,” says Ganley.

Future‑proofing research through FAIR data and AI

Ganley and Padilla also talk about how they envisage reproducibility in the future, including the role of AI. Padilla draws a distinction between probabilistic and deterministic AI systems, explaining that the former is powerful but prone to hallucinations, the latter is more consistent but limited in scope. The key is taking the best of both, he says: “Being able to balance out different types of AI systems, especially in the context of reproducibility, I see that as being really, really important.”

Ganley is confident that AI never completely replace scientists. However, she believes that applying it cleverly will be vital for the future of reproducibility: “Having AI-ready data and standardised formats will lead to big progress and should make reproducibility a lot faster and easier to achieve for researchers.”

Overall, our guests believe that a “cultural shift” is needed to ensure that reproducibility will become the expectation rather than the exception in the future. Transparent data, digital tools, and FAIR principles, well applied, will help to achieve this and, as Ganley puts it, “turn research results into a global resource rather than a lockbox.”

Listen and explore reproducibility in practice

Reproducibility sits at the intersection of culture, technology and collaboration and, as this conversation shows, is becoming an increasingly strategic concern for research organisations across academia and industry, particularly as R&D environments grow more digital, distributed and interconnected. Listen to the full podcast conversation with Emma Ganley and Robin Padilla here or click on the image below.

Reproducibility, from abstract to context — A conversation with Emma Ganley and Robin Padilla © Springer Nature 2026

In the second post in this two‑episode series, we’ll continue the discussion by focusing on transparency in practice, from everyday research behaviours and documentation to the role of digital tools, publishing practices, and incentives that support reproducible research.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

From research to policymaking: insights from China

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Jun 2 2026

What difference does your research make beyond academia? For many researchers, this question is becoming increasingly important. While citations remain a key benchmark, there is growing emphasis on how research contributes to real-world challenges — informing decisions, shaping policy, and supporting progress towards the United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). 

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019

Our 2025 SDG Impact Report 'From publications to policy' provides new insight into this shift. Based on analysis of more than 19 million policy documents, the report shows that SDG-related policies cite academic research significantly more often than non-SDG policies. The findings suggest that research aligned with global challenges is not only more visible, but more likely to be used. 

To understand how this works in practice, and to explore practical ways of strengthening research-to-policy connections, we spoke with Dr. Wang Yan, a senior education policy expert in China. 

How research feeds into policymaking in China 

China provides a useful example of how research can be embedded within policymaking systems. By 2022, China had achieved the world’s highest average citation impact for SDG-related research, reflecting both the scale of its output and its influence in academia. As Dr. Wang explains, this reflects a deliberately structured approach to policymaking, in which research plays a foundational role: 

“I have previously described the policymaking cycle in China as having five steps. The process begins with research. Within China’s education system, there are dedicated research organisations embedded within the Ministry of Education system… These institutes conduct research before policymaking begins.” 

This cycle moves through stages including international comparison, stakeholder consultation, pilot testing, and policy implementation. At each stage, evidence is used to inform decisions and refine direction. As Dr. Wang explains, “research is therefore an integral part of the policymaking process.”  

Rather than being applied after policies are developed, research helps shape their direction from the outset, influencing both what is prioritised and how solutions are tested. 

Creating pathways from research to policy 

One way to strengthen links between research and policymaking is through dedicated forums that bring researchers and decision-makers together. 

Dr. Wang provides an example of this — the 2025 G20 Education Dialogue in Beijing. Bringing together policymakers, researchers, and institutional leaders, the event was designed to translate research into actionable insights. Dr. Wang describes the Dialogue as “a structured mechanism for the research-policy process.” 

Discussions focused on areas such as Climate Action (SDG 13) and Quality Education (SDG 4), combining empirical research with practical examples from institutions and schools. 

Importantly, the outputs were designed to feed directly into policymaking. As Dr. Wang explains: 

“Formal outcomes, including a comprehensive conference summary and a dedicated policy advisory report, were synthesised from the discussions and formally submitted to the Ministry of Education to inform national decision-making.” 

Forums like this help ensure that research is not only discussed, but translated into outputs that can be directly used in policymaking. 

The role of collaboration between researchers and policymakers 

Closer collaboration between researchers and policymakers can further strengthen the use of evidence, particularly when it is built into the way policymaking systems operate. 

In China, this is supported through secondments, where researchers work within the Ministry of Education. This enables them to contribute directly to policymaking while bringing academic perspectives into government processes.  

Dr. Wang notes that “in doing so, they brought a research element into the policymaking process by providing analytical insights into daily administration work.” 

Collaboration is also reflected in how research priorities are set.  As Dr. Wang explains, the research themes are decided jointly with the Ministry of Education. 

By combining direct involvement in policymaking with shared priority-setting, these approaches help ensure that research is closely aligned with policy needs – making it more likely that findings are taken up in practice. 

Why access to research matters for policy impact 

Accessibility is a critical factor in determining whether research can inform policy. 

The report shows that open access (OA) research reaches policy audiences nearly 300 days faster than non-OA work and is cited more frequently in policy documents. This demonstrates how publishing choices can influence the reach and use of research. 

For Dr. Wang, this is also a question of equity: “In the SDG framework, knowledge is explicitly recognised as a global public good. Yet the traditional subscription-based publishing model effectively privatises that knowledge, creating a ‘knowledge divide’ that runs counter to the principle of leaving no one behind.” 

Limited access can prevent policymakers and practitioners from engaging with relevant evidence. As Dr. Wang notes, “evidence can only inform policy if policymakers and the institutions that advise them can actually access it,” highlighting how access directly shapes whether research can be used in practice. 

Positioning research for real-world use 

Before research informs policy, it is usually interpreted, synthesised and adapted. 

Through her work with international organisations such as the World Bank and the Asia-Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC), Dr. Wang has seen how this process often extends beyond national systems, requiring coordination across institutions, regions and policy contexts. 

The report also highlights the role of intermediary organisations, including think tanks, NGOs, and international agencies. These organisations act as knowledge brokers, translating academic research into formats that policymakers can use, and as Dr. Wang’s experience suggests, this translation step is critical. Research is more likely to inform policy when it is presented in ways that policymakers can engage with and apply, particularly in multi-stakeholder and international contexts. 

In practice, impact is shaped not only by what is published, but by how it is communicated. Outputs that are clear, concise, and aligned with policy needs are more likely to be used. Shorter formats such as policy briefs or advisory summaries are often what enable research to move into decision-making contexts. 

Supporting research impact in policy 

Drawing on the findings of this case study, researchers can take several practical steps to strengthen the policy relevance of their work: 

  • Focus on usability: Present findings in ways that are clear and actionable for non-academic audiences  
  • Support open access: Openly accessible research is more likely to be used in policy contexts  
  • Align with global priorities: Framing work within SDG-related challenges can increase relevance  
  • Engage with intermediaries: Collaborating with think tanks and similar organisations can extend reach  
  • Participate in policy-focused forums: These create opportunities to connect research with decision-making 

From research to impact 

As this case study illustrates, the lesson from China is clear: research has the greatest impact when the pathways to policy are clear, structured and intentional. 

From structured policymaking processes to dedicated forums and closer collaboration between researchers and government, these examples show how evidence can be positioned to inform decision-making more effectively. 

For researchers, this underlines the importance of not only producing high-quality work, but also ensuring it is accessible and aligned with policy needs. When research is openly available and communicated in ways that support real-world use, it is far more likely to contribute to meaningful progress across the Sustainable Development Goals. 

Explore the full findings in our 2025 SDG Impact Report.
 


Dr. Wang Yan, Senior Specialist, Academy of Regional and Global Governance, Beijing Foreign Studies University.

Wang Yan © Springer Nature

In her previous role, Dr. Yan was Education Network Coordinator of APEC Human Resource Development Working Group from 2015 to 2022. She has over 20 years of professional experiences in the field of education policy and administration at national and international level, working with Chinese governments as well as UNESCO, World Bank, Unicef, G20 and providing intellectual strategic and operational leadership, helping to meet regional and global development needs through strategic planning, policy reforms and education innovation.
  
She has led the drafting, revision and finalization of APEC Education Strategy 2030, the first mid- and long-term plan for education development in the sphere of APEC as well as G20 Education Dialogue, a platform for education exchange for policymakers, researchers and practitioners in G20 members. She has authored, co-authored and edited numerous articles, reports, journal and books on various educational topics including groundbreaking works Education Policy Reform Trends in G20 Members as well as Research, Policymaking and Innovation: Teacher and Education Development in the Belt and Road Countries.
  
She has been selected as one of 20 thought-leaders on the future of education and learning by UNESCO for her contribution to the study on 21st century competencies and skills. She holds a Ph.D. of education policy, administration and social studies from the University of Hong Kong, a Master of Educational Economics and Administration and a first degree in English Literature.


Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs,sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest! 

Nature Briefing: a trusted way for researchers to stay informed and avoid overwhelm

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon Jun 1 2026

Staying informed as a researcher has never been easier, or harder. New papers, alerts, policy updates, funding calls and general news arrive daily, often all competing for attention at the same time. For many researchers, the challenge isn’t access to information but deciding what’s worth their limited time. That is where trust becomes essential: when time is limited, researchers need a source that helps them focus on what matters.

From feedback from Nature Briefing readers, one thing is clear: the researchers who feel most on top of science aren’t reading everything. They’re choosing carefully,  and finding small ways to make keeping up feel lighter, more curious and even joyful. 

Get Nature Briefing in your inbox 
P_057RT_NATBRIEF_300x170 px © Springer Nature 2026

Join researchers worldwide who start their day with a trusted filter for the most important science stories, curated by Nature editors. 
What you’ll get: 

  • A quick, readable daily roundup that saves you time 
  • Context and clarity, not just headlines 
  • Breadth across disciplines to spark new ideas 

It’s also free to sign up

Nature Briefing is the only email I NEVER delete without reading.” 


– AU Daniels, Prof. Emeritus for Experimental Surgery, University of Basel Faculty of Medicine

Small moments of joy in a busy research day

Several readers describe a familiar pattern: scanning inboxes quickly, bookmarking articles they never return to, and feeling quietly behind despite constant information intake. 

What they’re looking for isn’t volume, it’s filtering. A way to understand what matters today without needing to track dozens of sources themselves. 

Readers frequently describe the Briefing as a solution because it does something subtly different: it makes keeping up feel easy and enjoyable. Stories are selected, summarised and framed clearly, so readers can take in key developments quickly, without the nagging sense that they should be reading everything. 

“I enjoy the usually gentle humour and generally upbeat tone of the Nature Briefing!  It is not always easy to be a scientist these days [but], the Briefings make it a little more fun to BE an active scientist.”

Anonymous reader  

Enough context to understand, with freedom to go deeper 

A recurring theme in reader feedback is appreciation for how summaries are written. 

Rather than offering a headline and a link, the Briefing gives enough information to understand why a story matters. That means readers can decide, quickly and confidently, whether it’s something they want to explore further. That confidence comes not only from clarity, but from knowing the selection has been curated by Nature editors. 

Some readers note that this makes it easier to stay broadly informed even when their own work is demanding or highly specialised. Others mention that it helps them step outside their discipline without feeling lost or overloaded. 

In short, the Briefing acts as a starting point, not a destination, which is exactly what many time‑constrained researchers want. 

“Like everyone, I receive Avogadro’s number of emails every day, many devoted to science news. Nature Briefing is my favorite, and I always look forward to reading it.” 

— Anonymous reader

A habit that fits real research lives

Another pattern emerges in how readers describe when they read Nature Briefing

For many, it’s part of a routine: first thing in the morning, with a coffee, or as a quiet moment before the day’s work begins. Because it’s concise and predictable, it doesn’t feel like another demand, it feels manageable. 

Over time, that consistency matters. Readers say they’ve stopped opening most emails automatically, but they continue to make space for Nature Briefing because it respects their time.

Staying informed without burning out 

Across disciplines and career stages, readers express relief at finding a way to stay connected to science without feeling constantly behind. 

In an environment that rewards constant output and attention, small design choices, like clarity, tone, and brevity, can make a meaningful difference. For many readers, Nature Briefing offers a way to engage with science that feels manageable and trustworthy. It can even reconnect them with what they liked about research in the first place.

Nature Briefing is the only news I am opening these days. It’s a life saver. I always forward an article or two to family and friends.”

— Anonymous reader

Get Nature Briefing in your inbox 

Join researchers worldwide who start their day with trusted, curated science updates from Nature BriefingSign up here.

Related Content

Acting responsibly, driving progress

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Thu May 28 2026

In 2025, we celebrated 10 years of Springer Nature. It was an opportunity to reflect not only on a decade of growth, but also on what it really means to be a responsible business.

Responsibility goes beyond strategy; it is something our colleagues live every day. Our short video (https://youtu.be/N4_W6yXMaqc) brings those voices together, sharing in their own words what being a responsible business means to them and how it influences their work.

For us, true responsibility is about more than delivering a strong performance. It’s about recognising our role in society and ensuring our growth supports both the communities we work with and the planet. At a time when science is more and more in the public spotlight, that sense of purpose matters more than ever.

Publishing

Nearly two-thirds of people worldwide say they struggle to identify trustworthy media (Edelman Trust Barometer 2025). As misinformation becomes harder to identify, ensuring confidence in our content is essential. As publishers, we are custodians of the scholarly record, and trust sits at the heart of that role. We build it through editorial integrity and independence, transparent decision-making, and long-term accountability to the communities we serve.

This commitment is reflected in the feedback from the people who work with us every day: more than 80% of our authors and reviewers rated their experience with Springer Nature as good or excellent. These results matter because they reflect consistency and integrity over time, not short-term gains.

Our commitment to responsible publishing is reflected through our contribution to the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). Since 2015, we have published more than 1.4 million SDG-related articles and book chapters. By 2025, this research had been cited over 23 million times, that’s around 2.3 million citations a year, demonstrating how evidence underpins policy, funding and public debate.

Today, 62% of our SDG-related research was published open access in 2025. Openness does not mean compromise. Editorial independence, rigorous peer review and robust integrity checks remain unchanged, and acceptance rates continue to tighten, reflecting our commitment to quality as volumes grow.

Planet

Responsibility also means acknowledging our environmental impact and acting with transparency and ambition. As a publisher of climate and environmental research, we believe it is essential to align our own operations with the science we publish.

We have committed to achieving net zero emissions by 2040, with targets validated by the Science Based Targets initiative. Since 2019, we have reduced overall emissions by around 50% and are making good progress against our targets.

This progress reflects practical action across our operations and supply chain, including shifting from print to digital where possible, increasing our use of cleaner energy, and working closely with partners to reduce impact. Responsibility requires clear goals, transparent reporting and steady, measurable progress.

People

Just as importantly, responsibility means creating an inclusive and supportive workplace. We invest in learning, wellbeing and flexible ways of working because engaged people are fundamental to long-term success. Hundreds of colleagues are active in our 10 employee networks, which promote dialogue and understanding across a wide range of topics and help create a vibrant, inclusive working environment. For the third year running we have been recognised as a leading employer in Germany, USA and the UK.

We are committed to supporting the communities we work with, in part through a partnership-led programme of giving. From 2022–2025 we provided €3.5 million in funding to initiatives that expand access to research, education and support trusted science communication, amongst others. As part of our ten-year celebrations in 2025, 34 of our global locations came together to volunteer and donate to causes that matter locally. More than €110,000 was donated to staff-chosen organisations, supporting work in areas including health, education and food security. This was a powerful reminder that a responsible business is defined not only by what we deliver, but by how we give back. 

As we show in our 2025 Annual Report, responsibility is fundamental to our business and strategy. Over the past decade, we have expanded open research, strengthened integrity systems, and built platforms designed for transparency and resilience, helping to reinforce trust and confidence in our role as a publisher with the communities we work with. That is the responsibility trusted publishers carry, and one I am proud Springer Nature will continue to uphold in the decades ahead.

All data referenced in this blog is from our 2025 Annual Report, unless otherwise stated. 

Related Tags:

Collections: helping researchers working in emerging and trending areas get noticed

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue May 26 2026

Publishing in a developing field can feel challenging, especially when your research topic is so current that the perfect journal doesn’t exist yet. This blog explores how collections provide a flexible publishing option, helping you reach readers interested in new developments in emerging areas and connect with fellow experts in your area.

“Collections are really important for us because it's a way to offer researchers a home for their research, where we currently don't have the perfect journal for it. And oftentimes those are trending topics where it's just too soon to have a journal available on such a current or emerging topic.”


Daniel Korany, EVP Journals, Full Open Access Brands 

Collections bring together articles around a shared theme or research question. That means your work appears in a context that helps readers understand why it matters and how it connects to other developments in the field. If you work in fast-moving or less established areas, that added context can make it easier for the right audience to find and engage with your research.  

Here’s what that means in practice for you:

  • Create space for emerging topics. 
  • Give multidisciplinary research a clearer home. 
  • Make it easier for readers to discover related work in one place. 
  • Help early career researchers become more visible. 

Watch this short video featuring Springer Nature experts to hear how collections help create a home for fast-moving topics.

“We want to be able to react fast to trends in research, and collections are a great way of reacting faster than launching a journal.” 


Daniel Korany, EVP Journals, Full Open Access Brands

Why flexibility matters in fast-moving fields

Emerging research areas do not always fit neatly into traditional publishing structures. A flexible route matters because it lets the publishing format reflect how knowledge is developing. Instead of waiting for a field to become established enough to support a dedicated journal, you can contribute to a collection that captures the topic while it is still taking shape. 

This can be particularly useful when a topic is attracting growing attention but does not yet have a clear journal home. Collections help create a focal point for the field by bringing related work together in one place. That makes it easier for readers to follow developments and helps researchers contribute to the conversation while the area is still evolving.

  • They help define and spotlight growing areas of research. 
  • They create a focal point before a dedicated journal exists. 
  • They make it easier for readers to follow new developments. 
  • They let researchers contribute while a field is still taking shape. 

“Collections offer an excellent opportunity to ensure one’s research contributes directly to a specific, impactful conversation, reaching the very people who can act on it. It’s about getting the work in front of the right audience, not just the biggest one.”


Megha Rao, Research Fellow for the Thanzi Labwino (Better Health) project

Helping the right readers find your work

Visibility is not only about where your article is published. It is also about how easily people can find it, understand why it is relevant, and connect it to a wider topic. Collections help create that context by grouping related articles around emerging themes, making it easier for engaged readers to discover research they are already looking for. 

Collections are curated by topic experts and supported by Springer Nature’s editorial and research integrity processes, so researchers can benefit from visibility without compromising on trust.

As Petia Apostolova, Head of Collections at Springer Nature points out “We’ve seen the numbers to back this up, collection articles receive 31% more citations, 30% more downloads, and 63% higher Altmetric scores compared to articles published outside of collections.”

P_Publish with Impact_Blog Teaser Image © Springer Nature 2026

While every research journey is different, the principle is straightforward: when your work is easier to discover and connected to an active topic area, it has a better chance of reaching the right audience.

  • Readers can find your work more easily. 
  • Your article is connected to a clear topic area. 
  • Visibility is supported by trusted editorial processes. 
  • Your research can gain more attention from the right audience. 

If you’re interested in publishing your work in a collection, check out our dedicated Springer Nature collections website, where you can find interviews with guest editors, impact case studies, author success stories, and much more. 

Related Content

AI, research institutions and what comes next: Insights from a leading SN ERAC member

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon May 25 2026

As artificial intelligence (AI) transforms every part of research (how it’s done, reviewed, and governed), research institutions across Europe are working to understand what these changes mean for institutional policy, governance structures, and long‑term strategy. To explore what these shifts mean at an institutional level, we spoke with Dr. Carles Sierra, Director of the Artificial Intelligence Research Institute (IIIA_CSIC), and member of the Springer Nature European Research Advisory Council (ERAC), about his views on AI’s implications for the research ecosystem.

First, a word about ERAC. To help explore these (and other) issues, Springer Nature’s Research Advisory Councils (RACs) bring together leaders from across the global research ecosystem to explore these challenges. Within this network, ERAC looks at the pressures and opportunities facing European institutions as AI becomes an integral part of research workflows.

We wanted to talk to Dr. Sierra, because he brings a unique outlook on AI in research, as someone who is both an ERAC member as well as an academic AI researcher. With deep experience in both the foundations of AI and its real‑world implications for research and publishing, Carles offers research institutions a valuable perspective on how AI is reshaping science and where institutional leadership and preparation will matter most next.

Human agency in AI-supported research

Dr. Sierra’s role gives him a holistic view of AI in research, and in publishing. He notes that “AI will influence all phases of the research process from hypothesis generation to code generation, to simulation execution, to data collection, and analysis, and even to the writing of scientific papers.” 

From this perspective, Dr. Sierra sees a host of interrelated issues that research institutions need to actively address. The common thread tying these concerns together is the need for institutions to ensure that humans drive the AI, rather than allowing automated systems to shape research practices unchecked.

Essentially, AI should serve science and researchers and making sure that happens requires intentionally centring humans across all phases of the research cycle. Dr. Sierra says, “Human agency must remain at the centre of the process. Decisions should ultimately be taken by humans, and the outputs of AI systems must always be critically evaluated by scientists.”

But keeping humans in charge means that humans need to know how to be in charge. “It is therefore essential to educate researchers about both the possibilities and the limitations of these technologies.” Consequently:

  1. Researchers need to know how these models work
  2. Researchers and leaders need to be aware of model biases
  3. Researchers will need multiple perspectives, and only multidisciplinary teams can give those perspectives

Building AI literacy as an institutional capability

Dr. Sierra says, “Researchers need stronger education and training in AI if they are to adapt their methods… that in many cases have been followed for decades or even centuries… They need to develop at least a good understanding of how these algorithms work and how the AI systems have been trained. It is also important to recognise that some AI systems are not fully reliable and require strong human supervision. AI systems do not have agency, intentions, or moral responsibility.” 

While this applies to researchers at all career stages, institutions play a key role in deciding where, when, and how this education is embedded. For institutions, the best opportunity to build this capability is early, embedding AI literacy into training and development at the start of researchers’ careers. Dr. Sierra said, “Early-career researchers in all fields should acquire a solid understanding of artificial intelligence. It will soon be very difficult to imagine meaningful research in almost any discipline without some familiarity with AI tools and methods.”

Institutional governance and ethical AI leadership

Safeguarding human values in the development and deployment of AI models is increasingly an institutional responsibility. Key questions include: How do we continue to develop and train AI systems and models in ethical ways? How do we make certain we have policies to ensure ethical AI use? These questions actually form the core of Dr. Sierra’s own work, and from that perspective, he says, “We must continue investing not only in the application of AI but also in the science of AI itself… From a scientific perspective, we still need to improve the foundations of AI itself. Important challenges include reducing biases in training data, improving the reasoning capabilities of AI systems, and ensuring that increasingly autonomous systems behave in reliable and ethically acceptable ways.”

From a policy perspective, “Research leaders play a key role in promoting reflection on the responsible use of AI in science. This includes encouraging open discussion, establishing clear institution‑wide guidelines for researchers, investing in AI tools that can accelerate scientific progress, and maintaining close oversight of the ethical implications of these technologies.”

Why multidisciplinary collaboration matters more with AI

Training the models inevitably incorporates various biases into them; not only impacting social biases, but biases that could affect their scientific output. The researchers using these tools need to understand how these biases could affect the output they get from them, to recognise and correct for these biases. Doing this effectively will require institutions to enable collaboration across and between disciplines. Multidisciplinary teams will become more critical, and institutions will need to create the conditions that allow these teams to thrive. Dr. Sierra: “Perhaps the most important competence researchers will need in the future is the ability to work effectively in collaborative teams, combining different types of knowledge and technological expertise… Another important trend is the increasing importance of multidisciplinary teams. Complex scientific problems require collaboration across different areas of expertise, and the boundaries between disciplines are becoming less rigid.”

AI in scholarly publishing, peer review, and evaluation

There are also implications for scientific publishing, spanning everything from writing research to even new ways of publishing it, to research assessment, findability, accessibility, and more. Part of this can involve re-imagining the research article. Dr. Sierra has been collaborating with Springer Nature for several years on the possibility of something called “liquid publications, where scientific documents would have a dynamic digital life. Sections of a paper could be refined, recombined, or adapted for different audiences and purposes.” Well-trained AI could help make a vision like this a reality. 

Beyond that, AI can help lubricate many of the friction points in scientific publishing. Dr. Sierra said, “We discussed the possibility of using AI tools to assist in the assessment of research and how such tools might be integrated into publishers’ workflows. At the same time, we considered what kind of ethical guidelines should be established for the responsible use of AI in the publication process. Overall, there was a shared sense that the way we write, review, and evaluate scientific publications may need to be reconsidered quite urgently.”

Addressing these challenges requires sustained, strategic collaboration between research institutions and publishers, particularly around evaluation practices, incentives, and research integrity frameworks. Dr. Sierra again: “Publishers should listen carefully to the academic community, which is responsible for producing scientific knowledge and advancing research practices. They should observe which practices are emerging and which ones are proving successful. At the same time, publishers should pay attention to the ethical committees and governance structures within academic institutions. Conversely, research institutions also need to understand the pressures and incentives that shape authors’ behaviour, particularly in relation to evaluation and career progression.”

Springer Nature is already addressing some of this by implementing AI tools for research integrity; you can read more about those here.

What to watch next for AI and research support

We’re now at the point where AI’s risks and rewards have come closer, into sharper focus, but the picture is still not quite complete. And as regards AI and research, researchers, librarians, publishers, and funders are all contributing to completing that picture. All of these stakeholders are participating, and they’re all important. 

As research institutions rethink how they approach, use, and govern AI, Springer Nature continues to offer tools, insights, and guidance to support informed institutional decision‑making. You’ll see more perspectives on AI in scholarly communications, including last year’s Perspectives on AI in Scholarly Communications, here on The Link.

About Carles Sierra

P_Carles Sierra 140x140 © Springer Nature 2026

Carles Sierra is Director and Research Professor at the Artificial Intelligence Research Institute (IIIA‑CSIC), one of Europe’s leading centres for AI research. He is also an Adjunct Professor at Western Sydney University and a Fellow of EurAI and ELLIS. A prominent figure in multi‑agent systems, agreement technologies, and computational trust, he has authored hundreds of scientific publications, and his work has received 20,000+ citations. Sierra has held major leadership roles, including President of EurAI and Editor‑in‑Chief of the Journal of Autonomous Agents and Multiagent Systems. He has also chaired leading AI conferences such as AAMAS 2009, IJCAI 2011, and IJCAI 2017. His contributions have been recognised with top honours including the ACM/SIGAI Autonomous Agents Research Award and the IJCAI and EurAI Distinguished Service Awards. Sierra also leads AIHUB.CSIC, a network of 400+ AI researchers within CSIC, and works extensively on socially aligned and responsible AI.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Fighting Ebola and the hard‑won lessons of the 2014 outbreak for research support teams

T
The Link
By: undefined, Fri May 22 2026

What does it take for research systems to function effectively in a crisis? For academic institutions and global health organisations, the 2014 Ebola outbreak remains a defining example of how evidence, communication, and community trust must work together, often in real time. The firsthand experience of frontline clinicians continues to shape today’s research practices, information infrastructures, data needs, and preparedness strategies. 

We spoke with Dr. Marta Lado, an infectious disease specialist and Director Clinical Programs in Partners in Health, Sierra Leone about how she distilled these lessons into Ebola Virus Disease: A Manual for EVD Management. Her book captures the practical insights she and her colleagues gained while responding to the outbreak, offering guidance that extends well beyond Ebola to other emerging diseases. She shared with The Link the experiences that informed the manual and how she came to play a central role in the 2014 response.

New Content Item © Springer Nature 2026

In 2014, Dr. Marta Lado began what she thought was to be a 1-year sabbatical in Sierra Leone. But that was also the year of the Ebola outbreak that struck Sierra Leone, Liberia, and Guinea. As an infectious disease specialist, fighting that outbreak changed her 1-year sabbatical into a 10-year mission.

This experience became the basis of her book, Ebola Virus Disease: A Manual for EVD Management, in which she recounts the hard-won lessons from fighting one of the world’s deadliest viruses. For organisations supporting global health research, the manual demonstrates how lived experience can be translated into structured, shareable, and actionable knowledge during a global crisis.

Confronting fear and misinformation during the Ebola outbreak

Outbreaks of novel diseases, especially highly lethal ones, challenge communities, especially when the healthcare system is poorly funded. Fear and lack of information can make managing the situation difficult for public health authorities and healthcare providers. “There are many challenges when a new disease comes into a community, especially with a high mortality rate. There is a lot of reluctance, especially in countries where the healthcare system is not very well funded,” Dr. Lado says.

The absence of clear, trusted information exposes a critical challenge for research support teams: how to deliver reliable, usable evidence at speed, often before formal guidance is fully established.

This challenge reflects a broader issue: during crises, the effectiveness of research depends not only on the quality of evidence, but on how clearly and quickly it is communicated and supported institutionally. As explored previously, sustained investment in clear communication structures and institutional backing can significantly influence how research findings are understood, trusted, and acted upon during periods of uncertainty.

Early messaging described Ebola as untreatable and almost always fatal, creating panic and distrust. Restrictions on funerals and isolation deepened grief and suspicion among communities. “People saw others going to hospitals and never returning,” recalls Dr. Lado. This led to many hiding symptoms or simply avoiding care, thinking death was inevitable. 

The initial response focused on breaking the chain of transmission. That meant that every new infection required quarantine, which can be hard on both the patient and the patient’s family. “We had to make them understand isolation doesn’t mean abandonment,” Dr. Lado stressed.

Building trust through communication and community engagement 

In 2021, after the vaccine effective for the Zaire strain of Ebola was approved, trust grew and people started coming to get vaccinated. “We used ring vaccination, whenever we have a case of Ebola, we vaccinate all the ring contacts, household contacts and people from the community, almost everyone. People come voluntarily and it is a huge success. This means that people do engage more when they understand the disease.”  For organisations supporting research and public health policy, these experiences underline the importance of aligning evidence generation with communication and community engagement as part of research design.

Dr. Lado says that mistrust often stems from lack of information, past negative experiences, and fear of the unknown. In places like North Kivu, repeated outbreaks eventually led to better preparedness and community acceptance. Unless sensitisation and education happen alongside medical intervention, people may refuse vaccines, hide symptoms, and avoid treatment centres. 

Standard intervention like optimized supportive care: IV fluids, Oxygen therapy, treating co-infections, blood products when needed were simple to implement and managed to save countless lives. “People were able to return to their communities and explain the positive side of the experience. They could say ‘I was extremely sick, I was in a coma for a week, but they took care of me. There were always people around me dressed up like astronauts, but they did give me the medication I needed and took good care of me," Dr. Lado explains.

Dr. Lado also learned that even the best medical technology won’t work without patient and community trust, and good communication. These lessons have led to a rethinking of treatment centres and practices, resulting in new treatment centres often built separately from hospitals, and with transparency in mind. Transparency and communication also means that community leaders can come to learn about the procedures, and there is a respect for practices like dignified burials. 

Lessons in compassion: Balancing protocols with humanity

For Dr. Lado, the Ebola outbreak changed how medicine is understood and practiced in emergency settings. “It taught me that not all answers are already written down. Sometimes, we need to create them,” she explained. For novel situations, experts don’t already have the answers, but they have the tools, including the scientific method combined with past expertise, to find them. Conducting research during a humanitarian crisis was incredibly difficult, but Dr. Lado and her colleagues managed to do it progressively, building new knowledge as they responded and writing it down in her manual for Ebola virus disease management.

And remembering that every patient is a person, with hopes, and fears, and family is incredibly important. While protocols are essential, without empathy and clear communication, they can feel harsh, especially to families facing loss. Resistance to rules often comes from grief, not ignorance, and understanding the cultural and emotional contexts is vital.

“Of course, we all understand the rationality of what we need to do in times of a health crisis, but at the end of the day, it’s your son. Are you telling me I can’t hug him, feed him, or be with him? Or it’s your mother who died, and you’re not even allowed to say goodbye. That’s the kind of grief people were facing, and it’s not easy to accept.”

The experience reinforced that effective outbreak response must balance medical urgency with human dignity, ensuring that people feel seen, heard, and supported.

How Ebola transformed emergency response systems

Structured emergency response systems were built from scratch, with clear pillars such as case management, laboratory coordination, infection prevention and control, community sensitisation, and operations, each with designated responsibilities. They quickly became essential for managing outbreaks. “For me, this is the greatest achievement. Despite challenges in different areas, the planning and structure of our system is now effective and straightforward,” Dr. Lado added. Thanks to this foundation, Sierra Leone was able to respond better to subsequent health crises like Covid-19 and Mpox. 

Global cooperation and innovation after Ebola

In terms of the evolution of global health and outbreak response, Dr. Lado mentioned two important shifts. First, there’s a growing awareness that no country is isolated, and outbreaks in one region can quickly affect others, making international cooperation and preparedness essential. For organisations across the research and innovation ecosystem, this shift reinforces the need for cross-border data sharing, interoperable systems, and open access to validated research during emergencies.

Second, the lessons from Ebola helped shape better case management protocols, including early supportive care and the use of portable critical units. Along with effective vaccines and monoclonal antibody treatments for the Zaire strain, these developments had an impressive impact. “They can reduce the mortality from 80% to even 30% when combined with optimized supportive care. The problem is now in areas with other strain, like Sudan and Marburg,” Dr. Lado explained.

However, the experience with Zaire Ebola has laid the foundation for research and testing therapies during emergencies. This progress is now helping the development of vaccines and treatments for other strains of the virus, with hope for similar breakthroughs soon.

From crisis to innovation in Ebola treatment and research

A central takeaway from Dr. Lado’s work and her book is the importance of patient-centred care during outbreaks. Written at a time when no formal guidelines existed, the manual captures how frontline experience can be translated into practical, evidence‑based approaches. Its message remains highly relevant today: effective treatment places the patient at the centre, while ensuring that healthcare workers are equipped to deliver safe, high‑quality care, even in crisis conditions.

Dr. Lado’s reflections reveal a deep commitment to transforming global health through equity and compassion. “Healthcare should be a right, not a privilege. That’s the goal I’m working toward,” she explained. Her mission is to narrow the gap between healthcare systems in low‑ and high-income countries. “When people need care, we must find ways to make it available,” she added.

Today, her work extends beyond clinical practice to include policy development and health system strengthening. Drawing on lessons from Ebola and other diseases, she continues to advocate for resilient systems that can respond effectively across contexts. “At the end of the day, healthcare is healthcare. We need to build systems that work for everyone, whether we’re dealing with Ebola, HIV, or TB,” Dr. Lado said. Her aim is to ensure that no community is left behind when the next outbreak occurs.

For those supporting research planning and delivery, these lessons highlight the importance of prioritising equity and access early on, particularly in emergency‑driven research. 

9783319948546

Dr. Lado’s experiences are explored in greater detail in her book, Ebola Virus Disease: A Manual for EVD Management. Further perspectives on how knowledge has evolved over time are available in our virtual museum, When the Shelf Went Digital… 20 Years of Springer Nature eBooks.

WHO declares Ebola emergency

In line with Springer Nature’s established approach to supporting the sharing of research during public health emergencies, we are making a broad body of recent and relevant Ebola research freely available to support the global response to the current outbreak.

Click here to access free Ebola research.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

The authors’ advocates: how Springer journal editors help authors

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri May 22 2026

Editors and editorial board members (EBMs) for Springer journals come from the community of publishing researchers. And because they are, these journal editors typically act as advocates for article authors, working hard to get submissions reviewed in a timely fashion, helping improve the manuscripts, and mediating polarised reviewer opinions. And, a lot of this work takes place behind the scenes, largely invisible to most journal authors. So, it’s time we try to make some of these efforts more visible. Understanding what editors actually do — and what motivates them — can change the way authors approach the publishing process.

Revealing what journal editors do

Springer journal editors are volunteers (although some do receive modest stipends) whose main work — like their authors’ — is in research. Editors-in-Chief typically recruit editors and EMBs from among researchers whose work they know. This means that editors and EBMs are actively contributing research to their communities, so they’re familiar both with current research as well as with journals from the authors’ perspective. 

What these editors do, mainly, is working to facilitate publication of new research; not mainly to gate-keep. They do want to assure that published work is of high enough quality; but that’s to support ongoing work in the community, not simply to artificially keep things out.

These researchers volunteer their time to help shepherd research from, and for, their communities to publication. The 2,700 Springer journals tend to focus on specific discipline communities, so the work these editors do directly supports their own colleagues and communities; that’s one of the reasons why this work is so important to them

While this is one of the most highly valued tasks, editors find it the most challenging. Finding reviewers — especially the right reviewers — is hard, and getting harder as submission volume grows. 49% of Springer editors polled cited this as their biggest frustration (possibly even more than keeping reviewers prompt in completing their reviews). So, authors should know that the effort these editors invest behind the scenes is more than just significant.

How editors help improve articles

Editors do more than process peer review and accept or reject (although that process is both critical and difficult — see more below). They also actively work to help improve your article manuscript, to make it the best version of itself. Authors consistently describe editors’ input as transformative, and not just, “accept/reject/revise.” Across multiple years’ worth of author surveys, authors cite editorial advice as one of the most celebrated aspects of the publishing experience. They speak of editors who “spotted weak parts,” helped them “restructure and learn,” and demonstrated “great depth of information about the topic.” 

Reflecting on their experience working with the Journal on Audio, Speech, and Music Processing, Haixin Zhao and Nilesh Madhu said,
 

“Our experience with this paper was extremely positive, with reviewers, editor and us engaging in a meaningful discussion during the review process. This led to a much stronger paper, as a whole, and also gave us new insights into how we could extend this work in future.”


This role as “development editor” — actively improving manuscripts — is a role that Springer journal editors take particular pride in. Improving submission quality is the number one new responsibility they would choose to take on. 

This means that when a journal editor sends a manuscript back to the author for revision, it’s not a meaningless request to make the author’s life more complicated; it’s meant to improve the final article. And improving the article can profoundly benefit the author, because a better article will have more impact, and that impact redounds back to the research, and to the author. (It also supports the journal as well, which is a win-win-win.)

How editors help support early career and first-time authors

Springer journal editors, with their community focus, are especially supportive of first-time and early career authors. Feedback from these authors consistently highlights how essential, and helpful, the personalised, human editorial communication they get from journal editors is to them. Editors help these authors navigate the publishing process for the first time, patiently guiding them “step by step,” and answering even basic questions about the process. This leaves these new authors feeling genuinely supported at a high-stakes moment early in their careers. 

And editors find this work fulfilling (although they sometimes don’t feel recognised for it — hopefully blogs like this one help rectify that). 77% of Springer journal editors feel that their journal recognises the value that they add.

How to work with an editor, not just “through” them

Knowing that your editor is a deeply engaged peer, rather than an administrator, is only useful if you act on it. A few things are worth bearing in mind:
 

  • Respond to editorial feedback as a dialogue, not a verdict. Editors are not simply relaying reviewer comments — they’ve already filtered, interpreted, and often moderated those comments on your behalf. Their framing matters.
  • Be specific about what you need. Editors who go beyond the call of duty tend to do so when authors give them something to work with. If a section of your manuscript has a known weakness, name it. You may find the response is more substantive than you’d expect.
  • For early-career researchers especially, ask. The authors who describe their experience as formative are, almost universally, those who engaged. Questions that feel basic to ask are rarely basic to answer — and editors in this field have seen the full range.
  • Understand that timelines often reflect workload, not indifference. Finding reviewers is the single biggest frustration cited by editors across the portfolio—a constraint that shapes timelines in ways that have nothing to do with the quality of your submission.

Editors’ human connection 

When we talk about journals, peer review, and scholarly communications, something gets lost. Among the talk of submission portals and peer review pain points, the relationship between author and editor, which is one of the most genuinely human interactions in scholarly publishing, can get lost in the noise. 

It’s worth realising that the intrinsic reward of the work itself, which includes engaging with emerging science, shaping the field, feeling the respect of peers, is what sustains most editors. And it’s worth approaching the relationship accordingly.

If you’re preparing to submit, or navigating the process for the first time, our author resources cover every stage—from choosing the right journal to responding to reviewers. 

Find out more about how to find the Springer journal that might fit your work best, and how to put your next submission together.

Related Content

Publish your SDG research in a Springer Nature journal or collection

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri May 22 2026

Your research relating to the Sustainable Development Goals contributes to academic knowledge that can impact the important work of policymakers, practitioners, and communities working to address urgent global challenges. In this post, we discuss how publishing your research as an article or as part of a collection at Springer Nature can give your work extended reach and impact. We also include a checklist to support you in getting started.

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019

Publishing your work as a journal article or in a journal collection makes it available to a broad audience of academics, practitioners, and policymakers. For research relating to the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), delivering timely, focused, and credible insights can contribute to shaping SDG policy. 

The article format: Why it works so well for SDG research 

The concise structure of an article gives the content clarity that allows policymakers, nongovernmental organisations, and researchers to understand and apply your findings. Journal articles are published and indexed rapidly, making their knowledge and insights discoverable and available.  

Those who work practically on evolving issues like climate resilience, poverty alleviation, gender equality, or sustainable cities, can get support from this knowledge and stay responsive. The peer review process that articles undergo lend the research rigour and authority that are important to influence decisions and shape interventions.  

And when your work is published with a publisher that actively supports and champions the SDGs, its reach and relevance become even more meaningful. Springer Nature is committed to amplifying SDG articles’ visibility, strengthening its credibility, and ensuring it contributes to the broader global effort toward a more sustainable and equitable future. 

Why publish your SDG research in a Springer Nature journal or collection? 

Springer Nature is committed to supporting SDG-related research and amplifying it across disciplines and sectors. We offer one of the world’s broadest portfolios for SDG-related research, spanning thousands of journals and specialist collections. Through the Springer Nature SDG Programme, we support SDG-related research and amplify it across disciplines and sectors.  

With more than one million SDG relevant articles and chapters published since the SDGs were introduced in 2015, and over 17 million citations for its SDG content, Springer Nature journals and collections offer a home for high quality research designed to create real world impact. Your work gains visibility among global research communities as well as the policymakers and practitioners who rely on evidence to drive the Goals forward. 

Springer Nature data show that publishing in collections leads to 31% more citations, 30% more downloads, and 63% higher Altmetrics scores than articles published outside of a collection. 

Making impact with your SDG research, in academia and policy 

A special report from 2025, titled ‘From publication to policy,’ examined the influence of published research on policies linked to the SDGs, as a signal of real-world impact on internationally agreed priorities. It showed that SDG research is not only growing in volume but also demonstrates higher academic impact.

Fig2 - Average research impact © Springernature 2026
  

SDG articles received higher average citations, Altmetric scores (indicating attention), and full-text downloads than non-SDG articles. But for the SDGs, impact beyond academia is central. The report shows that academic research is cited in SDG-related policy more often than in wider policy. Research is being used in policy and practice to support evidence, justify recommendations, or shape policy directions.  

Our report shows that SDG research is being used well beyond academia, actively informing policy and realworld decisionmaking.” 
Nicola Jones, Director, Springer Nature SDG Programme 

For maximum reach for your SDG research, publish open access

The report also explored the influence of different publishing models, and found that publishing open access significantly enhances the societal impact of SDG-aligned research. By removing barriers to readership, your work becomes instantly accessible to policymakers, educators, nongovernmental organisations, and communities.  

Springer Nature supports the broadest possible dissemination of research central to sustainable development. Much of the SDG-related research published in Springer Nature is openly available for anyone to read. In 2025, 62% of Springer Nature’s SDG-related articles were published open access.  

How publishing in a collection can amplify your SDG research

A collection is a curated group of journal articles that focus on a specific theme or emerging topic, sometimes also known as a special issue. Springer Nature collections create a dynamic platform for authors working on similar research to share insights and discoveries. This affinity makes research more discoverable and relevant for related and interdisciplinary audiences. 

Many of these collections have an SDG-focus and engage with broad audiences that share an interest in the relevant SDGs. In 2025 alone, Springer Nature launched 2,180 SDG-related collections. 

Publishing in a collection is an effective way to increase the reach and relevance of your work, and to transform promising research into real-world impact. Curated by expert guest editors, SDG-focused collections bring together related research and make it easier for readers to discover and contextualise your article. The various Springer Nature collections that advance the SDGs highlight impactful research and attract readership. 

Just as importantly, publishing in a collection places your work within a carefully curated and trustworthy research environment, supported by expert editorial oversight and integrity safeguards that help uphold the quality, credibility, and relevance of the research it contains. That focus on quality is also reflected in author feedback: last year, 87% of authors were happy with their collections publishing experience

“Publishing in a collection has given this research much greater visibility, specifically because it showcases the real-world application in Malawi. This has acted as a powerful proof of concept. [...] Collections offer an excellent opportunity to ensure one’s research contributes directly to a specific, impactful conversation, reaching the very people who can act on it. It’s about getting the work in front of the right audience, not just the biggest one.” 
Megha Rao, Research Fellow for the Thanzi Labwino (Better Health) project 

Checklist: How to get started and publish your SDG article  

Identify which SDG(s) your work addresses.  

  • Use Springer Nature’s SDG Programme page and its hubs dedicated to each of the SDGs to explore and identify topics. 

Select journals or collections aligned with your discipline and SDG topic

  • Explore with the Journal Finder and consider SDG badges on journals that support the SDGs. 
  • On Springer Nature Link, use the SDG filter to refine your search and identify journals or calls for papers for relevant collections.

Review the aims, scope, editorial policies, and submission requirements of relevant journals

  • Check the collections and updates pages of journals of interest to explore calls for papers open to submissions.  
  • If you can’t find a call for papers relevant to your work, consider proposing an SDG-related collection to the journal’s editor-in-chief.

Consider publishing open access to expand the visibility, reach, and policy engagement of your work.  

 Highlight the SDG relevance of your article.  

  • Alongside the usual priorities when preparing your manuscript, such as clarity and methodological rigour, make the connection to the relevant SDG(s) explicit, and where appropriate include policy analyses and practical recommendations.

 Extend visibility post publication.

Springer Nature is committed to advancing progress on the SDGs by publishing high quality, impactful research and ensuring it reaches the audiences who can use it to drive change. Publish your SDG research in a Springer Nature journal or collection to support these efforts, and get our support to making your research count.  

Learn more about publishing in a Springer Nature journal or collection, including a step-by-step guide to walk you through the publication journey and information on open access publishing.  

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs,sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest! 

Building trust at scale: using AI to strengthen the scientific record

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Thu May 21 2026

Each year, more than three million scholarly articles are added to the global scientific record, shaping decisions across medicine, public policy, climate action, economics and technology. As research volumes grow and AI becomes embedded across writing, discovery and evaluation, a central question emerges: how can science scale without losing credibility while meeting the challenges of our time?  

For science, scale without trust is not progress. At Springer Nature, trust is not assumed — it is the outcome of deliberate technical and editorial choices about where automation belongs and where responsibility must remain human. 

Quality and integrity are design choices 

Scientific publishing is fundamentally a validation process. From millions of annual submissions, only a proportion becomes part of the permanent scholarly record. In 2025, we received 3.1 million submissions and published 539,000 primary research articles, showing increased selectivity compared with the previous year and a deliberate focus on rigour and quality, supported by improved systems – not automation. 

At Springer Nature, we are using AI to augment human judgement, not replace it. Editorial responsibility remains with people, while technology operates within defined and auditable boundaries. This is because we believe, used well, AI improves consistency and sharpens focus. It allows editors and reviewers to direct their expertise where it matters most, without compromising quality, relevance or ethics. Publishing, at its best, makes responsibility explicit through shared standards, transparent decisions and consistent expectations across the whole research cycle. 

This approach depends on coherence. Today, more than half of our 3,000 journals run on a single end-to-end publishing platform, helping integrity and accountability scale with output.  

AI that sharpens focus, not noise 

Applied consistently, AI helps direct attention where expertise matters most. In 2025 alone, our AI‑assists enabled 586,000 journal transfer recommendations, 427,000 reviewer suggestions, and 1.58 million uses of journal‑finding tools. 

The impact is practical: better matching of work, reduced reviewer burden and faster time to decision. Faster outcomes do not mean weaker standards — they mean less wasted effort across a growing system. For researchers, this delivers clarity and confidence rather than complexity, reduces friction across the process, and ultimately frees up time and capacity for what matters most: discovery. 

Creating AI‑ready knowledge responsibly 

We are focusing on this because high‑quality research does more than inform today’s debates. It shapes the data foundations on which future discovery — more and more AI‑enabled — will depend.  

As search and discovery increasingly rely on summarized and synthesized outputs, trust depends on traceability: clear links back to primary sources, evidence, and editorial context. High‑quality metadata, attribution, and structured content are therefore essential to preserve the distinction between evidence and inference. 

This is why investment matters. Since 2021, Springer Nature has invested €188 million in technology and talent, including in research integrity, supporting resilient infrastructure and the long‑term stewardship of the scientific record. 

Designing the future of trusted discovery 

We believe technology can accelerate research and strengthen trust at the same time. Doing so requires focus, system‑level coherence and a whole‑cycle view of how scientific knowledge is created, assessed and shared. 

For researchers, this reduces friction and frees time for new discoveries. For society, it means confidence in the evidence underpinning critical decisions. And for the future of science, it means progress built on dependable foundations. 

At Springer Nature, this is why we invest in people and systems, not shortcuts, and apply AI deliberately, with human judgement at the core. Trust at scale is not a constraint on innovation — it is what makes innovation meaningful. 

We will explore these themes further at TECH by Handelsblatt Europe 2026, examining how AI can speed up discovery while safeguarding trust and credibility in science. 


Related Tags:

Inclusion is in the details

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Wed May 20 2026

This Global Accessibility Awareness Day, UX Researcher and Generation Valuable mentee Gonzalo Gonzales shares his experience of the Valuable 500 initiative and the importance of small details when it comes to inclusion.

In December 2025, 500 organisations came together in Tokyo for the world’s first accountability summit on disability inclusion in business: SYNC25. As a mentee in Springer Nature’s Generation Valuable programme, I attended to share experiences with peers from across the Valuable 500: a global partnership that brings together companies to support disability inclusion. Generation Valuable is its reciprocal mentoring programme, pairing senior executives with disabled leaders.

Safety makes disclosure possible

My disclosure came a few months into my journey at Springer Nature. I had only received my diagnosis not long before joining, so I was still learning how to talk about it. I was also learning how to accept myself with this new part of me. The only reason I could be open that early was that the environment felt safe, and my manager was supportive.

Disability inclusion, by design

At the event, leaders spoke about disability inclusion as a strategy, by design, and about inclusion as something that shapes innovation and builds engagement. I went to SYNC25 to learn from different disabled and neurodivergent perspectives and share my experience as a neurodivergent mentee. I spoke about how my mentor at SN, Marc Spenlé, COO, helped me shape how I try to lead by putting authenticity at the centre of our relationship.

For me, mentorship is not magic. It is built on trust, listening, and clear objectives. It is also built around safety, which matters a lot to me as an autistic person.

From mentee to microphone

The day before I spoke at SYNC25, I barely enjoyed the beauty of Tokyo. I was too nervous about speaking in front of strangers on a very large, unfamiliar stage. My mentor, Marc, gave me three reminders that shaped my entire participation:

Be yourself.
Treat it as a learning experience.
Have fun, enjoy what you’re doing.

This advice fit our mentorship perfectly. Our relationship revolves around authenticity, mutual learning, and enjoying what we were experiencing. So, I used it. I scrawled my quite structured notes into a little notepad and got to the stage.

I shared part of my life story as a neurodivergent immigrant. For a long time, I assumed I felt “different” mainly because of cultural differences, but not completely; it was more undiagnosed autism and ADHD.

I also talked about how “be yourself” made me react defensively the first time I heard it during mentoring, as if it were easy. In my life, being myself often came with risk. I could be judged or excluded because of my social differences. So, like many neurodivergent people, I tend to mask to protect myself.

I still mask sometimes. I understand the cost, and I know not everyone understands neurodiversity. In contrast, I have started speaking up more, initiating conversations, and showing up as a whole person. I think it is easier to build safety when you build trust from the start.

Inclusion shows up in the small things

Networking is not fun for me. Being AuDHD (autism + ADHD), I crave connection, but I process social cues differently and I need more time to respond. Fast-paced situations can feel overwhelming.

But something small happened after my talk. People started approaching me. They shared personal stories, dinner, and their big projects for the future. I had never talked so casually with a CEO of a global firm before. I expected distance and formality. Instead, it was just a very human conversation.

He seemed genuinely moved by what I said, partly because he was the uncle of a young autistic child. He was kind, authentic, and open. That moment felt like a reflection of what I had just spoken about, and it mirrored the same safety, kindness, and respect I have been shown by my manager and my mentor.

Bringing it back to my day-to-day work

My day-to-day role is UX research in an educational digital product. I am not an accessibility specialist, and I am not an inclusion specialist. What I do understand much better now is how inclusion shows up in everyday work.

It shows up in who gets invited into conversations, whose perspectives carry more weight, and whether barriers are brushed aside as exceptions or treated as a sign that the way we do research is unintentionally excluding people.   

What I asked leaders to do

I closed my participation at SYNC25 by urging leaders not to be afraid to invest in disabled and neurodivergent talent. Disability is not a deficit. My disability has helped me shape how I lead in certain ways, but it is not my defining factor. I am a whole person. That is why I have recently taken on a mentoring role focused on neuroinclusion, to support leaders who want to reflect on how their interactions can include or exclude neurodivergent colleagues.

Treating people with respect, making accommodations ordinary tools for performance, and not excluding people unintentionally are the details that decide whether people feel safe enough to contribute fully.

One line I heard stayed with me: “Disclosure happens only when respect is guaranteed.” I have felt that respect from my manager and from so many of my colleagues at Springer Nature. It has shaped what I believe inclusion can look like, especially through mentorship, safety, and the details that help people thrive.

Related Tags:

China’s oncology breakthroughs: Key takeaways

T
The Link
By: undefined, Wed May 20 2026

Among the regulatory reforms China made in 2015 and 2020 were provisions for priority review and breakthrough therapy designations. Anti-cancer therapeutics, especially for deadly and to date difficult-to-treat cancers like pancreatic cancer, would clearly fall into the first category. And attacking these diseases with new biologics (monoclonal antibodies and other new technologies) would fall into the second. And when you have these breakthrough technologies applied to treating these cancers, you get a flowering of promising (and already on-the-market) anti-cancer therapies flowing out of China.

Monoclonal antibody technology, as well as other advanced biologic and biotechnology approaches (including using AI for drug discovery, see Insilico, specifically), allow these companies to focus on specific disease states. For example, cancers that have, so far, been intractable (like pancreatic cancer or multiple myeloma) where there’s opportunity to not only save lives (the first priority, obviously) but also commercial opportunity.  

AdisInsights recent report, Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers and Shakers looks in depth at the portfolios and pipelines of ten of China’s most innovative biotech and pharmaceutical companies, including:

  • Akeso, Inc.    
  • 3SBio 
  • Innovent Biologics                          
  • Legend Biotech 
  • Duality Biologics  
  • Lepu Biopharma
  • Insilico Medicine
  • Sinopharm
  • WuXi Biologics
  • Sciwind Biosciences                     

Many of these companies have already-approved or late-stage therapies for a variety of cancers. Below you’ll find a brief summary of some of these, but you’ll find much more detail in the full report.

Company

Therapy 

Indication 

Mechanism 

Trial Stage 

Akeso

Ivonescimab 

PD-L1+ NSCLC

Bispecific PD‑1/VEGF antibody (ADCC)

Phase III (HARMONi‑2)

3SBio

SSGJ‑707

Advanced NSCLC & solid tumors

Bispecific antibody

Phase II → Phase III

Innovent Biologics

Sintilimab

Multiple cancers

PD‑1 inhibitor

Approved (China)

Innovent Biologics

IBI3009

SCLC & neuroendocrine tumors

ADC with topo I inhibitor

Clinical (Australia)

Legend Biotech

CAR‑T products

NHL, ALL

Autologous CAR‑T cell therapy

Clinical-stage

Duality Biologics

BNT323

HER2+ breast cancer

ADC

Phase III success

Lepu Biopharma

MRG003, 007

Solid tumors

ADCs

IND (China)

Lepu Biopharma

MRG003

Nasopharyngeal carcinoma 

ADC

Clinical development

Novel technologies

As you see above, these companies have focused on newer biotechnology to develop these therapies, monoclonal and bispecific antibodies, in particular. But these companies’ approaches aren’t limited to that.  

Antibody technologies give these companies the ability to identify tumour targets, and to develop monoclonal and bispecific antibodies to go after those targets. This opens up whole approaches to treating cancers, like pancreatic cancer, that have, to date, been extremely hard to treat.

Some companies, like Insilico Medicine, are adding generative artificial intelligence (AI) to that approach.  

Insilico Medicine, for example, focuses on using AI to help in drug development. Insilico uses AI to create novel molecules with custom properties, to optimise existing compounds, and to enhance R&D efficiency. By analysing vast chemical and biological datasets, Insilico’s AI can identify potential drug candidates faster and more accurately than traditional approaches, reducing both development time and costs.

Commercialisation and market access

However, even developing therapies with these advanced technologies, and even being able to shepherd them through clinical trials to local approval, these China-based companies face challenges in bringing them to market around the world.  

That’s where partnerships with global pharmaceutical firms come in. Companies like Pfizer and Merck already have licensing deals to bring some of these breakthroughs to the global market. This combination of potential blockbusters that are either already approved and licensed or in late-stage trials in China, combined with the need to commercialise them globally presents rich deal-making opportunities for global companies.

Insights for oncology R&D teams

An important part of the future of cancer treatment, maybe even the eventual end of cancer, is taking place in China. With robust pipelines in late clinical trials based on advanced techniques and technologies, the ten companies profiled in the report represent both examples and opportunities for global oncology R&D teams.

Find out more in AdisInsights’ report, Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers and Shakers. 

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

High standards, real support: peer review at Discover

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed May 20 2026

Peer review is a defining part of publishing: a chance to have your work stress tested by experts and strengthened before it reaches the wider community. After months of developing your paper and choosing a journal with care, that review period can feel like a pause, but it’s also where valuable, field-specific feedback can help move your research forward. Read on to hear how other researchers found the peer review process at Discover, so you know what to expect.

For many early career researchers (ECRs), the phrase “rigorous peer review” is meant to signal quality, and when the process is clear and constructive, it can do exactly that. But it’s not always easy to know what to expect: who will review your work, what kind of feedback will you receive, and how will the timeline unfold. The best experiences pair high standards with practical, actionable guidance and transparent communication, so you can improve your manuscript with confidence and keep moving.

Discover journals are built on a different premise: peer review should be a positive and constructive experience that significantly bolsters your research and professional growth. As part of Springer Nature's portfolio of over 600 fully open access (OA) journals, the 70+ Discover titles were created to improve how peer review works for authors, ensuring academic rigour and a supportive environment define our authors’ experience.   

What does rigour mean at Discover?

We address traditional publishing barriers such as opaque timelines and prestige bias by redefining rigour as follows: 

  • Subject-specific expertise: we aim to find reviewers as closely matched as possible to your specialism, ensuring you get useful feedback 
  • Actionable guidance: we routinely ask reviewers to provide feedback is structured to give authors clear, practical steps for improvement 
  • Transparency: you can track your manuscript from submission through to decision, with real-time updates available in your author dashboard 
  • Support: you will benefit from Springer Nature's established publishing systems, which ensure your work meets global ethical standards, receives expert editorial oversight, and is indexed upon publication. 

Rigour is one of four commitments, alongside representation, rapid publication, and wide-reaching impact, which ensure we provide an efficient path to publication for diverse researchers.

Want to hear what this looks like in practice? Watch the video below where our authors share real experiences of constructive, confidence-building peer review.

The Discover author experience

Our commitment to rigour is best reflected by the researchers around the world who have published with us. Here is how they describe their experience with us: 

Dr. Sara Causevic, a postdoctoral fellow at Stockholm University, published research in Discover Conservation on the use of AI and earth observation to protect forests. She describes the peer review process as rigorous but purposeful.

“The peer process was rigorous, but it was also very constructive. It pushed us to strengthen different sections of our paper, which were critical to ensure that our paper was still original and novel. Communication from the editorial team was clear throughout, and the paper moved from submission to publication in three to four months.” 


Sara Causevic, Discover Conservation 

Constructive feedback, delivered on time

Rigorous feedback is essential, but it lands much better within a transparent and supportive environment. Enoch Leung, a researcher in inclusive education at McGill University, Canada, describes what sets Discover Education apart. For Enoch, the value wasn’t just in the speed, but in the tone of the exchange.

“We felt like we were all contributing to the success of our article, really incorporating the feedback and elevating the manuscript to the next level.” 


Enoch Leung, Discover Education 

For Vicky Xu, a research associate at the University of Sydney, Australia, Discover Psychology’s visual timeline was central to making the review process less intimidating.  

Relevant feedback, professional standards 

Dr. Nasrin Sultana, of Hajee Mohammad Danesh Science and Technology University, Bangladesh, needed a journal that offered relevant, high-quality review. After previous experiences where feedback felt disconnected from her research, she was pleased to find the Discover Electronics review committee came back with the specificity she was looking for. She adds, “Their comments were actually related to the work; it really helped me to improve the quality of my paper.” 

While Dr Sultana found the exact guidance she needed, Paul Awoyera, an associate professor at Prince Mohammed bin Fahd University, Saudi Arabia, also had a positive experience with the Discover Sustainability team. He described it as professional and efficient, and the work as “a collaborative experience rather than just a transactional one.” 

Good is good enough: why you shouldn’t wait for perfection

The researchers featured here share a consistent message for ECRs approaching peer review for the first time: do not avoid it. 

Sara Causevic is direct: peer review can sound harsh, but she advises embracing it regardless. Some of the greatest improvements to her paper came directly from reviewer feedback. “Don't fear the peer review process. Embrace it. It will improve your paper — and don't take it personally.” 

Enoch Leung notes that waiting to produce a perfect manuscript will mean missing the opportunity for a critical external assessment. He thinks that feedback is part of the process, not a verdict on it. Atique Ishrak Anik, at Chittagong University of Engineering and Technology, Bangladesh, gives the best advice for anyone who might be feeling unsure about submitting: “peer review is not a criticism. It is a way to improve your work.”

Evaluating a journal: what to look for

Peer review is difficult to evaluate from the outside. When choosing a journal, ask: 

  • Are reviewers matched precisely to your specialism? 
  • Is feedback structured and actionable, or just generic? 
  • Does the editorial team communicate clearly throughout the process, with defined timelines? 

Every Discover title strives to ensure the answer to each of these questions is a definitive yes. Qualified reviewers, constructive feedback, and transparent communication are how we operate. 

You’ve done the hard work. Rigorous peer review ensures that your good work is scrutinised by experts, improved by specific feedback, and supported by a process that keeps you informed throughout. 

That is the experience the researchers featured here had with Discover journals. And it is exactly what the series was designed to provide. This year also marks a milestone for the series: Discover PsychologyDiscover Education, and Discover Sustainability, among several others, are turning five—and the stories shared above by authors from these title shows how we’re actively bringing that author experience to life across the series. 

If you want rigorous review without the guesswork, explore the Discover journal series, where defined timelines and clear editorial communication are part of the process. 

Featured research 

Sara Causevic, Discover Conservation  
  DOI: https://doi.org/10.1007/s44353-024-00002-2

Enoch Leung, Discover Education  
  DOI: https://doi.org/10.1007/s44217-022-00016-9 

Nasrin Sultana, Discover Electronics 
  DOI: https://10.1007/s44291-024-00002-5 

Vicky Xu, Discover Psychology  
  DOI: https://doi.org/10.1007/s44202-023-00111-4 

Paul Awoyera, Discover Sustainability  
  DOI: https://doi.org/10.1007/s43621-024-00655-y 

Atique Ishrak Anik, Discover Civil Engineering  
  DOI: https://doi.org/10.1007/s44290-024-00018-6

Related Content

Bioinformatician Johannes Koester on embodying the spirit of open science

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed May 20 2026

This is the third blog post in a new series in which researchers share their experiences with open science practices, and reflect on the impact that sharing open data, code, and protocols can have.   

Johannes Köster is Professor for Bioinformatics and Computational Oncology at the Institute for AI and Medicine, University of Duisburg-Essen, Germany. As author of the open-source workflow management system, Snakemake, and founder of the Bioconda project, Johannes Köster has extensive experience with open science practices and publishing, with Nature Portfolio articles including Applying the FAIR Principles to computational workflows (Scientific Data), Neoadjuvant nivolumab with or without relatlimab in resectable non-small-cell lung cancer: a randomized phase 2 trial (Nature Medicine), and Bioconda: sustainable and comprehensive software distribution for the life sciences (Nature Methods).  

We asked Professor Köster to share his perspective as an advocate of data sharing and embracing open science in every area of research practice.

How did you first become interested in open science practices? 

I think it was early during my PhD thesis when my group was approached by another that did research in reproducibility and workflow management. They asked, ‘How does this apply to Bioinformatics, actually?’ At that time, we were using a very old but relevant tool to ensure reproducibility of our data analysis. 

Upon this request, we sat together and drafted ideas on how we could make this more ergonomic and convenient for bioinformaticians, such as workflow management, reproducibility, and so on. This is, of course, only a part of open science, but it was the part that drove me to the topic. We brainstormed a bit; I came up with an idea for a syntax and the others did too. I then kind of converged those three ideas into a prototype. That was Snakemake. 

I implemented that over a couple of days and refined it for about one year. Suddenly, it was so useful for the entire group. When we published it, it was immediately very useful for many others. This became quite important for my thesis. In principle, this is exactly what brought me to open science: reproducibility and thinking, ‘How can we actually make our data analysis more accessible to others?’ It’s not only about automation but about making this accessible and understandable. That is, for me, what open science is or should be about. 

What open science practices do you use? 

Whatever I'm involved in, I ensure we publish all the code and data whenever possible. With data, it sometimes depends. When we can, we rely entirely on open data that is also accessible to everybody. Sometimes, like for example in the Nature Medicine paper we published last year, it's not possible because it's German patient data and we are not allowed to just disclose it for everybody, but at least it's uploaded to a repository where you can ask for access. It's a bit more cumbersome than just hitting a button and automatically downloading everything, but this is the best we can do in such a case.  

Protocols are, for me, inside the code. We try to write code in a way that’s human readable, not just dumping some stuff that we run quickly for publication but making sure that it's also reusable and readable by others. This is, I think, an important aspect that is often not fully recognised by reviewers or journal editors. It’s nice that journals sometimes try to get people to publish those things along with the paper, which is already an improvement compared to before, but the quality of what is published matters as well, I think. For me, this is particularly important and a mission. 

What motivated you to adopt these practices?  

“It’s very important that code is seen as a primary research output.” 

  Johannes Köster, Institute for AI and Medicine, University of Duisburg-Essen, Germany 

I think the true value, especially of the stuff that comes as auxiliary to the actual manuscript, lies in two things. First of all, I hope that it makes it easier for readers and reviewers to judge whether the work was valid, both from a methods perspective and a statistical perspective. Doing a data analysis is much more than what you usually read in the methods section of a manuscript, like ‘we applied a t-test’ [a statistical test that compares the means of two samples]. Often, it’s not even specified whether it was one-sided or two-sided, or what the exact thresholds were. For a t-test it’s easy, but there are much more complex methods, and all the parameters matter — how you filter the data matters, and so on. That level of detail you only see in the code. Therefore, I think it’s very important that code is seen as a primary research output. 

The other aspect is not about transparency or judgement, but I think people are reinventing the wheel all the time. Not so much in methods papers but in papers that analyse some big dataset. All the code is rewritten constantly because it wasn’t done in a way where you can actually reuse it and apply it to new datasets. I think this is the second big value of this approach: ideally, each publication is made of building blocks that can be used by others as well, at least in part. This is what we should all aim for because then people can concentrate on the actual big questions and don’t have to deal with all these technical difficulties every time. 

Have you ever faced any particular challenges or barriers in undertaking open science practices?  

There are quite a few barriers or challenges. One I mentioned already, especially as somebody who wants to use open data analyses by others, which is people don't take enough care in publishing and documenting those parts properly. In part, I think this is a matter of culture on the principal investigator (PI) level because they don't care so much how their postdocs or PhD students publish those parts, as long as they can ‘tick the box’. 

Another is for open access. The pricing is not always reasonable. It might be justified, but it's causing discrepancies or imbalances between countries and research groups. There are groups that have a lot of funding, and for them it's much easier to publish high impact because they can easily afford it. Also, there are countries where it's much easier to afford than other countries. That causes science to be a hierarchical system. That's a bad side effect of open access, I think, because everybody wants to publish open access nowadays or most people. It means some people need to choose a journal by just the price, and that is not good. 

Is there a particular success story or example you’re proud of that illustrates the benefits of open science?  

For me, personally, it's definitely the story about Snakemake and Bioconda because they enabled a lot of things for me. First of all, having these tools available, being able to use them, and show others how to use them in unrelated publications made me quite well known in the community. This enabled a lot of career steps for me. For example, one year before the end of my PhD thesis, I was asked to be a postdoc in the lab of Shirley Liu in Harvard. I would never have thought of applying for a postdoc in Harvard if I had not been contacted by her. She only contacted me because she knew about my open science stuff, so that was a huge opener for me. Of course, by just having something you maintain for a long time, you get regular users and they tend to collaborate more with you. That opens a lot of doors. 

How do you advise early career researchers on open science best practices? 

“When thinking about the code you publish along with your open science, make sure you use quality control tools.” 

                                              Johannes Köster, Institute for AI and Medicine, University of Duisburg-Essen, Germany 

When thinking about the code you publish along with your open science, make sure you use quality control tools. There are lots of them available for virtually every programming language. The benefit is, of course, that maintainability improves and you less frequently run into issues, such as having a shortfall in your analysis that you don’t see until publication. 

Speaking about tooling, AI is also a tool one needs to mention. It can be very useful in terms of, let’s say, reviewing your code, but you have to be super careful with that. I would not use it in a generative way, especially not for science. You need to be very sure about every single method and parameter, and AI is not about being sure. What I’m really worried about is paper writing with AI. To me, writing a paper is the process of getting your research idea into a natural language. This process is part of the actual research because you need to think about everything again, and sometimes while doing that, you get new ideas or spot a mistake that you wouldn’t if you just prompted AI to write this paragraph for you. 

This process can be painful, of course, especially if you’re a beginner, but if we start to skip that, we will have a huge problem with the quality of research. It also applies to writing code, such as writing the analysis or engaging in the cognitive process of solving a problem in a scientific way. If you just delegate things like that to AI, we are lost, I think. With this I don’t want to say that AI is not a useful addition and assistance, but we should not let ourselves be seduced to use it as a shortcut. 

Are there any gaps in support or resources about open science you’d like to see addressed? 

Open science gives you a lot, but it's very hard to get recognition for that (apart from personal relationships or career steps) in terms of, let's say, metrics, for how successful you are as a researcher. In terms of software, even if it's a small, niche project, you ideally still need to maintain it for a very long time. This is often not recognised in academia. People look at citations and probably download counts, but even for niche projects, it can still be a huge benefit for the scientific community if the person who developed it maintains it for a long time. I think we need to find metrics we can have for that as well, like continuous maintenance and proper user support, and so on. 

Another gap relates to how we handle peer review. So far, reviews are a service that researchers do for others and for the journals, of course, because it wouldn't work if everybody just published and nobody reviewed. It makes total sense, but it also means that it's often anonymous and the review is not open science, although there are exceptions to that. I like this idea of the review being a publication in and of itself because that's also science, and this is something that deserves recognition. Why not make this as open as a research artefact and let others read the review? 

Currently, we think once the paper is published, the review process is over, and then we have just the authors and the readers. There's usually no direct feedback mechanism. That's something journals could think about adopting as well, allowing reviews by readers. A platform that already explores this direction is Octopus,where peer reviews get their own DOI, becoming a citable and public entity. 

What advice would you give to researchers considering adopting open science practices?  

“There's nothing better in training you as a scientist or a computer scientist than participating in open source and getting in contact with others.” 

            Johannes Köster, Institute for AI and Medicine, University of Duisburg-Essen, Germany 

When I teach students, I tell them all the time, think about open-source projects you could contribute to or come up with your own. "There's nothing better in training you as a scientist or a computer scientist than participating in open source and getting in contact with others."  

Regarding taking care of open science and reproducibility in the publication process, I would say just do it, even if your PI doesn't care. They will tell you, ‘We have to publish this paper next Friday,’ and then, of course, every PhD student will think, ‘Oh, I just need to get this done.’ In the end, it goes into review, but the reviewers want some additional work to be done or criticise a certain step of the analysis. Now they need to go back to the work they did in a rush and basically repeat it because they didn’t do it in a properly documented and automated way the first time. 

What I want to say is that it usually pays off if you spend this extra time thinking about being reproducible and open, in the sense that later on you have less work to do and can build upon your previous work. By doing that, you get automatic citations because if others use your code for their analysis, they have to cite you. I can definitely see from my own practices that it nearly always pays off in the end. 

Learn more about open science and sharing research data, code and protocols & methods openly
 


Johannes Koester © Springer Nature

Johannes Köster, PhD, Professor for Bioinformatics and Computational Oncology at the Institute for AI in Medicine, University of Duisburg-Essen, Germany

Johannes Köster is professor for Bioinformatics and Computational Oncology at the Institute for AI in Medicine, University of Duisburg-Essen, with a focus on algorithm engineering and data analysis. Johannes Köster studied computer science at the University of Dortmund, did his PhD at the TU Dortmund, and was a postdoc at the Dana Farber Cancer Institute, Harvard University and Centrum Wiskunde & Informatica (CWI). 

Johannes Köster is the author of the workflow management system Snakemake and the founder of the Bioconda project for sustainably distributing bioinformatics software as easily installable packages. He is also the author of the Rust-Bio library, and works in the field of Bayesian statistics in order to provide algorithms for analysis of high-throughput data while capturing and quantifying all known sources of uncertainty, thereby providing more reproducible predictions.


Related content:

  • Open science conversations: 
  1. Building trust through transparency: An open science conversation with Geir Kjetil Sandve 
  2. Open science, altruism and impact: An interview with clinical geneticist Zornitza Stark
  3. How to do science that matters: Computational biologist Casey S. Greene on purpose-driven open science practices 
  4. Open science before it had a name: An interview with molecular biologist Steven Henikoff 
  5. Building the infrastructure for open science: A conversation with Carole Goble 
  •  Best practices for transparency and reuse: 
  1. How to share your research protocols and methods openly 

  2. How to share your research code openly 

  • Supporting open science practices: 
  1. Why share your research data? 

  2. Why sharing protocols matters 

  3. Why sharing your code matters 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest

A practical guide to your Scientific Reports publishing options

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon May 18 2026

Publishing open access (OA) means your research is immediately available to anyone, anywhere, without subscription barriers. If you’re considering Scientific Reports, you might be wondering: how do researchers cover the article processing charge (APC)? The good news is that funding is often available, you just need to know where to look. This guide walks you through the most common options, so you can plan early and publish with confidence.

Scientific Reports is fully open access, by design

Scientific Reports is part of the Nature Portfolio and is built to be a trusted, rigorous home for scientifically sound research from across disciplines—open and accessible to the global research community. As a fully OA journal, every article is published open access as soon as it’s ready, supporting broad discoverability and access across institutions, sectors, and regions. 

That means you don’t need to decide whether to publish OA in Scientific Reports, OA is built in. What you do need is a clear plan for funding the APC. 

Quick clarity: the APC, the timing, and why “early” matters

Scientific Reports charges an APC, which is determined from the date your article is accepted. You can find the current APC (plus any applicable VAT/ local taxes), along with helpful resources, on Scientific Reports dedicated Open Access Fees and Funding page

Because funding routes can depend on eligibility checks, institutional approvals, or grant conditions, it’s worth exploring your options before submission (or at least early in the process), so there are no surprises later.

Your OA funding routes: the most common options

Most authors cover APCs through one (or a combination) of these routes: 

  1. Institutional open access agreements (often the easiest route) 
  2. Funder or grant support 
  3. Institutional OA funds (via your library or research office) 
  4. Waivers or discounts (when available) 
  5. Self-funding (as a last resort, or when required) 

Let’s unpack each one.

Route 1 (start here): Institutional open access agreements

Many universities and institutions have open access agreements with Springer Nature that can cover APCs fully or partially for eligible authors and eligible journals. 

Depending on your institution’s agreement, this support may look like: 

  • Full APC coverage (your institution pays 100%) 
  • A percentage discount (e.g., a fixed % off the list price) 
  • A fixed contribution (e.g., up to a set amount) 

These agreements are designed to reduce both the financial and administrative burden, and they’re usually integrated into the publishing workflow for the corresponding author. 

Tip: Even if you’ve never used OA funding before, you may already be covered, especially if your institution has a library-led OA team or participates in national/consortium arrangements.

If you’re in the US

The US landscape is mixed. Policies, OA budgets, and institutional approaches vary widely. That’s exactly why OA agreements can be such a helpful first check: if your university participates, an agreement can remove much of the friction (and uncertainty) around APC payment.

Route 2: Your research funder or grant provider

Many funders allow APCs as eligible costs, either within an existing grant budget or through a dedicated OA publishing allowance. 

What to check: 

  • Is OA publishing an allowable cost for your grant? 
  • Are there rules about the licence type (e.g., CC BY)? 
  • Do you need to acknowledge funding in a specific way? 
  • Does your funder require immediate OA (which Scientific Reports already provides)? 

If you’re unsure, your institution’s grants office or library OA team can often confirm the best route quickly.

Route 3: Your library’s OA fund (or local institutional support)

Even if you’re not covered by an OA agreement, your institution may have: 

  • central OA fund 
  • departmental publishing budget 
  • support for early-career researchers 
  • guidance on applying for institutional or charitable publication funds 

Libraries are often the best starting point here. Many have dedicated OA specialists who can: 

  • tell you what funding exists locally 
  • explain eligibility rules 
  • help you avoid delays later in the process 

Route 4: Waivers and discounts (when available) 

Springer Nature offers APC waivers and discounts for articles in fully open access journals in certain circumstances. 

Two key points to know up front: 

  1. Some waivers/discounts apply automatically (for example, based on the corresponding author’s location in the world’s lowest income countries). 
  2. Other waiver/discount requests are assessed case-by-case, and typically need to be requested at the point of manuscript submission (not during review, and not after acceptance). 

If you think you may need a waiver or discount, plan for this early so you can apply at the right moment in the workflow.

Route 5: Self-funding (when other routes aren’t available) 

Sometimes researchers pay APCs directly, especially when: 

  • there’s no agreement coverage 
  • the grant doesn’t allow publication costs 
  • local institutional funds are unavailable 
  • a time-sensitive publication decision needs a fast route 

If this is your situation, it can still help to speak to your library or department first. They may be able to suggest partial support, discounts, or alternative internal funding streams. 

Find your best route in 60 seconds: a simple checklist 

If you do nothing else, do this: 

  1. Check whether your institution has a Springer Nature OA agreement (and whether Scientific Reports is included). 
  2. Confirm you’re the corresponding author (agreement eligibility typically runs through the corresponding author). 
  3. Check your affiliations (if you have multiple, test the most relevant ones). 
  4. Check your funder rules (especially licence/compliance requirements). 
  5. If needed, talk to your library/OA office early (they can often resolve uncertainties fast). 

A few FAQs researchers often ask 

“What if I have multiple affiliations, or international co-authors?” 

Funding eligibility is commonly tied to the corresponding author’s affiliation and the institution’s agreement terms. If you have multiple affiliations, it can be worth checking each one and confirming which affiliation should be used for funding purposes. 

“Does funding affect peer review?” 

No. Funding checks and APC payment processes are separate from editorial decisions and peer review. 

“What if I realise too late that I needed a waiver?” 

Because waiver/discount requests typically need to be made at the point of submission, it’s worth flagging financial constraints early—before your manuscript progresses. 

Publishing OA shouldn’t be the barrier 

Open access is about making scientifically sound research available to the widest possible community, globally and immediately. And in many cases, the funding is already there. 

If you’re considering Scientific Reports, take a few minutes to explore the routes above. A quick check now can remove delays later and help you focus on what matters most: sharing your work. 

Next step: Start by checking your institutional OA agreement eligibility, and if you’re unsure, contact your library or OA office for guidance. 

Check your eligibility in minutes. Head to the Scientific Reports website to explore funding options, agreements, and next steps for submitting your research.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest!


Making research policy-ready: how institutions can support think tanks and SDG impact

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon May 18 2026

Connecting research to real‑world policy outcomes is becoming a strategic priority for institutions that support and disseminate scholarly knowledge. Institutions are increasingly expected to demonstrate how the research they fund, publish, or manage contributes to national and global priorities, including the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). Yet much of that impact depends on what happens after research is produced: how easily it can be found, interpreted, and applied by policy actors.

In The publication‑to‑policy connection: Supporting the real‑world impact of research, we explored how evidence moves through policy ecosystems, highlighting the critical role played by intermediary organisations in translating research into use. More recently, What can institutions learn from a systems approach to sustainability transformation? examined how integrated data, collaboration, and aligned financing are needed to move beyond policy influence towards coordinated SDG action.

Our 2025 SDG Impact Report identified one key group that consistently sits at the centre of this translation process: think tanks. These organisations are among the most active users of scholarly literature in the policy ecosystem, synthesising research into insights that governments and international agencies rely on. Understanding how they work, and what they need from research, provides institutions with a powerful lens on how to boost visibility, usability, and policy influence.

This case study follows that process in practice through the work of a leading think tank, adelphi, showing how evidence moves from research to policy and what institutions can do to ensure their research is policy‑ready and positioned for maximum real‑world SDG impact.

How the SDGs shape policy priorities and funding

André Müller is Senior Advisor in Water and Biodiversity at adelphi, a German think tank and public policy consultancy focused on climate, environment, and development.

For André, “the SDGs are the overarching framework for almost everything we do in development cooperation.” This framework also shapes how national priorities are set and funded: “Since the SDGs are the overarching framework guiding Official Development Assistance (ODA), government aid that promotes the economic development and welfare of developing countries, the topics represented in them are those that receive funding and are mainstreamed into national policies,” he explains.

His work focuses on sustainable water management, freshwater ecosystem conservation, and climate adaptation, often in transboundary governance projects. “SDG 6 (Clean Water and Sanitation) is definitely the most central to my work, but because water is such a cross-cutting issue, I often deal with other SDGs too, especially those related to biodiversity (SDG 15: Life on Land) and climate (SDG 13: Climate Action). Our work frequently analyses how solutions can deliver co-benefits across several sectors, SDGs, and other global policy frameworks.”

How think tanks use research every day

Our 2025 report found that think tanks, international organisations, and NGOs are the policy actors most likely to cite scholarly research. They also produce and publish their own studies, synthesising evidence into policy recommendations that are frequently cited by other types of policymakers. This points to a distinct role for these organisations as knowledge brokers, translating research in ways that can influence policymaking across multiple arenas.

For André, this science-to-policy-practice is simply part of the job: “This process is really our everyday business,” he explains. “We use primary research, synthesise the results, and communicate them to different audiences in ways that suit their needs, this might mean simplifying the language, focusing on specific findings, or turning research into actionable recommendations.”

Research underpins almost every aspect of his work. “I use research every day, my job wouldn’t be possible without it. I write studies, policy papers, and briefs, and we develop technical assessments for the state of rivers or wetlands, as well as management plans for river basins or give trainings on financing wetland protection.”

For research institutions, this has important implications: how research is accessed, discovered, and presented can directly shape its ability to inform policy. “All these activities depend on solid evidence and research,” explains André. “I also conduct research myself, generating new knowledge as a social scientist, for example, through expert interviews or focus groups. This applied research is always closely linked to practical challenges in the field.”

This intermediary role is particularly visible in Germany, where Ministries typically fund implementing agencies, which then contract think tanks and NGOs to deliver evidence-based inputs: “These agencies rarely deliver projects directly,” says André; “They contract think tanks like adelphi, or other organisations, to write policy briefs, develop strategies, or deliver capacity-building trainings.”

How evidence moves from research to policy

A recent example is a project André led for Germany’s main development agency, Deutsche Gesellschaft für Internationale Zusammenarbeit (GIZ) GmbH, in preparation for the United Nations Biodiversity Conference (COP 15) in Montreal and the United Nations 2023 Water Conference in New York, focused on strengthening the role of freshwater ecosystems in German development cooperation.

“We developed four factsheets, each focused-on SDG 6 (Clean Water and Sanitation) and its subgoals related to freshwater ecosystems, demonstrating links to other SDGs. We analysed biophysical connections, policy links, and co-benefits, and provided recommendations for strengthening these ties. We also produced a comprehensive policy paper exploring how German development actors can lead global efforts to better protect and restore freshwater ecosystems.”

Rather than producing new academic research alone, the emphasis was on translation, integration, and timing, ensuring that evidence entered policy discussions at moments when it could shape agendas. Thanks to sustained efforts like these, the Kunming-Montreal Global Biodiversity Framework now includes explicit goals and indicators for freshwater ecosystems previously underrepresented in global biodiversity frameworks.

Why timing matters in policy influence

The SDGs have become a powerful lens for understanding and addressing society’s most urgent challenges, including access to clean water. While these issues were active areas of research long before the SDGs were introduced in 2015, André’s experience is that the Goals have helped align evidence, funding, and policy priorities.

“NGOs and think tanks have worked hard to build the evidence base needed to raise the profile of freshwater ecosystems in these policies and their associated indicators.”

This alignment increases the demand for timely access to credible, interdisciplinary research across multiple SDGs and subject areas, particularly in the context of global cuts to development budgets: “It’s more important than ever to implement solutions that pay off for multiple SDGs. Nature-based solutions are a great example here: restoring peatlands supports biodiversity, maintains healthy water cycles, helps with drought resilience, stores carbon, and benefits local livelihoods such as fishing and hunting. There are many other freshwater-related solutions with win-wins for multiple SDGs.”

Why research impact in policy is difficult to measure

Despite the emphasis on evidence-based policymaking, André is candid about how difficult impact can be in practice: “There’s a lot of discussion and activity around policymaking, but from my experience, actually influencing policy through research is quite challenging. If you want your research to have a real impact on policy, it takes a lot of experience and a strong network to know how to make that happen.”

This raises important questions about how impact is tracked, and how it could be strengthened: “We should get better at tracking whether our work actually makes a difference, and at improving our strategies for making that impact happen.”

For institutions, this highlights that impact is not only about availability, but about usability and reach across different audiences. This echoes the UN’s call for science to contribute to sustainable development through action, not just theory. The UNESCO’s 2016 Science for Sustainable Development policy brief emphasised closer alignment between science and policy through partnerships across government, business, and civil society.

Where institutions can strengthen research-to-policy pathways

Our report identifies several ways that institutions can strengthen this research-to-policy pathway by supporting think tanks in their intermediary role:

Institutional repositories should consider:

  • Improving the accessibility of research through open access, making it easier for think tanks to engage with evidence, particularly in fast-moving policy contexts
  • Using SDG-aligned tagging, metadata, and thematic curation to help surface relevant research more effectively

Librarians and knowledge managers can support think tanks by:

  • Supporting research synthesis and review content, which is disproportionately cited in policy
  • Helping users navigate bodies of evidence that cut across disciplines and SDGs

Research offices and funders can improve policy relevance by:

  • Supporting outputs that are usable beyond academia, including synthesis and applied research
  • Encouraging research that is closely linked to practical challenges in the field

Across all institutions, creating opportunities for closer dialogue between researchers, think tanks, and policymakers is essential, for example through institutional partnerships, events, and programmes such as Science for a Sustainable Future.

What’s next for research impact in policy?

As the 2030 target for the Sustainable Development Goals approaches, the need for evidence-informed policymaking will only intensify. Governments, funders, and international organisations are under increasing pressure to demonstrate progress, making the effective use of research more important than ever.

This case study highlights how that process works in practice. Research does not move directly from publication to policy. Instead, it is interpreted, synthesised, and applied by intermediary organisations such as think tanks, which play a critical role in shaping how evidence is used in decision-making.

Think tanks will continue to play a central role in this ecosystem, but they cannot operate in isolation. Stronger collaboration between research institutions, think tanks, and policymakers will be essential to ensure that evidence is not only produced, but actively used to shape decisions.

For institutions, this highlights the importance of moving beyond access alone to ensure research is positioned, discovered, and applied to strengthen its contribution to evidence-informed SDG policy. Explore the full findings in our SDG Impact Report: From publications to policy.

About André Müller
P_André Müller_140x140

André Müller works as a Senior Advisor at adelphi, specialising in sustainable water resources management and biodiversity conservation. He sees an urgent need to drastically lower the growing pressures from human actions and a warming climate on water resources and the ecosystems that provide them. Thus, he dedicates his work to projects that spearhead a sustainable, climate-resilient water management approach.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts! 

How to reach engaged research audiences and increase impact through collections

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri May 15 2026

Publishing your research is only part of the story. What matters just as much is who finds it, and whether they engage with it. Real impact comes from reaching the right readers: those who will apply your findings, cite your work, and build on your research.

Read on to learn how Springer Nature collections help make sure your research doesn’t just get seen but reaches communities actively looking for work like yours. That’s where meaningful engagement, and long-term impact, begins.

Why engaged readers matter

It’s not just about how many people see your research, it’s about who engages with it and how.

There’s a clear difference between: 

  • Reach: being visible to a broad audience 
  • Meaningful engagement: being read, cited, shared, and applied

When your work reaches the right audience, you’re more likely to see: 

  • Higher citation potential from researchers working in your field 
  • New collaborations across disciplines and institutions 
  • Real-world impact, from influencing policy to shaping practice

For early-career researchers, this is especially critical. Building visibility among the right audiences helps establish your reputation, grow your network, and position your research within ongoing academic conversations. 

As highlighted in author stories, researchers who publish in collections often benefit from more targeted visibility and stronger downstream engagement like tangible interest from health ministries looking to put research into practice, WHO policy citations, and collaborative opportunities, because their work reaches readers already invested in the topic.

The challenge: reaching the right audience

Even high-quality research can struggle to find the right readers. 

That’s because: 

  • Research is increasingly fragmented across disciplines and subfields 
  • Publishing in a general context doesn’t guarantee targeted readership 
  • Readers are looking for relevance, not volume 

You might publish strong work, but if it’s not positioned alongside related research, it risks being overlooked by the very audience most likely to use and cite it.

This is a common challenge highlighted across author case studies, for example, researchers working on global health and policy shared how context and placement were key to ensuring their work reached policymakers and practitioners, not just academics.

How Springer Nature collections drive engagement

Springer Nature collections are designed to help your research connect with engaged, relevant audiences. They do this by:

Curating research around specific topics

Your work is grouped with related articles, making it easier for readers to discover and explore connected research.

Reaching targeted research communities

Collections are promoted to audiences most likely to engage, helping your work reach readers actively interested in your field. 

Using audience insight and segmentation

Distribution is informed by reader behaviour and interests, increasing relevance and discoverability. 

Aligning with active research conversations

Editorial curation ensures your work sits within ongoing discussions, not in isolation.

In practice, this means your research is more discoverable, more contextualised, and more likely to be used. 

As explored in “Inside the author experience: what collection authors say and what to expect,” authors consistently highlight improved visibility and audience alignment as key benefits of publishing in a collection.

Want to see how you can get your work in front of the right readers? This short video shows how collections help connect your research with engaged audiences.

What engaged readership looks like in practice

Engaged readership isn’t just a metric, it’s reflected in how your research is used. 

For example:

  • Researchers publishing on global challenges have seen their work reach policymakers and inform decision-making 
  • Early-career authors report greater confidence in their visibility when publishing within a collection 
  • Authors working in interdisciplinary areas benefit from cross-field discovery, connecting with audiences they might not otherwise reach

In one featured case, research on malaria control reached policy audiences more effectively thanks to targeted placement within a relevant collection, helping bridge the gap between research and real-world application. 

These examples show that when your research reaches the right audience, its impact extends far beyond publication.

How you can increase engagement (author tips)

If you want your research to connect with the right readers, there are practical steps you can take, before and after publication. 

Choose the right collection

Publishing in a collection aligned with your topic helps ensure your work sits alongside relevant research and reaches the right audience from the outset.

Write for discoverability

Use clear, accessible titles and abstracts that reflect how readers search for content. Avoid overly complex phrasing, clarity improves both search visibility and reader engagement.

Focus on why your research matters

Make it easy for readers to understand the significance of your work. Highlight the problem you’re addressing and its real-world relevance. 

Use consistent, relevant keywords 

Think about how your audience searches for content. Using consistent terminology improves indexing and helps your research surface in search and recommendation systems. 

Plan for post-publication visibility 

Consider how your research will be shared, through collections, networks, and broader promotion. Visibility doesn’t stop at publication. 

As many collection authors note, thinking about your audience early, rather than after publishing, can significantly increase engagement and impact. 

Focus on your audience early on 

If you want your research to do more than exist. If you want it to connect, influence, and resonate, you need to think beyond publication. Consider who will read it, how they’ll find it, and why it matters to them. 

Springer Nature collections are designed to support exactly that: helping your research reach the audiences who are most likely to engage with it and amplify its impact.

Explore the Springer Nature collections hub and find the right home for your research.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs,sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest! 

Trusted, readable, human: why researchers love Nature Briefing

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu May 14 2026

Most researchers don’t need another email. Between journal alerts, funding updates, institutional messages and general news, inboxes are already under pressure. Yet, for many readers around the world, Nature Briefing is a resource they deliberately make time to open. So, what makes it different?

Based on anonymised feedback from readers across disciplines, career stages and geographies, a clear picture emerges: Nature Briefing isn’t just another source of science news, it’s become a trusted daily ritual, helping researchers stay informed, curious and grounded in a fast‑moving and often overwhelming landscape. 

“Just wanted to drop a note to you saying that Nature Briefing is the only news I am opening these days. It’s a life saver. […] Even if the news isn’t great for science, it’s still a safe place to turn to. I always forward an article or two to family and friends.”

Anonymised reader 

Get Nature Briefing in your inbox

P_057RT_NATBRIEF_300x170 px © Springer Nature 2026

Join researchers worldwide who start their day with a trusted filter for the most important science stories, curated by Nature editors.

What you’ll get

  • A quick, readable daily roundup that saves you time 
  • Context and clarity, not just headlines 
  • Breadth across disciplines to spark new ideas

Free to sign upSign up here. 

Breadth that expands horizons, without overwhelming

Nature Briefing readers often work in highly specialised areas. But many say one of the newsletter’s strengths is helping them look beyond their own field. 

They value the range, from discoveries far outside their discipline to timely insights within it, and the sense of how science connects across topics, communities and real‑world events. Several readers mention using stories from the Briefing as conversation starters in lab meetings, teaching and everyday conversations. For them, the Briefing becomes a way to stay connected not just to science, but to how science fits into the world more broadly. 

For time‑constrained researchers, that balance is critical. As one long‑time reader put it, the Briefing offers “just enough to stay informed, without feeling overwhelmed”. 

“Like everyone, I receive Avogadro’s number of emails every day, many devoted to science news. Nature Briefing is my favorite, and I always look forward to reading it.”

Anonymous reader

Thoughtful summaries that respect the reader

Another recurring theme is respect for the reader’s intelligence. 

Many readers compare Nature Briefing favourably to newsletter formats that rely on headlines alone or links without explanation. They appreciate that the summaries are written with care, offering context, nuance and clarity, rather than oversimplification or hype. 

This approach builds trust. Reader’s mention feeling confident that what they are reading has been chosen and written thoughtfully, drawing from multiple sources and perspectives. Over time, that consistency becomes a reason to keep opening the email, even when everything else in the inbox remains unread.

A human tone that makes science more enjoyable

Content matters, but so does tone. 

Across the feedback, readers repeatedly mention the warmth and humanity of Nature Briefing. Gentle humour, personal sign‑offs and moments of delight stand out in a professional environment that can otherwise feel impersonal or relentless. 

For some readers, especially those later in their careers, this tone makes it “a little more fun to be an active scientist”. For others, it simply makes the reading experience more enjoyable, which is a reminder that science can inspire curiosity, wonder and joy. 

“It’s a great balance of insightful and entertaining, and gives me the info (and a fun break) that I’m looking for."

— Tyler Arbour, Biogeochemist, Center for Microbial Ecology and Technology, University of Ghent

A steady place in uncertain times

Several readers describe Nature Briefing as more than a source of information, it’s a steady presence. 

In times when science funding, public trust, or global events make the news feel heavy, readers value having a place to turn that feels calm, balanced and reliable. Even when the stories themselves are challenging, the Briefing is seen as a space that avoids unnecessary alarmism while still taking science seriously. 

For some, maintaining that connection to science has a deeply personal meaning, helping them stay engaged with a subject they’ve dedicated their lives to, or feel close to conversations they once shared with others. 

That sense of steadiness shows up in small habits: readers returning to the Briefing even when the news is difficult, because the framing feels calm, balanced and grounded in evidence, without switching off from the world. 

Shared, forwarded and talked about

Nature Briefing rarely stays in one inbox. 

Readers frequently mention forwarding articles to colleagues, students, friends and family. Some describe printing out quotes or screenshots, pinning them up in workspaces, or bringing stories into teaching and lab discussions. 

This pattern of sharing reflects something important: readers don’t just consume the Briefing, they use it to communicate science, spark curiosity and connect with others.

More than a newsletter

For many researchers, Nature Briefing has become: 

  • a trusted filter in a noisy information landscape 
  • a window into science beyond a single discipline  
  • a daily habit that fits into real working lives 
  • a small daily reminder of curiosity, discovery, and why the work matters

It’s not just about staying up to date. It’s about staying connected, to ideas, to science in the wider world, and to a community of people who care about understanding it. 

Get Nature Briefing in your inbox

Free, daily science news and perspectives curated by Nature editors. Sign up here.

Related Content

How to use social media to promote your book: a guide for authors

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed May 13 2026

Publishing a book is a major achievement — one that deserves visibility within and beyond your discipline. In today’s digital landscape, social media is one of the most effective ways to help your work reach an audience who will benefit from it most. With researchers increasingly active on platforms like LinkedIn, Facebook, and more. You have every reason to showcase your book there, too.

Our new guide: How to use social media to promote your Book, gets into the specifics of the most used platforms, and tips on choosing the right platform to engage with your research community. It's designed for all researchers, no matter what stage you are in your career. Whether you're just beginning to build your online presence or are already active on social platforms, this guide is for you. 

Why social media matters 

Social media was originally called social networking, and for research, that’s one of its superpowers. For research collaboration, it’s less about posting, re‑posting, and liking, and more about making connections that you can then take offline and into real life. But it makes finding connections — that you might not be able to make any other way — possible.  

You can find, follow, and join communities that share your research interests. You can also connect directly with readers and peers, including researchers in other countries. Which is why engaging regularly (even when you’re not discussing your book) makes it a uniquely powerful tool. 

Book Authors Social Media Guide Cover © Springer Nature

What’s inside the guide 

This new guide gives you quick, actionable steps and best practices for promoting your book, and instructions for each platform. 

Choosing the right platform 

One of the most useful sections of the guide walks through how to get started, offering tips on the primary social media platforms to help you decide which one(s) are right for promoting your book, including: 

  • LinkedIn for professional engagement and visual posts 
  • Platform X/Twitter for real‑time conversations and tagging researchers 
  • Instagram for visual content and guiding readers to book links directly through the stories feature 
  • WeChat Ideal for Chinese researchers, and is widely used for research‑related activities.  
  • Bluesky a newer platform where academic communities are beginning to grow 
  • Facebook for groups and institutional pages

It also offers practical instructions for posting on each platform, including how to add links, hashtags, and use images and visuals of your book.

Book promotion toolkit

When you publish your book with Springer Nature, you will receive a link to the toolkit to help you spread the word. So, you don’t need to design any promotional assets yourself.

In the guide, you’ll find details about the bespoke marketing assets provided in the toolkit. Including how to search for your book title, download the promotional flyer, social media images, and email signature banner. 

Ready to get started?

Promoting your book on social media isn’t only about reach — it’s about sparking interest, encouraging meaningful discussion, and helping the right readers discover your work. And the benefits don’t stop there. A strong online presence grows with you, boosting visibility for future projects and collaborations. 

Download the guide to explore platform-specific advice, best practices, and real examples to help you promote your book with confidence.

For more tips on using social media read these articles from our social media series. 

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs,sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest! 

Putting impact first: how long-term charitable partnerships help strengthen science and learning

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Tue May 12 2026

“SDG 17 is about partnership for the goals. And sort of the core principle, the core intuition, is that collaboration is needed to deal with complexity.” – Dr Kate Roll, UCL Institute for Innovation and Public Purpose. 

The importance of partnership for sustainable development was covered in a recent Working Scientist podcast series from Nature Careers called ‘How to save humanity in 17 goals’. The sustainable development goals, or SDGs, are an important focus for us at Springer Nature, when we consider the positive impact we can have in disseminating research that can enable global progress.  

Our most important contribution is through our activity as a publisher. However, we go beyond that to support the communities we serve more directly. This includes a regular and carefully considered programme of charitable donations, giving over €3.5 million across multiple projects from 2022-2025. One principle has guided Springer Nature’s charitable support over the past three years: impact matters most when it is sustained, thoughtful and rooted in partnership. 

While there have been occasions that called for specific responses or one-off donations, such as our efforts to help colleagues and partners following the devastating Hurricane Melissa in Jamaica, or our focused support for researchers impacted by the war in Ukraine, our approach has focused on backing initiatives that strengthen the wider research and learning ecosystem over time. This means asking not only where help is needed, but how it can contribute to lasting outcomes for communities connected to science, education and advancing knowledge.

Strengthening science communication and trust 

Public trust in science depends not just on the quality of research, but on how well it is communicated and understood. For that reason, a core focus of our charitable activity has been supporting organisations that improve science communication and public understanding of research. This includes backing the global network of science media centres and the Springer Nature Fellowship for Advancing Science Journalism in Africa and the Middle East, offered in collaboration with the Knight Science Journalism (KSJ) Program at MIT, now in its third year. 

These initiatives play an important role in helping reliable evidence reach broader audiences, tackling misinformation, and supporting informed decision-making. In a world where scientific expertise is increasingly contested, strengthening these channels is a vital part of sustaining trust in research. 

Widening participation in research and learning 

Another priority has been widening participation in education and research. 

Through a mix of global programmes and locally led initiatives, our support has aimed to help people engage with learning, develop skills, and contribute to research. We’re proud to have supported over 70 students and early career researchers to take their first steps in research careers via programmes such as In2Research in the UK, the Deutschlandstipendium in Germany, and the Innovation in Cancer Research programme in the US.  

Looking to younger students, around 300 primary school aged children have attended the Civitas Saturday School in our London offices for extra support with maths and English since 2014. The school, which runs every weekend of term time, aims to help local children who have been identified as working below their expected level to make extra progress and thrive.   

Partnerships that strengthen research ecosystems in lower-income countries are also a focus. We are particularly proud of our association with Research4Life, which this year celebrates its 25th anniversary of enabling access to research for those in low-income countries, and which has evolved to build capability to support researchers around the global to contribute as authors, peer reviewers and editors.   

Access to knowledge remains uneven, but sustained investment in participation and capacity-building helps create the conditions for more inclusive and resilient research systems.

A partnership-led and principled approach

Since 2021, Springer Nature’s charitable giving has been guided by a clear framework and consistent governance. This helps ensure our support is strategic, transparent and aligned with our purpose of advancing discovery, learning and progress. 

Working with established and trusted partners allows us to contribute expertise as well as financial support, and to focus on outcomes rather than visibility.  It also helps ensure that our charitable activity complements, rather than substitutes for or hinders, the responsibilities and efforts of others across the research ecosystem or further afield.

Looking ahead

The challenges facing science, education and society are not short-term, and neither are the solutions. As Springer Nature looks ahead, our charitable support will continue to prioritise long-term impact, trusted partnerships and initiatives that help knowledge to be discovered, trusted and used. 

By keeping impact at the centre, we aim to contribute in ways that matter to research communities and learners, today and in the years to come.

Related Tags:

A decade of open data: Progress, challenges, and how institutions can support

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue May 12 2026

For research organisations working to strengthen open science practices, the tenth anniversary of the FAIR principles is a timely milestone to take stock of what has changed and where more efforts are needed. As open data policies evolve, AI adoption accelerates, and expectations for data quality intensify, understanding researcher attitudes has never been more important.

The 2025 State of Open Data webinar brought together leading experts to discuss a decade of findings on researchers’ experience of, and attitudes towards, data sharing. In this blog, I explore key themes and persistent challenges to open data and highlight insights that can help institutions more effectively support meaningful and sustainable data sharing.

Closing the gap between Open Data ambition and everyday practice

The State of Open Data 2025 © Springer Nature

Open data is no longer an emerging idea or an aspirational principle. The 2025 State of Open Data report, ‘A decade of progress and challenges,’ analyses ten years of tracking researcher experience and attitudes towards data sharing. It shows that open data has moved from the margins of scholarly practice into the mainstream.

Indeed, awareness is high, policies are widespread, and infrastructure exists. But data sharing is still not routine for many researchers, between mandate fatigue and a lack of recognition.

To examine the tensions between the progress and persistent obstacles, the webinar convened experts contributing to the 2025 report. Their perspectives provide a focused assessment of how far the community has come and what is required next to close the gap between intent and implementation, particularly for organisations aiming to support equitable and sustainable data‑sharing practices.

Webinar panel:

  • Mark Hahnel, Vice President Open Research, Digital Science
  • Graham Smith, Director Research Data Innovation, Springer Nature
  • Brian Nosek, Co-founder and Executive Director, Center for Open Science; Professor of Psychology, University of Virginia (USA)
  • Hilary Hanahoe, Secretary General, Research Data Alliance (RDA)
  • Joy Owango, Founding Director, Training Centre in Communication (TCC Africa) (Kenya)
  • Chair: Ana Van Gulick, Head of Customer Engagement, Digital Science

“Open data has gone from novelty to mainstream… now everyone recognises that this is something that they need to wrestle with.”

- Brian Nosek, Co-founder and Executive Director, Center for Open Science; Professor of Psychology, University of Virginia

From awareness to infrastructure: The decade’s biggest shift

The State of Open Data survey has been running since 2016, capturing researchers’ relationships with data sharing. A decade on, it has impressive scale and global reach. Since its launch, the survey has gathered insights from over 43,000 researchers across 212 countries and territories, making it the longest-running longitudinal study on this topic. It also covers a wide range of institutional contexts, including universities, hospitals, industry, and government.

The webinar asked panellists how researchers’ perspectives on data sharing have evolved over this decade. One of the most significant changes is the steady rise in awareness of the FAIR principles of findability, accessibility, interoperability, and reusability. Mark Hahnel describes this as a genuine success story: “About 80% of researchers globally have heard of FAIR or are familiar with FAIR. ‘Never heard of FAIR’ has gone from around 60% to 20%.” Importantly, this shift cuts across most disciplines, even if adoption still varies.

The deeper shift, as identified by Joy Owango, is the move “from awareness to infrastructure”. Ten years ago, many researchers simply did not know what open data meant or where to share their data. Today, FAIR-aligned repositories, persistent identifiers, and institutional policies are far more common.

The conditions to move beyond counting datasets towards thinking about quality are already here, according to Hahnel. “No one can say, ‘I don’t know where to put my data’ anymore,” he says.

Researchers are often judged by publications and journal prestige, not by the accessibility or reusability of their data sets.”

- Joy Owango, Founding Director, Training Centre in Communication (TCC Africa)

Making data sharing routine: How organisations can support researchers

Awareness and infrastructure have improved so dramatically, but data sharing is still not routine. The problem is not principle, but practice, according to the webinar panel. What opportunities for organisations can we identify in the friction points researchers face that the panel discussed?

  1. Helping researchers start earlier can make all the difference: Brian Nosek describes a familiar scenario: Researchers confront data-sharing requirements at the point of publication, long after data collection has concluded. At that point, preparing data for sharing becomes a burden. The well-intentioned policies turn into bureaucratic obstacles rather than good research practice. Organisations can certainly support researchers in prioritising data sharing from the start and guiding them throughout the research process. This support can make sharing an essential part of communicating research rather than an afterthought.
  2. Supporting recognition for data sharing in research assessment: Deeper structural issues, particularly around incentives, also play a part. Researchers, Joy Owango notes, are still evaluated on publication and journal prestige, not on the accessibility or reusability of their data. Because of this lack of recognition in funding or promotion, data sharing remains a low priority even where infrastructure exists. Organisations can support the move towards broader recognition of data quality and openness in their own contexts, as well as more broadly in coordinated action and alignment across funders, publishers, and policy frameworks. By providing clear guidance, infrastructure, and training, they can help ensure data contributions are recognised as important research outputs.
  3. Capacity differences show where targeted support can have real impac: Hilary Hanahoe highlights the cost of implementing FAIR properly and the disparities this creates: “Some institutions can afford specialised staff to support researchers; others cannot.” Indeed, institutional capacity is uneven, and these gaps are often amplified by regional and regulatory constraints. Where limited capacities are identified, institutions can attempt to address this collaboratively, for instance using joint training programmes or shared guidance as pooled capacity across institutions in a consortium or a region. These adjustments could produce meaningful gains and create more equitable conditions across the research ecosystem. 

AI and open data: Accelerating discovery, amplifying risk

The webinar speakers are in agreement that AI will redefine both the value and the risks associated with open data, and I couldn’t agree more. Adoption of AI tools by researchers is accelerating rapidly, Mark Hahnel notes, and at this pace, AI-assisted research will soon be near-universal. This creates new opportunities to enhance discovery and efficiency, while also highlighting areas where data practices can continue to strengthen.

Because AI systems are based on the input they are given, Joy Owango warns of poor metadata, biases, and mislabelling that can be amplified at scale. Continued investment in robust data stewardship is therefore increasingly valuable, to ensure that data sets are well-documented, clearly structured, and accurately labelled.

AI can also unintentionally narrow the landscape of research by privileging data that is already machine-readable and well documented, according to Graham Smith. That bias risks marginalising disciplines, regions, and forms of knowledge that are harder to standardise. This raises important questions for research organisations about how AI may shape what is visible in global research, and how existing support mechanisms might be adapted over time to avoid further marginalising less structured forms of knowledge.

Looking ahead, Hilary Hanahoe declares that the open data community has a duty, not just an opportunity, to shape the governance of AI use in research. In this important role, the open data community can contribute frameworks that prioritise transparency, inclusivity, and responsible use, and ensure that AI strengthens the research ecosystem.

“Policy on its own isn’t going to do the job. We’re talking about behavioural change, cultural change.”

- Graham Smith, Director Research Data Innovation, Springer Nature

From sharing data to doing it well: How institutions can support better data sharing

The challenge for the next decade is the shift from compliance to quality, from volume to value. And policies and mandates along cannot drive sustainable, meaningful data sharing practices. To support continued and better adoption of data sharing, institutions must increasingly be involved in shaping how research itself is produced, shared, and reused in the age of AI. Not just through their policies, but the actual experience of their researchers and how usable their data is.

As we’ve seen, awareness of data sharing is at an all-time high. This allows institutions to move beyond advocacy to operationalisation. To encourage the necessary cultural change, enabling good practice and making it easier than bad practice is key. Institutions can promote this, where possible, through practical support for data sharing, encouragement of data sharing research practices and discourses, and formal or informal recognition.

In this transitional timepoint, institutional infrastructure, services, and training should aim to support researchers in producing data that is usable and trustworthy. Discipline-specific guidance could round your offerings for holistic data sharing support. This support would ideally be offered early in the research lifecycle as well as throughout, and paired with practical tools such as templates, storage, curation time, and technical support. With this institutional leadership and support, the academic community will continue moving into a future in which data is reusable and reproducible, and the ecosystem is inclusive and trustworthy.

Understanding the state of open data can empower institutions to support data sharing proactively and appropriately. Watch the full webinar for more details and in-depth exchanges.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Inside the author experience: what collection authors say and what to expect

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue May 12 2026

If you’re new to publishing in a collection, you shouldn’t have to guess what happens next, or where to go for help. In this post, we dig into the collections author journey and share what authors tell us in satisfaction feedback, alongside real author experiences, to show what outstanding support looks like in practice and what you can expect when you publish in a Springer Nature collection.

“Collections are really important for us because it's a way to offer researchers a home for their research, where we currently don't have the perfect journal for it. And oftentimes those are trending topics where it's just too soon to have a journal available on such a current or emerging topic.” 

Daniel Korany, EVP Journals, Full Open Access Brands

Prefer the highlights? Watch the short video below for a quick summary of how experts working on Springer Nature collections keep your submission moving so you can focus on your research, not admin.

Supporting you from start to finish 

Publishing can sometimes feel overwhelming. That is why we built the CMA team, a dedicated group of experts from academia, publishing, and research. This team oversees each collection from proposal through publication and beyond, fostering collaboration and ensuring every project is meaningful and impactful. This specialised team is a defining hallmark of Springer Nature. 

From the initial idea to the final publication, our collections authors receive ongoing support to navigate peer review, production, and post-publication engagement with confidence. Our experts are here to guide you through the entire process and provide resources to support you at every stage.  

Think of your collection article as a chapter in a growing book, with each contribution adding something new. Our goal is to make your publishing journey as smooth and rewarding as possible. 

“At the end of the day, we're more than just a publishing team. We're partners in supporting the research community. Because we come from research, academia, and publishing ourselves, we understand what really matters: visibility, quality, and impact.”

— Petia Apostolova, Head of Collections

Author satisfaction: what collections authors tell us

Your trust drives everything we do. We measure our success by your satisfaction, and your feedback helps us continue improving.  

Farah Aldabbagh, Research Analyst from Springer Nature’s Market Intelligence team, explains: “To track and monitor author satisfaction, we send all corresponding authors a survey after online publication of their article, asking them about the general overall satisfaction with the journal they published with, and then satisfaction with specific aspects of the publishing experience.”  

Our latest survey data shows that 83% of collection authors are happy with their experience; a strong result that reflects our ongoing commitment to delivering an exceptional author experience at every stage—from clear guidance and thoughtful editorial input to responsive communication and transparent updates throughout the publishing journey. 

That overall satisfaction is reflected in the detail, too. When we look at specific stages of the journey, authors consistently tell us what’s working. In 2025, more than 90% of authors rated the peer review process, editorial collaboration, communication, and production workflow highly, confirming that our dedicated teams deliver an outstanding author experience.  

So far this year, the results are tracking similarly: over 90% of authors felt peer review was useful in improving their manuscript, editor advice and comments were helpful, and their manuscript underwent an appropriate number of rounds, with reviewers that had a good understanding of their topic.

Authors also report a consistently strong service experience, including: 

  • enquiries being answered promptly 

  • helpful depth of information in responses 

  • and clear updates on your manuscript status throughout the process

You should be able to publish with complete confidence, knowing you’ll be supported to help your manuscript reach its highest potential. This feedback from collection authors shows that our commitment is real and reinforced through continuous feedback and improvement.

Collections author experiences: visibility, impact and outcomes

Publishing in a Springer Nature collection enhances the reach and real-world impact of an article, and Dr Alfred Eboh from Kogi State University can testify to this. When he published his study on addressing malaria through healthcare expenditures in a Springer Nature collection, his work was academically recognised and referenced in the WHO’s World malaria report 2024. In this Q&A blog, Dr Eboh shares his experience publishing in the collection and the gratification of seeing it inform global policy.

“Publishing in a dedicated Springer Nature Collection has increased my work’s visibility among health systems researchers and donors. It's also strengthened my CV by demonstrating engagement with a focused, high-impact journal early in my career.” 

— Dr Alfred Eboh, Department of Sociology, Kogi State University, Nigeria

Megha Rao and her co-authors wanted to publish their research on health resource allocation in Malawi where it will reach the very people who could implement their findings and suggestions. Learn more about Rao’s experience publishing in the collection, and subsequent inquiries from policy makers about adapting and implementing her work across Africa

“Publishing in the Collection has given this research much greater visibility, specifically because it showcases the real-world application in Malawi. This has acted as a powerful proof-of-concept.[…] Collections offer an excellent opportunity to ensure one’s research contributes directly to a specific, impactful conversation, reaching the very people who can act on it. It’s about getting the work in front of the right audience, not just the biggest one.” 

- Megha Rao, Research Fellow for the Thanzi Labwino (Better Health) project

For Dr. Federico Virga, publishing his work in a Springer Nature collection not only enhanced the visibility of his research but also propelled his career to new heights. He adds, “I’ve already had two citations. I was also contacted by a student from outside Europe who asked me if I have a PhD position, and some companies have also been in touch to suggest we might collaborate. I can’t go into details yet, but some want feedback or to see if I can help them to develop specific tools related to my field.” 

“Publishing to the collection really was a great opportunity for me; I was extremely surprised and happy about the visibility I could get in a short time.” 

— Dr. Federico Virga developed his research in Italy (University of Turin), Belgium (VIB-KU Leuven) and Spain (CNIO and CNIC)  

Why authors choose Springer Nature collections

When you choose a Springer Nature collection, you gain:

  • Expert guidance and dedicated support: We help you navigate publishing challenges with a dedicated team ready to support you. 

  • Faster publishing for timely impact: We launch collections quickly to help your work reach the right audience sooner. 

  • Research integrity and credibility: We uphold rigorous peer review standards, so your work is trusted and respected. 

  • Global connections: Collections connect you to a thriving community of researchers and guest editors in your field. 

  • Increased visibility: Articles published in collections receive more citations, downloads, and online attention, helping you build your academic reputation. 

  • Continuous improvement: We listen to your feedback and develop our author services, so your experience only gets better. 

Benefits of publishing in a Springer Nature collection

When an article is part of a collection, it is easier to discover, attracts more attention, and reaches a broader audience. The data proves it: authors publishing in Springer Nature Collections enjoy 31% more citations, 30% more downloads, and 62% higher Altmetric scores than articles outside collections.

For researchers, publishing in Springer Nature collections means greater visibility, stronger influence, and deeper connections within their field.

P_Publish with Impact_Blog Teaser Image © Springer Nature 2026

Your publishing partner: support beyond submission

We see ourselves as more than just a publisher; we are your partners. Your research deserves a home where it is prioritised, cherished, and amplified; and that is exactly what we offer. Petia sums it up well: “We care deeply about your research and your success. Our team is dedicated to ensuring that your work reaches its full potential.”

If you’re interested in publishing your work in a Springer Nature collection, check out our dedicated Springer Nature collections website, where you can find interviews with guest editors, impact case studies, author success stories, and much more.

Related Content

Building research visibility: Practical skills to help early-career researchers get started

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon May 11 2026

As an early-career researcher, you are producing work that matters. You are contributing new perspectives, asking new questions, and pushing knowledge forward. But once your work is written, submitted, or published, a familiar challenge often appears. How do you make sure the right people see it?

The visibility gap

Many early-career researchers describe a clear visibility gap. They want their research to be read, understood, and shared, but they are unsure how or where to begin. Publishing alone no longer guarantees attention, and yet the skills needed to communicate research effectively are rarely taught in a structured way.

Researchers frequently express uncertainty around communicating their findings beyond immediate field. Questions such as how to talk about research clearly, how to adapt messaging for different audiences, or which digital channels are worth using often go unanswered. At the same time, early career researchers are navigating publishing pressures, funding expectations, short‑term contracts, and heavy workloads. With so much to manage, research visibility can feel overwhelming or even optional.

This uncertainty does not reflect a lack of ambition or ability. It reflects a lack of practical guidance. Visibility is increasingly expected of researchers, but many are left to figure it out alone.

Research visibility and what it unlocks

When research visibility is approached thoughtfully, it can unlock far more than increased readership. Strong communication helps your work travel beyond traditional boundaries, opening up new professional and personal opportunities.

Clear and effective research communication can expand your reach by helping others grasp why your work matters. It can increase influence by making your ideas more accessible to researchers outside your immediate specialism, as well as to practitioners, policymakers, educators, and the wider public. Over time, this reach helps build recognition and establishes your expertise within your field.

Visibility also plays an important role in confidence. Seeing how your work is read, shared, and discussed helps you understand its real‑world relevance. This feedback can be motivating, especially at an early career stage when self‑doubt is common and progress can feel slow.

Professional opportunities often follow. Researchers who communicate their work clearly are better positioned when applying for funding, jobs, or fellowships. Visibility can lead to new collaborations by making your interests and expertise easier to find. It can also support teaching, outreach, and engagement activities that strengthen your academic profile.

Importantly, visibility does not mean self‑promotion for its own sake. It means helping your research reach the audiences it was always meant for.

Building researcher confidence through skills focused webinar

Recognising these challenges, a dedicated webinar titled “How to Promote Your Research” was designed with early career researchers in mind. The session was built as a researcher-first resource, focused on practical skills.

The webinar responds directly to the uncertainty many researchers feel about visibility and communication. Instead of abstract theory, it focuses on what research visibility actually looks like in practice today and which approaches can be applied immediately without adding unnecessary pressure.

The strong response to the session highlighted just how relevant this topic is. More than 560 researchers attended our last session live, demonstrating widespread interest in building confidence and capability around research communication. Throughout the session, participants asked thoughtful, practical questions that reflected real challenges they face in promoting their work.

One participant, postdoctoral researcher Maria Babakhanyan Stone, joined the webinar out of curiosity and a desire to build on her existing interest in science communication.

During her PhD, Maria invested significant effort in making astronomy accessible. She created YouTube explainer videos, developed visuals from her thesis figures, and ran workshops for learners of all ages. Communication had always been important to her, but the webinar introduced her to new ways of understanding how that work resonated.

When altmetrics were discussed, she decided to explore the publicly available download data for her PhD thesis at the University of Turku. What she found surprised her. Her astronomy thesis had been downloaded more frequently than others in the same topic area, topping usage rankings over a seven‑year period and ranking among the most downloaded astronomy theses of the past decade.

For Maria, this discovery revealed a hidden dimension of impact. It showed that her efforts to make science welcoming and engaging were reaching real readers. The numbers mattered, but what mattered more was the confirmation that her work was making a difference.

Her experience highlights how understanding visibility can strengthen confidence and reshape how researchers think about their contribution.

Join the next session

Building research visibility is not about changing who you are as a researcher. It is about learning how to help your work be seen, understood, and valued for what it already contributes.

If you are an early-career researcher who feels unsure about where to start with communication and visibility, the “How to Promote Your Research” webinar offers a practical and supportive next step. It is designed to help you develop skills that build confidence, expand reach, and open up new opportunities over time.

You can explore upcoming sessions and related resources here.

Related content

AI and Sustainability: the promise and peril of AI

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri May 8 2026

As the adoption of AI spreads, its potential to accelerate discovery and address global challenges is being tempered by mounting concerns over sustainability and equity. These questions took centre stage in early 2026, when The University of Tokyo and Springer Nature co-hosted the seventh SDG Symposium on AI and Sustainability—Opportunities and Challenges for a Sustainable Future

Artificial intelligence (AI) is now deeply entrenched within research and is widely anticipated to accelerate scientific discovery and help tackle global challenges. Yet there is another side to AI that cannot be ignored—immense consumption of electricity and water, dependence on scarce materials, and the reproduction, or even amplification, of existing inequalities. 

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019

At the SDG Symposium, leaders from academia, publishing, industry and international organisations looked at both AI’s costs and benefits from a variety of perspectives. They were joined by about 500 global participants.  

Emerging from the symposium was a clear recognition that ‘sustainable AI’ is far more than a matter of technical and logistical optimisation; rather, it is a broader challenge that compels us to reconsider ethics, social structures, institutions, and patterns of resource distribution. 

In his opening remarks, Teruo Fujii, President of The University of Tokyo, stressed that this challenge demands collaboration among diverse actors, including leaders in the spheres of technology, industry, academia and policy. 

Physical constraints on the digital realm 

When interacting with AI through smartphones and laptops, it is easy to imagine that its computations occur somewhere nebulous in ‘the cloud’. In reality, AI is profoundly physical. 

Magdalena Skipper, Editor-in-Chief of Nature and Chief Editorial Adviser for Nature Portfolio, presented stark data on the direct environmental burdens of AI’s rapid uptake. Searches using generative AI consume four to five times more energy than conventional web searches. Large data centres also require vast quantities of cooling water. In one reported case, a regional cluster of data centres consumed about 6% of the area’s monthly water supply. 

What may appear modest in global aggregate terms could pose a major threat to local communities. Skipper stressed the importance of making these hidden burdens visible, suggesting that just as light bulbs carry energy information such as wattage, AI chatbots might also display a comparable indicator. 

A further warning came from Tshilidzi Marwala, Rector of the United Nations University and an under-secretary-general of the United Nations. Manufacturing AI hardware requires rare earth elements, whose extraction imposes substantial environmental and social costs. Marwala challenged prevailing growth models that seek to maximise shareholder returns. He also cautioned that infinite growth cannot be achieved with finite resources. 

The recycling rate for rare earths is currently below 1%. Unless sustainability is embedded from the earliest stages of hardware design—as a third core metric alongside cost and performance—AI development may run up against the limits of the planetary environment. 

The semiconductor industry’s responsibility 

Positioned at the leading edge of the physical infrastructure underpinning AI, the semiconductor industry is not insulated from these concerns. Yuji Ogino, global head of sustainability at the semiconductor production equipment manufacturer Tokyo Electron, pointed to projections suggesting that surging demand for AI devices could drive the semiconductor market to US$1 trillion by 2030. 

AI’s progress has been propelled by the miniaturisation and increasing integration density of semiconductors, but this entails a steep rise in electricity consumption of data centres, along with a corresponding rise in carbon-dioxide emissions. Technological advances must come with a transition in data-centre energy sources from fossil fuels to low-carbon alternatives, Ogino argued. 

In his view, ‘systemic governance’ requires simultaneous, integrated engagement with energy management and the environment, alongside ethics and human rights. In other words, governance cannot lag behind technological innovation. 

Elite capture or inclusive transformation? 

Another central theme? Fairness and equity, specifically, inclusion. Marwala noted that 80% of AI investment is concentrated in the United States and China. Left unchecked, such concentration risks expanding the gap between the advantaged and disadvantaged. 

Ayyoob Sharifi, Professor in sustainability at Hiroshima University, explored both the promise and the peril of AI in smart-city development. Sharifi urged society to move beyond a narrowly technical imagination. The essential question, he argued, is not simply whether something can improve efficiency, but whether it advances justice and sustainability. 

Interlocking SDG targets 

The 17 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) of the United Nations are interdependent. Xin Zhou, Director of the AI and New Frontier Group at the Institute for Global Environmental Strategies, highlighted the synergies and trade-offs involved. For example, progress in decarbonization (Goal 13) can yield spillover benefits for clean energy (Goal 7) and health (Goal 3); however, expansion of renewable energy may also compete with food systems or land use. 

Zhou expressed concern that policymaking too often remains siloed and argued that this is precisely where AI’s deeper value may lie. It could help visualise the complex interdependencies among water, energy and food systems, update risk maps in real time and support integrated policy decisions. 

But AI will not automatically repair fragmentation; it could just as easily deepen it. Whether AI accelerates sustainability or entrenches inequality and division, Zhou argued, will ultimately depend on governance. 

Physical AI and dialogue with society 

The symposium also considered the challenges posed by physical AI—AI moving beyond digital systems and into real-world space. Hironobu Takagi, Executive Director of the science museum Miraikan and senior researcher at IBM Research–Tokyo, highlighted the social dimensions of such a transition. 

Here, science communication is crucial. Social implementation depends on how sighted participants interact with the robot in demonstration trials and help co-create social rules needed for its use. 

From carbon reduction to social design 

The panel discussion broadened the debate. The moderator, Hiromi Yokoyama, Professor at the Kavli Institute for the Physics and Mathematics of the Universe at The University of Tokyo, reframed the scale of the problem. Sustainable AI, she argued, is not merely about reducing carbon footprints; more fundamentally, it concerns how societies design the social, economic and governance systems in which AI is embedded. 

In practice, the primary beneficiaries of AI often differ from those who bear its costs—whether in the form of depleted water and electricity supplies, or the broader social burdens of intensified surveillance. These asymmetries are unevenly distributed across both geography and generations. 

Regulation cannot rest with a single actor, the panel agreed. Rather, it requires a multilayered approach spanning the international community, nation states and industry. Yet it also acknowledged sobering realities: regulatory evasion through loopholes, and unavoidable disparities in AI performance for languages and populations that remain poorly represented in data. Future AI systems, the discussion suggested, should disclose such limitations as explicitly as the side effects of drugs are disclosed. 

A future built on inclusive participation 

Perhaps the clearest message was that AI development suffers from a profound lack of transparency, accountability and cross-border, multilevel cooperation. Marwala argued that the overwhelming underrepresentation of Global South languages and cultures in AI training data was an ethical failure. 

Addressing this challenge from the perspective of scholarly publishing, Antoine Bocquet, Managing Director of Springer Nature Japan, pointed to another structural imbalance: the unequal distribution of knowledge that informs policymaking. Springer Nature’s analysis, he noted, found that 78% of the research cited in policy documents originates from authors in the Global North, revealing a persistent geographical asymmetry in whose knowledge counts. 

Kensuke Fukushi, Director of the Institute for Future Initiatives at The University of Tokyo, closed the symposium by emphasizing the value of academic collaboration as the foundation for dialogue and shared rule-making in an increasingly fragmented world. In a divided world, he suggested, scholarly collaboration is essential. 

The road to sustainable AI will not be smooth. A system in which the benefits of AI are monopolized by the powerful and by a limited number of advanced, affluent countries, while environmental and social burdens are displaced onto future generations and vulnerable regions, demands correction. 

The central question is whether AI can be transformed from something that intensifies environmental strain and inequality into an infrastructure that supports a sustainable society. The answer lies not within algorithms alone, but in the wisdom and governance of the people who design, use, regulate and learn to live alongside them. 

Discover more from our SDG programme — featuring events, blogs and publications on sustainability and research.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs,sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest! 

How authors found the right fit with Discover: a publishing home for every researcher

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu May 7 2026

As a researcher, you’ve probably wondered whether your work is the right fit for a particular journal, or whether the journal is the right fit for you. Maybe your topic is niche. Maybe your institution doesn’t carry the kind of prestige that opens doors, or your methods or topic come from different disciplines. These doubts are understandable. Many journals favour research from well-funded settings, established institutions, and a narrow band of topics. That leaves a lot of unpublished research.

With more than 70 titles, the Discover journal series was created in response to this. The series is an open access (OA) imprint within Springer Nature’s portfolio of over 600 fully OA journals, one of the largest OA portfolios in the world.

What does representation mean at Discover?

For Discover journals, representation means one thing: all good research deserves to be published, on its merits alone. In practice, this means your paper won’t be screened out because of your research area, a regional focus, or if your approach crosses subject boundaries.

For early career researchers (ECRs), this is reassuring. Many researchers will recognise that sense of doubt when submitting work: Is my article relevant or novel enough? Discover journals embed representation through:

  • broad aims and scope that welcome interdisciplinary research and non-traditional article types
  • a commitment to publishing valid work, not on its perceived novelty or impact but solely on its own merits
  • OA publishing under a Creative Commons licence, free to read, share and reuse
  • financial support through institutional agreements and article processing charge (APC) waivers, so that who can publish isn’t determined by who can afford to

Our mission at Springer Nature is to facilitate inclusion. We believe that “research progress depends on the inclusion of diverse perspectives, and the best research emerges when researchers from all backgrounds are empowered to contribute fully.” Discover journals are designed to deliver on this policy.

Watch this author interview compilation video to hear researchers from different disciplines, locations, and career stages share how publishing in Discover journals helped them reach the right audience for their interdisciplinary and emerging research.


OA and community reach

For Atique Ishrak Anik and Vicky Xu, OA wasn’t a publishing preference. It was the point of publishing. Both chose Discover journals because their research was written for specific communities, and those communities needed to be able to read it.

Atique Ishrak Anik is a civil engineer and researcher at Chittagong University of Engineering and Technology, Bangladesh. He leads a multi-disciplinary team that covers structural engineering, environmental research, and social science. His focus is on developing sustainable alternatives to high-emission building materials and practical housing solutions for people living in low- and middle-income country contexts.

Anik chose Discover Civil Engineering because its OA model ensures his work reaches the researchers and practitioners who need it most. For him, publishing OA isn't a secondary consideration but the foundation of his work; without it, essential findings would be locked behind expensive subscription barriers.

“We want to publish our study to a wide global area, without any subscription barriers. That's why we think Discover Civil Engineering is a good home for our work.”

— Atique Ishrak Anik, Discover Civil Engineering

Vicky Xu is Research Associate at the University of Sydney and a clinical psychology registrar. She designed a research project on emotion regulation. When it came to publishing their findings, her team chose Discover Psychology—now celebrating its 5th anniversary—for its OA model and broad scope, spanning clinical, cognitive, organisational, and social psychology. Their paper attracted media interest, and a plain-language version was subsequently published, bringing the findings directly to the public.

“It was really important to us that our findings would have the biggest reach.”

— Vicky Xu, Discover Psychology

Diverse teams, disciplines, and geographies

Representation is evident in who is producing research and where it originates. Discover journals publish a varied mix of researchers representing different disciplines, countries, and career stages, including the four researchers featured below.

Ayesha Nehvi published her first research paper, analysing why psychology students avoid certain specialisms, while studying at the University of Limerick, Ireland. Discover Psychology provided an APC waiver that allowed the student-focused study to become OA, ensuring the target community could access the research.

Dr. Sara Causevic, a postdoctoral fellow at Stockholm University, Sweden, is a public health researcher. A paper she co-authored on AI and forest protection took her outside her usual field and brought together colleagues from climate finance and remote sensing technology. The paper was published in Discover Conservation.

Dr. Paul Awoyera, an associate professor of civil engineering at Prince Mohammed bin Fahd University, Saudi Arabia, is developing alternative construction materials that reduce energy consumption and carbon emissions in buildings. Dr Awoyera chose Discover Sustainability because its OA model ensures the findings reach not only researchers but the engineers who can act on them.

Enoch Leung, a student and course instructor at McGill University, Canada, leads an interdisciplinary team researching inclusive education and support for LGBTQ+ youth in schools. The team chose Discover Education (also celebrating its fifth anniversary this year) for its commitment to equity and its reach across education and psychology. For Leung, open access was essential; the findings had to reach the educators and counsellors working with students, as well as academics.

“Research done for the community, by the community.”

— Vicky Xu, Discover Psychology

Choosing a journal: why representation matters

Choosing where to publish is an important task. To get it right, ask yourself the following questions:

  • Does the journal welcome research across disciplines and subjects, including interdisciplinary and applied work?
  • Are the editorial board and published author lists geographically and demographically diverse?
  • Is the journal fully OA, with potential APC coverage or funding options available, if required?

Discover journals can answer yes to all three. To see how this fits into Springer Nature’s broader commitment to global inclusion, visit our Global Inclusion in Research Publishing web page for practical tools and resources.

Being representative isn’t an afterthought at Springer Nature. It affects careers and knowledge alike, and prioritising inclusion helps ensure good work doesn’t go unpublished or unread because of where it came from or who could afford to access it.

Whatever your field, your background, or your career stage, we think your work deserves a trusted home. Explore the Discovery journal series and consider us for your next submission.

Featured research

Related Content

Research4Life turns 25

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Wed May 6 2026

In celebration of Research4life's 25th anniversary, partners from across the scholarly communications ecosystem are reflecting on the partnership’s impact and future direction. This interview originally appeared on the Research4Life website and has been republished here with permission.

This year marks 25 years since the launch of Research4Life, an initiative that has reshaped access to scholarly knowledge for researchers, clinicians and policymakers in low and lower-middle income countries. As a member of the Executive Council of Research4Life representing Springer Nature, this anniversary offers a moment to reflect on what’s been achieved over more than two decades and what lies ahead.

Research4Life emerged at a time when digital access to journals was still in its infancy. The idea that competing publishers could collectively make peer reviewed literature freely available in lower income countries was unprecedented. For Nature Publishing Group and Springer – who would later come together to form Springer Nature – the collective motivation was clear. If research is to deliver global benefit, it must be accessible and inclusive.

At Springer Nature, we commit our full journal portfolio to the initiative. Through Research4Life, institutions in eligible countries can access journal content across all disciplines, from health and agriculture to environmental science, engineering and the social sciences. There is a close alignment, for us, with our broader support for the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), where access to high-quality research evidence can underpin progress across areas such as health, climate action, food systems and sustainable development more broadly.

Since 2000, global research output – and the modes of publishing – have grown dramatically. Around the turn of the millennium, when Research4Life was founded, fewer than two million scholarly articles were published each year worldwide, according to data from the US National Science Foundation (NSF). Today, that figure exceeds five million. Open access (OA) has transformed how research is shared and Springer Nature is proud that more than half of our primary research articles are today published fully OA. However, Research4Life helps ensure the widest research community can engage with the full breadth of the scholarly record as global research output continues to rise.

Over time, Research4Life has evolved far beyond its original access programmes. While access to subscription content continues to form the backbone, the partnership now places increasing emphasis on training and supporting researchers to become active contributors to the global research ecosystem. This shift, from access alone towards participation and contribution, has been one of the most significant developments of the past decade and is especially important to us at Springer Nature. That’s why we’ve continued to provide financial support to Research4Life to enable improvements in process and infrastructure, including supporting the Country Connector project, which has deepened research productivity and visibility within participating countries. The Country Connectors bring their direct personal experiences of some of the structural barriers, from reliable internet access to unstable electricity supply. That knowledge feeds directly into how Research4Life develops and delivers its support. 

More recently, thanks to member funding and insights like these, Research4Life is launching a new training platform -Tools and Skills for Accessing & Supporting Research –  so that researchers can access the full breadth of available resources and contribute their own work. 

At Springer Nature we also invest in training and skills development, by making all Nature Masterclasses content freely available to Research4Life Group A countries, giving researchers access to practical courses on writing, publishing and research skills. We also provide premium access to protocols.io, which helps researchers share, adapt and build on robust, reproducible research methods. 

This sits alongside our other work on the SDGs and global inclusion and equity initiatives. For example, we provide article processing charge discounts, of up to 100%, for researchers in eligible territories, enabling those without sufficient funding to publish their work open access to be read, shared and reused freely by others. Within our wider programme to enable greater geographic representation in research output, we work to amplify research voices from underrepresented regions through outlets such as Nature Africa and other editorial programmes designed to broaden authorship and peer review participation.

And capacity is growing. Data from the NSF shows that research output from lower and lower-middle income countries has grown steadily over the past two decades, and in relative terms has increased faster than output from high income economies. While these countries still account for a smaller share of global publications, the trend is clear: more research is being produced, across a wider range of disciplines, and by a more geographically diverse set of authors and institutions. 

Research4Life today supports c.12 thousand institutions worldwide, with over 6 million platform views from 2021-2023 (from its recent Impact Report), helping to underpin research that informs public health, environmental protection, food security and sustainable development. This impact is significant, and we think that as a scholarly communications industry, we can build on the progress made in the first 25 years, to maximise the benefits for  researchers everywhere and for the research ecosystem as a whole. 

Looking ahead, Research4Life remains highly relevant. It helps us listen to a wider set of community needs and gives publishers, institutions and international organisations a way to achieve together what no single partner could deliver alone. Ensuring that researchers in low‑ and lower‑middle‑income countries can contribute to, and shape research agenda is also essential if the evidence base informing progress towards the SDGs is to reflect diverse contexts and priorities.

As we celebrate 25 years of Research4Life, I am proud of the role Springer Nature has played and of the spirit of cooperation that continues to define this initiative. When publishers, institutions and international organisations work together with a shared sense of purpose, we can make research more inclusive, more equitable and more impactful for the communities we serve.

Related Tags:

Expert-led collections: enhanced visibility, credibility, and connection

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon May 4 2026

Where you publish can shape not only who reads your research, but who you reach through it. Expert-led collections connect your work to specialists, relevant audiences, and a focused scholarly conversation. As guest editors and contributors share the collection through their own networks, your article can gain greater visibility, expert feedback, and opportunities for connection and collaboration.

In this blog, you’ll see how Springer Nature collections offer something different: an expert-led publishing route designed to help your work find the right context, the right audience, and the right scholarly conversation.

A collection brings together related articles under a shared theme within an existing journal or across journals. Led by expert guest editors, it gives your work context, visibility, and a clearer place within an evolving research conversation. That expert-led context can also bring an immediate sense of credibility.

“For an ECR, the immediate value comes from the credibility it provides. Being included in a curated Collection by established editors acts as a 'stamp of approval' and effectively positions my work within the most relevant community of experts and policymakers.”


 ―  Megha Rao, Research Fellow for the Thanzi Labwino (Better Health) project

Prefer the highlights? Watch the short video below for a quick summary of how publishing in a collection can help you connect with experts in your research area and the benefits this brings to your professional profile and research.

The value of an expert-led collection

When you are deciding where to submit your research, you want to know that the people behind the publication understand your field and appreciate the value of your work. That makes the guest editor leading a collection an important part of the decision. 

At Springer Nature, guest editors are selected for their expertise in their fields. They shape the collection around the most pressing questions and developments in the area, ensuring that contributions are relevant and valuable. In practice, this gives you greater confidence that your work will be considered in the right scholarly context by people who understand its significance and contribution. 

Guest editor insights: If you want to understand how expert-led collections take shape, hear from two ECR guest editors as they share the steps they took to create, curate, and promote their collection, and the role that specialist insight played throughout.

A clearer publishing route for timely research

Guest editors help define the topic, shape the scope, invite contributions from researchers with relevant expertise, assess scientific validity and topic relevance, and promote the collection across their communities. That specialist oversight is critical because it gives the collection a clear scholarly focus from the start.  

As such, you can be confident that your research is contributing to a carefully developed theme that has been built with close attention to current developments and urgent research needs, such as:

  • what is happening in the field 
  • what questions are gaining momentum 
  • and what kinds of research are most needed right now

Help your article appear where interest is already growing

This advantage is particularly valuable in fast-moving fields. Research sometimes progresses more quickly than the publishing landscape can accommodate. New technologies and interdisciplinary questions can quickly become important, yet there may not be an obvious journal category that reflects the direction of the conversation.  

Collections help bridge that gap by organizing research around specific themes or timely issues, making it easier for your article to be published in contexts where interest is already growing and where the conversation is already taking shape.

“Collections offer an excellent opportunity to ensure one’s research contributes directly to a specific, impactful conversation, reaching the very people who can act on it. It’s about getting the work in front of the right audience, not just the biggest one.” 


―  Megha Rao, Research Fellow for the Thanzi Labwino (Better Health) project 

Visibility that helps you build momentum

Increased visibility is vital for early-career researchers. Building a profile involves publishing in the right places where your work has the best chance of being discovered, understood, and cited. A collection can assist by placing your article alongside other relevant work on a timely topic, increasing the likelihood that peers and senior researchers will find it.  

Moreover, collection articles typically receive, on average, 31% more citations and 30% more downloads than non-collection articles, making this visibility particularly beneficial when establishing your reputation.

P_Publish with Impact_Blog Teaser Image © Springer Nature 2026

In an interview with early career researcher and Springer Nature guest editor, Christopher S. Rozek, he says “Another nice part—as an early career researcher—is that it increases your visibility in the field; it’s an opportunity to work with big-name scholars.” 

“the visibility you get from strong indexing and a respected publisher like Springer Nature isn't a vanity metric: it directly leads to the citations and collaboration opportunities that are essential for building a sustainable academic career.”


―  Megha Rao, Research Fellow for the Thanzi Labwino (Better Health) project 

Confidence in fit, focus, and audience

Knowing that a collection is guided by an expert guest editor can make the submission decision feel less uncertain. You are not submitting your work to a wide audience, hoping that the right people will find it later. You are contributing to a research theme shaped with a clear sense of what is timely and worthwhile. This clarity offers reassurance, ensuring your research is assessed accurately. 

“We had very specific ideas about topics we wanted covered and perspectives we wanted included. We worked closely with our author teams to ensure that the papers they were contributing would relate to those topics and perspectives.”


Christopher S. Rozek, Springer Nature Guest Editor

Publishing as part of a bigger conversation

Research develops through shared questions and peer exchanges. Collections foster a collaborative environment by bringing together researchers tackling similar problems from diverse perspectives. This means your paper contributes to a larger dialogue rather than standing alone, facilitating connections and future collaborations. Guest editors often curate collections that reflect the breadth of the conversation while maintaining a strong intellectual focus. 

In fact, Carlton J. Fong, an early career researcher and first-time guest editor, saw guest editing as an opportunity to connect with scholars beyond his existing network. You can read his full interview here. 

ECR Tip: In an interview with early career researcher and collections author, Megha Rao, she advises other ECR’s to “look for a Collection that tells a story your research can contribute to. [...] Being part of a curated Collection amplifies your message and places your work in context. For an ECR, this is invaluable.” 

Questions to ask before choosing a collection

If you're considering submitting to a collection, examine the leadership closely. Ask yourself whether the guest editor understands the direction of your field, if the theme addresses the questions your community is asking, and whether the collection aligns with your research goals. 

For emerging, trending, and interdisciplinary topics, the answer is often yes. The right collection can do more than provide a route to publication. It can help your research become part of a visible, expert-led conversation that supports connection, credibility, and impact.

If you’re interested in publishing your work in a Springer Nature collection, check out our dedicated collections content hub, where you can find interviews with guest editors, impact case studies, author success stories, and much more.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Source Monthly Digest!

What can institutions learn from a systems approach to sustainability transformation?

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon May 4 2026

Demonstrating how research contributes to real-world change is an increasing priority for institutions working towards the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs).  As explored in The publication-to-policy connection: Supporting the real-world impact of research, impact depends not only on producing high-quality evidence, but on how effectively it is translated, shared, and applied in policy and practice. This case study builds on that perspective by examining the work of AE4RIA (the Alliance of Excellence for Research and Innovation on Aephoria), showing how a systems-based approach, combining integrated data, stakeholder collaboration and aligned financing, can help move research beyond policy influence into coordinated, implementable action.

Springer Nature’s recent report, From publications to policy: the impact of research towards achieving the Sustainable Development Goals, shows that evidence is already shaping national and international policymaking when it comes to the SDGs. But ensuring that research is not only accessed, but also acted upon, requires more than visibility. It requires the capacity to translate knowledge into coordinated, implementable action.

For institutions committed to strengthening research impact, supporting multi-stakeholder collaboration, or contributing to national sustainability agendas, AE4RIA (the Alliance of Excellence for Research and Innovation on Aephoria) offers a practical and replicable framework. Working at the intersection of economics, earth systems science, and policy, their systems-driven approach is grounded in integrated data, stakeholder co-design, and aligned financing to help move the SDGs from ambition into action.

Through the work of AE4RIA, Director and co-chair of the 2027 United Nations Sustainable Development Goals Report, Professor Phoebe Koundouri and colleagues explain how a systems‑based approach can help institutions move research beyond policy influence into tangible, funded outcomes.

The implementation gap: from framework to delivery

For AE4RIA, the SDGs provide a powerful framework for addressing what Professor Koundouri describes as a “permanent multi-crisis” across environmental, economic and social systems. “The SDGs for us are a brilliant science-based structure that can allow us to move away from the permanent multi-crisis of natural, social, and economic systems into a sustainable pathway,” she explains.

However, while global progress has been significant (196 countries signing the SDGs and 20% implementation in just ten years), translating this framework into delivery remains complex. The challenge is not only political or financial, but structural. “Even the most developed countries lack the capacity to organize the necessary data, modelling, stakeholders, or funding approaches, and very few people work on this kind of large-scale integration,” Professor Koundouri adds. “Those who do are mainly scientists, and they don’t have continuous interaction with policymakers, governments, and all the other stakeholders needed to implement change.”

For institutions, this highlights that producing high-quality research is not enough to impact the SDGs. Success depends on the ability to connect evidence across disciplines, stakeholders, and systems in ways that support implementation.

A systems approach to research impact

AE4RIA’s methodology is designed to address this gap by translating the SDGs into actionable, financed transition pathways. At its core is a systems-based approach that integrates four interconnected domains, nature, infrastructure, economy and society, recognising that progress in one depends on coordinated change across all.

Professor Koundouri outlined the methodology’s three structured steps:

  1. Measure and understand where you are 
    Using integrated data frameworks, AE4RIA helps define where a country, region, or sector currently stands in relation to SDG targets. “We have continuous monitoring and assessment of the scale we want to work on. We have co-developed with other institutions an extensive framework of matrices that allow you to quantify where you are.” 

  2. Develop pathways that cross silos and sectors
    Next, stakeholders work together to map out how to move from the current state to SDG-aligned outcomes. “We make explicit where we are, where we want to go, and then we design systems-based pathways that allow the transition for each sector of the economy to a sustainable interaction between the four main systems: nature, infrastructure, economy, and society.” The process is iterative and co-designed with stakeholders at each stage. 

    Underpinning this step is an integrated modelling system – a “digital twin” of the economy and environment – which allows stakeholders to test transition pathways before implementation. By simulating different scenarios, stakeholders can identify trade-offs, understand cross-sector impacts, and prioritise the most effective interventions.

  3. Align financing with the transition
    “The third step is to secure the money and instruments needed to deliver the plan described in step two.” This involves identifying funding sources, designing blended finance strategies, and structuring portfolios of projects that can realistically be delivered. For institutions, this reinforces a critical point: research impact depends not only on generating evidence, but on connecting that evidence to real-world funding and delivery mechanisms.

Putting systems thinking into practice: Living Labs

AE4RIA implements this approach through structured “living labs”: collaborative environments where research, policy, and practice come together to design and test real-world solutions.

For institutions, living labs offer a practical model for embedding research within decision-making processes, bringing together policymakers, industry, researchers, financiers, and civil society to co-develop solutions grounded in both evidence and local context. “We have developed different case studies across Europe, bringing together stakeholders to co-design the problem, the capacity on the ground, and potential solutions”, Phoebe Koundouri explains. 

One example focused on improving the climate resilience of Mediterranean ports (and by extension SDG13 and SDG14). Stakeholders included port authorities, ministries, businesses, financial institutions, regulators, NGOs, and researchers. These groups first agreed on the current state using shared data and modelling insights. They then co-designed a future vision and year-by-year transition actions to reach SDG targets. A digital innovation platform, BRIGAID, supported knowledge sharing and the integration of market-ready climate adaptation solutions.

Enabling collaboration: Engagement and digital infrastructure

Co-development of solutions like this relies heavily on participation from a wide range of stakeholders, which can be a challenge. “It’s a volunteering process, but it’s costly,” explains Eleni Toli, Senior Researcher, AE4RIA. Maintaining participation relies on transparency and accountability, as well as financial support for key contributors.

“Sometimes you start with high ambitions and engagement, but after some time, people tend to be less involved. It’s also a burden for the organisers. It’s important that key stakeholders are reimbursed for their work and also supported in doing [it].” - Eleni Toli, Senior Researcher, AE4RIA

These challenges directly informed AE4RIA’s development of digital tools to support its Living Labs. These tools function as shared knowledge infrastructure, providing democratic access to information, a record of actions, and continuous collaboration across stakeholders.

Crucially, the platform connects participants to the underlying modelling system, enabling stakeholders to move beyond discussion to evidence-based decision-making. Different policy options, investment choices, or technological interventions can be explored and tested within the model, helping participants understand trade-offs, identify synergies across sectors, and anticipate economic and social impacts before implementation.

Ensuring knowledge transfer and scalability

AE4RIA’s approach is designed to scale learnings from one setting can be applied in others, without having to start again from scratch. “The systems thinking and modelling approach aims to cover all countries in the world”, explains Professor Koundouri.

Using a taxonomy of similarity (economic, political, policy or socioeconomic similarity), elements of a case study can be transferred and replicated to others across the region. While transferred pathways may not have the same level of detail as a full case study, they provide a strong foundation for integration into national plans. For institutions, this demonstrates how research impact can extend beyond individual projects, contributing to broader, transferable solutions.

Springer Nature’s SDG report highlights the growing connection between research and policy. AE4RIA’s work demonstrates what it takes to extend that connection into implementation.  For institutions, the opportunity now lies in moving beyond knowledge production and dissemination to actively supporting the systems that enable research to be used, connecting data, stakeholders and funding in ways that translate research into delivery.

Take a closer look at the report: From publications to policy: The impact of research towards achieving the Sustainable Development Goals.

About Professor Dr. Phoebe Koundouri

P_Dr. Phoeba

Professor Dr. Phoebe Koundouri is a globally renowned mathematical economist who has pioneered human-centred, interdisciplinary modelling systems for the sustainable interaction between nature, society, and the economy. She brings nearly 30 years of academic leadership and research excellence at leading institutions, including the University of Cambridge, University College London (UCL), the London School of Economics (LSE), the University of Reading, and the Technical University of Denmark. She is consistently ranked among the top 2% of world scientists in multiple prestigious international listings, with an academic record that includes 21 books, more than 800 published papers, over 100 large-scale research projects, and measurable impact in more than 120 countries.

She is currently Professor at the School of Economics, Athens University of Economics and Business (AUEB); Visiting Professor at the Department of Earth Sciences, University of Cambridge; and Senior Research Fellow at Peterhouse, University of Cambridge, her alma mater. She is the Founder of the Alliance of Excellence for Research and Innovation on Aeiphoria (AE4RIA), a global research and innovation network bringing together more than 200 researchers. AE4RIA is anchored in ReSEES.AE4RIA at AUEB and SDU.AE4RIA at the ATHENA Information Technology Research Center, both research centres directed by Professor Koundouri.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts! 

Open science, altruism and impact: An interview with clinical geneticist Zornitza Stark

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Apr 30 2026

This post is the second in a blog series focused on researchers’ experiences with open science practices, highlighting the impact of sharing data, code and protocols openly.   

Professor Zornitza Stark is a clinical geneticist at the Victorian Clinical Genetics Services in Melbourne, Australia. She works in the field of translational genomics, specialising in rare diseases. As a senior researcher, Zornitza Stark has wide publishing experience, with recent articles published in Nature Portfolio journals, such as this Call to action to scale up research and clinical genomic data sharing and Feasibility, acceptability and clinical outcomes of the BabyScreen+ genomic newborn screening study. She is also Associate Editor for NPJ Genomic Medicine and has frequently published in the European Journal of Human Genetics.  

We asked Professor Stark to share her experiences of open science practices and the impact that open data sharing has on patients and their families.

Can you briefly introduce yourself and your research area?  

I'm a clinician researcher, so my time is split between clinical work and research. My research tends to be very translational; it's closely related to the type of clinical work that I do, which is primarily with families affected by rare disease. There are several projects that we're currently working on, including genomic newborn screening. We are also exploring how to leverage machine learning and artificial intelligence approaches to scale up the analysis or reanalysis of genomic data. I'm heavily involved in novel gene discovery for rare conditions and research into how to speed up the implementation of genomic testing into clinical practice, in particular how to generate the evidence that governments and policymakers need to fund it as part of healthcare. A big portion of my work involves working out the health economics for specific clinical applications of genomics. 

How did you first become interested in open science practices?  

Translational genomics is a relatively new field, which involves the application of new technologies. Working out how to do it is heavily dependent on sharing knowledge, but genomics also depends on the sharing of data; we need data for as many individuals as possible to work out what is rare and significant.  

As a community, we share data using specific genetics platforms, such as Gene Matcher, ClinVar, and Shariant (an Australian genomics-led variant sharing initiative). I also lead PanelApp Australia, a platform for sharing information on gene–disease associations for diagnostic use. Through this platform , we contribute to the Gene Curation Coalition, which is an international aggregation database of gene-disease relationships. 

In addition to data sharing, what open science practices do you use? 

From the sharing of code right through to how to conduct an economic evaluation as a protocol, or publishing a paper open access, we’re sharing knowledge on how to do relatively new tasks, because we're all new to this field.  

What motivated you to adopt these practices?  

“Open science ensures we share knowledge as quickly as possible, because that's what impacts both research and clinical outcomes” 

                              Zornitza Stark, Victorian Clinical Genetics Services, Melbourne, Australia  

I think most people are in medicine and research for altruistic reasons. I believe in the underlying premise of open science. We are also generally funded by public funds, and work in a public healthcare system. I strongly feel that public funds should be used to create public goods. 

Open science also ensures we share knowledge as quickly as possible, because that's what impacts both research and clinical outcomes. And those two are very closely intertwined in my type of work. 

Have you ever faced any particular challenges or barriers in undertaking open science practices?  

For the area that I work in, there is a lot of dependence on infrastructure. We know there is willingness from patients and research participants to share their data — that’s generally not a barrier — and most researchers also feel the same way. When we have been held back, it has been through a lack of political will to resolve potential legal issues and the lack of investment in large-scale infrastructure that would enable much more data sharing to occur. 

As an example, as a federated country, Australia has not been able to create a centralised Australian genomic dataset that could aggregate genomic data from across the country. This is due to a lack of investment in infrastructure and agreement between all the parties that we can share across borders. Contrast that to the National Genomic Research Library set up in England, which has managed to aggregate hundreds of thousands of datasets into a single infrastructure that can be queried by researchers. 

Is there a particular success story or example you're proud of that illustrates the benefits of open science?

“Sharing data openly has also had an impact on citations: being recognised by the international community as a contributor increases the visibility of our work.” 

                                                                                                      Zornitza Stark, Victorian Clinical Genetics Services, Melbourne, Australia  

We have been better at organising data sharing for other types of data, including data at gene variant level, which is crucially important in terms of facilitating the accurate interpretation of genomic data. Because it is considered to be more de-identified, there has been less objection, and we have been able to build the necessary infrastructure to share this data type. As a country, this infrastructure has enabled us to participate in international databases such as ClinVar, massively accelerating our submission to this open international resource. 

Having our own data accessible in both national and international databases actually alerts us when we have potentially misinterpreted something. It allows researchers to get in touch with us if they disagree with our assessment, which is often very helpful because it can have an impact on patient diagnosis. From a research perspective, it has enabled us to participate in the assembly of international cohorts of patients with rare diseases because it has alerted other researchers that there are patients in Australia with those conditions and provided a means to get in touch with the clinicians and the families to participate in that international effort. This has helped us to understand the natural history of rare conditions better and to link families with emerging therapies for rare diseases.  

Another area to highlight that is almost entirely dependent on open data sharing is the discovery of new gene–disease associations; data sharing massively accelerates gene discovery. For example, the discovery of the RNU4-2 gene a couple of years ago was made possible through large-scale data sharing; a cohort of over 100 patients was assembled within a matter of weeks. It was a groundbreaking discovery, because we think this one gene accounts for nearly 1% of all cases of intellectual disability. 

Sharing data openly has also had an impact on citations; being recognised by the international community as a contributor increases the visibility of our work. 

How do you advise early career researchers on open science best practices? 

For us, open science is the accepted way of working. Occasionally, I guess people may feel reluctant to share their work because they feel anxious about competition. My role as a senior researcher is to deal with those anxieties and instead emphasise all the benefits of being part of the international community and large-scale collaboration. Working this way just massively increases our capacity to produce world-class research. 

Are there any gaps in support or resources about open science you’d like to see addressed?  

The principal issue is infrastructure as an enabling factor. We need much more strategic planning and high-level support that extends beyond individual projects or groups, backed with investment and the enabling infrastructure to magnify the benefits of open access to data. For example, several of the datasets that we've generated over the past decade are no longer available or accessible because the funding for a particular project finished. Although the participants consented to data sharing, with the lack of infrastructure for data deposition, these data have now been lost, which has been heartbreaking to watch. 

What advice would you give to researchers considering adopting open science practices?  

"My advice is always to embrace open science and to be an active participant in the international community; that will enrich your research and also your life.” 

                                                                                                          Zornitza Stark, Victorian Clinical Genetics Services, Melbourne, Australia  

I think my advice is always to embrace open science and to be an active participant in the international community, and that will only enrich your research and also your life.  

There is much greater recognition of the importance of open science, and there is momentum: we have seen investment in large-scale projects in several countries, including the US and UK. They have created the opportunity to build some of the enabling infrastructure to create trusted research environments and develop and implement the standards that will enable data sharing. The demonstration that something is possible, and how to do it, is really important to move people forward in creating similar investments and participating together in these endeavours, and I hope will accelerate open science practices further. 

Learn more about open science and sharing research data, code and protocols & methods openly

Related content:

  • Open science conversations:
  1. Building trust through transparency: An open science conversation with Geir Kjetil Sandve
  2. Bioinformatician Johannes Koester on embodying the spirit of open science
  3. How to do science that matters: Computational biologist Casey S. Greene on purpose-driven open science practices 
  4. Open science before it had a name: An interview with molecular biologist Steven Henikoff 
  5. Building the infrastructure for open science: A conversation with Carole Goble 
  •  Best practices for transparency and reuse: 
  1. How to share your research protocols and methods openly 

  2. How to share your research code openly 

  • Supporting open science practices: 
  1. Why share your research data? 

  2. Why sharing protocols matters 

  3. Why sharing your code matters 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest

From open data to meaningful impact: Data sharing impact stories

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Apr 28 2026

The 2025 State of Open Data report looks back at a decade of survey responses from researchers to see how attitudes, behaviours, and policies around open data have evolved. In this blog, we explore the impact of data sharing more personally, through individual experiences of shared data. What happens when the barriers to data sharing are overcome, and how can shared data make an impact beyond one’s own work?  

By opening and sharing their data, researchers gain more visibility and credibility for their work. When data is open, individual studies can more effectively support long-term scientific progress. Results can be verified and contribute to creating new knowledge across disciplines. 

The State of Open Data 2025 © Springer Nature

In the 2025 State of Open Data report, we learned that researchers recognise the benefits of sharing open data, and that familiarity with FAIR principles (findability, accessibility, interoperability, and reusability) has risen sharply. The report also highlights that researchers still face challenges around reuse, recognition, and infrastructure.  

But what does data sharing and its benefits and challenges look like in practice? While writing the 2025 report, we spoke with researchers, librarians, and data experts about open data. For this blog, we collected their real-world examples of how data sharing has shaped research and collaboration. 

From data sharing to enabling reuse at scale 

When data is openly shared, it can become a reusable resource far beyond its original purpose. Brian Nosek, Co-Founder and Executive Director of the Center for Open Science and Psychology Professor at the University of Virginia in the United States, saw this happen with his data on bias.  

Nosek developed Project Implicit in 1998 with Mazarin Bonaji and Tony Greenwald. Project Implicit was a popular website that allowed people to measure their own implicit biases, and for twenty years, more than a million people a year contributed to the project.  

“It generated enormous amounts of data that could be used for all kinds of social and behavioural research,” Nosek explains. In 2013, when he opened the Center for Open Science, the Project Implicit team suggested to add its data: “No one else has such a data source, it's totally unique.”  

Project Implicit data is shared systematically every year, and it has generated enormous numbers of cross-disciplinary research applications in epidemiology, political science, sociology, and behavioural medicine. “These things are way beyond the work that we did with implicit bias and it just wouldn't have happened without making the data available. It’s been very exciting and gratifying to see it get reused that way,” Nosek says. 

This example shows how unexpected and rich the contribution of open data can be, and why sustained availability and documentation can mean long-lasting impact.   

Connecting data to unlock new insights 

Combining datasets can create knowledge that no single dataset could deliver. Melissa Haendel PhD, FACMI, is Sarah Graham Kenan Distinguished Professor, Director of Precision Health and Translational Informatics, Deputy Director of Computational Sciences – NC Tracs, The University of North Carolina (UNC) School of Medicine in the United States. She shares from her experience of linking and interpreting information to improve outcomes. 

Together with Chris Mungall at the Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory and with support of international collaborators, Haendel leads the Monarch Initiative. This initiative brings a variety of different open data sources together from humans and model organisms. “Once we've integrated the data, we can use it to improve the diagnosis of patients with rare diseases, really bringing those open data resources to the point of care, and using the data to help improve the lives of patients with rare diseases,” Haendel explains.  

In another project, the All of Us Research Program aims to recruit a million participants from across the United States, from diverse races, demographics, social structures, and religion. The study collects survey data, wearable data, genomic data, and electronic health record data. At the Center for Linkage and Acquisition of Data, Haendel and colleagues link that data to a variety of other data sources.  

“Participants have agreed to share, but not all of them are able to get their data into the program,” she explains. “We've partnered with a national health information network, eHealth Exchange, to go retrieve their electronic health record, and bring it back into the system. This is the first time anybody's ever done this, and it is so exciting because we finally actually have representation of their actual data from the place where they're receiving care.” 

Haendel’s work shows that interoperability and linkage can lead to meaningful impact. When data is available to be combined, value emerges, from research to healthcare and beyond.  

From open data to real-world and societal outcomes 

An example like Haendel’s Monarch Initiative also exhibits how data sharing can directly support cultural, health, or societal outcomes. Joy Owango, Founding Director of Training Centre in Communication (TCC Africa) in Kenya, illustrates how data sharing can have societal impact by supporting communities in preserving, managing, and sharing knowledge. 

The National Museum of Nigeria contacted TCC Africa because they are digitising and launching their digital library. This is a first step in data management; collect, curate, store, and share. But many questions arise: “How do you store it? Where do you store it? Now they are thinking about what kind of technology they can use to share our indigenous knowledge and protect our sovereignty. Something that acknowledges our ownership and contribution to research,” Owango explains. 

Impact is not only about citations and publications. Considerations of ethics, ownership, and trust are essential, as this experience shows.  

Catalysing collaboration and paradigm shifts 

Data sharing can lead to new collaborations and broader networks. Dawei Zhang is Deputy Director of the National Materials Corrosion and Protection Data Centre, and Professor at the School of Advanced Materials Innovation, University of Science and Technology Beijing in China. His shared data led to new and exciting collaborations that opened new research directions in the field. 

Zhang’s group was the first in the world to use AI models to process data obtained by a corrosion sensor in a typical atmospheric environment in China. The results showed that the combination of high-throughput corrosion data and AI models could help understand and even predict how materials can degrade.  

“A leading Croatian scientist in Belgium asked if we could share the data,” Zhang shares. “At that time only a minority of people wanted to believe that this data-driven machine learning model, which we often call black boxes, could lead to something that is really transformative. By using the data we shared, they not only published several very important works, but also helped us broaden our impact and extend the collaboration to many other countries,” Zhang explains.  

These collaborators from different countries are now driving the transformation of the entire corrosion research paradigm. Zhang’s experience exemplifies how sharing data can lead to collaboration, which can accelerate new insights, paradigm shifts, and scientific development.  

From data shared to data reused: What your data needs to create impact 

The 2025 State of Open Data report shows that the foundations for open data are in place. They should be strengthened and supported to make data sharing the standard across the research community. The impact stories above are just a few examples from across disciplines around the globe, that illustrate how meaningful intentional sharing can be providing data are curated, documented, and well-governed. As we’ve seen in the 2025 State of Open Data report, and as amplified in these stories, openness alone is not enough.  

Making shared data count is not only about making it available, but ensuring it can be reused in meaningful ways. Infrastructures, standards, and services are required to enable data to travel across geographical locations and scientific disciplines to deliver more impact.  

These impact stories illustrate what is possible when openness is combined with intention and purpose. If your work generates high-quality data, share it to create your own impact story. Turn your work into a resource that can drive reuse, collaboration, and long-term impact.  

Get resources and support to share your data openly in Springer Nature’s Open Science hub, and explore the 2025 State of Open Data report to learn more about global attitudes towards open data.  

Related content

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest

Springer: A legacy shaped with research communities

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Apr 28 2026

You know Springer as a trusted name, trust that is nearly two decades in the making. Springer’s reputation is rooted in a habit of adaptation to an ever-evolving research landscape, to support its research communities to do their best work. When this work is shared and communicated effectively, it inspires change, fosters collaboration, and drives action.


Here’s a glimpse into how Springer’s legacy took shape, and how its adaptive, forward-looking approach reflected in its response to major shifts in scholarly communication, like digitalisation and open access. And most importantly, how this legacy continues to guide our work today.


“Within the Springer Nature family, each member serves researchers in its distinct way, always underpinned by trusted scholarship. With its long publishing heritage, Springer brings a particularly strong combination of global reach and discoverability, rigorous editorial and integrity standards, and guidance and support throughout the publication journey.”


Nearly two centuries of scholarly communication have passed since Julius Springer founded a small publishing house in Berlin in 1842. Springer has been growing alongside the development of modern research, adapting to its evolution, and responding to the changing needs to its research communities.

Your work is shaped by your research community and field, and by the methods, standards, practices, and tools that you use. As these evolve, so do expectations around how research is produced, validated, and shared. To best support researchers, Springer evolves and adapts as well. Working closely with research communities, it innovates to accommodate the evolving landscape, while always remaining grounded in integrity and rigour.

“Working with Springer has enlarged my own visibility, because Springer is a renowned publisher and has a wide readership in those areas in which I publish, which increases my own visibility.” 

- Dr. Bernice Bovenkerk, author of Beyond Natural, Normal, Necessary, Nice: Introducing ‘Neglectable’ as a Distinct Coping Strategy for the Dairy Paradox (2026)


Springer today: A legacy of trust for your research

To publish your best work and reach a broad audience, you need a publisher you can trust. Springer’s long legacy of excellence is what makes it the trusted publisher you know today.

Springer has a broad disciplinary reach, spanning science, technology, medicine, humanities, and social sciences. You’ll find cutting-edge science as well as foundational work, in formats ranging from journals and books to reference works and more, designed to serve the various needs of the research community. With its portfolio of over 2,700 journals and over 220,000 books, Springer publishes the trusted content that serves as the foundation for research and development. And it empowers authors to share impactful research.

Over time, books and articles can do more than record results. They help define fields, connect within and between communities, and support the development of your work and of research beyond your field. Springer supports this long-term value by adapting alongside authors and editors to the evolving landscape of scholarly publishing. Springer’s adaptive, forward-looking approach is reflected in how it responded to two major shifts in scholarly communication over recent decades: digitalisation and open access.


“A benefit for the authors, in the first place, is the reputation of Springer. It’s attractive to have an article in a Springer journal, because Springer is a good publisher, obviously.”     

- Marc de Vries, author of Storybook driven design for enhancing spatial ability in early childhood: a lesson study approach (2026)



Forward-looking innovation: At the forefront of globalisation and digitalisation

The modest Springer publishing house grew alongside the internationalisation of science. Knowledge advances fast when researchers engage across borders, and Springer was there to support the global circulation of ideas, which required trusted editorial processes in an international scale. Research needed more than just wider distribution, but also meaningful connections.

Digitalisation expanded this process of connecting and delivering research. Springer’s early embrace of digital publishing was a natural extension of its legacy of excellence and rigour, combined with an innovative spirit.

Digital publishing makes it easier for your work to be discovered, accessed, and connected to related research. Springer’s early investment in digital infrastructure made more than a century and a half of scholarly publications available to study and explore. This digitalisation underscored Springer’s commitment to supporting researchers as they navigate an increasingly digital, networked environment.


“At the Springer publication European Journal for Philosophy of Science, we try to give space for non-mainstream voices. We also try to make the refereeing process as fair and transparent as possible, especially to younger researchers who may be less acquainted with what happens behind the scenes.”

- Federica Russo, Co-Editor-in-Chief of the European Journal for Philosophy of Science


Open access: Making research more accessible than ever

Springer has always played a significant role in shaping new publishing models, particularly open access. The same adaptive mindset that has always guided Springer also shaped its proactive and leading response to the advent of open access.

As expectations around access, funding, and transparency in research began to change, Springer expanded new publishing models that supported wider dissemination while maintaining established editorial standards. The development of open access journals and books reflected an understanding that research communities differ in their needs, and that sustainable routes to openness require flexibility rather than uniform solutions.

Open access is another chapter in Springer’s robust legacy, which continues its longstanding mission to support research communities navigate the publishing and research landscapes, and ensure research can reach the audiences who can make it meaningful by building on it or putting it into practice.

Research now moves faster, crosses disciplines more readily, and is expected to address increasingly complex global challenges. Springer evolves alongside it, always helping experts publish their work and helping others find it. While tools, platforms, and publishing models may change, Springer’s underlying commitment remains the same as it was in 1842: to support research communities in turning knowledge into insight and action.

Explore the benefits of publishing your next journal article or book with Springer. Get practical tools, expert insights, and tailored resources to help you navigate the process with confidence and clarity.

Related Content

Open access at scale: why it continues to deliver for authors, research and society

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Wed Apr 22 2026

For more than 25 years, we have stood behind a simple principle: research has greater impact when it is open, trusted and usable. Researchers want their work to be read, cited and built on. Funders and policymakers want the research they support to be openly available — immediately, and in its final, citable form. And society depends on the integrity of the version of record to inform decisions and tackle urgent global challenges.

At a time when the costs associated with OA are being questioned, it is worth looking at the value it delivers in enabling scalable and sustainable openness. 

  • For researchers, immediate openness drives visibility, use and impact. As our latest Annual Report shows, last year saw a 9% increase in average citations per published OA article.
  • For institutions and libraries, OA delivers stronger engagement. Research published openly is downloaded and reused far more widely, helping maximise the value of institutional research investment.
  • For society, OA ensures timely access to evidence that matters. In 2025, we published 1.4 million research articles and book chapters related to the SDGs – 62% were OA supporting policy and public debate.

By ensuring immediate access to trusted high-quality content at the point of publication, supporting authors through waivers and sustained reinvestment, OA helps ensure that both access to research and participation in publishing are equitable at global scale.


Delivering OA at global scale

As Frank has said before me, OA agreements remain a key driver of this progress. They help institutions manage costs, simplify publishing for authors, and support participation across disciplines. In 2025, we reached 85 agreements worldwide, supporting researchers at more than 4,400 institutions and enabling the publication of more than 63,000 open access articles — up 12% on 2024.

We also waived more than €22 million in APCs, ensuring researchers in underfunded disciplines and in LIC and LMIC countries can benefit fully from the reach and engagement that OA delivers. At the same time, the average cost per download has fallen by around 54% since 2019, and we continue to reinvest more than 10% of profits back into the research community. Today, more than 53% of the primary research we publish is open access — a clear signal of uptake and confidence from researchers.


Transparency and reproducibility - foundations of trust

This growth has not come at the expense of quality or impact.  In 2024, our average acceptance rate for full OA article was 21.1%, down from 29.5% in 2019. – reflecting sustained selective and a continued focus on publishing high quality research. That rigor underpins trust in the scientific record.

Making research immediately available in its final, peer‑reviewed form is fundamental to that trust. OA ensures work can be scrutinised, reused and built upon from day one, whilst remaining connected to the academic record in perpetuity. Through our advocacy for reproducibility, transparent peer review and open standards — including data availability statements and the open sharing of data, code and protocols — we are working with the community to ensure that every stage of the research process is visible and accountable.


Scaling responsibly with AI

Partnership will continue to be central to progress. The future of open access is multi‑funded, with collaboration across publishers, institutions, funders and infrastructure providers essential to enabling scale while managing cost and maintaining quality.

Innovation is key. To accelerate the next phase of the transition, we are investing strongly in technology and AI, focused on making publishing easier for authors while protecting the integrity and trust of research. Since 2021, Springer Nature has invested €188 million in technology, including AI‑enabled tools that strengthen research integrity, support editorial decision‑making and improve the publishing experience.

Finally - industry collaboration, supporting more open ways of sharing research and removing barriers to participation. We will continue to play an active role in discussions around shared protocols, data availability and open code policies, listening closely to our community to help build shared standards that benefit the research ecosystem.

The transition to OA is ongoing and complex. Progress depends on partnership, shared standards and sustained investment. Our responsibility is clear: to ensure OA is accessible to all, sustainable at scale, and uncompromising on quality and trust.

Researchers embrace AI. The disclosure gap is the challenge.

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Tue Apr 21 2026

As AI becomes more embedded in day‑to‑day research practice, the question for the scholarly community is no longer whether it will be used, but how it should be governed. To better understand how researchers are navigating this shift, last year, Springer Nature and TBI Communications surveyed over 1,000 researchers. The results offered useful insights into where confidence in AI use is growing, where it is lacking, and what role publishers can play in supporting responsible use.   


Cureus TBI survey © Springer Nature


AI has moved from a topic of debate to a tool of daily practice for most researchers. Our survey found that 69% of respondents already use AI tools frequently or occasionally in their research or publishing workflow.  

Only a small minority now expect to not use AI at all in the future, with researchers in mathematics more likely than those in other fields to say they do not plan to use AI. 

Usage also varies by career stage. Early-career researchers are the most engaged. PhD students (87%) and early-career academics (82%) are the most likely to follow, recommend, or submit to an AI-integrated journal. Senior academics remain more cautious in their adoption and use. 

New Content Item © Springer Nature


Fig. 1: How often researchers use AI in their research or publishing process (n = 1,017) 

The primary use case for AI was typically translation and summarisation, followed closely by manuscript writing and editing along with data analysis and modelling. What is interesting is that AI is no longer limited to administrative tasks. It now extends across most core research activities, from study design to data analysis.  

 

Fig 2 cureus © Springer Nature

Fig. 2: Ways researchers have previously used AI in research or publishing (n = 825) 


Researchers also see potential for AI in peer review. In our survey, 59% said AI could speed up feedback, and 41% expected it to improve the clarity of reviewer comments.  

Comfort with AI in early-stage tasks, for example reviewer matching and initial manuscript screening, is notably high. There is less support, however, for AI generating substantive analytical content without human oversight. 

There is also a notable pattern: Humanities and social science researchers showed higher enthusiasm for AI-assisted publishing than many STEM fields, a finding that may reflect different disciplinary needs and workflows. 

AI adoption is increasing but transparency over use is lagging 

Despite growing adoption, one third of respondents told us that they have never disclosed their AI use when submitting or publishing. Patterns again vary by career stage and discipline: 

  • Senior academics were more likely to always disclose their use of AI compared to other career stages (47% vs. 39% average). 

  • Respondents in STEM are less concerned with disclosing their use of AI (37% sometimes and 34% always).   

  • Respondents in Medicine are particularly strict on disclosure (only 9% never disclose, and 70% always do) 

With other surveys showing one of the largest barriers around AI use being the lack of transparency, this data points to a shared gap in expectations and guidance that needs to be addressed collaboratively with the research community.  

Fig 3 cureus © Springer Nature


Where we are now 

These findings reflect a wider sector challenge. AI adoption is scaling faster than the frameworks designed to govern it. Across publishing, the response has been gathering pace. Publishers have responded through a combination of tools, policies, and shared standards. Alongside investments in detection technologies and updated author guidelines, industry bodies are also stepping up. In September 2025, STM introduced recommendations for classifying and labelling AI use in research outputs. This work has since expanded into a broader consultation on the responsible use of scholarly content in generative AI (March 2026), opening dialogue across publishers, researchers, and technology providers. In parallel, the World Conference on Research Integrity in Vancouver (May 2026) has established a dedicated track to advance a global standard for AI disclosure in research. 

At Springer Nature, we have been working to build that infrastructure across our portfolio. We have introduced AI-assisted tools at multiple stages of the publishing process, from manuscript preparation and peer review administration through to author support services, with a clear principle: AI should augment human editorial judgement, not replace it. This work is underpinned by our five AI principles covering dignity, fairness, transparency, accountability and privacy, which inform our author guidance and AI policies across the portfolio. 

Our full approach is set out on our AI hub. 

We know this is work in progress. The survey data are useful precisely because they tell us where the gaps remain, and where researchers need publishers to do more. 


What comes next 

One practical response to these findings is the new Cureus Journal of AI-Augmented Research. When surveyed, 61% of researchers said they would consider submitting to an AI-integrated journal, and 75% would follow it for updates. Researchers were also clear about what makes a venue credible: indexation in major databases (58%), a recognised editorial board, transparent AI policies, and human oversight of peer review (29%). These expectations are widely shared. They reflect a consistent message: AI is welcome in scholarly publishing, but only under conditions of transparency, human control, and clear accountability. These signals have a direct bearing on how publishers design journal offerings going forward. 

 

Fig 4 Cureus © Springer Nature

Fig. 4: What would give researchers confidence in a credible, high-quality journal (n = 714) 

This new publishing venue is designed to offer a ‘sandbox’ approach to AI research and a space for researchers to explore models of AI-supported peer review, reproducibility, and open science, alongside publishing AI-augmented peer reviewed research, with human editorial oversight at every stage. 

Researchers are actively shaping how AI fits into their work. At Springer Nature, we see our role as working alongside the research community, offering clear standards, practical author guidance, and processes that are transparent about where AI is used and how.  

The aim of this journal is not to provide a definitive model, but to test and refine approaches collaboratively in the open. We’re excited about this journey and plan to share what we learn along the way. 

Related Tags:

Demystifying the publishing process: What value do open access book publishers add? Part 2

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri Apr 17 2026

This article was originally published in 2021 and was last updated in April 2026.

This is the second part in our blog series looking at the value that publishers add for open access book authors (find part 1 here, which looks at quality assurance, the editorial process and publisher prestige).

How publishers help your open access book go further

If you publish an open access book through an academic publisher or press, you will have access to more services, distribution channels and marketing support than if you were to self-publish.

At Springer Nature, our open access books all have their own International Standard Book Number (ISBN) for both the eBook and the print copy enabling readers to buy the book, as well as a Digital Object Identifier (DOI) on a book and chapter level. DOIs are persistent interoperable identifiers used on digital networks, which support the discovery, sale and analysis of your book and chapters.

In addition to print, our open access books are available online as HTML, PDF and ePub from our publishing platform Springer Nature Link, and through other platforms and indexers we partner with such as Google Books. MOBI is also available through Amazon. This variety of formats removes barriers by allowing readers to read your work on any device.

Dissemination, discoverability and preservation

We know that open access book authors want to reach a wider and broader audience, so dissemination and discoverability are crucial in getting your work out there and making it easier to find.

Some publishers host publications on their own platforms. Springer Nature’s publishing platform, Springer Nature Link, receives 24 million readers per month, guaranteeing a wide audience for your work.

In addition to Springer Nature Link, we work with partners such as Web of Science, Scopus and the OAPEN Library, plus all of our open access books are listed in the Directory of Open Access Books (DOAB) and, where appropriate, PubMed’s NCBI Bookshelf. Inclusion on these sites enhances the visibility and discoverability of your open access book.

Our open access books are also automatically included in our eBook Collections at no additional charge to ensure maximum distribution. Our existing relationship with libraries and booksellers means that your open access book will reach our millions of customers around the world. By assigning a Creative Commons (CC) licence, this gives readers a clear indication of how they can use your book.

We endeavour to ensure that all content remains accessible and usable to our readers, regardless of media failure and technological change. As such, we work with digital preservation organisations such as CLOCKSS and Portico to ensure the long-term survival of web-based scholarly publications for the benefit of the global research community.

Marketing and activities

Perhaps one of the most highly valued services that a publisher can provide is the marketing and promotion of your work. However, not all open access book publishers include marketing support in the services that they provide to authors. If self-publishing, the absence of this service can be a major disadvantage alongside the extra labour involved on the author’s side to get the book created.

At Springer Nature, our open access books are marketed in the same way as our non-open access books, to make sure that they reach the greatest number and widest range of readers. Our global and expert marketing teams employ an effective mix of marketing activities.


  1. Search engine optimisation
    Each book has its own homepage on our website with its own downloadable promotional flyer. To ensure that relevant content appears at the top of the results list of an appropriate keyword search, we constantly optimise our product pages. 
  2. Newsletters and alerts
    To stay up-to-date, many of our readers and library customers have registered for subject-specific email newsletters and new book alerts for customised information such as highlighted books.
  3. Social media
    Our social media accounts are subject-specific and interest group focused, allowing us to connect with new and existing audiences. To keep them informed and engaged, we promote conferences and run special campaigns.
  4. Conferences
    We present a selection of recent books at scientific conferences and we promote more books in our conference-specific catalogues, newsletters and on dedicated web pages.
  5. Highlight campaigns
    Thematic collections are curated to further increase the discoverability of our publications and help surface some of the most pressing topics. Examples include the Sustainable Development Goals (SDG), and open access books publishing. These campaigns are promoted across multiple channels, targeting readers interested in their content.

Of course, your own network and connections are invaluable too, so we encourage you to reach out to them directly. We have some tips and tools to help you spread the word about your book.

The impact of our open access books is tracked through usage statistics which you can find on Springer Nature Link, showing the number of chapter downloads, citations and Altmetric mentions. Our open access books receive on average 10 times more downloads, 2.4 times more citations and 10 times more online mentions than our non-open access books, and reach 61% more countries  increasing the global diversity of your readership.

Have maximum confidence in, and visibility for, your open access book

The OAPEN Open Access Books toolkit, an independent free author resource, suggests that if your goal is to publish sound science or reputable research, you should choose a publisher that will give your readers the confidence that your research is academically sound. Self-publishing does not always offer this.

An open access book means more than just “free to read” - it needs a proper licence, quality assurance and effective distribution and marketing methods to ensure it reaches your intended audience.

By offering an open access option to book authors, we are giving you the freedom to choose the right publishing method most suited to your needs.

Interested in experiencing the benefits of open access publishing? Visit our open access books hub to learn more about how it all works, or get in touch with a Springer, Palgrave, or Apress publishing editor with your idea.

Related content

Perceptions of fairness and bias in the scholarly publishing ecosystem: Insights from a new report

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Apr 16 2026

How do researchers perceive fairness and bias across the scholarly publishing landscape? And how do these perceptions impact their publishing behaviour? 

Our recent report analyses responses from over 8,000 researchers globally to better understand their views across the scholarly publishing landscape as a whole. In this blog, we discuss the report’s key findings, and explore some of the strategies we use to address perceived bias and encourage fairness in the publishing process at Springer

Perception of fairness © Springernature 2026

Nature.

Science and research are often seen as domains governed by impartial standards, where methods, execution, and evaluation are grounded in established research standards. As a key stage in the research lifecycle, scholarly publishing is likewise expected to assess research primarily on its quality.  

Yet researchers’ experiences suggest a more complex reality. Bias is widely perceived to be present globally across scholarly publishing. It remains underdiscussed but widely felt, and shapes researchers’ trust, behaviour, and decisions about where and how to publish. 

Our survey asked researchers about their perceptions of fairness and bias in scholarly publishing, so that we can better understand and address them. We received responses from researchers worldwide representing various regions, disciplines, career stages, and publishing experiences across the scholarly publishing landscape. 

The findings from the survey were recently published in the report titled Perceptions of fairness and bias in the scholarly publishing ecosystem: a global survey' They highlight both structural challenges and practical expectations researchers have of publishers, editors, and reviewers. 

Understanding perceptions of bias in scholarly publishing  

Bias is widely perceived to exist across scholarly publishing, according to the report. 91% of surveyed researchers believe there is some degree of bias in academic publishing. And 84% of respondents say they have experienced bias in some way during the publishing process. 

Country-related bias is the most prevalent type of bias researchers believe to exist in publishing (62%), followed by institutional affiliation bias (56%) and professional network bias (55%). Common experiences of bias include rejection followed by similar papers being published (42%), lack of appreciation for regional significance of research (29%), and reviewer comments focusing on language skills rather than on the research itself (25%). 


Fig1 © Springernature 2026

Figure 2 from the report: Types of perceived bias


Fig4 - Indicators of individual experience of bias © Springernature 2026

Figure 4 from the report: Indicators of individual experiences of bias

How bias influences researchers’ publishing decisions  

The report finds that 72% of researchers consider the possibility of bias when deciding where to submit their work for publication. 45% say the possibility of bias significantly influences their decisions, and 30% say they’ve decided to not submit to a journal again after having experienced perceived bias.  

This means that researchers’ perceptions of bias influence where they choose to publish. They evaluate various indicators to assess a journal’s potential bias before submitting their manuscript. Beyond their own bias experience with a specific journal and that of their colleagues, many authors will also consider the types of articles published, the diversity of authors and editorial boards, and the the acceptance rates for authors from their region.  

Researchers also report actively using strategies to reduce potential bias against their manuscript. These range from collaboration with senior researchers, researchers from prestigious institutions or countries likely to be accepted, or utilising writing or language services.  

Addressing bias: What researchers expect publishers to do 

The survey shows strong consensus that publishers have both the responsibility and agency to address bias in the publication process. 91% of researchers expect clear policies and systems to address bias, and 62% expect procedures to investigate instances of bias. 

Researchers’ perceptions of the stages in the publication process when bias occurs explains their expectations from publishers to address bias. Respondents identify the initial editorial assessment and decision about whether to send a manuscript out for peer review (71%) and the peer review process itself (64%) as stages where bias primarily occurs. 

Editors indeed have a key role in the publication process, and most respondents want more training for editors, to support them in recognising, managing, and mitigating bias. Over half of respondents want greater visibility into editorial decision processes, as well as more prioritisation of scientific content over language. 

A little over half of researchers feel that reviewers should be provided with guidelines on how to minimise bias in peer review. Respondents consider transparency and anonymisation as ways to potentially reduce bias due to affiliation, gender, or region. And of course, targeted training on delivering constructive, bias-free feedback is considered essential. 

Addressing bias: Springer Nature’s efforts to minimise bias  

To tackle the problem of bias and support fairness in the publication process, publishers across academic publishing need to understand how researchers perceive bias and address their concerns. Indeed, 91% of survey respondents expect publishers to have clear policies and systems to address bias.  

Addressing bias requires more than intent; our efforts concentrate on practical mechanisms that shape decision-making. Because publishing decisions are made by people, training has a critical role in addressing bias. It helps individuals recognise unconscious assumptions, reflect on their decision-making, and avoid practices that may unintentionally reinforce bias. This is essential given what our survey shows us about the impact of perceived bias on researchers’ trust and publishing choices.  

In addition to training, practical mechanisms influence decisions at scale. They can help reduce bias by shaping how decisions are made using clear criteria, transparency, and structured workflows that reduce the reliance on individual judgement.  

Our efforts to reduce bias and encourage fairness in the publishing process at Springer Nature include:  

  • Training We’ve been offering implicit bias training for book and journal editors since 2024. The training examines how implicit bias can surface across the publication journey, including content acquisition, peer reviewer selection, editorial appointments, and portfolio management, and offers practical suggestions for countering bias. Additional trainings include Nature Masterclasses on peer review, research integrity training for editors and authors, and more.  
  • Increase transparency To support increased transparency, which may help to counter perceptions of bias, we expanded our use of transparent peer review to provide greater insight into the decision-making process. Transparent peer review is now available across all Nature family journals and the BMC Series journals. 
  • Diversifying editorial teams We are working to increase the regional diversity of our external academic editors to better reflect the global diversity of the research landscape. 
  • Language support We support authors with language-focused services. 

Towards a more robust research ecosystem 

Bias is challenging to prove empirically, but researchers’ perceptions of it have consequences, and they impact their publishing choices.  

Fairness, transparency, and inclusion are not abstract principles for us. We work to achieve and strengthen them throughout the publishing process at Springer Nature. The survey and report on researchers’ perceptions of fairness and bias help us in our efforts to contribute to a more robust and inclusive global research ecosystem for all.  

Explore the full report to learn more about how researchers like you perceive fairness in scholarly publishing, and how Springer Nature is acting on those insights.  

Related content: 

Report: Perceptions of fairness and bias in the scholarly publishing ecosystem: a global survey 

Blog: How we work to promote inclusive practices in book publishing 

Report: Inclusive book publishing at Springer Nature 

Blog: The benefits of inclusive publishing and why we need more inclusive journals 

Blog: How do you determine the value of a journal? Journal value beyond rankings 

White paper: Demonstrating journal value beyond rankings 

Blog: The value of null results: How Discover champions inclusive science 

White paper: The state of null results: Insights from 11,000 researchers on negative or inconclusive results 

Resources & Tools: Global Inclusion in Research Publishing 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs,sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest! 

How to publish open access with BMC: Funding options explained

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Apr 16 2026

If you’re an early-career researcher (ECR), publishing open access can sometimes feel daunting, especially when it comes to understanding fees, funding, and the different open access models used across the publishing landscape. In fact, many ECRs are simply unaware that their institution may already have support in place to help cover open access publishing costs. In this guide, we’ll explain the essentials and show you how to quickly check whether your open access fees could be covered.

Last year, we celebrated 25 years of publishing high-quality, widely accessible research through BMC (formerly known as BioMed Central). Since we launched, our mission has remained the same: to pioneer openly available research and support authors at every career stage through every step of the publishing journey. This blog article explores how publishing in our fully open access (OA) journals shares your work with BMC’s 6 million monthly readers, as well as exploring your funding options.

Pioneering OA publishing

In 2000, BMC (then BioMed Central) made high quality research open to every reader – and in making the open access model sustainable, we changed the world of academic publishing.  

Since then, we’ve anticipated many open science trends that are now industry standards; we’ve introduced transparent peer-review processes across a wide range of titles; and we’ve encouraged authors to publish a variety of article types, including datasets and methodologies, to support the reproducibility of their research.  

Funders, research institutes, and governments are increasingly calling for OA publishing, and we continue to fully support the mission to make knowledge sharing more equitable. OA articles have no paywalls, allowing anyone, anywhere to access, read, and cite the latest scientific advances. We believe that OA has a crucial role in addressing current and future global challenges by ensuring that peer-reviewed knowledge reaches the widest possible audience.  

BMC’s portfolio now spans more than 300 fully OA journals across 16 disciplines. Explore the full portfolio of BMC journals

Watch the video to explore how we are advancing open, trusted, and community-led science for the future. 

Why publish OA with BMC?

Our publishing model is guided by four key tenets:

  • Trust: Our monthly readership of 6 million demonstrates that the research community trusts our publications. We care about quality research, and we were one of the first publishers to have a dedicated scientific integrity team. All our editors are carefully selected and trained.  

  • Community: Our diverse community of more than 20,000 editorial board members will guide your research through the peer-review process. They play an essential role in helping shape the vision of the journals in our portfolio and representing researchers globally.  

  • Support: We’ll be with you at every step of the publishing journey. We’ll help you find the right home for your research. And once you’ve chosen a journal and submitted your article, we’ll provide personal feedback and ensure that the peer-review process is both rigorous and constructive.  

  • Inclusivity: We offer a home to all robust research. By including datasets and null results, we help researchers avoid collecting the same data twice or repeating experiments that have already been done and led to negative results.

Together, these principles are designed to make publishing open access feel more transparent and supportive, especially for researchers early in their careers who are navigating the process for the first time.  

Learn more about the benefits of publishing open access, including increased citation and usage. 

"The whole process was researcher-centred and there was high cooperation between the editorial team and the authors.” 

– Author, BMC Medical Education

BMC open access funding options

Navigating different OA models can be tiring, so we ensure that our process is as smooth and transparent as possible for researchers at all career stages.  

Our article processing charge (APC) covers all the work involved in getting your manuscript into top shape before publication; managing the peer-review process; proofreading and lay-outing your article; and ensuring that it reaches a wide audience.  

A full list of the APCs for all our journals is easily accessible on our dedicated BMC website. Once your manuscript is accepted, the APC can be paid by your funder, your institution, your employer, or yourself.  

If your institution has a funding agreement in place with Springer Nature, part or all of the APC could already be covered. This is a key point for ECRs: in many cases, your university or institution may already have an open access agreement that covers your fees, but you won’t know until you check.

"The manuscript handling process was very careful yet also very swift. The reviewers' comments were precise and valuable.” 

– Author, Stem Cell Research & Therapy

How to find out whether your APC is covered by an OA agreement

Step 1: Go to the homepage of your journal of choice and click on ‘Explore open access funding’ underneath the ‘Submit your manuscript’ button.  

Step 2: Institutions are pre-filled based on your IP address, but you can update this to reflect your best fit or that of your co-authors.  

Step 3: If your university or institution has an agreement with Springer Nature, the eligibility checker will let you know your funding options.  

Tip: If you’re unsure which institution to select (for example, if you have multiple affiliations or international co-authors), try checking each relevant affiliation to see what funding options apply.

Our four-step process for publishing your research with BMC

  • Submission: Once you’ve chosen the right BMC journal for your work, you can submit your manuscript online. The first step is to navigate to the journal’s website, click ‘Submission guidelines’, and check whether your article meets the formatting and content requirements. When it’s ready to go, click the ‘Submit manuscript’ button.  

  • Peer review: Once your manuscript has been received, if appropriate for the journal, peer reviewers will rigorously evaluate it, assessing the validity of the work, and for our selective journals, the significance of the research. You may be required to make revisions based on their feedback.  

  • Acceptance and publication: Once accepted, your manuscript will be prepared for publication. This is the time when you’ll be charged the APC fee, unless it is already covered through an institutional agreement. We will also add relevant metadata to make sure your article can be discovered easily by those it could benefit. The final article will then be published online and made freely accessible.  

  • Post-publication: After publication, you can track the impact of your work through metrics such as downloads, citations, and social-media mentions. We will provide tools and support to help you maximize the visibility of your research.

Building an equitable future

We remain committed to being a trusted partner for our authors and readers; providing a platform that reaches millions of readers; championing inclusive publishing; and building a diverse community of contributors who feel supported.  

For early-career researchers, this means not only having a rigorous publishing home for your work, but also clearer routes to open access — including funding support through open access agreements where available.

If you’re interested in joining us to advance openness, transparency, and quality in community-led research, you can find out more about open access funding options with BMC.

Related Content:

Working in partnership to make research open, trusted and valuable

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Wed Apr 15 2026

For Springer Nature, 2025 was a year defined by growth, innovation, and a focus on advancing research and learning for the benefit of society.  

Our Annual Report provides an opportunity to reflect on our progress, recognise what working in close partnership with our communities helped us to achieve, and to be clear about where we are headed.   

With global research outputs continuing to increase, the report shows how we are ensuring we continue to meet community expectations around openness, speed and integrity so that science can be trusted and how our responsibility as a publisher remains steadfast - to help research be used more and travel further, to protect the integrity of the scholarly record, and to invest for the long term in ways that benefit the research community.  


Partnering to open up research, at scale  

 Open access (OA) remains central to how we support researchers and funders, and sustainable progress at scale has only been possible through partnership. Working with libraries, funders and institutions worldwide allows us to expand OA in ways that reflect regional needs.    

In 2025, more than 53% of the primary research articles we published were OA, reflecting continued momentum towards a more open scholarly record. This progress is happening at significant scale. Submissions grew by more than 30% to 3.1 million, with 539,000 primary research articles published across disciplines. Managing that growth while maintaining quality matters more than ever.  

The impact of openness is clear in how research is used. Last year, our articles and book chapters were downloaded 5.6 billion times, an increase of over 50% on 2024. This included more than 860 million downloads of content related to the UN Sustainable Development Goals.  

Looking ahead, our focus remains on expanding OA in ways that are sustainable and inclusive. This includes growing our global network of TAs, supporting librarians through the transition to OA, continuing to provide funding support where needed, and working with partners to enable access across regions and institutions.  

  

Partnering to support quality at scale  

We continue to take a researcher‑led approach to technology, investing in AI‑assisted tools developed in partnership with the research community to deliver value at the point of need.  

Central to this is Snapp, our proprietary article processing platform. With more than half our journals now using Snapp, it is provding a more consistent, transparent and efficient publishing experience, while allowing us to embed AI‑enabled tools across screening and editorial workflows. Since launch, it has supported 7 million authors, processed 3.7 million submissions and published over 600,000 articles.  

We apply the same approach beyond research publishing. In education, Macmillan Education Everywhere now supports 3.2 million active users, while in health our Medbee app is used by more than 40,000 doctors – with technology designed to deliver practical value where it is needed most.  

Used responsibly, AI helps us operate at scale and, combined with editorial expertise, ensures quality, accountability and rigour. 

  

Partnering to embed trust  

However, the value of publishing is measured not only in volume or usage, but in trust. I am proud that in 2025, authors, editors and peer reviewers continued to rate their experience with Springer Nature as excellent or good, reflecting the importance of reliable processes and collaboration in a changing ecosystem.  

Trust also depends on people. That is why we increased our dedicated global research integrity team to 75 specialists and continue to apply our “human in the loop” principle across publishing.  

That trust is also reflected in impact. The average number of citations per article rose by 14% compared with 2023, underlining how greater visibility and reach translate into meaningful engagement with research.  

We continue to work with the community to deliver free training in best practice, provide skills development through Nature Masterclasses, and support young doctors via Springer Medizin digital training programmes.  

  

Looking ahead: responsible growth, shared ambition  

While our Annual Report reflects a strong year, our focus is firmly on the future.  

We will continue to invest in OA, in technologies that improve the publishing experience, and in systems that protect the integrity of the scholarly record. We will also continue to act as a responsible business – building on progress in reducing carbon emissions by 50% since 2019, supporting charitable partnerships, and fostering a culture where colleagues can thrive.  

Most importantly, we will keep listening to the communities we serve. The challenges facing research will not be solved by any one organisation alone. Progress depends on partnership – and on a shared commitment to openness, rigour and trust. 


A new wave of women redefining biopharma

T
The Link
By: undefined, Wed Apr 15 2026

Pharmaceutical organisations increasingly recognise that inclusion is essential for innovation, workforce resilience, and robust scientific decision-making. Information professionals play a pivotal role in this, operating at the intersection of people, knowledge and systems. Through their work, they influence how scientific communities connect, how information is shared, and how equitable practices take root.

Our conversation with Dr. Shae Taylor offers a clear view of the challenges women encounter in biopharma and highlights how thoughtful information practices can strengthen participation and visibility across the sector. 

P_Dr.Shae_Taylor © Springer Nature 2026

Introducing Dr. Shae Taylor 

Dr. Shae Taylor’s career reflects a rare combination of scientific depth, technical expertise, and sustained advocacy for women in STEM. With dual degrees in biology and chemistry, she began her career as an analytical chemist before moving into engineering roles and, later, marketing. 

In 2000, she joined Agilent Technologies as a field service engineer specialising in liquid chromatography at a time when only 3 per cent of Agilent’s US field service engineers were women. Alongside her technical work, Taylor became an active leader in the Society of Women Engineers (SWE), heading the SWE@Agilent Employee Network Group, the organisation’s first employee network and for many years its only women‑focused group. 

Today, as North American Marketing Program Manager at Agilent, Taylor draws on a broad perspective shaped by scientific practice, engineering, advocacy, and customer engagement. Her book, Women in Biopharma, part of the Women in Engineering and Science series, documents the professional journeys of women across the global biopharmaceutical industry. 

The spark behind Women in Biopharma 
9783031803482

The idea for the book emerged at a Society of Women Engineers conference, where series editor Jill S. Tietjen led a session on the overlooked contributions of women in STEM. The discussion highlighted how many foundational scientific achievements were made by women whose work has not been widely recognised.

The session struck a chord with Taylor, who saw a clear gap in the Women in Engineering and Science series. Even as biopharma expanded and diversified, there was no volume highlighting the women shaping the field. Given her close work with biopharma customers, Taylor knew she was in a strong position to address this.

What women in biopharma are experiencing today

Across interviews with contributors from around the world, several themes emerged.

  • Persistent hurdles: Women face challenges at each career stage, from early‑career isolation to mid-career caregiving responsibilities and late‑career support for ageing parents. These experiences reflect broader patterns observed across the sciences, where belonging and representation strongly influence retention.
  • Perseverance and adaptability: Despite varied paths, each woman spoke about the need to adapt and persevere in a rapidly changing industry.
  • Structural instability: Volatility caused by mergers, acquisitions, and the dynamics of early‑stage biopharma makes adaptability essential.

“Everyone…encountered hurdles and difficult situations… but none of them let them stop them.”

One story that stayed with Taylor was Isadora’s. She immigrated from Brazil at 17 and faced deep loneliness as she tried to build a life without a community around her. Instead of accepting isolation, she created the support network she wished she had, only to discover how many others were searching for the same thing. She met countless people, men and women alike, who were struggling in similar ways. By bringing them together, she built a space where people could support and encourage one another. As Taylor put it, “She created her own group… and quickly found out she wasn’t the only one.”

Digital transformation: opportunity and risk

With AI and automation reshaping drug discovery, workflow optimisation, and scientific analysis, Taylor emphasises that inclusion must be embedded early in digital transformation.

Her team demonstrated this through an experiment using AI‑generated headshots produced from identical prompts. Results varied dramatically, demonstrating inconsistencies in how people from different demographic groups were represented. As Taylor observes, individuals from underrepresented groups are often the least accurately depicted.

These observations highlight key responsibilities for information managers:

  • AI-driven tools must be evaluated for representational fairness.
  • Metadata, training sets, and algorithmic outputs require scrutiny.
  • Diverse contributors must be involved in system design and governance.

This mirrors broader discussions on how institutions can build more equitable research environments by making it safer to report discrimination, improving support for underrepresented groups and taking deliberate action to improve workplace culture.

Underrepresentation in biopharma

Many girls grow up loving science, mixing things, building things, experimenting and asking questions. But as they reach their preteen years, the cultural messages around them often change. STEM stops being seen as something for everyone and starts being coded as something “for boys.” Taylor says this early loss of belonging is one of the first barriers we need to tackle. Keeping girls engaged means showing, clearly and consistently, that science and technology are not limited to one gender. It also means helping them understand the full range of STEM careers. As she points out, areas like law, policy and regulatory affairs, featured in Women in Biopharma, are essential to the biopharma sector, yet young women rarely recognise them as STEM pathways. Sharing this broader view early can help more girls imagine themselves in the field.

Why women leave and what organisations can do

One of Taylor’s most striking findings is that more than one‑third of women leave STEM roles within five years of graduating. The reasons are complex, but several themes recur:

  • Lack of flexibility, especially for those balancing childcare and eldercare.
  • Pay inequity, which undermines long-term career confidence.
  • Limited visibility of women in senior leadership, with only around 13% of STEM sector CEOs being women.
  • Insufficient support systems, particularly for mid-career and late-career caregiving responsibilities. “We need to switch from parental leave to family leave… across your entire career.”

How information professionals can advance equity

Taylor identifies librarians and information professionals as important enablers of progress. They can:

  • Provide flexible access to digital resources to support flexible working.
  • Use knowledge‑sharing platforms to highlight and amplify women’s contributions.
  • Model inclusive practice through equitable curation, presentation and promotion of content.
  • Curate resources that showcase women’s achievements in science and biopharma.
  • Ensure access to books, case studies and development materials, including the Women in Engineering and Science series.
  • Create safe physical or virtual spaces for networking, mentoring and community building, helping women form supportive communities.

Together, these actions help build a stronger sense of representation and belonging, especially for early‑career researchers who are just beginning their journey in science and often depend on inclusive, supportive environments to grow.

Women in biopharma: A new era of leadership

Taylor’s reflections, and the stories captured in Women in Biopharma, show a sector full of potential, shaped by challenges but also by a new wave of confidence. Young women today are entering STEM ready to break ceilings and define success on their own terms. As Taylor notes:

“Young women today have so much confidence. I'm blown away by it. They want to buck tradition. They want to break that ceiling and achieve success on their own terms, both at work and in their personal lives. And they're rewriting the narrative of what it looks like to be a woman in biopharma.”

For organisations, especially those managing information ecosystems, this creates a clear opportunity. Equitable access to knowledge, inclusive digital transformation, and the amplification of diverse voices directly influence who feels seen, supported, and able to thrive. Information professionals play a pivotal role here: making women’s contributions visible, curating resources that broaden representation, and creating spaces where community and mentorship can grow.

This is exactly what Women in Biopharma, part of the Women in Engineering and Science series, aims to reinforce. By highlighting the experiences and leadership of women across the sector, it not only documents progress but inspires the next generation to see themselves in biopharma’s future. With intentional information practices, that future becomes one where women don’t just enter the field, they help define its direction.

To explore more resources that inform, inspire, and drive new thinking across the research community, visit our Trusted Research hub. It’s a great place to dive deeper into the books, journals and tools that support equitable access to knowledge and shape the future of scientific discovery.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Perceptions of fairness and bias in the scholarly publishing ecosystem: a global survey

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Mon Apr 13 2026

Published today, Perceptions of fairness and bias in the scholarly publishing ecosystem: a global survey, is a new report from Springer Nature, sharing insights from a global survey of over 8,000 researchers on how they perceive bias and where they believe it shows up in the publication process. 

The global research landscape has diversified dramatically in the past decade. Researchers from emerging regions now represent an ever-greater share of research output, yet benchmarking shows that some of the most active countries producing research – especially China and India – remain underrepresented among academic external editors who are usually also practicing researchers in universities, editorial boards, and peer reviewers. This disparity risks reinforcing country-related bias in publishing outcomes.   

These disparities are not unique to any single publisher, and for that reason, this research engaged a broad international community of researchers. The sheer number of responses from researchers is an indication of the strength of feeling on this topic. The findings are clear: most researchers perceive bias in the publishing process, and that this is especially strongly felt in relation to the region and location of the researcher(s), followed by affiliation and network bias. Experience or perceptions of bias affect researchers’ trust and their decisions about where to publish. Encouragingly, researchers also believe that publishers have both the responsibility and the means to act.   

At Springer Nature, we are committed to supporting our editors and reviewers in recognising and reducing bias, to ensure a fair peer review process as well as a more complete and representative global knowledge base. We continue to advance our efforts across key areas identified by researchers in this survey: increasing the regional diversity of our external academic editors to better reflect the global diversity of the research landscape, expanding bias awareness training for editors, increasing transparency through initiatives such as transparent peer review (now available across all Nature family journals and the BMC Series journals) and supporting authors with language-focused services.  

We hope these findings stimulate discussion, reflection and collective action to broaden participation and create greater inclusion and fairness in research publishing. 

Related Tags:

Building trust through transparency: An open science conversation with Geir Kjetil Sandve

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon Apr 13 2026

Welcome to a new series of blog posts, where researchers share their experiences of open science practices and the impact that sharing open data, code or protocols can have. 

Geir Kjetil Sandve is Professor of Scientific Computing and Machine Learning at the University of Oslo in Oslo, Norway. He develops machine learning methods for life sciences and public health, with recent work focusing on climate-sensitive disease prediction. As a senior researcher, Professor Sandve has extensive publishing, teaching, and supervision experience, with articles in journals such as Nature Machine Intelligence, including Improving generalization of machine learning-identified biomarkers using causal modelling with examples from immune receptor diagnostics and The immuneML ecosystem for machine learning analysis of adaptive immune receptor repertoires.  

We asked Professor Sandve to share his experiences of open science practices and the impact that sharing open code can have on public health and research in the age of deep learning. 

Can you briefly introduce yourself and your research area?  

I do research within machine learning, and often I do methodological research which is very tightly inspired by real-use cases. I try to always base my new methodological projects on some concrete need. I have worked in life sciences for 20 years in machine learning; I first worked in genomics, then pharmacoepidemiology, and, for some years, quite intensely with immune receptors, like adaptive immune cells and how they recognise foreign threats. Most recently, I'm spending most of my time on how climate change is affecting health, such as machine learning for malaria and dengue fever, and predicting outbreaks ahead of time. 

How did you first become interested in open science practices?  

I think it was during my PhD, where we published quite a bit in the BMC series, including BMC Bioinformatics and Genome Biology, which published open access articles. I liked that for two reasons. As a computer science researcher, it’s not just about whether you can find a paper in the end but how quickly you can browse and navigate papers. Even though we had access to most of the papers we needed in my PhD, the open access ones were more convenient. That was my entry point. 

For open software, that was more on transparency. I could see that when anything was open science, it was much easier to double-check if things had been done correctly and feel reassured that I could trust the paper in detail. Also, it's much easier to build further on. In my PhD, I spent most of my time on preparation and boilerplate aspects. When I went in a more open software direction, where I tried to create open science projects that were built on open software, I could focus more on new ideas using the context of existing work. 

What motivated you to adopt open science practices?  

I went into research a bit of an idealist. I think it's quite a tough sector to be in, so I feel we have to find motivation in some ideals of science. One is that if I do something, I want it to be as helpful to others as possible. I want others to be able to build on what I've done. The second is trust. In science, we shouldn't be forced to trust people. We should instead always be open to check each other’s work. 

You’re never 100% proud of your research code. You always know that if you had unlimited time, you would make it even better. Allowing yourself to share it and say, ‘Okay, this is what I had time for,’ and being able to trust that you’ve made the right prioritisations is important. If you have done something wrong, there is a big chance that somebody will catch it. 

Have you ever faced any particular challenges or barriers in undertaking open science practices? 

Data sensitivity is one challenge, but another big challenge is the computational cost of ensuring reproducibility, especially when analyses are run frequently. We have practises to ensure transparency, reproducibility, and unbiasedness of results, but if you want to go into deep learning, you simply cannot do them realistically based on computational budgets. I think we are entering a phase where sometimes computation is so intense and demanding that we have to sacrifice a bit of this transparency and reproducibility in order save computational time.  

Also, it’s one thing to share code, but for it to be valuable, people need to be able to run it. That is becoming harder, as it may depend on particular GPUs or system setups. It may also sometimes rely on closed models from large commercial companies or require access to computing centres that are not openly available. I think they are the main challenges we face in the machine learning community specifically. 

Is there a particular success story or example you’re proud of that illustrates the benefits of open science?  

“For researchers from smaller institutions, open science is crucial for being part of a broad international community beyond their own office.”


Geir Kjetil Sandve, Professor of Scientific Computing and Machine Learning, University of Oslo, Norway 

We have one ongoing project that is not yet academically published, but it has already had an impact. I’m collaborating with the HISP Centre to develop DHIS2, which is the world’s largest open-source health information system. It is used as the national health information system in around 70 countries, where vaccination data, medicine stocks, tuberculosis outbreaks, and other health indicators are tracked.  

I’ve worked with them for three years to develop machine learning methodologies to predict climate-sensitive disease outbreaks. While there are many open-source models for early warning systems, we are trying to build a platform that enables such models to be used operationally, as that can be quite challenging in practice. We are building an open community where everything is open source and where we share our ambitions and ideas transparently. The goal is to bring the community together so countries can retain control over the models and how they are used, make informed decisions, build local capacity, and communicate effectively with governments to ensure real-world impact. 

It has been fascinating to me because it goes beyond publishing open access papers or open-source code. It requires an open development cycle, where we contribute core software platform technologies to a shared community and develop them collaboratively. 

Another point is that open science is also a way of contributing to capacity building. For researchers from smaller institutions, open science (its processes, networks, software, and publications) is crucial for being part of a broad international community beyond their own office. 

Have open science practices influenced your career progression? 

Yes, I think so. When I was hired for my permanent position, they wanted someone who could interact with existing research. I was able to say that I bring with me a lot of open and still actively developing code that others can contribute to. This is better for students as they can contribute to open-source code, which facilitates collaboration and interaction with the research environment. Open science practices have also increased the impact of my work. Several people have been inspired by the code I've made, and I have gotten collaborations both nationally and internationally based on it. 

What advice would you give to researchers considering adopting open science practices? 

“Open science is a way of thinking about science and work that makes it feel meaningful and easier to stay motivated in the long run.” 


Geir Kjetil Sandve, Professor of Scientific Computing and Machine Learning, University of Oslo, Norway 

It is completely worth it. I think you gain so much by going in this direction. If you see it as a community and become conscious of your strengths and weaknesses, it will open so many collaboration and learning opportunities. Open science is a way of thinking about science and work that makes it feel meaningful and easier to stay motivated in the long run. 

I feel the point of open science is that work should be possible to reproduce or reuse in practice. To me, open science is not about whether it’s theoretically possible with unlimited time to build on something but about ensuring it’s open in a way that actually invites reuse, transparency, and reproducibility. Sharing code without putting yourself in others’ shoes and considering how it might realistically be reused is not truly in the spirit of open science. It's not about checking a box; it's about actually contributing.

Learn more about open science and sharing research data, code and protocols & methods openly 


Geir Kjetil Sandve, PhD, Professor of Scientific Computing and Machine Learning, University of Oslo, Norway 

Geir Kjetil Sandve © Springer Nature

Geir Kjetil Sandve studied computer science at the Norwegian University of Science and Technology (NTNU). During his PhD, he surveyed, benchmarked and developed machine learning methodology for motif discovery in biosequences. For his postdoctoral studies at the University of Oslo, Norway, he broadened his understanding of statistics, collaborating with biologists and statisticians to pioneer statistical analysis of genomic co-localization. Currently, his main focus is on doing his part to help make our research environment fun but productive, brutally honest but supportive, and visionary while delivering on our promise.


Related content:

  • Open science conversations:

  1. Open science, altruism and impact: An interview with clinical geneticist Zornitza Stark

  2. Bioinformatician Johannes Koester on embodying the spirit of open science

  3. How to do science that matters: Computational biologist Casey S. Greene on purpose-driven open science practices

  4. Open science before it had a name: An interview with molecular biologist Steven Henikoff 

  5. Building the infrastructure for open science: A conversation with Carole Goble 

  • Best practices for transparency and reuse: 

  1. How to share your research protocols and methods openly 
  2. How to share your research code openly 

  • Supporting open science practices:
  1. Why share your research data

  2. Why sharing protocols matters 

  3. Why sharing your code matters 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest

Climate hope in a changing world

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Fri Apr 10 2026

The topic of climate is not often associated with good news. As discussed in a recent Nature Climate Change editorial; data, reporting and people’s lived experiences indicate that climate change is here, and it’s having a real and dangerous effect on global citizens.  

Since the first issue of Nature Climate Change in 2011, an anniversary we are celebrating this April, the world looks very different. The global mean surface air temperature has increased by more than half a degree, 60,323,400 km² of vegetated area has burned (roughly 11 times the area of the Amazon rainforest) and the global average sea level has risen by 52.7mm. Amid this context, it’s understandable that the public mood tips towards anxiety, with around 60% of the 16-25 year olds surveyed saying they felt ‘very’ or ‘extremely’ worried about the future of the planet.  

But in my role as Chief Editor of a global journal, I’m fortunate to see firsthand the breadth of work being done across disciplines and regions. I see risks sharpening, but I also see the response strengthening. This serves as a reminder for those of us working in climate research as much as it does for anyone watching from the outside: if we tell ourselves it’s only bad news, we make it harder to sustain the pace, creativity and collaboration that progress depends on. 

So, let’s look to the successes of the last 15 years: a much broader research community involved in understanding climate change, a clearer sense of how science can inform decisions in the real world, and a far stronger evidence base, to name a few. We’ve seen major milestones in global climate governance, including the Paris Agreement, successive climate COPs and IPCC reports. Over 135 countries have adopted net-zero emissions targets with around 40% of electricity now produced from clean and low-carbon sources. And as we reported earlier this year, there are safeguards in place that prevent a reversal on climate action so far. What’s more, the worst-case climate scenarios, set out in early COPs, are now exceptionally unlikely due to these policy shifts.  

Closer to home, at Nature Climate Change we’ve developed new ways of highlighting success and speeding up action with our Solutions in Practice and Policy Brief features. Research from our pages repeatedly makes the top 10 most talked-about climate-related papers in Carbon Brief’s yearly analysis. And in 2025 alone, Springer Nature published over 114,000 climate-related articles and book chapters.  

Throughout my decade-long tenure at Nature Climate Change, there’s been many moments, people and papers to be proud of (see our 10th anniversary issue for one of my memorable papers at that time.) But one thing in particular stands out. Nature Climate Change was created as the first thematic journal in the Nature Portfolio, designed to bring natural and social sciences together around a shared challenge. It’s wonderful to see that this interdisciplinary approach has become ever more important. Climate change is no longer discussed as a niche interest, but a cross-sector issue. The papers and proposals arriving on our desks now span mitigation, adaptation, impacts, equity, governance, behaviour, finance and technology, often all at once. Today, our pages reflect a wider range of topics, methods and perspectives than anyone could have predicted in 2011. 

Crucially, climate action is also a knowledge challenge. Solutions do not appear fully formed. They are discovered, tested, improved, and scaled. That process relies on research and on the systems that allow knowledge to move from one research group to another, from one discipline to another, and from evidence to decisions. This is where publishing plays an important role, helping to qualify research, so that policymakers and practitioners can trust what they are using. It helps to connect findings, so that we are not solving the same problems in isolation. And it helps to accelerate learning, by making results discoverable, comparable, and ready to be built upon. For addressing climate change, that matters at every step: understanding the physical system, assessing risks and impacts, designing and evaluating interventions, and learning what works in different contexts. 

I am under no illusion about the scale of what lies ahead. Ambition still needs to rise, and implementation needs to catch up. But we have a stronger scientific foundation, better tools, and broader awareness than we did 15 years ago. Most importantly, there is a global community of people who care deeply; researchers, reviewers, practitioners and readers. Nature Climate Change exists because of that community, and for it.  

Related Tags:

Safeguarding Springer Nature collections: the integrity checks you should know about

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri Apr 10 2026

Join us for a look behind the scenes of Springer Nature collections in a special blog series. In today’s blog, Kun Yu, Director of Collections Management and Acquisition, explains how Springer Nature collections safeguard integrity, and why this is so important for the researchers who publish in them. From rigorous guest editor vetting to data-driven topic-picks align, when you publish in a Springer Nature collection, both your work and your reputation benefit, and you also get networking opportunities.

In 2022, Springer Nature launched its Collections Management and Acquisition (CMA) team to drive the growth of high-quality articles via topical collections. Since then, I've been leading this team through the creation of high-quality collections through Springer Nature’s journals, from BMC and Nature to Discover and Springer. These collections are developed based on trusted relationships we’ve built with the global research community. 

Our CMA team oversees collections published across Springer Nature journals, from BMC and Nature to Discover and Springer. By building trusted relationships with researchers worldwide, the team curates’ high quality, topical collections that showcase impactful work.

Delivering trustworthy collection content is our top priority

Collections provide an excellent home for your research because they bring your findings to highly engaged audiences, increase visibility within your field, and place your work alongside other rigorously selected articles. Maintaining the integrity of every collection is therefore essential. It ensures that your research gains the maximum benefit.

Prefer the highlights? Watch the short video below for a quick summary of how we safeguard integrity in our collections.

The difference between collections and journals

Collections are an effective way to group research papers focused on a specific topic and attract relevant and engaged readership interested in the themes or methods covered by the collection. Unlike a journal, a collection is not a standalone publication with its own aims-and-scope and editorial board; instead, it is a curated grouping of articles published within an existing journal (or across multiple journals), brought together under a shared theme to make it easier for readers to discover connected work in one place. 

P_Publish with Impact_Blog Teaser Image © Springer Nature 2026

The benefits of publishing to a Springer Nature collection 

When researchers publish in a Springer Nature collection, their work can enjoy greater visibility and a broader audience because it is surfaced to readers actively following that topic area. And because these collections uphold strong integrity standards, your article is presented alongside accurate, relevant, and properly curated content, reinforcing  credibility for readers and strengthening the overall visibility and impact of your research. 

Springer Nature data show that publishing in collections leads to 31% more citations, 30% more downloads, and 63% higher Altmetrics scores than articles published outside of a collection.   

Sustaining these benefits for our authors requires not only great content, but for the content to uphold integrity and be trustworthy to the reader. How do we achieve this and create impactful Springer Nature collections?

Working with guest editors to safeguard collections 

Our efforts to maintain and protecting research integrity in Springer Nature collections are multi-layered. The content itself must uphold integrity standards. As such, all manuscripts submitted to our collections undergo the same rigorous checks as regular submissions. As collections are guest-edited, we use shared editorial oversight between the collection’s guest editor and the editor-in-chief of the journal in which the collection is published.

Selecting and onboarding collection guest editors 

Here’s how our guest editor selection process works.  

  1. Before a collection is launched, the CMA team conducts thorough research-integrity checks of proposed guest editors. These research-integrity checks include verifying email authenticity, background screening using both internal and external platforms, validating  credentials and expertise, and assessing editorial qualifications. 
  2. The editors-in-chief and publishers of the journals in which the collection will be launched then review the suitability of proposed guest editors and reach a decision.   
  3. Once the guest editor for the collection is selected. the commissioning editors clearly communicate the guest editor’s main responsibilities as well as the journal’s ethical standards.  
  4. After signing Springer Nature’s general data protection regulation (GDPR)-compliant agreement, guest editors are granted temporary and restricted access to the Springer Nature manuscript-handling system.  
  5. The CMA team collaborates with the journal team to provide on-boarding support for the guest editors through tutorials and targeted training on editorial responsibilities, journal policies, research integrity, and the validation checks required during peer review.

Collaborative editorial oversight and responsible editorial practice for integrity  

While guest editors can submit to their own collections, their own research cannot exceed 25% of the total content. All submissions from guest editors are handled by other independent editors to avoid any conflict of interest.   

We also have rules to limit editorial influence over content. For example, guest editors recommend manuscripts to be included in their collection, but the final decision is in the hands of the journal’s editor-in-chief always makes the final decision.   

For each paper submitted to a collection, the journal publishing team is responsible for conducting author conflict-of-interest checks, initial evaluations, scope checking, plagiarism  screening, and peer-review monitoring. If any issues arise, the journal  publishing team speaks with the in-house research integrity group to thoroughly investigate and resolve the case. 

Leading the way on integrity: Adhering to gold-standard guidelines  

The recently published Committee on Publication Ethics (COPE) guidelines on best practices for guest-edited collections have solved a long-standing challenge. In the early days, each academic publishing house developed different editorial models and associated policies based on their own strategies and requirements. This lack of standardisation created inconsistencies in the handling of content in collections. 

The recent COPE guidelines, which arrived at a critical moment, both acknowledge the value of the guest-edited model and help remedy these issues. And I’m proud to say that all our Springer Nature collections have been applying similar principles since well before the formal release of the guidelines in July 2025.

Using data and AI insights to enhance collection article’s impact  

We’re fortunate enough to be witnessing a digitally transformative age in the history of scholarly publishing, with scientific discovery expanding rapidly.   

One way we are embracing this is our data-driven approach to topic selection. Each collection theme is carefully proposed based on the CMA team’s analysis or suggestions from experts in the field. Topics are then approved by the editors-in-chief and in-house editorial teams. Commissioning editors evaluate various metrics to identify the most promising themes.  or suggestions from experts in the field. Topics are then approved by the editors-in-chief and in-house editorial teams. Commissioning editors evaluate various metrics to identify the most promising themes.

Moreover, artificial intelligence (AI) also plays a key role in enhancing the CMA team’s daily operations, especially in topic selection and author outreach. We use AI to map collections to relevant United Nations Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), streamline workflows, and improve strategic alignment. Our AI editor tool, launched earlier this year, is used to explore topics, scope collections, and create marketing text.

This approach, paired with a focus on openness and transparency, gives us confidence that the publishing environment is becoming more diverse, honest, and ethically sound. 

 In summary 

The high quality of Springer Nature collections relies on our thorough checks for guest editors; collaborations with the journal publishing and research integrity teams; and meeting the COPE standards to ensure we continue delivering trustworthy collections.   

If you’re interested in publishing your work in a Springer Nature collection, check out our dedicated Springer Nature collections website, where you can find interviews with guest editors, impact case studies, author success stories, and much more.

Related content

Demystifying the publishing process: What value do open access book publishers add? Part 1

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Apr 8 2026

This article was originally published in 2021 and was last updated in April 2026.

Academic publishers provide a range of services to authors who are looking to publish a book, whether for sharing their results with the research community, for career advancement, to cement their legacy, to fulfil funder requirements or another reason. But why involve a publisher if book authors want to publish their work online? Why not just self-publish?

This two-part blog looks at the value that publishers add for open access book authors, focusing on Springer Nature’s imprints, Palgrave Macmillan, Springer and Apress, all of which offer open access options for books. Find part 2 here.

How do authors choose a publisher?

As a book author, you might carefully choose your publisher based on a range of criteria including reputation of the publisher and their prestigious author list, recommendations from peers, whether there is a suitable book series, and the reach of that publisher to connect your work to relevant communities. If you are publishing an open access (OA) book, these criteria might change, as you might need to find funding for an open access fee, also called a book processing charge, leading to questions such as “what will the publisher be doing for me and my research?”

How do open access books work?

An open access book is a peer-reviewed eBook that can be read or downloaded by anyone, anywhere, immediately upon publication without needing to pay or log in. Authors must be acknowledged, and a Creative Commons (CC) licence indicates how the research can be shared, reused and built upon. Our authors retain copyright and we also provide a print copy of the eBook for purchase.

At Springer Nature there is a book processing charge (BPC) for open access books, which covers all the costs of commissioning, arranging peer review, copyediting and proofreading, production, dissemination and promotion of our authors’ work, including online hosting and indexing. The BPC is typically funded by the author’s funder or institution. This model allows for the permanent and unrestricted distribution of research in a sustainable way.

Quality assurance

If you need just one reason to publish your open access (OA) book through a reputable publisher rather than self-publish, then quality assurance is your answer.

Readers need a guarantee that the scientific developments and research theories presented are sound science and high-quality content. Our open access books are therefore rigorously peer-reviewed as an integral part of the submission and evaluation process. The peer review system ensures that published research is authoritative and meets the international standards set by each discipline. We engage in a collaborative refereeing process for all of our books including open access titles

Abstracting and indexing services also boost quality assurance; the Directory of Open Access Books (a discovery service that indexes open access books) requires that all listed academic open access books are subjected to independent and external peer review prior to publication.

Our authors also have the opportunity to publish in book series that are indexed in reputed databases like Scopus.

A world-class editorial experience

Our experienced and dedicated editorial team provides an attentive and personal editorial experience to authors with guidance and support throughout the writing process, from the proposal to the final product.


“I was very impressed by how quickly it was all done, from making decisions in the earlier stages to the actual production of the book. The production was done well, and I am very happy with the finished product.”

- Springer Nature book author survey response (2024)


Editors help shape the book's content for the market from the outset, providing invaluable advice. You will work closely with an editor in your field to refine your proposal, both before and after the peer review feedback. You might be interested in publishing in one of our book series; your editor can advise on the best fit and will pitch your book to the series editor on your behalf. Editors also work closely with our dedicated open access support teams, helping to identify funding opportunities and navigate institutional requirements.


“Whether you’re looking to publish your first book or you’re a seasoned author, your editor is here to support you from proposal to publication. I love working with authors to develop their books from the germ of an idea to an expertly researched work that will advance their field and even change the world."

- Molly Beck, Executive Editor at Palgrave Macmillan

Publisher prestige

We are proud of our publishing heritage and reputation, and both authors and readers can feel confident in the high quality of our books. Indeed, prestige is important in the world of open access publishing, as there has been an unfortunate rise in ‘predatory publishers’ who charge fees without delivering the promised services. Reputable publishers are well-known and recognised by online indexers as well as the online checklist Think. Check. Submit.

In this interview, open access book author Dr Sven Teske shares why he chose to publish with Springer:

“I have been a scientist and engineer for more than 25 years, and for all of that time I have referred to numerous high-quality technical Springer published books. So given Springer’s reputation and reach, it was an easy choice. In this era of fake news and multiple online sources, it is now more important than ever to provide quality information from established reliable sources.

- Dr Sven Teske, lead editor of Achieving the Paris Climate Agreement Goals


Therefore, choosing a prestigious open access book publisher is not just a matter of pride for the author, but it also carries a signal of quality, increases dissemination of the work as readers trust the publisher, and it can help an author’s career.

Springer Nature is a pioneer in open access book publishing, with over 4,500 open access books and more than 670 million chapter downloads. Our list includes award-winning authors and Nobel winners. We are experienced in providing our authors with the best services they need such as open access options for a range of book types, a free Open Access Funding and Policy Support Service, usage statistics via our platform Springer Nature Link, as well as established dissemination routes. We also participate in community projects such as the OAPEN Open Access Books Toolkit, and we work with funding partners such as Max Planck Society and the University of California, Berkeley Library.

Interested in experiencing the benefits of open access publishing? Visit our open access books hub to learn more about how it all works, or get in touch with a Springer, Palgrave, or Apress publishing editor with your idea.

Related Content:

The publication-to-policy connection: Supporting the real-world impact of research

T
The Link
By: undefined, Wed Apr 8 2026

As public expectations for accountability and transparency continue to rise, institutions and their researchers are increasingly being asked to demonstrate how their work contributes to meaningful change beyond academia, addressing large societal challenges such as the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs). This means that showcasing the real-world impact of research has never been more important.

Amongst others, one of the most powerful measurements of real-world impact is policy influence – when research informs decisions that guide societies. Last year, Springer Nature partnered with Overton, the world’s largest policy document database, to explore how SDG research is cited in policy. These findings were published in the report, From Publications to Policy: The Impact of Research Towards Achieving the Sustainable Development Goals.

In this blog post, we look at these learnings through an institutional lens, to consider how institutions can support their researchers in achieving greater policy impact.

The impact of SDG research in academia and policy

SDG-related work represents a significant and growing share of global research, accounting for approximately 24% of all research published. The importance of these publications in an academic context is well understood. Topics such as climate, health and social development continue to be of great global relevance and urgency, and on average, Springer Nature’s SDG research receives higher average downloads, citations and Altmetric scores than non-SDG research.

When it comes to the impact of SDG research beyond academia, less is known. However, the report’s findings were encouraging: Academic research is cited in SDG-related policy more often than in wider policy – suggesting a greater connection between policy and research within the SDGs.

So how do researchers and their institutions make the most of this connection, and help their research find its way into policy?

How can institutions support the policy impact of research?

The report identified several factors that contribute to the impact of SDG research in policy, highlighting practical levers that institutions can use to help research reach decision makers:

  1. Encourage open access (OA) publishing
    Using a sample of 11 Springer hybrid journals, the report compared OA and non-OA citations in SDG-related policy from 2015 to 2024. The analysis found that OA publications were more likely to have at least one policy citation (32% compared to 18%) and a faster median turnaround time from publication to policy mention (501 days compared to 817 days). By advocating for and facilitating OA publishing, institutions can help their research reach policy faster and more frequently.
  2. Connect researchers with intermediaries
    Not all policy documents cite research directly. The report found that think tanks, IGOs and NGOs are up to 20% more likely to use scholarly research in their SDG documents than government bodies – suggesting there might be a role for these types of organisations as knowledge brokers between research and policy. Strengthening dissemination of research to these actors, and building partnerships, can provide a powerful route to amplify research impact.
  3. Support researchers with science communication
    When studying the policy impact of different types of content within Nature Portfolio journals, the study found that reviews, news, commentaries and editorials are disproportionately cited in policy – 27% of review articles from the sample were cited at least once in SDG policy, followed by 15% of letters and 9% of original papers. This suggests that short form commentary and accessible summaries are valued by policymakers, and assisting and training researchers in translating their findings into more digestible “policy-ready” formats can help them reach a broader audience.
  4. Facilitate collaboration across regions
    The SDGs are inherently global in their nature, with SDG-related research being conducted all over the world. However, the study found that this is not shown in SDG policy, with research from the Global North having a disproportionately high impact – 78% of research cited in SDG policy includes authors based solely in the Global North. This imbalance reflects wider structural barriers within the research ecosystem, but institutions supporting research collaboration can help to amplify research from the Global South and facilitate knowledge exchange between countries facing similar societal challenges.

Reflecting real-world impact within research assessment

All of the recommendations above are inherently tied into the ways researchers are evaluated. Another Springer Nature white paper, The State of Research Assessment, found that a majority of researchers would like their contributions to the “public good” to be weighted more heavily in the assessment of their work. However, current practice falls short, with publication metrics continuing to dominate assessment processes. Only 18% of researchers are assessed on their influence on policy, 23% on whether their outputs are published OA, and 43% on developing international collaborations.

Incentivising these kinds of practices on both an institutional and a wider level is key to maximising their uptake and effectiveness. However, as we have discussed in previous blogs, achieving research assessment reform on a large scale requires buy-in and action from all stakeholders within the research community.

How can publishers support the policy impact of research?

The report also outlined some key recommendations and next steps for publishers. Many of these are similar to those already discussed, including building partnerships with think tanks and IGOs, investing in OA models, increasing efforts to widen geographic representation, and supporting research assessment reform initiatives.

This presents a key opportunity for collaboration between publishers and academic institutions, working together to strengthen the research-to-policy connection, making research more visible and impactful, and drive progress towards the SDGs.

Read the full report, From Publications to Policy: The Impact of Research Towards Achieving the Sustainable Development Goals here.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts! 

Can open access help SDG research achieve greater impact?

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Apr 1 2026

For researchers working on the UN’s 17 Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), progress depends on research reaching beyond academia – policymakers, businesses, educators, and the public – to translate findings into action.

recent Springer Nature report, From publications to policy, explored how SDG-aligned research is cited in policy documents worldwide, analysing who uses it, where, and how publication choices – such as access model or journal selectivity –influence its uptake. In this blog, we explore one key finding: how open access (OA) can expand the visibility, reach, and policy engagement of your work.

Open access and the SDGs 

When you publish open access, your research is available to anyone,

anywhere. Where your work is aligned with global development priorities, that reach matters even more. 

Open access continues to grow across Springer Nature’s portfolio. In 2024, over 50% of our primary research – 240k articles – was open access, expanding the global pool of knowledge for everyone.  

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019

SDG-related publications are even more likely to be open access: 58% of all Springer Nature’s SDG-related articles were published OA in 2024. This reflects a strong alignment between open dissemination and global development priorities: removing barriers supports the UN’s 2030 agenda by ensuring that knowledge essential to sustainable development is accessible, reusable, and actionable.  

What impact does open access have on SDG research for policymaking? 

The impact of making more SDG-related research OA has been explored in previous research, finding that it can achieve higher usage and attention, compared with non-OA research, and that it attracts more non-academic attention, helping to boost real-world impact. In our new SDG impact report, we explored this from a policy perspective – how does OA publication influence the way SDG research is used in policymaking? 

1. Open access widens availability for policymaking 

The report mapped the access status of scholarly research cited by SDG-related policy documents. Although patterns vary by country, in several – including Argentina, Brazil, Kenya, Nigeria and South Africa – OA research accounts for more than 55-60% of SDG research policy citations.  

This trend is consistent with OA usage patterns across our journals, where OA enables greater access to knowledge in countries where availability can be limited. In 2024, downloads of OA content from Low- and Middle-Income Countries increased by 21%. Open dissemination can broaden the potential audience for research relevant to global challenges. 

Open access also broadens dissemination to readers outside well-resourced academic systems. The report identified the key role think tanks, NGOs, and IGOs play as users of academic research in policy documents. Publishing OA facilitates their ability to engage with and translate research into policy recommendations. 

2. Policymakers often use open access research faster 

With the SDGs addressing fast-moving challenges, speed of access matters. We found evidence that open access reaches policy faster, with a shorter median time to first citation (501 days), compared to 817 days for non-OA articles.  

3. Open access is more frequently cited in policy 

The report also showed that open access articles were more likely to receive at least one policy citation and, on average, a higher number of citations per article compared with non-OA articles. It’s worth noting that the distribution is highly skewed, and there is a long-tail pattern of policy influence. 

Publishing your SDG-related work open access 

Together, these findings indicate that when your research supports the SDGs, considering how it is shared may be as important as where it is published.

Open access can deliver a multiplier effect, increasing discoverability, broadening readership, and speeding up transfer into policymaking. It becomes immediately accessible to a broader range of readers geographically and reaches wider non-academic audiences who can translate evidence into policy.

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019

If you are working on SDG-related research, OA can help increase the likelihood it is discovered, read, and cited beyond academia. 

Springer Nature supports many routes for you to publish OA, across over 3k journals and a growing OA books portfolio. We work with institutions

worldwide to establish centralised funding for OA, such as our transformative agreements which now support researchers at over 3,700 institutions worldwide. Choosing an inclusive journal – which often emphasise open practices and multidisciplinary collaboration – can also help facilitate the transfer of your research into policy. Our report found that inclusive journals, such as the Discover series, receive slightly more SDG policy citations than comparative selective journal articles.  

Our journal editors are keen to make sure that SDG relevant research reaches those best placed to implement it. 

“Most of the content we publish in BMC Public Health aligns with SDG 3, but also with SDG 4, SDG 2, SDG 16, SDG 5 and SDG 10, often providing interdisciplinary insights. We really value these studies, as they address urgent global challenges and aim to improve health, reduce inequality and shape public health policy and practice.


We are proud to publish SDG‑related research open access, as this means that anyone, anywhere, can access it, increasing the likelihood of collaboration across countries and communities. As Editors, we are always keen to see the research we publish making a difference in real life, beyond the academic setting.”


Lorena Verduci, PhD, Senior Editor, BMC Public Health

To explore more findings on how research informs policymaking, read the full SDG impact report  

Related content: 

Don'tmiss the latest news and blogs,sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest! 

Emerging librarian roles in supporting ethical and rigorous scholarship

T
The Link
By: undefined, Wed Apr 1 2026

As research institutions worldwide face a confluence of major financial, policy, and technology pressures, the current moment presents new challenges, and opportunities, for those dedicated to upholding the standards of integrity and transparency in research. With the World Conference on Research Integrity (WCRI 2026) convening in Vancouver this May, it’s the perfect time to reflect on the pivotal, yet often understated, role that librarians play in supporting researchers and fostering a culture of ethical publishing.

This blog post serves as a companion to the poster presentation I prepared for the WCRI in collaboration with Denis LaCroix of University of Alberta Libraries, delving deeply into how librarians have become the “hidden thread of trust” in the quest for research excellence.

How librarian roles are evolving in research support

Traditionally, librarians have been primarily seen as custodians of knowledge and facilitators of access to information. However, with the rise of open access publishing and open science practices more generally, their responsibilities have expanded far beyond shelving books and managing databases. The seeds of these changes were already visible in the early 2000s, with the Council on Library and Information Resources’ No Brief Candle report in 2008 an early and important call for a fundamental rethinking of academic libraries for the digital age. Research Libraries United Kingdom’s subsequent Re-Skilling for Research report (Auckland 2014, based on survey data from 2012) offered an even more granular template highlighting the skills librarians would need to acquire to adapt to the changing needs of the researchers they serve.

Today, the library foreseen in those visionary documents is a reality at many research institutions, with librarians actively engaged in guiding researchers through the complexities of the scholarly communication process, including Copyright and intellectual property considerations, data management, and compliance with institutional and funder requirements.

Librarians as advocates for research integrity

For all their foresight, the authors of those seminal CLIR and RLUK reports did not focus their attention on issues of research integrity. Yet a number of recent articles, most notably Matthew Goddard and Zachariah Motts’ Publishing Integrity series in Katina (2025), have highlighted how deeply entwined librarian’s research support activities are with broader efforts to ensure research integrity and broader public trust in scientific research.

With the rise of open access publishing, predatory journals, and increasing pressure to publish for professional advancement, researchers face a labyrinth of ethical considerations. Librarians are perhaps uniquely positioned to offer impartial guidance, helping academics navigate these challenges by providing guided access to trustworthy sources of information. Through workshops, one-on-one consultations, and the development of online resources, librarians educate researchers about issues such as plagiarism, proper citation practices, data sharing, and reproducibility. And as Goddard and Motts observe, the rapid uptake of open access agreements has given librarians an important point of entry to engage in promoting ethical research practices, particularly as advocates for the interests of readers of scholarly publications.

This engagement is timely, as publishers are also playing an increasingly visible role in reinforcing research integrity, creating important opportunities for collaboration with librarians. For example, here at Springer Nature, we have made research integrity a core pillar of our publishing mission, investing in dedicated integrity teams, editorial training, and transparent reporting on retractions and corrections. Through our Research Integrity Group, Springer Nature advises editors, reviewers, and authors on ethical best practices, investigates suspected misconduct, and aligns its policies with international standards and guidelines such as those shared by the Committee on Publication Ethics (COPE). These publisher-level efforts complement librarians’ local guidance, enabling more consistent, communitywide support for responsible research conduct.

Supporting best practices for ethical publishing

In recent years, publishers have increased transparency around how integrity checks are embedded throughout the submission and peer review process. Springer Nature publicly shares data on editorial screening, investigations, and retractions, underscoring a commitment to accountability and trust in the scholarly record. Integrity checks are supported by a combination of human expertise and technological tools, including AI-assisted screening designed to detect issues such as convoluted or nonsense text, problematic images, and irrelevant or suspicious references. By documenting these efforts, Springer Nature provides librarians with authoritative examples they can reference when advising researchers on journal selection and responsible publishing practices.

This is critical because of librarians increasing involvement in the publication process itself, working with faculty, and, in some cases, journal editors, to promote transparency and ethical publishing. This includes supporting the use of tools for plagiarism detection, advising on fair and responsible authorship, and helping researchers choose reputable journals for their work. In many institutions, librarians also lead or participate in committees that review cases of suspected misconduct and provide recommendations for corrective action.

Furthermore, librarians are advocates for open science practices, helping researchers comply with mandates for open data and open access publishing. They assist with the creation and maintenance of institutional repositories, and the placement of research outputs such as protocols, computer code, and datasets in specialized repositories, contributing to the verifiability of research studies and ensuring those outputs are discoverable and preserved for future generations.

Collaboration at the heart of research integrity

The most successful efforts in research and publishing integrity are collaborative. Librarians work closely with researchers, administrators, IT professionals, and legal counsel to build robust systems and policies that foster ethical scholarship. By participating in multidisciplinary teams, librarians help bridge gaps in knowledge and understanding, ensuring that integrity is woven into every stage of the research lifecycle.

These initiatives also highlight the shared responsibility across the research ecosystem. Springer Nature emphasizes collaboration among authors, editors, reviewers, publishers, and the broader research community to safeguard integrity at every stage of publication. Librarians, positioned at the intersection of researchers, institutional policy, and external publishers, are key partners in translating these global integrity frameworks into practical, local support. By engaging with publisher guidance, training resources, and openly available integrity data, librarians help ensure that ethical standards are not only upheld but clearly understood by the research communities they serve. 

Preparing for the next chapter in research integrity

As the field of research integrity continues to evolve, the role of librarians will only become more vital. Their expertise, adaptability, and commitment to ethical scholarship make them indispensable allies in the pursuit of trustworthy and impactful research. The World Conference on Research Integrity highlights the need for ongoing dialogue and innovation, and librarians are ready to add their thread to the fabric of research integrity.

We invite conference attendees and the broader research community to engage with librarians as partners in research excellence. Together, we can safeguard the values that underpin scientific progress and ensure that scholarly publishing remains a beacon of truth and credibility in uncertain times.

Interested in exploring the findings in more detail? You can view the poster presented at WCRI 2026, which highlights the key insights and recommendations discussed in this article.

Related content

Get the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts

Empowering researchers through communication, mentorship and collaboration

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Mar 31 2026

Research today moves faster, collaborates more widely, and reaches further beyond traditional boundaries than ever before. New technologies, new partnerships, and new expectations are shaping how scientific ideas gain attention and create impact. In this environment, visibility and communication sit alongside excellence as powerful drivers of momentum.

Few people understand this evolving landscape better than Olga Bubnova, Chief Editor of the newly launched Nature Sensors. With broad experience evaluating high‑quality research across sensing, materials, robotics, and biomedical innovation, she has a panoramic view of where science is heading, and the skills that help researchers thrive.

In our conversation, Bubnova shares how researchers can elevate their work through confident communication and intentional visibility, and how organisations can create the structures that support this.

Visibility and communication as research catalysts

As the research landscape continues to broaden and accelerate, visibility has become a powerful source of momentum for researchers and the organisations that support them. Bubnova sees researchers embracing communication as an integral part of their work: a way to share ideas with clarity, participate in their communities, and create opportunities for collaboration.

She describes this as a form of “showmanship in science,” expressed through thoughtful presentations, confident public speaking, meaningful conference engagement, and purposeful use of online platforms. For organisations, this creates exciting opportunities to equip researchers with communication training, presentation support, and structured visibility programmes that elevate both individual talent and organisational reputation.

Indeed, visibility is most impactful when guided with intention. With supportive institutional frameworks, such as advisory guidance for online engagement and best practices for professional storytelling, organisations can help researchers step forward with confidence while reinforcing a strong, consistent presence in the wider research community.

“How people present their ideas and being able to communicate science clearly is extremely important.” - Olga Bubnova, Chief Editor, Nature Sensors

Reputation flourishes in environments that champion growth and celebrate progress. Bubnova highlights how mentorship, recognition, and encouragement shape researcher confidence and help create teams that thrive. These elements underscore the influence organisations have in nurturing positive, vibrant research cultures where talent can flourish.

Strengthening STEM pipeline for women through early engagement

Bubnova offers a clear and pragmatic view on the importance of supporting women in science, particularly in fields where representation remains limited. She observes that the pathways into research begin long before university, shaped by the moments when young learners see what science can be and who it is for. When girls encounter real scientific role models and engaging examples of discovery early on, they form strong, positive connections to STEM that stay with them as they grow.

As Bubnova explains, this journey “starts much, much earlier… from school, almost elementary school,” where curiosity first becomes confidence. Early visibility helps broaden the pipeline by showing young women that their ideas and perspectives have a place in scientific discovery.

Research organisations can play a meaningful role in this. Outreach programmes, collaborations with schools, and initiatives that celebrate diverse researchers help young learners recognise their potential. Partnerships between organisations, funders, industry, and publishers also create valuable opportunities to bring inspiring scientific role models directly into classrooms and community spaces. These shared efforts support a more inclusive future for science by opening doors early and often.

Recognition programmes amplify this further. Through her involvement with the Sony Women in Technology Award, Bubnova has seen how visibility can shape a researcher’s trajectory. Awardees gain recognition, build new networks, and access opportunities that strengthen both their work and their confidence. This demonstrates the impact of platforms that highlight exceptional women in STEM and empower them to grow, contribute, and lead.

The expanding world of sensing and the power of interdisciplinarity

Just as visibility is essential to broadening participation in science, so too is it key to bringing emerging fields into focus within a research community. From people to ideas, Bubnova sees visibility as a catalyst.

The launch of Nature Sensors comes at a moment of remarkable creativity across sensing technologies, with innovations emerging across healthcare, robotics, environmental monitoring, materials engineering, and beyond. Bubnova highlights several areas shaping this momentum, each opening new opportunities for collaboration and real‑world impact.

One area of rapid development is intelligent sensing, systems that do far more than detect signals. These platforms interpret data, feed it back into the system, and continually refine how information is sensed, processed, and applied. This creates responsive technologies that adapt to their environments and support smarter decisions.

Alongside this, multimodal sensing is gaining traction. Inspired by the way our own bodies gather information through sight, sound, smell, and touch, these platforms combine multiple sensing modes into one system. This blended approach produces richer, more nuanced data and expands what sensing technologies can achieve across practical applications.

Bubnova also points to the momentum behind miniaturisation and edge sensing. As devices become smaller and more portable, advanced capabilities once limited to controlled environments such as ultrasound or MRI‑style insights can now support medical, industrial, and consumer use cases in entirely new ways. These innovations bring sensing technology directly into real‑world contexts where it can make an immediate difference.

Across all these areas, societal impact plays a central role. Bubnova emphasises the value of research tested in everyday environments, where sensing systems demonstrate how they support people, communities, and industries. This focus aligns closely with the journal’s vision: Championing work that is scalable, deployable, and purposeful.

What unites these developments is their inherently interdisciplinary nature. Modern sensing research sits at the intersection of engineering, biology, materials science, clinical insight, data science, AI, and embedded systems. Each discipline contributes depth and perspective, creating solutions that are both innovative and deeply aligned with user needs.

“When teams begin with a real‑world problem, everything becomes naturally interdisciplinary.” - Olga Bubnova, Chief Editor, Nature Sensors

Supporting interdisciplinary teams helps strengthen internal research ecosystems, spark new ideas, and encourage collaborative thinking across traditional boundaries. It also opens pathways for partnerships in sectors where sensing technologies are evolving quickly, giving organisations a clearer view of emerging trends, and helping them stay ahead of new possibilities. This is a field full of energy and one where collaborative, cross‑functional thinking continues to shape what comes next.

Supporting researchers in a changing landscape

Supporting researchers today means recognising that their needs are evolving and that the environment around them is evolving even faster. When organisations invest in communication skills, mentorship, and meaningful opportunities for collaboration, they create the conditions where ideas can grow with confidence. These foundations help teams step into new opportunities with confidence and lead the way in their fields.

This is also the intention behind Nature Sensors. The journal aims to bring forward‑looking research into view while celebrating the people who drive that progress, expanding visibility, strengthening connections across disciplines, and spotlighting innovations with real‑world impact. It reflects a research culture that is increasingly dynamic, interconnected and shaped by how well we support the individuals at its heart.

To explore journals and tools that align with your own organisational focus areas, and to find additional resources that help enhance researcher visibility, communication and collaboration, visit the Nature Portfolio resources hub for librarians.

Related content

Don’t miss out on the latest news and blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts.

CINCEL libraries explore the opportunities and risks of AI in research support

T
The Link
By: undefined, Thu Mar 26 2026

AI is quickly reshaping how research is done, and what researchers expect from their libraries. In September/2025 a webinar hosted by Chile’s Consorcio para el Acceso a la Información Electrónica (CINCEL) and Springer Nature, librarians explored the concepts, trends, and practical use cases that matter most to academic library services today.

CINCEL is Chile’s national consortium for scientific information. Since 2003, it has helped universities and public institutions expand access to international journals, books, and digital resources, supporting more equitable access to research across the country. To continue empowering its librarian community, CINCEL partnered with Springer Nature to host a webinar focused on AI in practice. The session encouraged consortium librarians to explore how AI can support their daily activities, while supporting the research community.

The webinar began with a quick pulse check to see if the librarians were using AI in their tasks. The pull result showed that 41% had experimented but didn’t use them regularly, 39% used AI for specific tasks, and a smaller group had not used AI yet, or weren’t sure what “counts” as AI.

Building on this context, the webinar introduced core AI terminology and the technologies most relevant to academic libraries today. This foundation allowed for a broader conversation about what AI can offer, from enhancing services to supporting researchers more efficiently, while also addressing the questions and ethical considerations that come with adopting new tools.

Here’s a look at the central points raised during the webinar, providing a straightforward overview of emerging AI trends that can inform your library’s next steps.

From AI foundations to the idea of superintelligence

To raise the audience's knowledge level, the webinar began providing simple definitions of AI concepts. At its simplest, Artificial Intelligence (AI) is the ability of a system to perform tasks we associate with human intelligence, such as understanding language, recognising patterns, making predictions, or generating content. In the library context, it could be translated as faster drafting, summarisation, cataloguing, translation, and support for discovery workflows.

  • Large Language Models (LLMs): LLMs are AI models trained on massive collections of text to understand natural language prompts and generate humanlike responses. Well-known LLMs include ChatGPT, Copilot, Gemini, and Claude. They perform tasks such as drafting, summarizing, translating, and answering questions.
  • Machine Learning (ML) Techniques: LLMs are built using ML techniques that enable them to learn from large datasets and predict relevant outputs. The session covered four key ML approaches:
    • Supervised learning: Learns from labelled examples (e.g., correct/incorrect) and uses this knowledge to make predictions, for example, usage predictions.
    • Unsupervised learning: Finds patterns or clusters in data without labels; useful for uncovering trends such as usage behaviour.
    • Reinforcement learning: Improves through trial-and-error feedback, optimising decisions over time.
    • Deep learning: A subset of ML that uses multi‑layer neural networks to process unstructured data such as long text, images, and audio.

The webinar also highlighted a practical distinction: Generative AI creates content, while retrieval-augmented generation (RAG) combines generation with search, returning answers grounded in specific documents (often with citations). For research support, grounding and traceability are essential.

Finally, the session briefly defined two long-term concepts that often appear in AI conversations: artificial general intelligence (AGI), a hypothetical AI that could perform any intellectual task a human can, and superintelligence, which would exceed human capability across domains. These ideas remain speculative, but they continue to shape debates about AI governance and safety.

How libraries are putting AI to work

As libraries continue to navigate rapid developments in AI, the webinar highlighted several trends that are likely to be felt most directly in 2025. These include the emergence of AI agents and increased automation, the growing availability of smaller language models (SLMs), expanded data‑centre infrastructure, and rising attention to environmental impact and workforce change.

Rather than discussing these shifts in isolation, the session connected them to the practical opportunities already available to libraries. Many of these trends are influencing day‑to‑day work in small but meaningful ways, creating new options for streamlining tasks, enhancing services, and supporting decision‑making. This set the stage for a series of concrete examples showing how libraries are beginning to apply AI today.

  • Content creation/revision, Translation, Data analysis (user behavior, collection usage, predictions): Draft emails, instructional materials, workshop outlines, or guides, tasks that often take librarians considerable time to refine. Tools: AI Platforms (Chat-GPT, Gemini, Copilot, Claude, Perplexity, Grok, Deep Seek).
  • Synthetic Videos: Product and service demos, tutorials, educational videos on specific topics, and short videos for social media. Tools example: Prezi, Colossyan, Synthesia, HeyGen, StoryKit.
  • AI Agents and Chatbots: Process automation (cataloguing, classification, metadata), virtual assistants and chatbots: 24/7 user support. Example of tools: Copilot Studio, Chatbase, Botsonic, QuickChat.  Real-world example: bot use at Hong Kong Polytechnic University Library.
  • More advanced tools for Data Analytics and Design/Prototyping: Lovable (Create interactive forms, Design thematic microsites, Develop internal tools, Prototype innovation ideas) and Google Colab (Bibliographic data analysis, Information visualization, Task automation).

The takeaway: AI is already useful in small, concrete ways, especially when it reduces routine work and frees time for higher-value research support.

Ethical, responsible and transparent AI use

The webinar stressed that AI outputs can reflect bias in training data (including gaps in language and cultural coverage). The recommendation is to treat AI results as drafts and always check for: validation, contextualisation, and uneven performance across user groups.

Another essential theme: Data privacy is a key concern. Many free AI tools use submitted information to train or improve their models, which means anything entered may not stay confidential. Librarians should be cautious and ensure they do not share sensitive or restricted content when using such tools.

Throughout the discussion, one message remained consistent: Keeping a human in the loop is critical. AI systems can produce plausible but incorrect information, and expert review is essential to maintain accuracy, trust, and integrity.

SN AI capabilities supporting the research community

The webinar also shared examples of Springer Nature editorial AI tools to support researchers, improve workflows, and strengthen research integrity.

Nature Research Assistant (currently in beta) is designed to help researchers work through growing volumes of literature by supporting discovery, summarising evidence, and helping with early drafting.

For research integrity, Springer Nature has developed AI tools such as our irrelevant reference checker tool and our AI-generated nonsense-text-checking tool, previously known as Geppetto. After internal use, Springer Nature donated Geppettoto the STM Integrity Hub to support wider adoption across the community.

Springer Nature also supports global collaboration through free AI-powered translation services for book authors, and through protocols.io, which can convert existing documents into interactive, publishable protocols (with careful review of imported content).

Preparing libraries for an AI‑driven research future

The session wrapped up by looking ahead at what growing AI adoption could mean for academic libraries. Rather than diving into big projects straight away, librarians were encouraged to start small, try out simple tools, set clear goals, and gradually build confidence. Even testing an AI assistant for common questions or using a tool to summarise a long document can help teams get a feel for where AI genuinely adds value.

Collaboration came through as another key theme. Creating communities of practice, teaming up with colleagues from other departments, or joining hackathons can make it easier to learn, swap ideas, and experiment together. These kinds of shared efforts have already sparked creative solutions in other settings, including prototypes developed within Springer Nature.

Besides introducing practical ways to begin using AI in libraries, responsible adoption is key. The webinar emphasized the importance of using AI ethically and responsibly, guided by Springer Nature’s AI Principles: Dignity, Respect, and Minimizing Harm; Fairness and Inclusivity; Transparency; Accountability; Privacy and Data Governance.

Looking ahead, building AI literacy will help everyone navigate changes in research workflows. Springer Nature’s publication Perspectives on AI in Scholarly Communications brings together voices from across the ecosystem and offers helpful context on how AI is influencing the way research is produced, shared , and evaluated. These insights can support libraries as they consider how AI might fit into their own services and future planning.

Related content

Get the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Starting your career? Here’s how Springer can help you publish open access

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Mar 25 2026

As an early career researcher (ECR), you’re likely to be seeking funding, building a reputation, establishing your profile, and trying to make your work stand out — all at once. Publishing open access (OA) can help you do exactly that. It puts your research in front of the people who need it — fellow researchers, policy makers, practitioners, and students around the world — immediately and forever, without a paywall standing in the way.

At Springer, we believe knowledge should travel as far as possible, and we’ve been helping researchers achieve that for more than 180 years. Today, OA is central to that mission. 

This blog post is part of a series on OA funding options. Here, we focus on what’s available to you as an ECR publishing with Springer, whether you’re working on a journal article, an individual book chapter, or a whole book.

Why make your research publications open access? 

OA research is freely available online from the moment it’s published. This means more readers, more citations, and more opportunities to make a real difference with your work — which really matters when you’re at the start of your career. 
 
Publishing OA can help you: 

  • Increase the visibility and discoverability of your research. 

  • Reach a broader audience and attract more citations. 

  • Share findings faster across disciplines and regions. 

  • Comply with funder or institutional OA mandates. 

  • Build your profile at a critical stage of your academic career. 

We know that the cost of OA publishing can feel like a barrier, especially early on, when budgets are tight and institutional support may seem lacking. That’s why we offer a range of funding routes to help make it happen.

Publishing open access articles 

Springer publishes both fully OA journals (where every article in the journal is freely available) and hybrid journals that allow you to make your article OA within a subscription journal — giving you flexibility to publish your research in the right journal. The evidence is striking: OA articles in Springer hybrid journals are accessed 4 times more often and cited 1.6 times more often on average.

Article processing charges: how to cover them 

Unlike traditional subscription journals, where publishing is free to authors, OA publishing typically involves an article processing charge (APC) to cover the costs at every stage of the publication process, from administering peer reviews to copy-editing and hosting the final article on dedicated servers. But there are several ways these can be covered or reduced — and you may already have access to funding you don’t know about. 

Open access agreements 

Publishing your article through an OA agreement is the easiest route to OA for eligible authors. Many institutions provide financial support for researchers to cover APCs, often through OA agreements with publishers — either independently or through a consortium across multiple institutions. To find out what’s available at your institution, browse Springer Nature’s OA agreement pages, which shows details of the agreements in each region or country. Your university library is also a great resource — and you may find your APC is already fully covered. 

Research grant funding 

Your grant funding may cover OA publication costs. Many funders now actively encourage or even require OA publishing, so it’s worth checking your grant terms first. 

Waivers and discounts 

Springer offers APC waivers and discounts for authors based in eligible low- and middle-income countries and considers requests from authors facing financial hardship on a case-by-case basis. You can find the list of eligible countries in our APC waivers and discounts

Publishing open access books 

For many researchers, particularly in the humanities, social sciences, and interdisciplinary, a book is more than a publication. It’s a statement of expertise and an important milestone. Springer offers OA publishing for single-author books, contributed volumes, and edited books, all instantly freely available online upon publication. 

OA books are widely downloaded — Springer’s OA portfolio has achieved over 200 million chapter downloads since 2013.

“We are moving faster as a society — we need things at the end of a click for immediate access. If it isn’t, then it won’t be used or cited as much.” 

Dr. Roseli Pellens, co-editor of Biodiversity Conservation and Phylogenetic Systematics (SpringerOpen, 2016)


Individual chapters can also be published OA via a chapter processing charge (CPC), making it a realistic option if you’re contributing to an edited volume rather than authoring a whole book. For an ECR, that kind of visibility can open doors to collaborations, speaking invitations, and career opportunities you might not have expected. 

Book processing charges: your options 

Publishing an OA book involves a book processing charge (BPC) — but, like articles, there are several options to cover it. 

Institutional support

A growing number of universities maintain dedicated OA book funds, and many of these are increasingly accessible to ECRs. Check with your institution’s library or research office. 

Research funders  

Some funding bodies allow grants to cover OA book costs, particularly where the publication is a direct output of funded research. If you are applying for a grant, it is worth checking with your funder early, ideally before you finalise your application. 

Collaborative funding 

For edited books or collaborative projects, BPCs can often be shared across contributing institutions, departments, or co-editors, making what might seem like a high cost more manageable. 

Tools and support to help you find funding 

Not sure where to start? You’re not alone. OA funding can feel daunting to navigate for the first time, but we’ve built tools and services to make the process easier. 

Our journal and funding finder is a quick way of matching your research to the correct Springer journal, as well as exploring the OA funding options available to you. It’s a practical first step if you’re not sure which journal to target or what funding might apply to you. 

We also offer a free OA support service. Our team can help you identify funding available through your institution or funder, connect you with your institution’s OA coordinator, guide you through the application process, and even help you demonstrate the benefits of OA to support your application. With more than 350 APC funds available worldwide — across over 170 funders, 130 institutions, and a further 170 institutions distributing OA block grants — you are sure to find the right support. 

Getting to grips with your funding options early is a good approach and will help you avoid any unwelcome surprises later. 

Where knowledge transforms into action 

At Springer, we are more than a publisher — we are a partner to the global research community, genuinely invested in your success. OA is how we make sure your work reaches the audience it deserves: the researchers who will build on it, the practitioners who will use it, and the decision-makers who need it.

Want to find out more? Explore your OA funding options here and find out what support is already available to you.

Related Content:

How Chinese research is shaping global SDG policy

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Mar 24 2026

As the world pushes harder to meet the United Nations’ Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) by 2030, research has become more important than ever. Whether it’s tackling climate change or improving global health, real progress depends on strong evidence and a research community that’s collaborative and globally connected. 

According to recent findings in Springer Nature’s SDG Impact ReportFrom publications to policy - The impact of research towards achieving the

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019

Sustainable Development Goals, one trend stands out: China has emerged as one of the most influential players in global SDG research and policy. Not only is China now producing the largest volume of SDG-related research, but that research is also generating significant academic impact and shaping sustainability policy far beyond its borders. 

This blog explores three key dimensions of this upward trajectory: 

  1. China’s rapid growth as a contributor of SDG-related research 
  2. The increasing academic citation impact of China’s SDG research output 
  3. How Chinese research is influencing global policy aligned with the SDGs 

China: Now the largest contributor of SDG‑related research 

Over the past two decades, worldwide academic engagement with the SDGs has grown substantially. Yet few countries have expanded their research output as rapidly, or as consistently, as China. According to the report, China is now the single largest contributor of SDG‑related research articles globally. 

Long-term growth outpacing global averages 

A comparison of compound annual growth rates (CAGR) across regions highlights just how significant China’s contribution has become. The SDGs were adopted in 2015. Since then, China's SDG‑related research output has grown by an average of 21% annually. For context, this compares to 5% in the United States, around 9% in Europe, 13% in Africa, 17% in India and 13% elsewhere in Asia. 

This growth trend extends back before the Goals themselves, with SDG‑related research from China expanding at 20% in the period 2000 - 2015, once again the highest among major global regions – and showing China’s longstanding commitment to research on sustainability. 

SDG research growing faster than non-SDG output 

Importantly, the growth of SDG-linked research in China significantly outpaces the growth of its overall research output. While the CAGR for all Chinese research between 2016 and 2024 stands at 12%, SDG-related publications grew at nearly double that rate. 

This indicates not only a broad expansion of national research capabilities, but also a deliberate and increasing prioritisation of sustainability-focused inquiry. 

Rising academic influence: China’s SDG research impact 

Volume alone does not capture the full story. The impact of research, reflected through citations and academic uptake, is an equally important indicator of its influence. 

China’s citation impact: from lowest to highest 

In 2000, China had one of the lowest average citation impacts among major research nations. But by 2022, that landscape had changed dramatically. According to the report, China now holds the highest average citation impact for SDG‑related articles, highlighting a major shift in the global distribution of sustainability research leadership.

China SDG Research-mean citation_600x340 © Springernature 2026

Several factors have seemingly contributed to this rise: 

  • Greater international collaboration 
  • Strengthening of national research infrastructure 
  • Increased openness and visibility of Chinese research outputs 
  • Growing expertise in fields central to the SDGs, including climate science, health, and engineering 

SDG articles outperform non-SDG in citation impact 

Across different regions, research related to the SDGs tends to receive more citations than non‑SDG work, a sign that sustainability-focused studies are increasingly seen as impactful and relevant for addressing societal challenges. China is a clear example of this pattern: Chinese SDG publications consistently attract more citations, on average, than its non‑SDG research output, respectively 28%, 58% and 46% higher in mean citations in 2000, 2025 and 2022. 

This indicates that China is not only producing more sustainability research, but it is producing research that is resonating strongly within the global academic community. 

Impact outside academia: Chinese research in global SDG policy 

Perhaps the most compelling aspect of China’s growing role in SDG research is its influence beyond academia. Research that shapes policy has the potential to drive tangible societal outcomes, from improving public health systems to guiding environmental regulation. 

The report shows that research from China is now widely cited in SDG-related policy documents across the world*, placing China firmly within the top 15 most cited countries for SDG policy influence. 

* The data on Chinese policy are comparatively limited, due to access constraint. As a result, the project focused on tracking the international use of Chinese-authored research rather than how Chinese policy cites research. 

Where Chinese research is being cited 

A breakdown of citations reveals a diverse and international policymaking audience engaging with Chinese research: 

  • Intergovernmental organisations (IGOs), including the UN, UNESCO, WHO, IMF, and OECD, cite Chinese research more frequently than any other individual nation in their SDG-related policy. 
  • Outside IGOs, the largest share of Chinese research citations in SDG policy comes from the United States (22%), followed by the United Kingdom (8%), the European Union (7%), and Germany (6%). 

This reflects both the global reach of China-authored research and its relevance to international policymakers addressing sustainability challenges. 

 It's worth noting that the analysis distinguishes between citations from global organisations (counted as “IGO” or “EU”) versus national governments to avoid distorting country-level influence. This ensures a clearer picture of how widely China’s research is used across different governance levels. 

A strong role in global health and climate policy 

Chinese research has a particularly significant impact in two SDGs: 

  • SDG 3: Good Health and Well-being – representing 38% of policy citations 
  • SDG 13: Climate Action – accounting for 13% 

These findings highlight China’s deep engagement in areas fundamental to global well-being and sustainability. Whether in pandemic preparedness, public health interventions, climate mitigation, or environmental monitoring, Chinese research is increasingly shaping international responses. 

Conclusion: The growing real-world impact of Chinese research 

The findings from the Springer Nature SDG Impact ReportFrom publications to policy, offer an insightful narrative of China’s role in the global sustainability research landscape and the international recognition of its contributions to solving global challenges. Over the past two decades, China has: 

  • Become the largest source of SDG-related research articles worldwide 
  • Achieved the highest average academic citation impact in SDG research 
  • Emerged as a major contributor to SDG-related policy across IGOs and countries 

As the world approaches the 2030 SDG deadline, the influence of Chinese research, across academia, international policy, and multilateral decision-making, will continue to shape pathways toward a more sustainable future. 

With strong engagement from Chinese scholars and institutions, and with increasing uptake by policymakers worldwide, China’s role in advancing the SDGs has become both vital and increasingly impactful. 

Read the full report: From publications to policy: The impact of research towards achieving the Sustainable Development Goals 

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source!

Empowering early career researchers through skills‑focused visibility training

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon Mar 23 2026

Early career researchers bring valuable new perspectives to the research community, along with a curiosity that helps push knowledge forward. As they start publishing, apply for funding, share their first results and find their voice within their communities, having the right support can make a huge difference at this early stage. Therefore, understanding open access, visibility and the tools that support effective research communication can help researchers lay the foundations for their careers.

Recognising this, Springer Nature’s Account Development (AD) team created a dedicated webinar series for institutions across Europe. These sessions introduce researchers to open access agreements and practical strategies for promoting their work. The response from participants has been overwhelmingly positive, and one researcher’s story stands out as testament to the impact of these sessions.

Building researcher confidence through skills‑focused webinars

As researchers begin shaping their publishing journey, many tell us they are eager to understand how to make their work more visible and how to communicate their findings with confidence. It’s not always obvious where to start, especially when juggling publishing pressures, funding expectations and the realities of early‑career life. That’s why we designed these webinars with the researcher’s needs in mind, to give them practical skills that can be applied immediately to strengthen both their research communication and professional profile.

During our session “How to Promote Your Research,” we explored what research visibility really means for researchers today. We looked at how strong communication can support funding applications, inspire collaboration, increase readership and contribute positively to the institution’s reputation. The response was extraordinary, with 560 researchers joining live, an incredible indication of how important this topic is across the research community.

What I appreciated most were the thoughtful questions that were asked about adapting their communication for different audiences and using digital platforms more effectively. These are challenges many early‑career researchers face, and they’re exactly the areas were small, practical adjustments can make a significant difference.

In the session, we introduced several techniques to start using right away, including:

  • Using storytelling to bring clarity and meaning to findings
  • Creating visual abstracts and multimedia summaries
  • Engaging with audiences through social media, blogs, podcasts and webinars
  • Using altmetrics to understand how their work is being shared and discussed

Each of these approaches helps build a wider understanding of how research is received beyond traditional academic metrics. More importantly, they empower researchers to take an active role in shaping how your work travels within your field and beyond it.

Our goal in these webinars is simple: To provide the tools, confidence and insight to communicate research in ways that feel authentic, accessible and impactful. And from the energy and engagement researchers bring to every session, it’s clear how committed they are to amplifying their work and sharing it with the world.

How one researcher discovered the hidden impact of her work

Among the attendees was Maria Babakhanyan Stone, a postdoctoral researcher who joined the session out of personal curiosity and a desire to discover new ways to share her work. During her PhD, she had put enormous effort into her dissertation and often looked for creative ways to make astronomy more accessible, recording YouTube explainer videos, developing visuals from her thesis figures and running workshops for learners of all ages. Communicating science clearly had always been important to her, and the webinar offered a chance to build on that passion. This opportunity was made possible through the support and resources of INAF (the Italian National Institute for Astrophysics), where she now works as a postdoc.

When we introduced Altmetrics, the concept was completely new to her. Hearing how online engagement can reveal interest in research beyond citations caught her attention, and she decided to take a look at the publicly available download data for her thesis at the University of Turku.

What she found truly made her day. A quick look at the university’s archived metrics showed that her astronomy thesis had been downloaded more often than others in the same topic area and topped several usage rankings. Her thesis stood out over a seven‑year period and even ranked among the most‑downloaded astronomy theses of the past decade. For Maria, this uncovered a new and unexpected dimension of impact.

She captured the moment beautifully in her blog: “I am thrilled to celebrate a small achievement which I discovered unexpectedly. I found out through happenstance that my PhD Thesis in Astronomy has been downloaded impactfully more times than others in the topic of astronomy from the University of Turku… what it means is that my PhD Thesis is making a difference with its social impact.”

For her, the discovery was meaningful not just because of the numbers, but because it showed that her effort to make astronomy welcoming and engaging was reaching real readers. Her thesis had found an audience genuinely interested in her work and her creative outreach was helping her research travel further than she realised.

Maria’s story is a powerful reminder of how empowering it can be for early‑career researchers to see the broader life of their work. A single idea introduced during the webinar sparked a deeper understanding of how her research resonates and strengthened her confidence in the contribution she is making to her field.

Understanding the full reach of research

Maria’s experience reflects something we see more and more among early‑career researchers: a growing desire to understand the full influence of their work beyond traditional measures. Citations will always matter, but they don’t tell the whole story. Downloads, online mentions, media attention and social sharing can offer a much more immediate sense of how the research is being discovered, discussed and used across global networks.

These kinds of engagement can spark new collaborations, strengthen funding or job applications and help researchers recognise the real‑world impact their work is already having. For institutions, supporting this broader understanding means giving researchers the confidence to communicate their work effectively and take proactive steps to increase visibility. These approaches enable researchers to pursue new opportunities, engage broader communities and advance steadily through each stage of their publishing process.

Working together to support the research community

Looking ahead, institutions continue to play a vital role in helping early‑career researchers thrive. Through the Author Journey series, we remain committed to offering workshops and webinars that provide practical, skills‑focused guidance on understanding open access policies, promoting research effectively, navigating both traditional and alternative metrics, building a strong digital presence and approaching the publishing process with clarity and confidence. These sessions are designed to help researchers find their voice, understand the reach of their work and grow their confidence as they contribute to the global research community. Every researcher’s story is unique, and for many, a single webinar can spark new insight that reshapes how they think about visibility, communication and impact.

To continue strengthening support for early‑career researchers, we invite institutions to explore our open access resources, including guidance on managing article processing charges, insights into how open access is transforming research and global stories of open access in action. Institutions can also register for upcoming webinars in the Author Journey series to offer their research communities practical, inspiring and actionable support. If your institution is looking for ways to deepen its engagement or enhance the support available to researchers, these resources and sessions are an easy way to get started and we would be delighted to welcome you along.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

A decade of change: How the IMISCOE–Springer Nature partnership is shaping migration research

T
The Link
By: undefined, Fri Mar 20 2026

Migration is transforming communities across the globe and the research surrounding it must evolve just as rapidly. Since 2015, the IMISCOE–Springer Nature partnership has played a crucial role in meeting that need, providing a trusted platform for interdisciplinary analysis of one of today’s most complex challenges. As part of our long-standing commitment to supporting research and education, the IMISCOE Research Series has become a foundational resource for scholars, librarians, and policymakers alike.

Anna Triandafyllidou © Springernature 2025

Professor Anna Triandafyllidou, an internationally recognised sociologist and leading global expert on migration governance, shares her perspective on how migration research has shifted over the past decade and how digital publishing is shaping its future. As Chair of the IMISCOE Editorial Committee and Editor‑in‑Chief of the Journal of Immigrant and Refugee Studies, she plays a central role in guiding scholarly conversations across the field. With more than 160 peer‑reviewed publications and decades of leadership in international research collaborations, Professor Triandafyllidou brings a uniquely global and interdisciplinary perspective to the evolving landscape of migration studies.

How the 2015 migration crisis changed research and publishing 

The year 2015 marked a turning point in European migration history, but also in the evolution of academic publishing. As millions fled conflict in Syria and across West Asia, migration became a defining feature across multiple regions of the world. "Certainly, 2015 is an important year, the repercussions of which we still see today. 2015 was the year of the 'Wir schaffen das' ('We can do this'), and of significant solidarity towards people fleeing Syria," recalls Professor Anna Triandafyllidou. 

That same year, IMISCOE partnered with Springer Nature, aiming to make scientific knowledge on migration as globally accessible as possible. In times of crisis, access to knowledge matters most. The IMISCOE Research Series has helped overcome barriers and respond to urgent migration challenges by fostering collaboration and timely interdisciplinary research. 

Migration research underwent profound transformations after the 2015 crisis. As Professor Triandafyllidou explains, "Initially, it was a foundational moment for Europe becoming a land of refuge. It very quickly backfired. In 2016, we had the EU-Turkey statement and the closure of the borders through the Balkans, and after that, we see an increase in securitization, not just of migration but also of asylum".  

The shifting socio-political landscape and the new challenges demanded research that could capture the complexities of migration. What was needed was a publishing model that could keep pace with the rapidly evolving realities of people on the move while capturing the human dimensions of migration. 

Making migration research more accessible and impactful  

The partnership between IMISCOE and Springer represented a shift in how migration research would be produced, disseminated, and accessed. Four key innovations stand out: 

1.  Open access is expanding the reach of migration research 

"The series is Open Access. Now it's going to be 100% Open Access, but it was always the aim, I think on both the IMISCOE and Springer side at the time when it wasn't that common that books would be Open Access," Professor Triandafyllidou emphasizes. 

Before Open Access became widely embraced, this decision marked a notably progressive step. Springer Nature began piloting open-access book publishing in 2011, reflecting our strong commitment to making trustworthy, high-quality knowledge accessible to everyone. This commitment to open knowledge ensures that vital research can reach policymakers, NGOs, and researchers in the regions most affected by migration without barriers. By removing access limitations, Open Access helps close knowledge gaps and supports informed, evidence-based research and decision-making on a global scale. "The strategy of the series is to expand the knowledge base and to really offer a service to the student and research community in immigration studies," notes Professor Triandafyllidou. 

2. Digital publishing is enabling timely responses to global challenges 

The digital format of the series enables researchers to respond quickly to emerging issues. As Professor Triandafyllidou mentioned, "We had a volume in 2021 already on migration and pandemics that was trying to seize the moment." This flexibility ensures that scholarship remains timely and responsive, narrowing the distance between research and implementation. 

According to Professor Triandafyllidou, the series publishes around 10 books per year - almost one per month. This rapid pace, made possible by the digital publishing model, facilitates efficiency and a broader distribution, allowing important research to reach a global audience without delay. 

3. Global perspectives are strengthening migration scholarship  

Perhaps most importantly, the digital format has been instrumental in expanding the global scope of migration research. "Our series has become more global by design," explains Professor Triandafyllidou. "We have made a concerted effort to have editors and authors from the regions. So, when we write about West Africa, South and Southeast Asia, the Asia Pacific, Latin America, and so on, we have people from those regions." 

This commitment to diverse voices challenges the traditional dominance of destination-country perspectives in migration studies. "I also find that in the research that we do, there's very much a bias from the country of destination, and we need to change that," she adds. 

4. Peer review is ensuring quality and academic integrity  

Professor Triandafyllidou proves that accessibility and quality can go hand in hand, emphasizing that the IMISCOE Research Series stands out for its full-manuscript peer review process, ensuring scholarly excellence. "The series is fully peer-reviewed. We ask for and review the full manuscript, not only the book proposal. It has also happened that we've rejected manuscripts or that they must go through revisions with detailed feedback."  

Advancing migration research for a changing world 

Migration continues to intersect with global challenges, and the IMISCOE Research Series is evolving to reflect these emerging realities. Digital technologies, from AI to broader tools, are reshaping politics and mobility. As Professor Triandafyllidou notes, migrants today navigate vast amounts of information, which highlights the importance of trusted sources and digital infrastructures that support informed decisions.  

Geopolitical shifts are also influencing migration in powerful ways. The growing role of mobility in political discourse calls for thoughtful, inclusive research. As Professor Triandafyllidou suggests, migration studies benefit from broadening their scope, moving beyond Eurocentric frameworks and recognising migration as a central force in societal transformation.

s13502 © Springernature 2025
 

The IMISCOE Research Series highlights the power of eBooks in advancing migration research by combining accessibility with academic rigour. It delivers timely, diverse and socially relevant scholarship to communities worldwide. Explore the series and connect with a global network of researchers shaping the future of migration studies, because what we publish and how we shape it helps build a more informed and connected world.  

When the shelf went digital 

2026 marks twenty years since we launched our eBook collections. Much has changed in that time across science, technology, and society. Can you remember a time before social media, when Obama took office, or when the Higgs Boson was discovered? Explore our timeline of 20 major scientific milestones that have shaped our lives and the books we publish. Visit When the shelf went digital

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Partnership promise in the East: China’s pharma sector and opportunities for global partnerships

T
The Link
By: undefined, Wed Mar 18 2026

What if you could find rich portfolios of advanced therapeutics for treating cancer, autoimmune disorders, metabolic disorders, and more, that had already proven efficacy and safety in advanced clinical trials. But also, that the companies developing them, while biological powerhouses, lack the global marketing footprint to bring them to the wider world. That’s the situation today with 10 of China’s most advanced biotech and pharmaceutical companies. To look at this closely, AdisInsight recently published a report, Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers and Shakers, which explores this in detail.

Driven in part by the regulatory reforms China made in 2015 and 2020, as well as investments in basic and advanced biomedical research, these China-based companies (including names like Innovent Biologics, Akeso, Sinopharm, Insilico Medicine, and others) have deep portfolios of therapeutics that are either already approved in China, or in late-stage clinical trials that have already demonstrated their efficacy, ready for global partnerships. You will find a wealth of detail about these 10 companies in Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers & Shakers; but I wanted to pick out a few highlights, including some examples of existing, highly successful China-global partnerships.

China’s therapeutic and innovative strengths

Common threads connecting these 10 companies include focusing on both life-threatening and chronic disease states like cancer and autoimmune disorders, and also an emphasis on biologics, including monoclonal and bispecific antibodies, chimeric antigen T-cell (CAR-T) technology, antibody-drug conjugates (ADCs), vaccines, immunotherapy, and other advanced and biologic modalities.

For example, Legend Biotech’s CAR-T cell therapy, which is an advanced immunotherapy approach that involves genetically reprogramming the patient’s own T-cells so that they’re able to identify and destroy cancer cells. These T-cells are laboratory-modified to express chimeric antigen receptors (CARs), specialised proteins that can identify cancer-specific markers, and then re-transfused into the patient’s cancerous tissue. Indicated mainly for blood cancers like specific types of leukaemia, lymphoma, and multiple myeloma, this CAR-T treatment’s revenue is forecast to reach $47.28 billion by 2030.

3SBIo’s deal with Pfizer for its SSGJ-707 is another example. This is a bispecific antibody that works on programmed cell death-1 ligand-1 inhibitors, indicated for non-small cell cancer and other solid tumours. Based on its strong Phase II objective response rates (72-100% among patients completing at least two treatment evaluations), 3SBio was able to make a global licensing deal with Pfizer, and Pfizer is advancing this treatment to global Phase III trials for non-small cell lung cancer and other solid tumours.

Akeso, Inc. has a monoclonal antibody for non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC) that, in clinical trials, outperformed Merck’s Keytruda (the market leader). This monoclonal antibody, called Ivonescimab, gave patients progression-free survival of more than 11 months before tumours began growing again, which is almost double Keytruda’s 5.8 months. But despite this superiour clinical performance, Ivonescimab’s market share lags Keytruda, because while Akeso has the stronger therapeutic, Merck has the stronger global footprint (in addition Keytruda’s first-mover advantage).

Innovent Biologics has monoclonal antibody candidates IB 3009 and IBI 343, the latter of which is fast-tracked for treating advanced pancreatic ductal adenocarcinoma (PDAC). It’s also in Phase II trials for gastric cancer and completed Phase I/II for pancreatic cancer. Based on this potential, Takeda has agreed to fully develop and commercialise IBI 343 outside of Greater China. IBI 3009 is a monoclonal antibody indicated for neuroendocrine carcinoma and small cell lung cancer. It is a cutting-edge approach in anticancer therapy combining the specificity of antibody-directed conjugation with the potent inhibitory effects on a critical enzyme involved in DNA replication and tumour progression.

Strengthening international biopharma alliances

A quick summary of some of the other active partnerships already concluded or in process include: 

  • Innovent Biologics has expanded globally through strategic alliances:   
    • Partnered with Roche to launch the ADC candidate IBI3009 internationally.   
    • Collaborates with Mankind Pharma to bring its PD-1 inhibitor, sintilimab, to the Indian market.   
    • Entered a $1.2 billion deal with Takeda, granting global rights to late-stage assets IBI363 and IBI343, plus an option on a bispecific ADC, signaling major East–West co-development momentum.   
  • Sciwind Biosciences signed a $70 million upfront licensing deal with Verdiva Bio (exChina & Korea) for its metabolic-disease candidate ecnoglutide, with up to $2.4 billion in milestones, marking a major move into global markets. 
  • Duality Biologics secured global licensing of DB1418 from Avenzo Therapeutics following its Phase III success of BNT323, demonstrating healthy cross-border biotech licensing activity. 
  • WuXi Biologics has advanced its Global Dual Sourcing Strategy, delivering on its global CDMO model—including EMA approval of its Dundalk site and further expansion in Europe and Singapore, enhancing its positioning as a global-scale biologics manufacturing partner.

Companies such as Innovent, Sciwind, and Duality illustrate China’s growing capacity in complex biologics and AI-driven platforms, bringing the right people together with novel technology to develop powerful new therapeutics.

Growing opportunities for China-global partnerships

China’s regulatory reforms has streamlined the approval process, especially for breakthrough technologies and for critical diseases. This has both attracted local and global investment, and spurred innovation. As a consequence, China’s pharmaceutical companies have been able to develop these therapeutics and quickly shepherd them through trials, despite these companies often lack global infrastructures or marketing footprints.

So, for global pharmaceutical companies that do have that global infrastructure and the ability to globalise new therapies, but whose pipelines might be moving more slowly, partnering with Chinese firms is an obvious choice. Global firms get access to strong candidates that are either already locally licensed, or in successful late-stage trials (which reduces risk), and the Chinese firms get access to the global market. And patients get access to new, life-saving medicine. It’s a win-win-win scenario.

Find out more: You’ll find a wealth of detailed insights in AdisInsight’s report, Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers & Shakers, that will help global R&D managers identify partners and evaluate their real potential.   

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

How to share your research protocols and methods openly: Best practices for transparency and reuse

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Mar 17 2026

Whatever your research topic, the step-by-step methods behind your study are key to understanding your results. 

These protocols may be detailed instructions for a specific experiment or synthesis, day-to day lab / field instructions, computational workflows, or the broader methodological framework used to answer a research question. Sharing them openly helps others understand what you did and what they would need to do to reproduce, verify, or build on your work. It also helps you meet the open science expectations of funders and publishers. 

Building on our previous introduction to sharing protocols, this guide covers how to prepare, publish, license and cite your protocols so they’re easy to find, use, and receive credit for.

Why best practices matter

Sharing detailed protocols openly enables clarity, usability, and reproducibility, so that others can follow your methods without guesswork. Recording your complete methods in an accessible format addresses many common pain points:

  • Reduce guesswork by replacing vague or missing steps with precise instructions.  
  • Enhance reproducibility by surfacing dependencies (such as reagents, equipment, or software and their versions, where relevant). 
  • Provide clarity by stating exact conditions (e.g. timings, temperatures, or acceptance ranges when those matter). 
  • Ensure readability by avoiding jargon and using plain, defined terms. 
  • Prevent dead ends by including expected outcomes and simple troubleshooting. 

By clearly recording your methods, you make it easier for anyone trying to replicate or build on your work, including your future self. Sharing protocols also helps to contextualise results so that others may accurately interpret and reuse your data. 

Benefits of sharing your detailed protocols openly:

  • Reproducible results: complete steps, conditions, and materials let others (and your future self) repeat your work. 
  • Faster peer review: clear methods reduce back-and-forth with editors and reviewers. 
  • Compliance: many funders, institutions, and journals encourage or require accessible, reusable methods. 
  • Reuse & recognition: modular, self-contained, and citable protocols can be discovered, reused, and properly credited. 
  • Future proofing for your own work: versioned, well-documented methods save you time later and remove uncertainty as your protocol is adapted. 
  • Community benefits: sharing methods for others to build on advances science for all. 

Step one: prepare your protocol for open sharing

- Write in clear language: keep instructions in active voice (e.g. instead of “a 25 µl reaction was set up containing” write: “set up a 25 µl reaction containing”), define all acronyms, and write each step as plainly as you can. 

- Make it complete: it should be possible to follow each step you took, using the same resources that you used. 

  • Cover the essentials: list all materials, equipment, and resources you used (e.g. reagents/instruments, datasets/archives, analytical tools) with supplier, model, lot/batch numbers, and RRIDs, where relevant. Include recipes and detailed parameters (e.g., buffer recipes; corpus selection rules) and software versions.  
  • Write the steps in chronological order: for each step, include the conditions that matter for your field (e.g. time, temperature, voltage, sampling rate, thresholds) and the expected output or critical points, if relevant.  
  • Provide guidance: note any expertise required, safety information, ethics notes, limitations, and references (see also PRO-MaP’s protocol reporting checklist). 

- Add context:  

  • Write for discoverability: give your protocol a precise and searchable name and include a 3-4 sentence abstract that explains what it does, when to use it, and the expected outcome. Be sure to add relevant keywords. 
  • Provide tips: consider additional points that would help someone repeat the method; for example, troubleshooting tips and visuals, such as short instructional videos or images for critical steps. 

- Give credit: ensure all authors involved in developing the protocol are properly credited, apply similar criteria as you would to determining authors on a research manuscript. Authorship order on a protocol often differs from an associated manuscript, ensuring appropriate credit for specific outputs. 

- Seek feedback: ask others from your group, department, or  chosen collaborators to review the complete protocol. 

Step two: choose the right platform  

We encourage authors to share protocols on a dynamic protocol platform of their choice, such as protocols.io. Unlike a static word or PDF file, these platforms may: 

  • Allow you to structure your method in a step-by-step format that’s easy to follow. 
  • Provide a DOI so your protocol is citable and findable. 
  • Enable version control. 
  • Integrate with tools you already use, such as Electronic Lab Notebooks (ELNs), cloud storage servers, and some journal submission systems. 

Read Nature’s policy on protocols sharing. 

Step three: ensure long-term accessibility  

Think of a protocol as a brief, modular, and self-contained scientific publication. With a DOI-minting repository like protocols.io, readers can retrieve the exact version of your method years later, while still enabling you to update the protocol with separate versions as your method evolves over time.  

  • Label your version, to keep a clear log of what has changed over time and why. Ensure that each version has its own DOI. 
  • Cite your protocol: add the protocol DOI to the Methods section and include a citation in the References list to ensure accessibility. 

Step four: copyright licence and permissions  

A licence tells others exactly what they may do with your protocol, and under what conditions.   

  • Select a Creative Commons licence for maximum reuse potential (this is the default when publishing on protocols.io). 
  • Determine if your protocol repository of choice has licensing terms  
  • Check if your funder mandates the use of a specific licence.  
  • If your protocol uses any third-party content, check whether you have permission to include them under your chosen licence and ensure the content is properly credited. 
  • Ensure that the licence information is included in the protocol record. 

Step five: ethical and legal considerations  

Like with other research outputs, it’s important to share protocols responsibly. 

  • Protect participants and IP: remove confidential or identifying information (e.g. patient IDs, GPS coordinates to sensitive sites, proprietary formulas, trade secrets, security keys, or identifiable photos of people). 
  • If removing details affects a step, say so briefly and explain how readers can proceed (e.g. use of synthetic data, or controlled access). 
  • Check compliance with funder, institutional, and journal policies: some studies must follow specific reporting standards (e.g. MDAR, ARRIVE, CONSORT, PRISMA, field-specific checklists). Link to these in your protocol record where relevant. 

Quick checklist for authors

If you keep these checks in mind as you work through your research project, you’ll be ready to share your protocols openly and be fully aligned with best practices and Springer Nature’s policy expectations. 

  1. Protocol is complete and clear  
  2. Context (title, abstract, keywords) and troubleshooting included 
  3. All authors are properly credited 
  4. Dynamic protocols repository chosen and DOI assigned 
  5. Creative Commons licence added 
  6. Versioning and change log started  
  7. Protocol DOI cited in any associated manuscript (in both Methods and References) 
  8. Funders acknowledged and references used to develop the protocol cited, if applicable. 

If you’re interested in learning more about sharing your protocols, protocols.io hosts regular webinars on why and how to share detailed protocols. And read more about why sharing protocols and methods matters. 

Additional resources

A short history of messenger RNA vaccines’ long road

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon Mar 16 2026

When the Athenian courier Philippides ran to Athens from Marathon with news of victory in battle, his story inspired the modern marathon. In their book, The Marathon of the Messenger — A History of Messenger RNA Vaccines, cousins Jérôme and Nicolas Lemonnier used this image of a long-distance messenger to frame their exploration of mRNA vaccine development. It’s a tale of how institutions, researchers, and knowledge networks, together, support essential research. They bring together scientific history, personal exploration, and ideas’ evolutions, including their family’s meaningful connection to an early mRNA patent. This blog post takes a look at the 20-year scientific path and impact of mRNA vaccine technologies, the myths and misconceptions surrounding the topic, and the potential for a new era of personalised medicine.

For institutions across the research ecosystem, this story shows how important foundational research, interdisciplinary collaboration, and effective knowledge stewardship are. The book brings to life the value of clear scientific communication, long-term investment in scientific inquiry, and the integrated role institutions play in supporting discoveries that shape public health. As mRNA technologies make new, personalised approaches to medicine possible, this story celebrates the institutional environments that help scientific ideas become concrete solutions.

While neither Lemonnier cousin is strictly a biologist or immunologist (Jérôme Lemonnier is a biological engineer and Nicolas Lemonnier has a background in computer science and finance), discovering Nicolas’ father (and Jérôme’s uncle) listed on an underlying patent inspired the cousins to want to find out more. This book grew out of what they uncovered about how their family was part of the broader story of mRNA vaccine development, and the scientific communities that brought it to life.

A marathon, not a sprint: 20 years in development
9783031393006

The book’s title draws on the ancient Greek legend of Philippides, a soldier messenger who ran extraordinary distances to seek military support before the Battle of Marathon. After fighting in the battle, he ran back to Athens to announce the victory, only to collapse and die immediately upon delivering the message.

The authors said, “This is a metaphor for what medical research is, but also about the ways mRNA delivers genetic instructions before being quickly degraded. It also reflects the long and often challenging journey of scientific research, much like in the development of mRNA vaccines.”

When we deployed mRNA vaccines during the Covid-19 pandemic, it looked to most of the world like a sprint; that this technology appeared suddenly. But, in reality, developing Covid-19 vaccines was the final kilometre of a 20-year development marathon. Research on mRNA vaccine technology, initially designed for cancer treatments, was already two decades old when the pandemic hit.

“I believed there was something important to write about. People now think the Covid-19 vaccines were developed in just one year, but we found a 20-year-old patent that already described immunogenic preparations related to mRNA vaccines. Discoveries made by French and other European researchers deserve to be known by the world,” said Jérôme Lemonnier.

This patent mentions Nicolas Lemonier’s father (who is also Jérôme’s uncle), a former research professor in immunology at the Institut Pasteur in Paris. Dr Steve Pascolo, the elder Lemonnier’s former student and now a researcher in his own right and the patent’s holder, cited his former professor in his patent. Finding this inspired Nicolas to reach out to Pascolo to ask about his father’s contribution, and this grew into a broader mission.

“We believed that people had the right to accessible scientific information about the history of mRNA vaccines, the right to ask questions and explore if Europe could benefit from its early innovations. This was the beginning of our story,” - Nicolas Lemonnier, co-author

Dispelling mRNA vaccine myths and misconceptions

Until the pandemic, mRNA vaccine development hadn’t been the type of research to make headlines. The fact that most people were unaware of this work has led to misconceptions about it, including that it appeared suddenly, but also about how mRNA vaccines work. “Our book has now become a tool in the fight against disinformation, but this was not necessarily its original aim,” Jérôme Lemonnier explains. “I think now, years after the pandemic, there is even more noise around the vaccine misconceptions than it used to be back when we wrote it.”

Nicolas Lemonnier explains how mRNA simply delivers a message to produce a protein, much like how traditional vaccines, including those for measles, mumps, and rubella, work. The difference lies in the purification and safety of the delivered protein. “Some people still describe the vaccine as a form of gene therapy, and I believe this is tackled in our book by discussing with experts and explaining how the vaccine works.”

The authors acknowledge that there are valid concerns about new technologies; and the book aims to provide clear, accessible explanations. “We wanted to provide rational answers and not answers inspired by fear,” Jérôme Lemonnier said. Rather than pushing people to accept vaccination through pressure, they believe in giving information that encourages informed decisions. Their book shares the same message, helping readers understand the long, often start-and-stop journey behind the science.

Explaining science with cartoons 

Cartoons which combine illustrations with humour can help explain sometimes complex scientific concepts. So, the Lemonniers collaborated with cartoonist Gilles Charrot, whose cartoons help break down scientific concepts into digestible bits, sparking readers’ curiosity. And while translating the humour from French to English was a challenge, the authors saw it as essential for keeping the book engaging to a wider audience. Whether you’re flipping through for fun or diving deep into the science, the cartoons add a unique and accessible layer to the story of mRNA vaccines.

Trust and promise of mRNA in cancer and genetic medicine 

Public discourse, and even politics, around mRNA vaccines has gotten worse since the pandemic. As an example: In February 2026, the US FDA initially refused to consider Moderna’s mRNA flu vaccine (it eventually reversed this decision). When asked about this, the Lemonniers were pessimistic. Societal debates have created uncertainty, even among scientists, turning the topic into a battle between beliefs and evidence.

“With time, I think people eventually validate what is good, but we’re going through a period where a lot of people are doubting science and politics” Nicolas Lemonnier said. He compared Covid-19 vaccines with other medical breakthroughs that were once controversial but later became widely accepted.

Originally developed for cancer therapies, mRNA technology now shows even greater potential. Jérôme Lemonnier, who is working on a follow-up book with Chantal Pichon, sees the field as just the beginning. “It is something truly fascinating and we see progress before our eyes in genetic diseases, regenerative and personalized medicine. Covid-19 accelerated these advances, but costs remain a challenge. One dose to treat cancer can cost $100,000,” he explained.

Even so, he remains optimistic “I do think that we are entering the era of personalised medicine. As Nicolas mentioned, informatics and computer engineering will play an even greater role in the development of mRNA therapies, especially in treating cancer.” He describes this moment as the start of a medical revolution, comparable in importance to Pasteur’s discoveries, with interest growing worldwide.

Remaining challenges for global mRNA adoption

MRNA vaccines face additional logistical challenges, like the need for built-out cold storage infrastructure. Also, some diseases that researchers hope mRNA vaccines can treat are especially difficult. Cancer, for example, comes from the body’s own tissues and therefore evades most immune responses. HIV specifically attacks the immune system, making any vaccine approach, including mRNA vaccines, extraordinarily difficult.

Ultimately, trust is the decisive challenge while public confidence in medical technologies and in the institutions delivering them remains fragile. As Nicolas Lemonnier reminds readers, “Don’t be afraid of biology research.”

As years go by, new breakthroughs and crises strike the world, as the need for trusted resources becomes more important than ever. Stories like this recall the importance of research and its history to address misinformation and bring to light the stories behind medical breakthroughs. 

Learn more about the development of mRNA vaccines at When the Shelf went Digital - 20 Years of Springer Nature eBooks highlighting key moments of two decades of breakthroughs in science, medicine, technology, and beyond.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Book collections: Charting 20 years of innovation and evolution

T
The Link
By: undefined, Fri Mar 13 2026

To mark the 20th anniversary of Springer Nature’s eBook collections, we’re taking a closer look at the transition from print to digital and the people who helped shape it. They are behind every workflow change, metadata breakthrough, and new access model, and they’ve experimented, adapted, and built the foundations of the digital library experience we know today.

Today we speak with Springer Nature’s Wouter van der Velde, Global Director Books Solutions Portfolio, and Itsco van der Linden, Head of Test Engineering. They were there from the beginning and saw firsthand how technology, teamwork, and library partnerships transformed the way books are created and discovered.

When eBooks first emerged in scholarly communication, van der Velde was worked in epublishing and van der Linden managed ereference content. At that stage, their work focused on converting print books into digital versions. The major shift came later, when eBooks were born digital rather than simply converted from print.

Their stories offer an insightful look into digital transformation, highlighting a journey of experimentation, problem-solving, and a commitment to improving discovery and access worldwide.

From print shelves to online platforms: The beginning of Springer Nature eBooks

When eBooks first appeared around the 1990s, they looked very different from today’s digital resources. Only select titles were digitalised, and reference works, often spanning ten or more volumes, were converted into HTML or XML-based online encyclopaedias rather than full eBooks in a PDF format. As van der Linden recalls, “They weren’t really eBooks yet. You browsed them online, almost like a website. That was the starting point.”  

Meanwhile, usage data was still a mystery, COUNTER standards for books didn’t yet exist, and the technology to track digital engagement was still emerging. For van der Velde, who worked on early usage statistics, those first years were about learning how readers interacted with digital content and identifying the patterns we are now accustomed to.

The shift to digital-first publishing

Around the early 2000s, the newly merged Kluwer-Springer publisher decided to prioritise digital access for book publishing, as was already the case for journals.   

The decision to digitise all books, publishing them electronically by default, expanded the reach of books, paving the way for today’s globally accessible eBook collections. It flipped traditional workflows, shifting from print-first to digital-first production. Rethinking old formats also meant that PDF-only workflows gave way to XML-based production, enabling EPUB formats and multi-device reading that libraries and users rely on today. 

Technology challenges and breakthroughs in digitising books 

The early days of publishing digital books posed significant challenges, as technology struggled to keep pace with the demands of publishing full-book PDFs. Two decades ago, bandwidth limitations meant that a 20‑MB file could slow or even crash servers. To keep platforms stable, full book downloads had to be removed, offering chapter-based access instead.   

Many reference works were built in XML with style sheets to enable browsing and keyword search, rather than static PDFs. “Little did we know that, 20 years later, users would still ask, ‘Where is the PDF?’ because they want to see page numbers,” van der Linden remarks.  

Metadata also required development in the beginning, as MARC records were extracted manually and stored in local databases. Packages and subject classifications were sometimes transferred unexpectedly, causing confusion for libraries. Over time, processes were streamlined and standardised, laying the foundation for a reliable metadata ecosystem.

Early experiments and innovation  

One of the earliest digital experiments meant to challenge traditional editorial standards was a “custom book” tool that allowed users to select chapters from various books and compile them into a single printed volume. Innovative at the time, it didn’t gain adoption due to the limited content pool, making the initiative impractical.   

Although ahead of its time, this early concept anticipated what, more than two decades later, would become highly adopted, thanks to algorithms. “With AI, we’re doing something very similar now, creating topic‑based literature reviews using content across books and journals. The difference today is scale and technology,” van der Velde explains.  

“Back then, we built things that people weren’t ready for or didn’t need yet,” van der Linden adds. “Today we have a better sense of what users find useful, and the technology to support it properly.”  

New skills for a digital future

The rise of eBooks brought to life the e-publishing department. This new department focused on innovation across disciplines and teams, similar to van der Linden’s current role in production technology. It encompassed technical skills, metadata expertise, product development, and working in close collaboration with editorial and production teams.   

This multidisciplinary approach was still emerging two decades ago, opening doors for new possibilities. Authors and editors progressively embraced the new standards and workflows, and the growing reality that digital access would soon become essential for both researchers and libraries. 

Scaling up: Orchestrating the publication of over 12,000 eBooks a year  

Today, Springer Nature publishes over 12,000 eBooks per year, nearly two books every hour. They are available on Springer Nature Link, where libraries have uninterrupted access to reliable content, even at such a large scale.  

But high‑quality digital publishing is more than hosting files. It requires consistent metadata, format quality control, integrity screening, and more. Van der Velde notes: “People think hosting eBooks is easy. But when you publish this much content, every process, from metadata to rights delivery, must work perfectly.”

The future of eBooks: Trends and predictions  

Looking ahead, both van der Velde and van der Linden agree that AI will change how content is discovered, but not the value of books themselves. While the fundamentals of scholarly publishing are here to stay, the way content is accessed and consumed will continue to evolve. Van der Velde and van der Linden highlight three trends they foresee:  

  • Books will remain essential for deep, structured, authoritative knowledge  
  • PDFs may eventually decline, as flexible, multi-platform formats become standard  
  • DOI‑based citations will increasingly replace page numbers  

Two decades of eBooks evolution, shaped together with libraries  

For many academic libraries, the past two decades have been defined by the shift from print collections to digital ecosystems that support discovery, access, and long‑term preservation. Close collaboration between librarians and publishing teams shapes the continuous process of development.  

Springer Nature’s journey of eBooks development mirrors the evolution of library services themselves, from managing print collections to navigating complex digital ecosystems. The shift to digital‑first publishing, the maturation of metadata standards, and the rise of multi‑format reading have all been shaped not only by technological progress but by the needs and feedback of libraries working to support diverse research communities.  

The journey has been one of experimentation, infrastructure building, and continuous refinement. Every improvement in platform stability, every enhancement in discoverability, every refinement in research integrity workflows ultimately supports the mission librarians champion every day: enabling equitable, reliable access to knowledge.  

Continuing the partnership with libraries in the next era of eBooks

Looking ahead, the next phase of digital books will bring new opportunities and questions for libraries. AI‑driven discovery tools, evolving citation practices, and the gradual shift away from static PDFs will influence how collections are built, taught, and preserved. Yet the core value of books as structured, authoritative sources remains unchanged. And the partnership and collaboration between publishers and libraries will continue to shape how these resources are delivered, accessed, and sustained.  

As Springer Nature marks two decades of eBook collections, this milestone is as much a library story as a publishing one. The foundation built so far, through shared challenges, learning, and commitment, sets the stage for deeper collaboration in the years to come. And as the landscape evolves, librarians will remain essential voices in defining what meaningful, future‑ready digital access looks like.

What has it been like, working closely with librarians through the eBooks transition? In the companion blog we speak with Senior Licensing Manager Amber Farmer, who shares from her experience and how this evolving relationship shaped both her role and the fabric of the modern academic library. 

When the shelf went digital: Explore memorable moments and key milestones from two decades of eBooks. And stay tuned for more stories from early-adopter librarians who have been part of this journey, views of authors, and Springer Nature colleagues who are bringing these milestones to your screens.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Making open access work for you: Practical librarian insights

T
The Link
By: undefined, Thu Mar 12 2026

For librarians, research offices and institutional leaders, open access (OA) offers an opportunity to expand reach, strengthen impact, and deliver greater value to their communities. During the 2025 Charleston Conference, Springer Nature hosted a lunch and learn at the historic American Theater, where librarians shared practical strategies to achieve these goals. Get four insights from the discussion, with suggestions for actions you can implement today.

Open access (OA) continues to shape scholarly publishing, and success depends on aligning strategies with institutional priorities such as impact, compliance, affordability, and visibility. At the lunch and learn event, titled ‘Making OA work for you: TA experiences from the field,’ we heard inspiring presentations from librarians representing various institutions of different sizes, focus areas, and funding models:

  • Danielle Aloia, Assistant Director of Information Management at New York Medical College, Capozzi Library, part of the NERL-Springer TA
  • Mark Paris, Associate University Librarian for Scholarly Resources and Discovery at Brandeis University, part of the NERL-Springer TA
  • Peggy Kain, Associate Professor and Licensing and Scholarly Communication Librarian at The University of Alabama at Birmingham (UAB) Libraries, part of the Lyrasis-Springer TA

American Theater picture - marquee © Springer Nature 2026

The conversation highlighted actionable steps that enable progress today and in the years ahead. From building data-driven dashboards to implementing transformative agreements (TAs), the ideas presented empower libraries and research offices to move confidently toward sustainable OA.

“This has been the most useful session I’ve been to out of the entire conference.” 

Lunch and learn participant Willa Liburd Tavernier, Research Impact and Open Scholarship Librarian, Indiana University

What’s working: Four insights to take forward

The discussion at the lunch and learn was rich with practical ideas that libraries and research offices can apply today. The following key takeaways combine strategic thinking with real-world examples from institutions already making progress. Each one offers a way to strengthen OA implementation, improve visibility, and demonstrate value to stakeholders. 

(1) Transformative agreements: When collaboration lowers barriers

TAs can be powerful levers for growing the adoption of OA while stabilizing costs. In her presentation, Danielle Aloia, from the Capozzi Library at New York Medical College, explored the advantages and disadvantages of various approaches, from consortia and fellowships to TAs, for gaining an OA advantage. She shared how her institution decided on a TA through a consortia, which enabled them to cover their researchers’ article processing charges (APCs) for publishing OA.

Indeed, speakers emphasized that joining a consortium often makes these agreements more feasible than negotiating solo, spreading administrative load, and unlocking better terms. If your institution is mid-sized or has limited negotiation capacity, a consortium route may be the most pragmatic way to build momentum (and internal support).

Action to consider: Map your local priorities (publishing output, author disciplines, compliance needs) to consortium options already operating in your region. Engage peers to benchmark terms and workflows, especially reporting and author support.

(2) Data-driven advocacy: Make value visible 

The University of Alabama at Birmingham Libraries’ approach shows how granular tracking transforms perceptions of library value. This institution focused on transformative agreements (also referred to as Read and Publish agreements), and uses rigorous tracking and targeted communication, calculating savings per researcher and per college to demonstrate tangible benefits. According to Peggy Kain, “Giving back to the university and showing the value of the library has been key.”

Kain explained how the library tracks and records data for every APC funded through their TAs: approval dates, publishers, APC costs, journal types, faculty ranks, and departmental affiliations. By rolling that up into dashboards, the team has demonstrated over $2 million in institutional savings. This level of detail enables targeted conversations with departments and senior leadership, connecting OA spend to academic outcomes.

Action to consider: Start a minimally viable dataset: fields you can reliably capture each month without new systems. Build from there and publish periodic internal “OA impact briefs” for deans and research leadership.

(3) Repositories: Cornerstone, not afterthought

Brandeis University underscored the role of the institutional repository as the cornerstone of OA strategy supporting compliance, preserving outputs and amplifying visibility. Mark Paris explained how repositories are also an engagement platform: They give departments and research offices a lens on where outputs sit and what could be improved.

Action to consider: Audit repository metadata quality, deposit workflows, and outreach. Prioritize researcher experience (fast deposit, clear rights guidance) and surface analytics that matter locally (downloads by department, open vs. closed proportions).

(4) Funders’ shifting priorities: Impact over inventory 

Participants in the lunch and learn noted that traditional collection narratives resonate less with funders; impact evidence resonates more. OA initiatives aligned to institutional goals, research visibility, collaboration, and societal benefit are easier to champion when supported by data and clear stories about researcher outcomes.

Action to consider: Build a simple “funders’ view” dashboard: outputs by funder with OA status, compliance, and usage. Pair it with practitioner stories that connect OA to research impact in the field.

“OA is a journey that thrives on collaboration, data-driven decisions, and a willingness to innovate.”

Librarians leading with communication in the OA transition

Throughout the discussion, speakers emphasized the importance of partnerships and reframing OA within the broader context of scholarly communication. In her presentation, Danielle Aloia stated, “Pursuing OA work and forming partnerships is essential work.” She further explained that while this work is sometimes perceived as extra and time-consuming, it is in fact essential.

As the role of librarians shifts and transforms in the age of OA, collaborations across various departments in your institutions become vital. Librarians are pivotal to getting both the buy-in and the funding to support and promote OA from various stakeholders in their institution. They advocate for OA with these stakeholders to ensure support and educate and inform colleagues on the value of OA publishing for the researchers, the institutions, and science more broadly.

Communication is therefore fundamental to the broader goals of librarians, especially in the OA transition. Through clear, consistent dialogue and proactive engagement, librarians build trust, foster collaboration, and create momentum for change.

OA is a journey that thrives on collaboration, data-driven decisions, and a willingness to innovate. The thoughtful insights and open discussions at this lunch and learn underscore the power of partnerships and practical strategies that help institutions achieve impact and sustainability.

Whichever route you and your institution are on, we are here to support you. Learn more about TAs and how you can benefit from them. 

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Research integrity in the age of open access and AI: The view from France

T
The Link
By: undefined, Wed Mar 11 2026

AI introduces new integrity challenges in research publishing, while open access (OA) can amplify the exposure to AI-generated or manipulated content. How can the research ecosystem safeguard trust in science in this era of OA and AI? To explore this question, a roundtable discussion brought together voices from an academic institution, a library, and a publisher. In this blog we share insights from the discussion, which underscored the need for robust guidelines and strong collaboration among all stakeholders to maintain trust in research.

Research integrity is the adherence to ethical principles and academic rigour in conducting and reporting scientific research, in order to maintain trust in science. With the increasing adoption of OA publishing and the growing use of AI, maintaining research integrity is becoming more critical and increasingly complex. OA increases the reach of research, making trust more important than ever. And while AI holds substantial benefits for research, it also raises questions about authorship, reproducibility, and ethics.

A roundtable discussion concluding the webinar ‘Open access and research integrity’ examined how integrity can be maintained in this evolving landscape, from a distinctly French perspective.

The discussion offered a holistic view on navigating the challenges of this era, with insights from an academic institution, a library, and a publisher:

  • Alexandrine Cheronet, Publishing Director for Earth Sciences, Environmental Sciences, and Chemistry, Springer Nature
  • Michel Dubois, Research Director at CNRS and Head of the French Office for Scientific Integrity (OFIS), as well as Director of the Group for Sociological Method Analysis at Sorbonne
  • Sébastien Perrin, Director of the Library at École des Mines de Paris (PSL)
  • Moderator: Chérifa Boukacem-Zeghmouri, Professor of Information and Communication Sciences at Claude Bernard University Lyon

The panellists explored what integrity means today and how policies, training, and technologies must adapt. By representing key stakeholders across the research ecosystem, they underscored why collaboration among publishers, institutions, and libraries is essential to maintaining research integrity in an era shaped by OA and AI.

Defining research integrity amid evolving practices

The roundtable discussion opened with Michel Dubois presenting the French legal definition of research integrity: Integrity is the set of rules and values that must govern research activities to guarantee honesty and rigour.

While this definition provides a foundation, its application varies across disciplines. This flexibility, Dubois noted, demands collaboration between all stakeholders (researchers, institutions, publishers and libraries), to ensure consistency and trust.

Strengthening Dubois’ perspective, Alexandrine Cheronet emphasised that publishers work closely with the scientific community to define and update codes of conduct. These codes guide authors, editors, and reviewers through ethical practices, from submission to publication. Integrity is dynamic, she explained, and Springer Nature’s standards therefore evolve alongside technology and global research practices.

Building trust in AI for research workflows

Generative AI is reshaping research workflows, from literature reviews to manuscript preparation. While these tools offer speed and efficiency, they raise critical questions about authorship, reproducibility, and ethical use. Cheronet explained how Springer Nature integrates AI into editorial workflows under strict governance, using it for tasks like quality checks and metadata management. However, she stressed that human oversight remains essential: AI can assist, but it cannot replace the judgment and expertise of editors and reviewers.

Advocating for transparency in algorithms and data sources, Perrin called for “trusted AI tools” that go beyond the black box. He warned that without clear standards, the research ecosystem risks introducing bias and undermining confidence in scholarly outputs.

Strengthening peer review through transparency

Peer review remains the cornerstone of quality assurance. The panel discussed various approaches such as open peer review and post-publication commentary, which aim to increase transparency. Despite these innovations, Dubois observed that peer review, while imperfect, continues to be perceived as providing a critical layer of scrutiny. 

Cheronet added that vigilance is essential to detect anomalies, such as AI-generated reviews or unusually rapid turnaround times. Libraries also play a role here in supporting researchers, for instance by clarifying evolving evaluation practices.

Driving cultural change through integrity training

Training emerged as a recurring theme throughout the discussion. While doctoral programs increasingly include mandatory integrity training, Dubois warned that senior researchers and supervisors often lack awareness of these principles. The trainers must also be trained, he explained, noting that cultural change requires engagement at all career stages.

Perrin described how libraries deliver training on citation ethics, plagiarism prevention, and data management. However, he acknowledged challenges in formal recognition of these trainings within academic structures.

Cheronet emphasised the need for global harmonisation, as publishers operate across diverse regulatory environments. The goal, she said, is to provide clear, accessible resources that support ethical research practices everywhere.

Building trust through ethical correction practices

Retractions often come to mind when research integrity is discussed. Dubois argued that retractions should be viewed not as punitive measures but as part of a virtuous cycle of scientific self-correction. Similarly, Springer Nature's Head of Research Integrity, Resolutions, Tim Kersjes, has argued that retractions are an effective corrective to the scholarly record, and should not carry a negative stigma.

The Springer Nature Research Integrity Group investigates every integrity concern thoroughly, and takes action once the investigation has concluded. Cheronet noted that Springer Nature has improved transparency in retraction notices.  It is investing efforts to make unethical practices unattractive and impractical, while supporting researchers in doing the right thing.

Practical steps to supporting research integrity

Research integrity continues to advance alongside the evolution of research. The rise of open science and AI brings exciting opportunities to refine policies, technologies, and practices. Collaboration among publishers, institutions, and libraries will strengthen trust and transparency across the global research ecosystem.

The roundtable discussion highlighted practical steps that empower every stakeholder to play a role in strengthening trust and transparency:

  • Researchers: Embrace best practices for citation, data sharing, and responsible AI use.
  • Libraries: Position themselves as leaders in integrity education and data governance.
  • Institutions: Extend integrity training beyond doctoral students to include supervisors and senior staff.
  • Publishers: Enhance transparency in workflows, corrections, and AI-assisted processes.

As each stakeholder contributes in their own way, these combined efforts move us toward a research ecosystem built on trust, transparency, and genuine partnership. When everyone takes part, it becomes easier to navigate new technologies, adapt to evolving expectations, and support ethical research practices across the board. Little by little, these shared commitments help strengthen a culture that is both resilient and forward‑looking.

If you’re interested in exploring these topics further, you can find more insights on how Springer Nature approaches research integrity and the responsible use of artificial intelligence. It’s a great way to see how these principles are being put into practice and how they continue to evolve in step with the global research community.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

How to share your research code openly: Best practices for transparency and reuse

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Mar 11 2026

Openly sharing the code that underpins your research makes your results transparent, improves reproducibility and replicability of your findings, can increase citations and visibility, and helps you meet funder, institution, and publisher requirements. Building on our previous introduction to open code sharing, this practical guide shows you how to do it responsibly for maximum reward.

Step one: preparing your code for sharing publicly

Review your content: you should review your code to check that it includes only what you intend to share. Make a simple list of: 

  • The new or custom code you wrote which is important for your results. 
  • Any external packages your code needs (e.g. Python libraries). 
  • Any runnable examples or demo datasets so users can test your code.  
  • Any data or parts you can't share (because of privacy, legal, or commercial reasons). If something can't be shared, note why, and how someone could request access. 

Clean and organise your project

  • Delete clutter: remove old drafts, temporary folders, and anything that requires passwords or keys to access. 
  • Use a clear folder layout so someone new can find things quickly: directories should have meaningful names that describe their contents (e.g. ‘my-project-name-version’ vs ‘code’). 

Document your code: write down exactly what is needed to use your code. This includes: 

  • A README in the top folder that explains what the code does, how to set it up, how to run it, how to reproduce the results, and who to contact with any questions.  
  • Environment dependencies: What exactly does a user need to install to use your code? Provide a list of packages and versions (e.g. requirements.txt or environment.yml) for reproducibility.  
  • Container: It can also be helpful to include a container/capsule (e.g. Dockerfile or a Code Ocean capsule) so others can run your code in a ready-made environment. These platforms make it easy for readers to immediately run the code, and in some cases offer verification that the code conforms to best practices and that it works. 
  • Consider adding comments to the code files to make it easier for others to understand the rationale behind the code and to re-use the resource. 

Ask a colleague to test it: we strongly recommend that you ask colleagues who are not familiar with the code to test it.

Step two: choosing a repository

While version control with Git is a popular way to ensure a backup of your code and documentation of its development over time, a stable, permanent version of your code is also essential to ensure that future readers can find the exact version of the code you used. To help others repeat your results, put your code in a repository that gives it a permanent identifier (DOI/PID), such as Zenodo or Code Ocean. This offers long-term preservation for your code and makes it easier to find and cite, giving you greater credit for your work.

Step three: licensing your code

A licence tells others exactly what they’re allowed to do with your code, and under what conditions. Without a licence, your code is “all rights reserved” by default, which means others can’t legally use it, modify it, or share it. We recommend using a licence approved by the open source initiative to support reuse, reproducibility, and compliance. Common open source licences include MIT, Apache 2.0, and GPL. Find out more at Choose a Licence

Repository Dos & Don’ts

Do

Don’t

  • Choose trusted PID platforms like Zenodo, Code Ocean, or institutional repositories. 
  • Consider using a container platform (e.g. Code Ocean).  
  • Include your README for clear documentation. 
  • Add an open source licence.  
  • Include environment files (e.g. requirements.txt or environment.yml). 
  • Upload tests: Provide a runnable example such as a small demo dataset, or ‘smoke test’, that users can quickly use to test your code. 
  • Add metadata to make your data discoverable.
  • Don’t rely on a GitHub URL only (without a PID/DOI, there is a risk your data won’t be accessible in the future). 
  • Don’t skip documentation (readers won’t know how to run your code). 
  • Don’t omit the licence.

Step four: writing a code availability statement

All Springer Nature journals require a code availability statement in original research articles that have developed new code as part of the work (we’ve included an example below). The following information must be provided in this statement: 

  • What: name of the code/tool and a one-line description. 
  • Where: repository URL and persistent identifier (DOI/PID), including a citation to the code in the reference list. 
  • Which version: tag/release number (e.g. v1.0.0) that matches the analysis in the paper. 
  • Licence: e.g. MIT, Apache-2.0, GPL-3.0. 
  • How to run: point to README/environment files or capsule (e.g. Code Ocean). 
  • Any restrictions, and reasons for this: Where there are restrictions, such as privacy, legal, or commercial limitations, it should be clear how to request access or link to a controlled access version. 

Example of a code availability statement, supporting best practices for code sharing - original publication in Nature Machine Intelligence © Springer Nature 2026

Example of a code availability statement, supporting best practices for code sharing - original publication in Nature Machine Intelligence.

Step five: citing your code

Treat code like a research output: it should be cited as a reference and in the article text (similar to data citations). The reference for the code should include the PID/DOI. This ensures credit for the team and individuals who worked on the code, makes your software findable, and lets readers retrieve the exact version you used. 

Example of a code citation, supporting best practices for code sharing - original publication in Nature Machine Intelligence. © Springernature 2026

Example of a code citation, supporting best practices for code sharing - original publication in Nature Machine Intelligence.

Why best practices matter

Taken together, these best practices make open code sharing simpler, more effective, and more rewarding – for you and other researchers. Well-prepared, clearly documented, and properly archived code ensures:

  • Results are reproducible and replicable: others can run the same code, under the same conditions, and verify or build on your findings with confidence. 
  • Peer review is smoother: clear documentation and accessible code reduce back-and-forth queries with editors and reviewers. 
  • Compliance: best practice supports alignment with institutional, funder, and journal expectations, including Springer Nature’s unified code policy.  
  • Visibility and impact: code that is archived with a DOI/PID is easier to discover, reuse, and cite. 
  • Future-proofing: versioned, well-described code is also easier for you to revisit as projects evolve. 
  • Community benefits: open, reusable code advances science for all, reducing duplication of effort, and strengthening trust in research. 

Quick checklist for authors

If you keep the following eight checks in mind as you work through your research project, you’ll be ready to share your code openly, fully aligned with best practice and Springer Nature policy expectations, to help others understand and reproduce your code.

  1. Code is clean, organised, and descriptively named. 
  2. Any sensitive data that can’t be shared has been removed. 
  3. README properly explains what my code does, how to install and run it (including dependencies and environment), expected outcomes, and how to contact you. 
  4. Code has been tested by another colleague on a different machine. 
  5. A versioned release is created on Git. 
  6. Code is archived in a PID-minting repository, including README, helpful metadata, and OSI-approved licence applied. 
  7. Code availability statement included in my manuscript submission. 
  8. Code is cited (in-text and in the references). 

See our research code policy

Related content

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest!

How to create a truly impactful collection: Insights from an editor-in-chief

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Mar 10 2026

A collection is a curated, evolving body of knowledge focused on a timely research theme or interdisciplinary topic. Collections boost research visibility and impact, while fostering collaboration and supporting emerging or interdisciplinary topics. But what does it take to launch an impactful collection? To find out, we spoke with Ravinder Dahiya, Professor of Electrical and Computer Engineering at Northeastern University and Editor in Chief of npj Flexible Electronics. Professor Dahiya has launched numerous article collections. Based on his extensive experience, he shares his insights into what makes a collection impactful.

Professor Dahiya leads the Bendable Electronics and Sustainable Technologies group, with research spanning flexible printed electronics, touch sensing, robotics, and wearable systems. His multidisciplinary background mirrors the expertise Springer Nature seeks in appointing guest editors: researchers with deep subject knowledge, strong community standing, and a clear editorial vision.

Editorial leadership researchers can trust

In the video, Professor Dahiya emphasises that impactful collections built around well-chosen, timely topics are shaped by experts who can bring together authoritative voices from across a field. This approach ensures that collections do more than aggregate papers. They tell a coherent story that advances understanding and supports future research.

For researchers and authors, this means confidence that collections are curated by leaders who understand both the science and the standards required to publish it responsibly

Publishing timely research that matters

Relevance and timing are critical to research impact. Professor Dahiya highlights a recent collection, Sustainable Flexible Electronics, as an example. The collection brought together work on semiconductor manufacturing and climate-focused technologies, two areas of growing urgency and global attention.

By exploring how flexible and printed electronics could help reduce carbon footprints while enabling continued innovation, the collection resonated widely across the research community.

Rigorous peer review as the foundation of quality

For authors and editors, the credibility of a journal or collection rests heavily on the strength of its peer review process. As Professor Dahiya makes clear, rigorous peer review is central to high quality publishing.

Guest editors are expected to select reviewers carefully. These should be researchers active in the field who can provide thoughtful, constructive, and expert feedback. Choosing the right reviewers for a collection not only safeguards standards but also helps authors strengthen their work.

The quality of the papers we publish is highly dependent on the quality of reviews we get from the community,” Professor Dahiya notes. At Springer Nature, peer review is treated as a collaborative effort that benefits authors, readers, and the field as a whole.

Active editorial engagement at every stage

Beyond review quality, trust is built through editorial engagement and responsiveness. For authors, timely communication and clear guidance can define their publishing experience. For editors and guest editors, active involvement is essential to maintaining standards and momentum.

In the video, Professor Dahiya advises guest editors to stay engaged throughout the entire publication process, from initial submission and reviewer selection to evaluating feedback and guiding revisions. Adding editorial insight alongside reviewer comments helps ensure authors receive the best possible feedback and that final papers meet the expectations of the journal and its readership.

This level of care and oversight is a hallmark of Springer Nature collections.

A shared commitment to research integrity

What unites researchers, authors, guest editors, and editors is a shared commitment to advancing knowledge with integrity. Springer Nature’s role is to support that mission by providing a publishing environment built on trust, transparency, and rigour.

For researchers and authors, this means publishing in respected, widely read collections. For guest editors and editors, it means working with a publisher that values their expertise and supports them in delivering high quality outcomes. For readers, it means access to research they can rely on.

Watch the full conversation

Watch the full video to hear Ravinder Dahiya share from his experience on what makes a collection impactful.

If you are interested in becoming a guest editor or publishing your research in a Springer Nature collection, visit Springer Natures’ collections hub  to find out more.

Related Content

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source!

From evangelist to essential: A librarian’s eBook journey

T
The Link
By: undefined, Fri Mar 6 2026

In the early 2000s, for most librarians, eBooks were a hassle. There were, and still are for most, issues like digital rights management (DRM) that limited what patrons could do with the books. There were hard access limits, limiting the number of people who could have a copy of the book at the same time. And all this, for a bunch of PDFs? But: What if things were different? What were librarians’ real, practical concerns? How could a publisher like Springer address them? Asking these questions began an open, frank, and ongoing dialogue with librarians, who described what they needed from a publisher for eBooks to deliver real value at scale.

Taking this feedback onboard, in 2005, Springer launched a new eBook approach built around these core needs: No DRM; access for multiple users and no limits on concurrent users; flexible use permissions and no limits on what readers could do with the eBook files. This new approach meant that eBooks’ power, to be shared and read and used with limits, was finally available, and it reflected how libraries already work with their academic communities. The result is that researchers and students can widely share Springer Nature eBooks and can easily use them in courses and in collaborations. This supports ongoing collaborations, discovery and learning across disciplines.  

Wendy Allen Shelburne, librarian at the University of Illinois, saw this model’s potential early on, and was among the first to sign up for this new way of doing eBooks. Her experience shows how librarians took an active role in shaping eBook evolution. On the occasion of looking back on the past 20 years of Springer Nature eBooks, I sat down with her to talk about her experience as an early eBook adopter. Keeping with the “book theme,” we looked at this like chapters: The rise of eBooks, the pandemic’s role as a catalyst, integrating eBooks into library services, shifting attitudes, and finally, a glimpse of the future.

Chapter 1:
The rise of eBooks in academic libraries

In 2006, it wasn’t obvious to everyone that eBooks were worth it, that they weren’t more work than they were worth, compared with traditional print books. “But nobody needs convincing anymore that eBooks are great, I get asked for them all the time now”, Shelburne points out.  

This shift in perception came gradually, as both librarians and users recognised the benefits and flexibility of digital resources. Especially when those eBooks don’t come with use restrictions or DRM. When buying one eBook license means everyone with library rights can get any book, at any time, and keep it forever. And, this includes textbooks. That means that if an assigned text is a Springer Nature eBook, students don’t have to pay out of pocket for it, and can keep the eBook file forever.  

Despite the internal adjustments required to make eBook acquisition work, Shelburne recalls the benefits of smoother access for students. “The joy of no longer getting printed lecture notes in computer science was...amazing and wonderful. It just became smooth sailing after a point in time”.   

Chapter 2:
The COVID-19 pandemic accelerated eBook adoption  

When the COVID-19 pandemic started, and libraries closed during lockdowns, librarians were faced with an unprecedented challenge. This moment marked a turning point in how libraries operated, as Shelburne shares her experiences at that time. “The pandemic, in my opinion, was the watershed moment in all of this. The only way you could operate was with eBooks, and that really just changed it completely. Were it not for eBooks, I don’t know what anybody would have done.” 

Shelburne remembers her institution going through a tough time when they had to migrate their integrated library system during the pandemic. “We had to close our fiscal year in May, which is early, and then we had no system until late June. So, that meant in the pandemic we couldn’t put anything in the catalogue.” 

Despite technical challenges, eBooks remained a reliable source for education and research, transforming even the most resistant disciplines: “It really changed. The last disciplines that weren’t eBook heavy…was really the humanities.” Now, she remarks, “linguistics people are always asking for e-books. The history people are always asking for e-books.” 

Chapter 3:
Enhancing library services through eBook integration 

In addition to cataloguing metadata like MARC records, eBook files are, themselves, completely searchable. This means an entirely new findability experience for users. Where researchers once had to navigate complex catalogue systems with specific subject headings, today’s digital resources offer faster, intuitive discovery. “Keyword searching is so much easier than subject headings,” Shelburne comments. "Nobody would have that problem now.”   

This transformation also reshaped how researchers use their library. While students still fill in the building, their behaviour reflects the digital approach to education. “There’s still a lot of bodies in the library, but I don’t think they’re doing the same stuff that they did 20 years ago,” Shelburne remarks. “You’d probably have to go to the rare book room or archives map library to see significant engagement with print. Probably what you’re going to see is a student sitting with a lot of snacks and a laptop.” 

Even the traditional library spaces have been adapted. “We have lots of group study spaces now, which we wouldn’t have had before. Very different. You never see anybody walking around with a backpack full of books anymore.” 

Chapter 4:
The changing attitudes toward eBooks over time 

Not everyone embraced digital resources right away. One of the most telling anecdotes Shelburne shared involves a self-described “curmudgeon”, a retired professor, once known for his resistance to anything electronic. Shelburne remembers him refusing to open email attachments, insisting that everything be pasted directly into the body of an email. But retirement brought new needs, and a surprising change of heart.  

He reached out to her for help accessing electronic resources remotely. “We had a long conversation where I went through easy proxy, VPN and all these things. Making sure he knew how to do everything. And the day I saw him in the curmudgeon T-shirt, he was like, ‘Thank you so much. That was so amazingly helpful. I am having such a great time using all the electronic things’ And I'm like, yeah, I remember when you wouldn't open an email attachment.” This story is far from unique. “I think his story could probably be applied to lots of people. I fought it. I was curmudgeonly about it. I refused to do it. Look at me now."

This transformation reflects a broader pattern, highlight how necessity often becomes a catalyst for change: “The pandemic definitely knocked out a long tail of ‘I need to print it, I need to do this. 'And then it’s like, ‘Oh, I guess I don’t.’” 

Chapter 5:
The future of eBooks and libraries in a digital age

Looking ahead, Shelburne reflects on digital resources’ evolving roles in academic libraries. While eBooks have become essential, she wonders if traditional publishing formats will stay the same. “I’m surprised that publishing container still hasn’t moved much,” Shelburne observes. She imagines a future where the boundaries between books, chapters, and articles may blur, and where the concept of a “journal” or even a “book” could be redefined. “What does the journal look like in 20 years? Are there even still books in 20 years?” Another rapidly transforming area? Artificial intelligence (AI). While she sees potential in AI for tasks like text mining and systematic reviews, she remains cautiously sceptical.  

Despite the uncertainties, eBooks have proven their value, and their story is far from over. Librarians like Wendy Shelburne, with their adaptability, curiosity, and a touch of humour, help shape the future of knowledge access.

As we look ahead to the next 20 years, Springer Nature’s mission to support learning and discovery remains unchanged. You’ll find an illustrated history of the last 20 years of Springer Nature eBooks at our “virtual museum”, When the Shelf Went Digital... 20 Years of Springer Nature eBook Collections, where you can explore key milestones, insights from authors, librarians and experts, as well as the events shaping the future of knowledge and global impact. Take a stroll through the stories that defined the eBook journey and see what’s next.  

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Nature Sensors supports sensing research across disciplines

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Mar 3 2026

For institutions and companies working with sensing technologies, the challenge is rarely a lack of research. Instead, it is keeping pace with developments in a field that evolves rapidly across disciplines, sectors and applications. Advances in sensing frequently move between foundational science and real‑world use, making it difficult to follow progress in a coherent way over time. The newest Nature Portfolio journal Nature Sensors is established to reflect this reality.  

The journal provides a dedicated forum for high‑quality research and industry‑relevant insight across sensing technologies, supporting organisations that need to track developments across use cases and over the long term. This approach is shaped by the perspective of Chief Editor Dr Olga Bubnova, whose background spans engineering physics, academic research and editorial leadership within the Nature Portfolio. As she notes, progress in sensing technologies often emerges where disciplines and sectors intersect. Bringing these perspectives together, she explains, helps clarify both where the field stands today and where it is heading next. 

Supporting organisations working across disciplines and sectors 

Research institutions and corporate R&D teams rarely operate within a single discipline. In sensing research, materials science, engineering, AI and data science are closely linked, and developments in one area often inform work in another. These connections can shape multiple research and development priorities at once.  

Nature Sensors reflects this way of working by publishing research from across the sensing landscape and emphasising work that remains relevant in more than one context. As Dr Bubnova puts it, “We look for research that people can return to and use in different ways, whether they’re approaching it from materials science, systems engineering or application development.” 

For universities, research institutes and companies, this joined‑up view supports longer‑term thinking about research directions, technology development and collaboration opportunities across sectors. 

Research across academic and industrial environments

Across sensing technologies, progress often depends on collaboration between academic and industrial research environments. Different teams contribute at different stages, from exploratory research through to system‑level development and applied use. From an editorial perspective, making these environments visible side by side reflects how the field advances. Many of the questions explored in sensing research are shared across sectors, and progress accelerates when these perspectives are connected rather than siloed. Bringing related work into conversation helps reveal how individual advances fit within a broader research picture.  

This approach is reflected in the range of topics represented in the journal, from sensing principles and AI‑enabled data analysis to applied systems in healthcare technologies, environmental monitoring, communications, robotics and autonomous systems. Together these contributions illustrate how sensing innovation develops through rich interaction between diverse research settings, following multiple interconnected pathways.

Connecting research, application and trust

Because sensing research often develops close to application, clarity and context are essential. Presenting academic and industrial perspectives together also helps place individual advances within the wider research landscape and shows how ideas move from concept to use. As Dr Bubnova observes, when research from different environments appears alongside one another, it becomes easier to understand how technologies progress through successive stages of development. 

Alongside this connection, trust in the research record remains critical. Across Springer Nature, AI tools support discovery, editorial processes and research integrity. Within Nature Sensors, these approaches contribute to clear and consistent review and publication practices. Consistency, Dr Bubnova notes, supports confidence in the literature, particularly for organisations that engage with research at scale. 

Publishing models aligned with institutional priorities

Publishing decisions across institutions and companies are shaped by the interplay of governance priorities, funding structures, and long‑term research strategy. Managing research outputs involves navigating access requirements, meeting compliance expectations and ensuring the ongoing integrity of the research record.

Within this context, Nature Sensors operates a hybrid publishing model that supports different organisational approaches under a single editorial framework. Subscription and open access options are treated as complementary routes, allowing institutions to align publication choices with policy and funding requirements while maintaining consistency in access and quality. 

From an editorial standpoint, this consistency is central. As Dr Bubnova explains, “Research may be published under different models, but it enters the literature with the same expectations around transparency, review and clarity. That’s important for organisations working across multiple policies and programmes.” For librarians and research managers, it supports informed decision‑making within a connected and accessible collection.  

A long‑term reference point for sensing research

Over time, Nature Sensors is intended to serve as a central resource for institutions and companies following developments across sensing technologies, including emerging areas such as quantum sensing, wearable innovations and data‑driven sensing systems. The journal draws research from diverse disciplines and sectors into a cohesive perspective on work relevant to healthcare, environmental monitoring and complex connected systems. As Dr Bubnova notes, when research is shared in ways that help organisations learn from each other and trace the links between ideas across the field, it strengthens understanding of the future direction of sensing technologies and their potential applications.

If you’d like to learn more about Nature Sensors or explore other journals in the Nature Portfolio that relate to your organisation’s work, our resources offer an overview of what each publication covers and how they connect to different areas of research.

Related content

Don’t miss out on the latest news and blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts.

AI in research and publishing: What institutions need to know from KRAF 2025

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Feb 24 2026

Artificial intelligence (AI) is now a central part of the research landscape, actively shaping how studies are written, reviewed and shared. For research institutions, this evolution opens up exciting opportunities to boost efficiency, advance discovery, and offer researchers powerful new forms of support. It also introduces important areas for consideration, including policy, ethics, integrity and training. With thoughtful planning, institutions can make the most of AI’s strengths, reinforce trust in science, and empower researchers to thrive.

If you’re shaping AI strategies for your institution, you’re facing both an enormous opportunity and a fast-moving set of challenges. That’s why global experts from academia, publishing and research policy came together at Springer Nature’s Korea Research Advisory Forum (KRAF) 2025, to share practical insights on how AI can be integrated into scholarly communication responsibly and effectively. This blog turns those insights into clear guidance for research institutions, helping you confidently shape AI strategies that support your researchers, strengthen trust and prepare your organisation for the future.

What AI means for institutional integrity

We all know AI is speeding up research workflows, from literature searches to drafting manuscripts, and that speed isn’t just a challenge; it’s a major opportunity. Opening the discussion at KRAF 2025, Nick Campbell, Springer Nature’s Vice President for Academic Affairs, reminded everyone that AI isn’t new to publishing, though we’ve never seen it at this scale or level of sophistication before. ‘We’ve been thinking about AI since the 1960s,’ he noted, pointing out that the company’s first experiment, a book generated by an early summarisation tool in 2019, predates today’s large language models. Now, those models can provide broader support, for example by helping researchers summarise literature, structure arguments, or polish text, although it's important to note that responsibility and final control must remain entirely with the author.

With AI advancing so quickly and the pros and cons becoming more prevalent, the rise in AI-generated submissions is prompting a wave of new editorial tools, policies and detection methods. Rather than overwhelming editors, this shift can empower them with better systems for identifying low-quality or fabricated work, ultimately raising the bar for what gets published. Campbell emphasised that the goal isn’t about limiting AI’s potential, but about using it responsibly. Springer Nature’s stance focuses on detecting misuse, reinforcing trust, and ensuring accountability throughout the research process. “AI is an assistant; humans make the decisions,” he said, where AI continues to enhance human expertise without replacing it, and where the industry can build more rigorous and efficient publishing workflows than ever before.

But what does this mean for institutions? It’s a chance for institutions to lead. As highlighted in our Perspectives on AI in scholarly communications report, providing researchers with clear, practical guidance on when and how to use AI responsibly helps strengthen research integrity, build confidence across your organisation, and support better collaboration with publishers. By setting thoughtful AI policies now, institutions can position themselves as proactive leaders shaping a more efficient, collaborative and trusted research future.

How editors are responding and what institutions can learn

Editors from Korean society journals have observed a noticeable rise in AI‑supported submissions, reflecting how quickly generative tools are being adopted across the research community. Many of these papers draw on readily available open datasets, creating new challenges for editorial teams as they assess quality and rigour. Institutions can help ease this pressure by updating internal review processes and giving researchers the training they need. It’s also worth exploring publisher tools, like AI‑powered integrity checks, to catch problems early and prevent poor‑quality submissions from slipping through the net.

The evolving needs of researchers in a changing landscape

Laura Schmid, Chief Editor at Nature Reviews Computing (previously Editor at Nature Communications), shared some revealing survey results that highlight just how quickly researcher behaviour is shifting. Almost every researcher who has experimented with AI reports finding it genuinely helpful, whether for speeding up literature searches, supporting coding tasks, or helping with early stage writing and structuring ideas. And even those who haven’t taken the leap yet recognise its growing relevance; many expect AI to become a routine part of research workflows in the near future. Enthusiasm for AI is accompanied by a growing awareness of key considerations, including bias in the data fed into AI models, bias that can become embedded in those models and reflected in their outputs, as well as concerns around data quality, accuracy, and environmental impact. These insights point to a research community that approaches AI with curiosity and optimism, embracing its potential while maintaining a strong commitment to responsible use.

“Researchers find AI useful, but integrity and sustainability must lead.” - Laura Schmid, Chief Editor at Nature Reviews Computing (previously Editor at Nature Communications)

Experts at KRAF highlighted that effective and responsible AI use is strengthened by context. As Prof. JK Seong, Seoul National University explained, biological and environmental variability adds important nuance to scientific findings, and when AI tools are designed to reflect this complexity, they can deepen insights and support strong reproducibility.

These perspectives show that as researchers become more aware of both the benefits and the complexities of AI, from embedded bias to the need for contextualised models, institutions have a key role in helping them use these tools responsibly and in ways that strengthen scientific integrity and open new avenues of discovery.

Envisioning interactive and open research

The forum concluded by highlighting Springer Nature’s vision for more open and interactive research, including the possibility for readers to dynamically interrogate research data, such as filtering results by specific conditions.

“AI can help us move toward more open, reproducible, and interactive research, but integrity must lead the way.” - Nick Campbell, Vice President, Academic Affairs at Springer Nature

Institutions have a meaningful opportunity to shape the future of open science by using publisher tools that bring transparency into everyday workflows. This dedication helps strengthen trust and supports research in advancing with clarity and momentum.

The bigger picture of building trust in a digital age

Researchers, publishers and institutions all share a commitment to maintaining strong confidence in scholarly communication, which calls for embedding human‑centred values such as fairness, accountability and transparency throughout the research process and throughout the implementation of AI. When institutions champion these principles, they strengthen research integrity and open the door to new possibilities for discovery, collaboration and innovation.

As institutions shape their AI strategies, they have a meaningful opportunity to guide the research community toward responsible and confident adoption. Springer Nature’s AI & Integrity hubs offer practical frameworks, tools and shared insights to support this work. The Link gives institutions access to peer insights that help refine and improve research workflows.

To support this evolution, institutions may wish to focus on the following areas:

  • Develop clear, institution-wide AI policies covering authorship, disclosure, peer review, and data governance.
  • Provide practical training and workshops to build researchers’ confidence in responsible AI use, transparent reporting, and critical evaluation.
  • Equip researchers with guidance on ethical standards, including quality, bias mitigation, reproducibility, and best practices for AI-assisted research.
  • Promote transparency by encouraging detailed reporting and clear disclosure of AI-assisted writing, analysis, and workflow steps.
  • Collaborate closely with publishers to stay informed about emerging integrity risks, expectations, and evolving AI policies.
  • Use the outputs from publisher screening and integrity checks, such as plagiarism reports or data‑availability assessments, to help strengthen internal review processes.
  • Champion context-aware, scientifically grounded AI tools that support robust research design and reflect real-world complexity.
  • Advance open science practices by embedding transparency and reproducibility into everyday research workflows.

For institutions looking to evolve their AI thinking with confidence, The Link and the AI & Integrity hubs provide supportive places to gather insights, hear from peers and deepen understanding at your own pace.

About the Korean Research Advisory Forum (KRAF)

Meeting the evolving expectations of the research community requires ongoing collaboration with institutional leaders. After launching the US Research Advisory Council in 2021, this collaborative model expanded in 2024 with the Korean Research Advisory Forum, uniting experts from across academia to share perspectives and shape future priorities. The forum members are listed below (in alphabetical order):

•    Changmo Sung, Director, Mission PM Center, Korea ARPA-H
•    Chulhong Kim, Professor, Pohang University of Science and Technology
•    Heisook Lee, President, GISTeR
•    Henry Hee-Seung Bom, Professor, Chonnam National University
•    Jae Sung Lee, Professor, Seoul National University
•    Je Kyung Seong, Professor, Seoul National University
•    Jooyoung Park, Associate Professor, Seoul National University
•    Ki Tae Nam, Professor, Seoul National University
•    Mijin Yun, Professor, Yonsei University College of Medicine
•    Sang Yup Lee, Professor, Korea Advanced Institute of Science and Technology
•    Sun Huh, Professor, Hallym University 
•    William Jo, Professor, Ewha Womans University
•    Woojung Jang, CEO, AI Star
•    Wooyoung Shim, Professor, Yonsei University
•    Yongsik Ok, Professor, Korea University

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts today!


The story of Springer’s first open access book

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Tue Feb 17 2026

This article was originally published in 2017 and was last updated in January 2026.

Did you know that it has been 15 years since Springer published it’s first OA book? To commemorate this landmark, we feature the story of our first open access book and the benefits of publishing open access. 

A year before the official launch of its OA books programme in August 2012, Springer published its first OA book: Future Internet Assembly 2011: Achievements and Technological Promises. Alfred Hofmann, then editor and now retired since 2020, describes the challenges of creating the first OA book.  

“The project was difficult to realize within Springer as nobody had experience regarding OA book publishing at that time.”

This was before many publishers had begun to offer OA for books. But there was a definite need to support OA publication: 

“The Future Internet Assembly series was a sequence of conferences sponsored by the European Community, which already at that time advocated OA publication of research results developed with EC-sponsored activities.“


- Alfred Hofmann, Former VP at Springer in 2017

“Open access is a requirement for all projects funded by Horizon 2020 […] so it was imperative to use the open access model in order to obtain a sufficient large number and high quality contributions from authors.” 


- Anastasius Gavras, contributing editor of Future Internet Assembly 2011 

With this need in mind, Springer challenged the status quo, successfully changing internal workflows and establishing a pricing model through a book processing charge (BPC), as well as approving use of a Creative Commons license so that Gavras and co-editors could publish Future Internet Assembly 2011 in compliance with their funder’s OA policy. 

Experiencing the benefits of open access 

Compliance with funder requirements is just one of the many reasons for publishing a book open access. There are many benefits for an author choosing to publish their research as an OA book, from increased discoverability and visibility, immediate online access, widened readership outside of their traditional research community, increased potential for collaboration, or career progression. Gavras confirmed that in the case of Future Internet Assembly 2011

“Open access contributed to increased visibility of the published works, and to the level of citations per chapter.” 

Open access at Springer 

In addition to Springer Nature Link, our comprehensive online delivery platform, all Springer Nature open access books and chapters are listed in the Directory of Open Access Books (DOAB) and, where appropriate, PubMed’s NCBI Bookshelf. We also work with Web of Science, Scopus and Google Scholar. Inclusion on these sites enhances the visibility and discoverability of authors’ work. As a result, open access books on Springer Nature Link receive 10x the downloads, 2.4x the citations, and 10x the online mentions of our non-OA books.  

Our OA books reach readers in 61% more countries globally than our non-OA books, and a majority of these additional countries are low and middle-low income countries. See paper/infographics here. For example, the Future Internet Assembly 2011 has now reached over a million downloads and almost 70 citations via Springer Nature Link.  

According to the download data available from the book’s homepage, this works out at around 1,116,665 downloads of the full book (as of 31 January 2026). Gavras has since published further open access books with Springer for these reasons.

Open access books today

Since its launch fifteen years ago, Springer Nature has published over 4,000 open access books across its Springer, Palgrave and Apress imprints, covering a wide range of disciplines within science, technology, medicine, humanities and social sciences.  The notable open access books list includes author Gerard t’Hooft, winner of the 1999 Nobel Prize in Physics and co-author Sir Timothy Berners-Lee, inventor of the World Wide Web and winner of the 2016 ACM A.M. Turing Award. 

Springer Nature OA books are subject to the same high level peer-review, production and publishing processes followed by traditional Springer Nature books and they are freely and immediately available online for anyone to download. The BPC covers all the costs of commissioning, copyediting, proofreading, production, dissemination and promotion. Readers worldwide can share and reuse books and chapters published open access using the applied Creative Commons License, ensuring maximum reuse as well as enabling authors to retain copyright for their work.

Interested in experiencing the benefits of open access publishing? 
Get in touch with a Springer, Palgrave, or Apress publishing editor to find out more.

From silos to systems building interoperable R&D workflows

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Feb 17 2026

Despite rapid digitalisation, research workflows often remain fragmented. Disconnected tools and data create unnecessary friction for labs and teams. In this blog, three data‑driven innovators explore why interoperability matters, the challenges labs face today and what more connected workflows could enable.

Every day, research teams lose valuable time and insights because their systems don’t connect as they should. Data sits in proprietary formats, workflows don’t quite line up, and sharing information across teams is harder than it needs to be. These everyday frictions often go unnoticed, yet they quietly slow down research and innovation. At a time when speed, transparency and reproducibility matter more than ever, such inefficiencies can have real consequences.

This is why interoperable workflows are moving onto the strategic agenda for digital labs. When tools, systems and data are able to work together, organizations can streamline research processes, collaborate more effectively and produce results that are both robust and scalable. To better understand how this shift is taking shape, we spoke with three experts at Springer Nature: Rob Padilla, Product Director, Digital Life Science Solutions; Emma Ganley, Director of Strategic Initiatives at protocols.io; and Prathik Roy, Product Director, Data Solutions & Strategy. They share their perspectives on why interoperability matters, the practical challenges labs face today, and how publishers and technology providers can help build more connected research environments.

Breaking down barriers to release value

As we’ve seen, siloed activity risks slowing the rate of discovery and innovation. This isn’t to say there’s no place left in the lab for modular platforms so long as they’re integrated well to avoid fragmentation. Modularity provides the flexibility to maximise internal efficiency without disrupting the entire system.

Interoperable systems on the other hand extend a platform’s reach seamlessly across tools, systems and organisations. What were once isolated tools are transformed into a connected ecosystem. And the benefits are immense. Digital lab operations are smarter and faster, generating more reproducible results. All of which leads to better collaboration and decision-making, increasing efficiencies and ultimately greater speed to market.

Achieving interoperable workflows is not a straightforward process though, as Rob Padilla points out. “Many big organisations are very complex and could potentially have many different ELNs at different locations, with formats that aren’t interoperable. If you want to export from an ELN to a different company or team, this will really hold you back. And this is an ongoing problem; when applications were originally designed, the main objective was “does it work?”. They were never built with interoperability in mind, but now people want digital product ecosystems.”

Emma Ganley agrees. She points out that tool providers need to bear these developments in mind. “They need a holistic view of what they’re offering, and how all these tools work together.”

Interoperable systems – key elements

Interoperable research environments are built on a small number of core capabilities that allow systems, data and teams to work seamlessly together. These elements provide the technical and organisational foundations for integrated workflows, trusted data use and collaboration at scale. The sections below highlight three key components that support connected digital labs in practice.

1. APIs driving integration across R&D systems

APIs (Application Programming Interfaces) play a central role in the connected lab environment. They act as a communication layer, allowing different systems to talk to each other in a format they can all understand. They’re the glue that holds together all the components of the digital lab, making it a cohesive whole.

“APIs play a crucial role in busting siloes,” says Prathik Roy. “A big pharmaceutical company will have all the major sources of data, but they need to make sense of it all. APIs enable them to integrate content directly into their lab environment, which bypasses the barriers they would otherwise encounter looking for solutions externally.”

This is where publishers play their part in promoting interoperability. “Corporate organisations want content in machine-readable format, and they need the interoperability to ingest the content with their AI systems such as ELNs,” says Prathik. “Springer Nature have created APIs for the integration of their vast collection of healthcare and medicine articles, personalised for the pharma/healthcare space. We enrich the content by annotating it, so relevant information can be easily extracted.”

2. Open data is the power behind connected research ecosystems

Lack of standardization has been a persistent challenge since data sharing began. As recently as 5 to 10 years ago, microscopy image data was notoriously difficult to access due to vendors’ proprietary file types, creating enormous problems for researchers and labs. The advent of open (FAIR) data and open-source tools was a major factor in resolving the issue.

“The concept of FAIR data is really big, and informs the discussion,” says Rob. “It’s a set of principles designed to improve reproducibility, stating that data should be Findable, Accessible, Interoperable, and Reusable.” He adds that FAIR data has lately come to mean Fully AI Ready as well. “Any AI system is only as good as the data going into it. High quality data going in is the foundation for good quality information coming out.”

Prathik adds that Springer Nature’s role is critical to healthcare and medicine. “You could build a drug discovery pipeline built on misinformation. Having access to proper, peer-reviewed data is vital for AI in medicine.”

3. Collaboration is driving speed and scalability in the cloud

These common principles are a foundation for trustworthy, scalable and efficient science. They facilitate collaboration by reducing ambiguity and making it easier for teams across disciplines, institutions or countries to share and integrate their data.

Cloud-based platforms are an essential element of the collaborative digital lab. They accelerate communication by allowing teams to work together seamlessly in real time, no matter where they’re located. Researchers at a global biotech company can simultaneously review experimental data, update project notes and adjust workflows, allowing discoveries and development cycles to progress more quickly and accurately. The result? Faster iteration and speed to market.

Building a future-ready digital lab for scalable innovation

Together, APIs, open data and cloud‑based collaboration provide the foundations for interoperable digital labs. When these elements work in combination, they support workflows that connect systems, enable data reuse and help teams collaborate effectively across platforms and locations. Applying shared standards, including FAIR principles, supports environments that can evolve alongside research needs.

Interoperable and well‑structured data environments contribute to consistency across research processes. Accessible, well‑integrated data supports reproducible results and enables researchers to build on existing work with confidence. This emphasis on reliability underpins scientific progress and supports innovation at scale as research continues to become more data‑driven.

Gain further insights into reproducibility and interoperability

Across research environments, interoperability takes shape through everyday decisions about how systems connect, how data is structured and how teams collaborate. From APIs that link tools and content, to open data practices and cloud‑based platforms, these approaches help research workflows come together in a more coherent way. The result is an environment where data can be reused with confidence, collaboration is woven into day‑to‑day work, and reproducibility remains central across the research lifecycle.

For those interested in exploring these ideas further, the white paper Reproducibility in the Life Sciences looks more closely at how reproducible research practices are developing across the life sciences community. You can also find more information on Springer Nature’s platforms and services, which are designed to support connected workflows and the reliable use of research content within digital lab environments.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts

How China’s regulatory reforms are reshaping global clinical trials and partnerships 

T
The Link
By: undefined, Fri Feb 13 2026

A combination of regulatory reforms and research funding and investment in China has created a situation where a group of Chinese companies have full pipelines, but need partners to market those drugs beyond Greater China. AdisInsight’s recent report, Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers and Shakers, details 10 of these companies and their pipelines, but I wanted to take a more holistic view of how this is playing out, by looking at the forces driving this, some key pipeline highlights, and the opportunities for global pharma companies  

China advances from generics to biotech leadership

How would a country like China transform its pharmaceutical sector from a generics-manufacturing “back office” mainstay to an innovation powerhouse? Starting in 2015, and continuing in 2020, China took active steps to reform its regulatory and clinical trials processes, making them, at a minimum, competitive with the rest of the world. In 2015, China instituted its “Opinions on the Reform of Review and Approval Process for Drugs and Medical Devices,” and took a further step in 2020 with the revision of the “Provisions for Drug Registration.” These introduced expedited pathways for priority review, conditional approvals, and breakthrough therapy designations, and shortened development timelines and reduced regulatory bottlenecks.   

These reforms particularly stimulated development of drugs using newer technologies like monoclonal and bispecific antibodies, chimeric antigen receptor T-cell (CAR-T) approaches, and others, that are showing great promise in dealing with previously intransigent diseases (pancreatic cancer, for example). Moreover, these reforms have given investors increased confidence in China-developed therapies, helping these companies attract and develop global partnerships.  

And while China’s rapidly evolving biotech and pharma sector is having great success with therapeutics, many of these companies lack the global marketing footprint needed to bring these new drugs to the patients around the world who need them. This combination means opportunities for global and US/EU-based companies to partner with Chinese firms to bring these badly needed medicines to the world.   

Combined with investments in research, and in companies commercialising that research, China is now home to a collection of biotech and pharmaceutical companies with portfolios of approved or late-stage therapies for treating life threatening diseases.   

The report, Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers & Shakers, looks at 10 of these firms, highlighting key compounds in their portfolios, along with these companies’ strengths, weaknesses, and opportunities for global pharmaceutical companies. The report profiles the following companies: Akeso, 3SBio, Insilico Medicine, Sinopharm, Innovent Biologics, Legend Biotech, WuXi Biologic, Duality Biologics, Sciwind Biosciences and Lepu Pharma.

Rising successes in China’s late‑stage biologics

Many of the therapeutics in late development or on the market come from advanced biotech categories, especially breakthrough therapies or expedited review. These include monoclonal and bispecific antibodies or other biologics treating cancer, metabolic disorders, or autoimmune disorders, some of the most difficult disease states to treat.

For example, Akeso’s lung cancer bispecific antibody, Ivonescimab, outperformed Merck’s Keytruda for non-small cell lung cancer (NSCLC), giving patients more than 11 months without progression, as compared to Keytruda’s 5.8 months. But Keytruda’s first-mover advantage combined with Merck’s global marketing footprint has kept Keytruda as the market leader, despite Ivonescimab better efficacy.

Another example: Sinopharm Group’s explosive growth, moving to the 4th strongest pharmaceutical company (up from 13th) on the strength of its herpes zoster mRNA vaccine, a joint venture with Lonza, and its pivotal role in global COVID-19 vaccine development.

Innovent Biologics has both a GLP-1 compound (mazdutide) already approved, as well as its foothold in oncology with sintillmab.

Other key developments include:

  • 3SBio has signed a landmark licensing deal (up to $6B) with Pfizer for SSGJ‑707 (PD‑1/VEGF bispecific), granting global rights outside China and setting up planned Phase III programs internationally.   
  • Insilico Medicine is pioneering AI‑driven drug discovery that is boosting R&D productivity and feeding assets into global development; the references include recent financing that underpins these programs.   
  • Innovent Biologics has secured China approval for Sycume (teprotumumab biosimilar) in thyroid eye disease; expanded internationally via Roche collaborations and a $1.2B Takeda agreement covering late‑stage oncology assets outside Greater China.   
  • Legend Biotech is advancing innovative CAR-T programs with strategic collaborations (e.g., Janssen, Novartis), drawing strong global investor attention.   
  • WuXi Biologics achieved EMA approval at its Dundalk, Ireland site enabling first commercial launch there, and passed FDA pre‑license inspections across multiple Wuxi facilities, strengthening global dual‑sourcing and trial support.   
  • Duality Biologics (DualityBio) reported Phase III success (with BioNTech’s BNT323) in HER2‑positive breast cancer and licensing (DB‑1418) alongside a successful Hong Kong IPO, evidence of late‑stage momentum with antibody-drug conjugates (ADCs).   
  • Sciwind Biosciences has signed a $70M upfront global licensing (outside China & South Korea) with Verdiva Bio for ecnoglutide and amylin receptor agonists, with up to $2.4B in milestones, positioning metabolic assets for wider trials.   
  • Lepu Biopharma is advancing an ADC pipeline with a major licensing deal for MRG007 and presented preclinical data at AACR 2025; also out‑licensed TOPAbody T‑cell engager assets to Excalipoint with significant milestone potential.

China’s biotech momentum expands global R&D paths

China’s rapid transformation into a global innovation hub offers R&D teams a unique window of opportunity. With regulatory reforms streamlining approvals and enabling faster development cycles, Chinese biopharma companies are now advancing cutting‑edge biologics, AI‑driven discovery programs, and late‑stage oncology and metabolic assets that increasingly match global standards. These shifts are strengthening China’s position as a vital source of inventive pipelines, attracting investment and expanding its contribution to global drug development portfolios. 

For global R&D leaders, this means earlier access to differentiated assets, the potential to accelerate clinical progress through China’s faster and more scalable trial infrastructure, and new avenues for co-development with companies whose scientific capabilities have grown rapidly. At a strategic level, China’s maturing biotech ecosystem signals a shift from viewing the region as a manufacturing base to integrating it as a core component of global innovation planning, portfolio diversification and long-term competitive advantage.

To explore these trends in more depth and understand how China’s evolving biotech landscape could shape your long‑term R&D strategy, dive into the full Strategic Pharma Insights: Asia Focus Part I: China’s Movers & Shakers report, where company profiles, pipeline analyses, and market data provide a clearer view of the opportunities ahead.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Exploring the visual side of science storytelling

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Wed Feb 11 2026

In 2025, Samira Hamza was the second recipient of the Springer Nature Fellowship for Advancing Science Journalism in Africa and the Middle East. The fellowship, offered in collaboration with the Knight Science Journalism (KSJ) Program at MIT, honours former Springer Nature colleague and pioneering Egyptian science journalist Mohammed Yahia who passed away in 2023. 

The aim is to help reporters and editors from the region to further develop a successful career in science journalism; reflecting Springer Nature’s commitment to supporting science communication and advancing discovery all around the world.  

Here Samira speaks with Lucie McCormick, a student in MIT’s Graduate Program in Science Writing, about her career so far and her hopes for her time studying at MIT. The interview was first published on the KSJ website while Samira was studying in the US and has been republished here, to mark International Day of Women and Girls in Science 2026, with their permission.  

Samira Hamza almost never stops thinking about her audience. The Egyptian journalist began her career as a translator for a media research institute that analyses how global media talk about the Arab world. She later became a translator and then senior editor for the Egyptian edition of National Geographic Magazine, where one of her favourite responsibilities was deciding which stories from the magazine’s English-language edition would resonate with her Egyptian young-adult readers. In that role, she says, she aimed to do more than just translate stories; she wanted to localise the science - to tie it to familiar cultural identifiers and on-the-ground realities - in order to make the issues relevant and accessible to people in her region. 

Hamza now works as the head of visual research for the online show “Al-Daheeh” which translates, in English, to “The Nerd.” There, she uses visual storytelling to make science accessible to general audiences across the Arab Region. She believes that the show’s viewers deserve accurate portrayals of science-related events, and she spends a lot of time fact-checking and researching the backstory of historic images. 

In 2025, Hamza became the second journalist ever selected for the Knight Science Journalism Program’s Advancing Science Journalism in Africa and the Middle East Fellowship. The one-semester fellowship was formed in partnership with Springer Nature to honour the late Egyptian science journalist Mohammed Yahia, for whom Hamza has expressed great admiration. 

I recently sat down with Hamza on two occasions to discuss her time at MIT, her fascination with transformation, and how she sees her role as a science communicator in the Middle East. Our conversations, below, have been edited for length and clarity. 

Lucie McCormick: You’ve done a semester-long fellowship through KSJ for journalists from the Middle East and Africa. Can you share a little about the work you focused on? 

Samira Hamza: Since I focus on audience psychology, I built a curriculum of courses about cognitive neuroscience and cognition, neurobiology of self, and so on. I also took courses about data and information visualization, computation and expression, and the history of science. 

I care a lot about the audience; I usually picture the viewers and readers that consume my stories as if they are my parents, or my nieces, because my mom and dad are illiterate. So whenever I write something I ask, would my dad read it? Or if I talk to him about it, would he understand? If he wouldn’t, I won’t write it, or I would rephrase it to be accessible to him. That’s why I like the show I’m working at now in Egypt, because it has this wide spectrum of audience. We are trying to simplify, to say something through the storytelling. 

LM: I’m curious how the relationship between data visualisation and cognitive neuroscience unfolds in your work. With your background focusing on audience and visualisation, do you feel like you’re seeing differences in how audiences behave in different parts of the world? 

SH: I always have in my mind that not everything I learn here could apply the same way to my audience. For example, in one class I’m taking, we talked about climate change. Who is the most affected in the category of climate change? Farmers and rural people. 

But we [in the Middle East] are still in the phase of convincing [people] they have a hand in climate change, and a hand in a solution. This is why the visuals have a big role in this. Because whenever you have a story about climate change, you have photos of the glaciers in Antarctica melting, or of a polar bear alone on the side of an iceberg. This is irrelevant for my audience: we are living in a semi-arid region. We don’t want our readers to think “it’s the first world’s problem, not ours.” 

So if you are going to talk about climate change, talk to them about the crops. Talk to them about how coastal cities could drown. You have to talk to them [through] their interests, not just deliver the facts as they are. 

LM: So when you’re doing translational work, you’re not only translating words, you are translating ideas as well. 

SH: I’m localising. I’m trying to localise; even when I translate a whole story from its origin, first I choose a story that’s relevant, and also tell them how it would [show up] in our society. 

In the digital show I work on now, we localise the tone of voice when discussing complex scientific concepts. We do this in various ways, such as having a comedy content writer, because humour is an integral part of our culture. 

LM: How do you see your role as a science journalist communicating to audiences outside your region? 

SH: To challenge prevailing misconceptions and implicit biases about my region by offering accurate, evidence-based, and context-rich reporting. 

LM: I am curious what it’s like to be here in the U.S at this moment? 

SH: I think maybe it’s my destiny to be here in this time to speak up, about my existence, my region, my country, my gender, because even if women are underrepresented all over the world, women from my background are even more marginalised and less visible, and that’s why sharing my voice feels important. 

So yeah, I think it gives me a responsibility to gain as much as I can in only one semester - that’s why I have a bunch of classes - and go back as Samira, who, I don’t want to say is different from the Samira that came, but Samira that has something extra, a wider horizon. So, I’m trying to do my best. 

I started with translation, and I’m trying now to simplify information and visualise everything. When I look at all of these, I think there is something common between them. I like transformation. That’s why I like writing - I transform my thoughts to words. I like translating - I transform words from one language to another. I like simplifying information - that’s totally transformation. And then visualisation is transformation from written to visual. 

I think that what motivated me for all of this is my passion for transformation. I’ve long been captivated by butterflies because they are the symbol of transformation from phase to phase even if their life is very short. My time here with KSJ is short, too, and I want to have a hand in transforming the scene of science journalism in my region. 

LM: What do you think is next for you? 

SH: Next for me is most likely to go back to Egypt and pass on this experience. I don’t want it to be just the few of us science journalists in the region. I want us to have momentum and a wider network that interacts with each other, and inspires each other, so we tell a broader variety of stories. And I think having fresh blood can help. 

Related Tags:

Introducing Nature Progress

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Feb 11 2026

Science and research are always in motion. New and exciting explorations and discoveries shape and reshape our understanding every day, across the globe. To support the advances in dynamic research horizons, Nature Portfolio extends its boundaries with a new series: Nature Progress.  

The new series unites with research communities to foster progress in rapidly advancing fields. What does this mean in practice and how will the series grow to support more diverse audiences globally? Nature Portfolio’s Allison Lang, Vice President Nature Communications Portfolio and Deborah Sweet, Executive Vice President, Journals, Nature Portfolio reveal details about the new series and share their enthusiasm for Nature Progress.  


What is Nature Progress?  

A. Lang: Nature Progress is a new series of fully open access journals in the Nature Portfolio family, covering a wide range of scientific disciplines. Collaborating with research communities in rapidly advancing fields, the new series will guide the progress of these fast growing, vibrant, and dynamic research areas.  

D. Sweet: Nature Progress journals are set up to support and serve research communities through the development of close relationships with them. They will do this while espousing the same values and focus on quality that researchers expect from Nature Portfolio. Journals in the Nature Progress series will enjoy the same editorial oversight, rigorous peer review, and high publication and production standards as any Nature Portfolio journals.  

A. Lang: We are building on Nature Portfolio’s longstanding reputation for rigour and high-quality research publications in creating and developing Nature Progress.  With the new series, we aim to reach a broader, global audience, and we are doing that in tandem with our communities. This is an evolution for the Nature brand. 


What prompted the launch of Nature Progress?  

D. Sweet: We saw the need for a new Nature Portfolio series from the authors who are already submitting to us. Through their publication behaviour as well as surveys we’ve done, our authors have communicated to us that they’d appreciate having another option within the Nature Portfolio journal family.  

Additionally, we noticed that there is growth in some fields that we don’t think we can support effectively within the range of journals that we currently have. The new series, Nature Progress, addresses both these needs. 

A. Lang: Indeed, the inspiration came from our desire and commitment to support our authors and help them find a home for their research.   

D. Sweet: We chose the name Nature Progress for this series because that is exactly what the papers in these journals will describe: progress! It’s also a reference to the focus on fields that are seeing particularly strong growth, and therefore also significant progress. 

“We chose a collaborative editorial model so we could really embed the Nature Progress journals in faster growing and dynamic fields.” 


- Allison Lang, Vice President Nature Communications Portfolio 


Tell us more about the collaboration with research communities in Nature Progress.  

A. Lang: We chose a collaborative editorial model so we could really embed the Nature Progress journals in faster growing and dynamic fields. In practice, it means developing editorial teams that represent the best of both worlds: We pair our in-house expertise with community knowledge by enlisting experts in the field as editorial board members. We already know that this model works extremely well for the Communications series of journals.  

Nature Progress editorial board members will handle manuscripts, and in-house editors will make the final decisions regarding publication. These editorial board members, all experts who are deeply embedded in their research community, will act as advocates for their journal and the Nature Progress series. In their roles in both the research community and the journals, they will directly support authors in their publication journey with us while shaping their discipline.   


What are the benefits of the collaborative editorial model for the Nature Progress series? 

D. Sweet: It’s clear that the time and dedication that professional, in-house editors are able to devote to journals has significant benefit for the journals and for the authors who publish in them, and we hear that all the time in feedback from authors.  

But particularly in fields that are changing quickly, people who are “on the ground” and working directly in relevant topic areas have valuable insights to bring as well. With academic editorial board members, Nature Progress journals will expand the overall editorial team’s topical expertise, and cover more areas directly than we otherwise could with only an in-house team.   

We’re really looking forward to working closely with the academic editors who will join us to collaborate on the Nature Progress series. We will equip this carefully selected group of editors with all the tools and background they need to be able to work effectively as part of the Nature Portfolio editorial team.  

“Open access publishing enables rapid dissemination and collaboration. These are meaningful to any field of research, but definitely so in those dynamic and evolving fields that Nature Progress will serve.” 


- Deborah Sweet, Executive Vice President, Journals, Nature Portfolio 


Nature Progress journals are fully open access. This means every accepted article will become immediately and entirely accessible to anyone, anywhere. Why did you decide to establish Nature Progress as a fully open access series?  

D. Sweet: We think open access is a good fit for the new Nature Progress series because it will help make sure that the papers we choose have wide readership right from the outset and enhance their global reach.   

Open access publishing enables rapid dissemination and collaboration. These are meaningful to any field of research, but definitely so in those dynamic and evolving fields that Nature Progress will serve. 

To enable more authors to publish open access in the Nature Progress journals, regardless of funding, we offer waivers and discounts on article processing charges (APCs). 

A. Lang: There is major support from funders, institutions, and authors for open access publishing. The data shows us there is significant uptake and support for the open access option in many fields.  

Publishing research open access has significant advantages of accessibility and readership to authors. We want the content from the Nature Progress series to be globally accessible and reach the widest possible audience. 


What can we expect to see from Nature Progress and how will it evolve?  

A. Lang: We have chosen two rapidly growing fields to kick off this series. In March 2026, we will launch the first two journals in the series: Nature Progress Oncology and Nature Progress Brain Health.  

Following the launch of our first two journals that cover clinical research, we will introduce additional titles later this year focusing on other areas of research. For every new journal and generally as the series grows, our priority will be to identify rapidly growing research areas in which we can support our authors better in their Nature Portfolio journey. 

D. Sweet: We plan to develop the series and announce new journals in topic areas where feedback from the research community suggests that a journal from the Nature Progress series could help the field grow and move forward.   


What excites you most about Nature Progress?   

D. Sweet: I’m always excited about a new way for us to support the research community, and that is what I see this series doing. We know authors are enthusiastic about publishing with Nature Portfolio, and this new journal series will give us an opportunity to offer that option to more authors, and particularly those working in some of the most exciting and rapidly growing fields.   

A. Lang: I am very enthusiastic about this new project! What excites me the most is bringing the reputation and rigour of the Nature Portfolio to a new series that is developed in response to the needs of research communities.  

I am looking forward to welcoming and working more closely with editorial board members in this context. I know from many previous experiences the wealth of opportunity and expertise that can be harnessed from community engagement, creating more diverse thinking.   


Nature Progress: What you need to know about the new journal series

Submissions  

The first two journals in the new Nature Progress journal series will open for submission on 19 March 2026.  

Scope: 

  • Nature Progress Oncology, publishing high-quality primary research across basic, translational, and clinical oncology 
  • Nature Progress Brain Health, spanning translational neuroscience, neurology, and neuropsychiatry 

Fully open access 

Nature Progress is a fully open access series. Its journals will complement Springer Nature’s existing portfolio of around 700 fully open access journals and build on the more than 240,000 open access articles published each year across Springer Nature’s portfolios.  

The APCs for the new series will be within the range of  EUR 4,390 – 5,090. As a fully open access series, the Nature Progress journals will be supported by Springer Nature’s APC waiver policy

Collaborative editorial model  

Authors publishing in the new series will benefit from the expertise of both specialist in-house Nature Portfolio editors and  external editorial board members from the research community. The in-house editorial team will include a chief editor, a deputy editor, and an associate editor.  Full editorial details and processes will be published when the journals open for submission. 


You can follow our Nature Portfolio LinkedIn page to be the first to hear more about the journals when they open for submissions.

A new chapter for the journal Theoretical and Applied Climatology

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Feb 11 2026

The journal Theoretical and Applied Climatology is entering a new phase as the current Editor-in-Chief Prof. Dr. Christian Bernhofer, hands over the editorship to Dr. Solomon Gebrechorkos. In this conversation, they share insights on the state of climate research, the challenges facing the field, and the future direction for the journal. 

How has the landscape of scientific publishing changed in recent years, particularly for climate science journals?
P_Christian Bernhofer © Springer Nature 2026


Prof Dr Christian Bernhofer: This change has been ongoing for many years but has accelerated in the last decade. It involves the competition between traditional journals and newer models, including also journals with questionable business practices - often described as “predatory journals” as well as “internet only” based journals, often run by science related agencies. The best means to describe the fundamental difference between these various types of journals is to look at how they treat peer reviewing and the distribution of publishing costs. Some journals have been criticized for inadequate peer review; there is little feedback from reviewers and the business model is based on costs for the authors. All journals which take care to conduct a rigorous peer review share one challenge: to find and engage well suited peer reviewers. As the global community of scientists is growing, and a larger and more fair contribution is coming from the global South, there are relatively few “experienced” scientists available globally. This leads to increasing workloads for the reviewers and sometimes frustration on the extended reviewing periods of some manuscripts. 

An additional challenge comes from a growing tendency in some parts of society to treat scientific findings as opinions. Opinions can differ and treating them as an equally important input into decision-making, increases the influence according to economic and technological power. I see this as an enormous risk to a sustainable future, as economic reasoning often prefers short-term profits over long-term benefits. As climatologists, we use facts or reasoning (like models) to learn what is right or wrong. We might fail sometimes, but quality assurance – as peer reviewing in a decent journal – helps to avoid failures. However, I would appreciate a different approach to publishing in academic careers. If we concentrate more on the quality of papers rather than on the quantity, the increase in the number of manuscripts for peer reviewing will slow down a bit. This would help well managed journals like Theoretical and Applied Climatology to improve science output for a better understanding and for better decisions in vital questions like climate analysis and climate change. 

What have been the most pressing challenges in climatology, and how has the journal helped address them?


Prof Dr Christian Bernhofer: There have been various pressing challenges in climatology, and I can only give a very personal selection. In global climate modelling, the integration of the carbon cycle became a must to understand past climate from the very beginning of life on Earth until today. Ocean currents, water budgets, land-use change etc. add to the complexity. Therefore, future earth system models will integrate many additional feedback loops and drivers (like human activities) for a better modelling of the global climate. Next, changes need to be quantified at a resolution in space and time relevant for decisions in climate change adaptation. For this downscaling, we need station data and remote sensing data, which suffer from decline and high initial costs, respectively. Hopefully, new tools (e.g., RADAR, cell phone signal attenuation etc.) and advanced data fusion techniques including AI will be able to solve this observation problem. A very large challenge is climate communication to improve the impact of climate research outcome. In my view, there are two major points to be addressed: First, the inevitable uncertainty in all projections into the future. Second, climate is always about statistics, which often requires special training for proper understanding. These facts are sometimes not properly taken into account when addressing climate related questions. Therefore, we have to make climatology accessible to other disciplines and to the public.  

Theoretical and Applied Climatology published many studies on the regional application of large-scale model output (like CMIP5 or CMIP6) for all kinds of climate change adaptations, from agriculture to water power and water resources management, from urban development to tourism. The journal output shows the need for information at national, regional or global level. In methodology, the rise of AI was clearly visible. A decent handling of AI-generated information is one of the future challenges, I would like to see covered in our journal.

Can you tell us about your research background and what drew you to climatology?
P_Dr-Solomon_140x140 © Springer Nature 2026


Dr Solomon Gebrechorkos: My research background lies at the intersection of climate science, hydrology, and Earth system modeling. I’ve always been fascinated by how changes in the atmosphere translate into tangible impacts on water resources, ecosystems, and human livelihoods — particularly in vulnerable regions such as Africa, where the majority of communities depend on rainfed agriculture. 

I began my academic journey in water and environmental engineering, which naturally led me to study how climate variability and change affect water availability and food security. Over time, I became increasingly interested in hydroclimatic extremes — droughts, floods, and heatwaves — and how these are evolving in response to anthropogenic forcing. My work now focuses on developing high-resolution climate datasets, global hydrological and land–atmosphere models, and integrated frameworks to better understand the physical processes driving these extremes. 

Ultimately, what drew me to climatology is the blend of scientific curiosity and real-world relevance. Climate science not only seeks to understand the Earth system but also informs decisions that can build resilience and sustainability for communities across the globe.

Are there emerging areas in climate research that you’re excited to spotlight through the journal?


Dr Solomon Gebrechorkos: Climate science is evolving rapidly, and several areas hold great promise for advancing both our understanding and our capacity to act. One emerging area is the integration of machine learning and data science with climate modeling — using AI-based emulators and hybrid models to bridge the gap between complex simulations and decision-relevant information.  

I’m also particularly excited about climate–society interactions, including the health and socio-economic impacts of hydroclimatic extremes. Understanding how climate change affects public health, agriculture, and migration patterns is essential for designing effective adaptation strategies. 

Another area gaining momentum is regional downscaling and high-resolution modeling, which is critical for representing local processes and providing actionable insights for communities and policymakers. 

Through the journal, I hope to spotlight research that bridges disciplines — connecting physical climate processes with impacts, adaptation, and solutions. Our goal is to make the journal a platform that not only advances the science but also amplifies work that directly supports resilience and climate-informed decision-making. 

Explore more from Theoretical and Applied Climatology on the journal homepage. You can also view the current and latest issues of the journal through this link.

Open data sharing: What a decade of researcher insights tells us

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon Feb 9 2026

“Where’s the data?” is the official theme of the 2026 Love Data Week, which allows us the space to think about the role of sharing data in the research process. In honour of this important theme, this blog explores what we’ve learned over a decade of asking researchers about open data. Drawing on ten years of the annual State of Open Data survey, the anniversary report offers a unique window into researchers’ attitudes, practices, and experiences with open data sharing.   

Below, we unpack the key findings most relevant to you as a researcher: how the research culture has shifted, what hasn’t changed, and what it all means for your own research data practices (including tips for open data sharing!).

Research data are the files digital or physical outputs generated or analysed in your research, that are needed to understand and interpret your work. They can take many forms such as visualisations, notebooks, code, spreadsheets, and maps, amongst others. When you make your research data open, accessible, and reusable, they become ‘open data’.  

Whether your funder or institution has requested you share your data openly, or you’re preparing a data availability statement, choosing a repository, or wondering how AI fits into your workflow, the topic of open data has become part of the discourse and practice of academic research. 

Capturing researchers’ perspectives on open data, since 2016 
The State of Open Data 2025 © Springer Nature

But data requirements alone don’t tell the whole story. The State of Open Data survey has been running annually since 2016, and has collected over 43,000 responses from more than 200 countries. It is one of the longest running surveys exploring how researchers themselves feel about making their research data open and what challenges they’re experiencing. These experiences reveal the real barriers, motivations, and cultural shifts shaping open science today. 

If you’ve ever wondered whether your peers are struggling with the same challenges, or whether your discipline or region is keeping pace, the State of Open Data 2025: A Decade of Progress and Challenges report offers clarity. 

Main insights from a decade of the State of Open Data survey  

Looking back across a decade of survey data, a few major trends stand out: 

  • Awareness of open science principles has grown dramatically, especially around the FAIR principles (guidelines to improve the Findability, Accessibility, Interoperability, and Reuse of digital assets). 
  • Support for open practices remains high, even as enthusiasm for mandates declines in some regions. 
  • The “credit gap” persists, with most researchers still feeling under-recognised for sharing data. 
  • AI has rapidly entered research workflows, aiding data collection, data processing, and metadata creation. 
  • Disciplinary and regional differences remain significant, shaping how open data is adopted in practice. 

Together, these trends paint a picture of a research ecosystem that is maturing but is still uneven, and still grappling with structural and resources barriers. 

Key findings researchers should know in 2026 

1. Awareness is up but support alone isn’t enough 

One of the most striking long-term shifts is the rise in familiarity with the FAIR principles. When the survey first asked about FAIR in 2018, nearly 60% of researchers had never heard of them. By 2025, that number has dropped to just over 20%. 

This shift is visible across disciplines. Fields that once lagged behind such as Business, Chemistry, and Materials Science have seen some of the biggest gains. Engineering and Biology now report familiarity rates above 40%, signalling a move from passive awareness to active engagement. 

What this means for you: If you haven’t been already, now is the time for you to start exploring the FAIR principles and join your peers in following them. Whether you’re preparing a grant application, depositing data, or collaborating across teams, funders and institutions increasingly expect that you follow the FAIR principles in your research practice.  

2. Mandate fatigue is real 

Open data mandates are a requirement by a national body or research funder for researchers to make their data openly accessible. These mandates are expected to encourage data sharing. But support for national open data mandates has shifted unevenly across the globe. Whilst global support looks stable at first glance, regional patterns tell a more nuanced story. 

The countries with the steepest decline in support for national mandates were Australia (63.2% in 2016, to 27.4% in 2025) and Brazil (64.7% in 2016 and 39% in 2025). Meanwhile, India (59.8% in 2016 and 54.7% in 2025) remained stable. Why the divergence? The report suggests that early enthusiasm for mandates may fade when researchers encounter practical challenges, due to unclear guidance, inconsistent standards, or insufficient institutional support. 

What this means for you: If you feel overwhelmed by policy requirements, you’re not alone. Many researchers support openness in principle but struggle with the realities of compliance. This is a signal to institutions and funders: mandates must be paired with practical and discipline-specific support. 

3. Open practices are popular, but recognition is lagging 

Despite mixed feelings about mandates, researchers remained strongly supportive of open practices in 2025 (n=3,959): 

  • 88% support open access 
  • 81% support open data 
  • 76% support open peer review 
  • 59% support preprinting 

But enthusiasm doesn’t erase the biggest cultural barrier: the lack of recognition for data sharing. 

Since 2020, the survey has consistently shown that most researchers feel they receive too little credit for sharing data. While the gap has narrowed slightly, nearly 70% still said their efforts go unrecognised. 

This disconnect affects behaviour. When data sharing requires significant time, documentation, and expertise but yields little professional reward, it’s no surprise that uptake varies. 

What this means for you: If you’ve ever felt that preparing a dataset to share openly takes more effort than it’s worth, you’re in good company. But the landscape is shifting. More institutions are beginning to recognise datasets as research outputs, and community-driven initiatives are emerging to reward contributions more fairly. 

4. AI is becoming part of the data workflow 

AI adoption is one of the fastest-moving trends in this year’s report. Between 2024 and 2025: 

  • Use of AI for data processing jumped from 22% to 32% 
  • AI use for metadata creation rose from 16% to 25% 
  • AI use for data collection increased from 17% to 24% 

At the same time, the proportion of researchers who were unaware of AI tools dropped sharply. 

AI is becoming a standard part of the research data landscape, but its impact depends on how it is combined with data expertise. When designed with clear intent and informed by disciplinary standards, AI can support FAIR data sharing by automating routine tasks like metadata creation and streamlining data preparation workflows. Rather than replacing expertise, well-designed AI tools embed it, pointing towards a future where data is more FAIR, more reusable, and more efficiently managed. 

What this means for you: AI is quickly becoming part of the standard research toolkit. Using AI can support you to share your data openly and make your data FAIR, by automating tasks like metadata creation and reducing time and effort needed to prepare data for sharing.  

What experts told us: Voices from the community 

Beyond the numbers, the report includes insights from researchers, librarians, and data experts around the world. Their perspectives shared the realities behind the trends. Several themes stand out: 

  • Infrastructure matters but it must be localised 

Experts emphasised that global mandates don’t always translate into local practice. Regions like Africa and Asia are developing their own open infrastructure ecosystems, tailored to cultural and community needs. As Joy Owango, Founding Director of Training Centre in Communication (TCC Africa) states, “It's a good sign. We are now getting sovereignty of our research.” 

  • Data quality is a growing concern 

As Melissa Haendel, PhD, FACMI, Sarah Graham Kenan Distinguished Professor at the University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill, shares, “data dumping grounds” have emerged in response to mandates: “People are sharing their data, but they're not necessarily making it reusable.” 

  • Librarians and data stewards are essential 

Many researchers lack the time or expertise to prepare high-quality datasets. Brian Nosek, Co-founder and Executive Director of the Center for Open Science and Psychology Professor at the University of Virginia, stresses the importance of support: “The support that's really needed is: how does a researcher make it easy for another person to know their data as well as they do?” Librarians and data professionals can bridge this gap, but only if institutions invest in them.  

  • Recognition must evolve 

From nano attributions to open research awards, experts highlighted creative ways to reward data contributions. These initiatives show what is possible when institutions take recognition seriously. However, without broader systemic support, cultural and behavioural change may remain limited. 

Five practical tips to improve your own data sharing 

To make your data more discoverable, reusable, and impactful

  • Cite all data, used or generated, in your research correctly 
  • Identify and share (where possible) the data that underpin your research  
  • Process any sensitive data and share it appropriately 
  • Write a Data Availability Statement  
  • Consider publishing a data article 

Read the full report: The State of Open Data 2025: A Decade of Progress and Challenges


Related content

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest!

Fixing the incentive problem in research assessment - lessons learned from global practice

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Thu Feb 5 2026

What happens when the systems meant to reward research excellence, can be seen as one of the causes of a loss of trust in science? Does an overreliance on publication metrics mean that researchers feel compelled to target these metrics? These questions shaped one of the discussions during COPE's Publication Integrity Week, an annual initiative that brings together the global research publishing community to highlight issues that define good practice.  

As COPE Trustee Board member, I had the pleasure to moderate the session Boosting Incentives for Ethical Conduct. With three fascinating speakers, we asked ourselves: 

Why do incentives matter for trust in science?  

Incentives shape behaviour. When institutions offer cash bonuses or base promotions on the number or prestige of publications, the pressure to publish can lead to shortcuts, and sometimes misconduct. It’s a reality for many researchers today, and my team and I have heard many researchers expressing these pressures during our research integrity investigations.

In the session, our panel of international experts discussed how the current research assessment systems influence behaviour, the unintended consequences of incentives, and the work underway to rethink how we reward researchers.  

What we can learn from the Cobra effect 

Achal Agrawal, founder of India Research Watch offered a striking analogy to the use of publication counts as prerequisites for bonuses or promotions – “the Cobra effect”. In colonial India, a bounty was introduced to reduce venomous cobras. Initially, the program worked to reduce numbers, but soon people began breeding cobras to claim rewards. When the program ended, breeders released their snakes, leaving the region with an even bigger problem. 

This tale mirrors what happens in academia when incentives prioritise quantity over quality. Achal shared examples of universities offering direct payment for papers and patents, alongside punitive measures for those who fail to meet unrealistic research goals. Combined with rankings that heavily weight research output, researchers face immense pressure to publish, sometimes at any cost.

These pressures, he argued, are driving misconduct and inflating retraction rates worldwide.   

 Achal warned: “When you reward papers, people start gaming the system” 

 “Incentives are powerful” he added, “if we don’t monitor and evolve them, they will lead to unintended consequences”.   

Achal’s call to action included:  

  • Better metrics that reward integrity, openness and collaboration  
  • Oversight and transparency in journal practices, clearer retraction notices and audits of COPE compliance  
  • System-level penalties for institutions with repeated misconduct such as a research integrity risk index  

Many of Achal’s recommendations align closely with our work to promote research integrity, transparency and accountability.

Through Springer Nature’s India Research Tour, in collaboration with the Ministry of Education, Government India, we delivered workshops, training across institutions to promote ethical, transparent, inclusive research practices and strengthening research integrity awareness. 

We also collaborate with organisations such as ORCID, DORA, STM and COPE, to develop shared solutions and resources, including guidance for publishers on how to clearly communicate retractions, which are a neutral mechanism to correct the scholarly literature.  These collaborations help create the interconnected systems that are required for incentives which promote integrity and good practice. 

Moving beyond Metrics  

Sanli Faez, national manager of the Dutch Recognition and Rewards programme, challenged the reliance on traditional metrics which tend to focus on counting papers and citations, ignoring the many different contributions that drive discovery and advance knowledge.  

 “What we aim for is concrete benefit to society and reliable science. But that’s not what we’re rewarding”  

Drawing on Bruno Latour’s work, Sanli explained that the day-to-day incentives are social rather than philosophical. "What scientists want is credit - from peers - because credit unlocks resources to keep doing the work.” 

This is the traditional credit cycle, where initial recognition leads to resources, which enable experiments and data collection, which turn into publications, presentations, generating more recognition and resources. However, this model does not reflect the reality of modern science today, with the growth of multi-disciplinary work, and blurred discipline boundaries.  

Sanli introduced a compelling idea, moving away from the traditional credit cycle to a credibility network, a cloud of contributions where value is distributed across people, teams and institutions.   

He added “We now conduct research in a more diverse and generally collaborative way, through countless micro-contributions: datasets, code snippets, preprints, peer reviews, blog posts, mentorship and collaborative discussions”.  

These smaller, interconnected outputs reflect the reality of interdisciplinary research and open science.  However, the current reward systems struggle to aggregate and meaningfully reward these contributions.  

The Netherlands are considering bold steps: removing H-index reporting in grant proposals and attempting to measure the qualities of the types of work in academia, across different disciplines.   Sanli said, “This moves us away from marketing or promoting the individual researcher and towards honouring the collective research output – the cloud of micro-contributions, advancing discovery”. 

At the institutional level, the Dutch Recognitions and Rewards programme is creating room for diverse talent profiles, valuing the contributions of teachers, researchers, managers, data scientists and more, and rewarding team science and cross-disciplinary collaboration. The Dutch Recognitions and Rewards culture barometer give an insight into the success of the programme and how this has been recognised, shared and experienced in the workplace by surveying over 8,000 researchers.  

These approaches resonate with my experiences in integrity and with the position Springer Nature has taken.  As a signatory of the Declaration on Research Assessment (DORA), we have long advocated for a more balanced approach to research assessment, one that rewards integrity, openness and collaboration.  Our recent white paper on the state of research assessment reflects this commitment, drawing on insights from over 6,600 researchers to understand their experiences on how their contributions are evaluated.  

We also continue to support the wider researcher community with free to access, specific training to promote good research practices, from fundamentals on research integrity, to conducting peer review. By working collaboratively across the ecosystem, we aim to shape systems that reflect the realities of modern science and strengthen trust in science.  

Recognising micro-contributions means valuing:  

  • Data sharing and curation that enable reproducibility 
  • Open-source code that accelerates innovation  
  • Peer review and mentoring that strengthen research culture 
  • Collaborative outputs that cross disciplinary boundaries.  

Building systems to capture and credit these contributions is essential. It’s not just about fairness; it’s about creating incentives that align with the realities of modern research.  

Redesigning Academic Rewards:  

Caitlin Schleicher introduced the MA³ Challenge, a $1.5 million initiative to help institutions rethink hiring, promotion and tenure systems, with a goal of rewarding bold strategies to foster a culture of openness, collaboration and transparency. She highlighted Stanford’s School of Medicine as a case study: faculty can now include an optional CV addendum showcasing open practices - data sharing, reproducibility, and more - while impact factors are explicitly excluded.  

“Show us your open data practices, rigor and reproducibility, not your H-index,” Caitlin emphasised. 

Key points of agreement 

All the speakers made compelling cases and, unsurprisingly, converged on some key points:  

  • Metrics aren’t going away but they must evolve. Rankings drive behaviour, so better, more robust measures are essential.  
  • Quality over quantity: Recognise diverse contributions, teaching collaboration and open science.  
  • System-level change matters: Funders, publishers and institutions must align incentives with integrity  
  • Global collaboration is crucial: Solutions must be inclusive, designed to support diverse academic contexts and avoid widening gaps between resource rich universities and those with limited resources.  

What struck me most was the sense of urgency and optimism. Reforming incentives is complex, but the examples our panellists shared show that progress is possible, when institutions, funders, publishers and other stakeholders across the sector work together. To build trust in research, we need systemic reforms that make ethical conduct the rational choice.  At Springer Nature, we are committed to supporting this shift through advocacy, resources and training that empower researchers to conduct research with integrity.  Learn more about our work here.  


Correction: An earlier version of this blog post incorrectly stated Achal Agrawal's affiliation. The correct affiliation is India Research Watch.


The 2025 State of Open Data report: Can technology push openness forward?

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon Feb 2 2026

The State of Open Data survey has been capturing researchers’ attitudes and experiences with open data since 2016. The 2025 report celebrates its tenth year, with more insights and findings. Understanding how researchers feel about data sharing and open data mandates helps institutions design services, training and infrastructure that genuinely match researchers’ needs and behaviours. By grounding policy and support in these insights, institutions can promote stronger adoption and compliance. They can create an environment that empowers, rather than pressures, their researchers. In a special blog contribution, Springer Nature’s Ed Gerstner, Director, Research Environment Alliances, Academic Affairs, shares his thoughts on the 2025 report, and why he is (cautiously) hopeful that technology could push openness forward.

With the 2025 State of Open Data report, titled 'A decade of progress and challenges,' we mark 10 years of tracking how researchers think about and engage with open data. The annual reports on the survey results have become a key reference point for understanding the open data landscape. The 2025 report shows that we’ve come a long way in ten years, but we’ve still got a way to go.

The 10th anniversary report examines the current state of open data as reflected in the 2025 survey results, as well as how attitudes and practices have evolved over the past decade. It provides valuable insight into experiences of researchers with data sharing, their attitudes and practices. You’ll also find input from experts on related topics, from funder mandates to data sharing challenges and from recognition to reproducibility

“Looking back, data sharing is still woefully unrecognised by funders and institutions. Looking forward, technology has finally reached a point where it might be able to help.”

For institutions, this long-term view of researchers’ motivations and the challenges they face offers insights that help them better design the essential services they offer to their researchers. With evidence-based support and advocacy, institutional stakeholders are invaluable partners in fostering open, transparent and reproducible research.

Making data FAIR, without sufficient credit for time and effort

The 2025 State of Open Data report shows that researchers’ familiarity with the idea of FAIR data has dramatically improved (ensuring data are findable, accessible, interoperable, and reusable).

But while the proportion of researchers who are now familiar with the FAIR principles has increased substantially, the 2025 report finds that recognition for researchers who make their data FAIR, or even just open, has not. Two-thirds of respondents told us that they feel researchers still don’t receive sufficient credit for making their research data open. This misalignment between efforts and recognition is one of the most significant barriers to widespread adoption of data sharing.

Date sharing mandates: Compliance burden with no support?

This in itself isn’t news, and has been discussed often, including in previous State of Open Data reports. What is striking to see is the corresponding drop-in net support for national open data mandates.

In the first report in 2016, a clear majority of respondents told us that they strongly supported open data mandates. In 2025, that strong support has fallen to around 40%, and to less than a third in the United States. National or funder mandates can be powerful drivers of data sharing, by setting clear standards of the practice. But without resources, tools, and guidance to researchers, these mandates may be seen as burdening researchers with compliance without enough support.

Even so, support for mandates outweighs opposition when comparing the two groups, which is encouraging to see. Institutional stakeholders, from libraries and research offices to data support units, play a central role in helping researchers understand and meet data sharing mandates. Understanding the challenges researchers face when implementing these mandates enables institutional stakeholders to better support them, design relevant services, and advocate for meaningful institutional change.

The challenges of sharing data and doing it right

But even with the strongest will in the world, researchers have precious little time to share their data (which is why it is so important to understand what drives successful data sharing). Data sharing competes with the need to manage labs, write papers, chase research funds, teach undergrads, and much more besides doing actual research.

What’s more, sharing data on its own is not enough. If research data is released without sufficient metadata, it has little value. Metadata is the information that tells others not just when, where, and by whom it was collected, but what it represents. Without metadata, the potential of shared data to be found and reused (the F and the R in FAIR) is limited.

The curation of data and the creation of metadata that enables it to be FAIR are specialist skills. If we require all researchers to be data scientists, it will cost much more than merely the investment in the construction and maintenance of digital infrastructure. The more time researchers spend making their data open, the less time they will have to spend doing research.

“How do you guide people to structure data in a way that others can use it? There is enormous capability, for example, in the academic librarian community that knows how to do these sorts of things well.” - Brian Nosek, Co-founder and Executive Director of the Center for Open Science and Psychology Professor at the University of Virginia, from the 2025 State of Open Data Report

Institutions can make the difference in supporting researchers with preparing high-quality datasets. The report identifies librarians as enablers of metadata, standards and licensing. Such institutional support can help researchers make their data available and accessible, thus promoting data sharing adoption and compliance.

AI supporting data sharing: The importance of maintaining trust

Recognition of researchers’ efforts to share data would be a first step. The support of data specialists would be even better. Short of both, it seems that technology might soon fill some of the gaps.

In the 2025 State of Open Data survey, a quarter of respondents told us that they were using artificial intelligence to help them create metadata. That’s a promising sign, but with a warning. Although AI can be used to help researchers manage data, it can also help dishonest actors generate fake data. Any incentives to share data need to be developed in a way that they don’t reward bad behaviour.

“AI empowers researchers to make their data FAIR, but it also allows for the generation of fraudulent data. Credit systems should promote the former and deter the latter.”

One of the greatest benefits of open data is the insight that can be gained by combining many datasets together. If the authenticity of any one of these data cannot be trusted, the value of the whole is lost. It’s critical then, that we develop ways to validate trust in the data that are shared.

Explore the full State of Open Data 2025 report to learn more about researchers’ views on data sharing and for expert insights on related topics, from funder mandates to data sharing challenges, and from recognition to reproducibility.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Water Science: An open global home for the next wave of water research

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Jan 29 2026

If you work on water, the world needs your results faster, in front of more practitioners, and framed for real‑world decisions. That’s exactly where Water Science fits in and why it’s a compelling venue for your next submission.

Water Science, published by Springer, occupies a distinctive position within this landscape. Rather than sitting purely within theory or practice, the journal operates at the intersection of hydrology, engineering, environmental science, and socio‑economic analysis, reflecting how water research is increasingly practiced today.

Why this moment in water research demands a different kind of journal

  • Connecting Global Challenges with Regional Insight

    One of the defining strengths of Water Science is its ability to link global water challenges with regionally grounded research.

  • Water stress and extremes are rising

    The UN’s World Water Development Report 2025 underscores intensifying hydrological variability driven by glacier retreat, changing mountain “water towers,” and compounding risks for billions placing new demands on applied, decision‑ready science. 

  • Interdisciplinarity as a Core Identity

    In Water Science, interdisciplinary is a core editorial principle. The journal actively bridges surface and groundwater hydrology, hydraulic engineering, water quality, coastal systems, climate change, and water resource socio‑economics.

  • Methods are transforming

    Machine learning, explainable AI, and remote sensing are redefining how we forecast floods, manage basins, and monitor quality at scale especially in data‑scarce regions. 

  • Public health surveillance has broadened 
    Wastewater based epidemiology (WBE) matured during COVID 19 and continues to evolve as an early warning tool for pathogens and community health. 

  • Nature based solutions (NbS) are mainstreaming and maturing 
    From flood mitigation to stormwater quality, the field is moving from case studies to standardized performance evaluation and multi benefit accounting.

What makes Water Science distinctive

1) Truly open and free of charge 
Publishing in Water Science is open access with no APC (article processing charge), thanks to funding support. So, your work is immediately available to the world without fees to authors. Springer Nature also reports OA articles see higher downloads, citations, and policy/news attention, amplifying your reach. 

2) Anchored in a water‑scarcity epicentre with global reach 
The journal is sponsored and managed by Egypt’s National Water Research Center (NWRC) and partners with the Egyptian Knowledge Bank (EKB), which is a vantage point at the confluence of the Nile Basin, arid and semi‑arid hydrology, coastal deltas, and rapid urbanization. 

3) Scientists as Editorial Board 
Editorial leadership includes Prof. Alaa Abdelmotaleb (Editor‑in‑Chief, NWRC, Cairo) and a board spanning agencies, universities, and development organizations bridging applied and academic perspectives from MENA to North America and Europe. 

4) A home for integrative, basin‑to‑policy work 
From river basin planning and hydraulics to water quality, climate-hydro‑environment interactions, and water socio‑economics, the journal explicitly invites studies that turn process understanding into practical solutions. 

5) A Journal Aligned with the Future of Water Research 
As water research increasingly focuses on resilience, adaptation, and sustainability, Water Science continues to align itself with emerging global priorities 

The author’s experience 

  • Open access, no APC: publish free and maximize visibility. 
  • Clear article types: Original Articles and Reviews. 
  • Creative Commons licensing: CC BY or CC BY‑NC‑ND, with authors retaining copyright. 
  • Interdisciplinary fit: From hydraulics and morphology to socio‑economics and policy. 

What great submissions look like right now

  • Bridges methods to management (e.g., explainable ML models deployed in a river‑basin operations room, not just benchmarked on historical data). 
  • Quantifies uncertainty and transferability (especially for data‑scarce basins using transfer learning or physics‑informed approaches). 
  • Evaluates NbS at scale with standardized metrics and co‑benefits (flood retention, biodiversity, heat mitigation, O&M costs). 
  • Links water quality science to regulation with implementable monitoring/treatment and policy implications. 
  • Shows WBE delivering early warning with validation against clinical or environmental outcomes and practical guidance for utilities. 

Read the full submission guidelines 

Why Water Science

By combining APC‑free open access, a Global‑South–informed vantage, and an editorial community that spans research, agencies, and development practice, Water Science is tuned to the questions funders, utilities, and basin authorities are asking right now especially across arid and semi‑arid regions where solutions must scale under constraint. 

In a world defined by increasing water uncertainty, Water Science invites researchers to submit original research and reviews that offer interdisciplinary insight and real‑world applicability and advance applied and basic water research with clear pathways to practice and policy.

By publishing in Water Science, authors contribute to a global dialogue where science informs solutions and helps shape the future of water research. Ready to shape the field? Submit your manuscript via the journal homepage.

Exploring AI with research librarians at Charleston

T
The Link
By: undefined, Thu Jan 29 2026

Last month, along with several Springer Nature colleagues, I attended the 2025 Charleston Conference, the most anticipated and lively research library conference in the United States. Springer Nature staff included our Chief Publishing Officer, Harsh Jegadeesan, as well as Frank Vranken Peeters, Springer Nature’s CEO, demonstrating just how important the library community is to all of us. It also helps that Charleston is a lovely place to be in mid-Fall, as you can see by this photograph of Frank being interviewed on a gorgeous, sunny Fall Charleston afternoon.

And Harsh did more than merely attend, in fact, he moderated a session on AI in Action. I got to attend the session, and I was personally impressed by how Harsh interacted with the panelists. Here’s my take on how the session went.

AI in action: Perspectives and best practices for libraries’ evolving role

Session - AI in Action © Springer Nature 2026
The session took place on Thursday, November 6th, 2025, at the Gaillard Center. The speakers were:

  • Helen Bischoff, the Coordinator of Liaison Services at the University of Kentucky.
  • Jeehyun Davis, the University Librarian at American University
  • Evan Simpson, the Associate Dean of Experiential Learning & Academic Engagement at Northeastern University

The panel discussed how AI is reshaping research support, the responsibilities of librarians, and the ethical considerations that must guide implementation.

The conversation began with a critical question: What opportunities does AI deliver for libraries? Panelists agreed that AI tools are now embedded in nearly every aspect of research support, offering enormous potential to streamline workflows and improve efficiency. However, successful adoption requires clarity of purpose; institutions have to define specific use cases and align them with stakeholder priorities to ensure meaningful impact.

Speakers highlighted different institutional approaches. For example, the University of Kentucky Libraries adopts AI tools based on faculty needs and feedback, while American University’s Kogod School of Business has taken a pioneering step by integrating AI tools into its curriculum to support experimentation, applied learning and professional readiness. These examples highlight the importance of collaboration between libraries and academic departments in shaping AI strategies.

Helen Bischoff pointed out that ethical considerations have emerged as a central theme. Responsible implementation and clear policies are essential to prevent misuse and maintain academic integrity. The rise in integrity-related questions involving AI misuse has overwhelmed integrity offices, prompting calls for every professor to include an AI policy in their syllabus. 

Harsh's session: AI in action © Springer Nature 2026

Libraries, as trusted knowledge hubs, have a commitment to teach patrons how to use AI ethically and responsibly.

Another essential issue? Bias. The data that AI companies have used to train their systems on aren’t neutral, which can lead to discriminatory outcomes. Panelists stressed that addressing bias is a moral imperative. Libraries need to advocate fairness and inclusiveness in AI adoption.

Ultimately, the discussion emphasized that AI is not a panacea. It is a powerful tool, yet AI’s value depends on how institutions integrate it.

Perspectives on AI in scholarly communications

I’d also note that this session dovetailed nicely with Springer Nature’s recent report, “Perspectives on AI in Scholarly Communications,” which was actually the inspiration for the panel, and as such, covered many of the same topics. This report includes perspectives and case studies from key library staff members from around the world, as well as from Springer Nature experts working on AI. These include: 

  • Keith Webster, Dean of University Libraries and Director of Emerging and Integrative Media Initiatives, Carnegie Mellon University, US
  • Letícia Antunes Nogueira, Head of Section Resources & Digital Services, Norwegian University of Science & Technology Library, Norway
  • Dr. Santhosh KV, Deputy Director Research, Manipal Academy of Higher Education, India
  • Beth Montague-Hellen, Head of Library & Information Services, Francis Crick Institute, UK
  • Heather Devereaux, VP, AI Growth & Partnerships, Springer Nature
  • Chris Graf, Director of Research Integrity, Springer Nature
  • Henning Schoenenberger, VP Content Innovation, Springer Nature
  • Harald Wirsching, Executive VP Data & Analytics Solutions, Springer Nature

The report looks at a range of ways libraries are already dealing with AI and its impact on research, including new AI tools, ethical considerations, the library’s role in developing AI for research, and more.

AI-powered tools driving smarter information discovery

AI is helping with information discovery. Letícia Antunes Nogueira noted that students are already relying on AI for search, and Keith Webster’s team has deployed AI discovery tools like Keenious and Scite. On the Springer Nature side, we’ve developed products like AskAdis, an AI-chatbot enhancement to the AdisInsight drug discovery database, and Methods Muse, a platform that streamlines protocol design, implementation, validation, and optimization.

Proper AI use means putting ethical principles at the core, with both publishers and libraries playing pivotal roles in education and supporting researchers in using these tools. Springer Nature even has formal AI Principles of fairness, transparency, accountability, privacy, and minimizing harm in using AI. Henning Schoenenberger, VP of Content Innovation, says, “As a publisher, we are in a position to provide an infrastructure and services for researchers to create reliable content faster and more efficiently, while also providing guidance for best practice which sustains trust, integrity, and reputation in line with AI safety.”

Key to that, though, is keeping humans in the loop. AI assists humans but should never be used as a replacement for human intelligence.

Building an ethical AI future through library leadership
AI in Action - Event © Springer Nature 2026

“AI doesn’t change the mission of libraries, but it does change the environment where knowledge is produced,” Letícia Antunes Nogueira observes. Collaboration across the research ecosystem will be essential to ensuring that those changes go in the best direction. Stakeholders including research institutions, funders, publishers, and others can work towards common goals. AI can improve accessibility and inclusivity within research, but there’s still work to be done to develop the right tools, and to make sure we use them responsibly. 

So, what are the key takeaways? Responsible implementation is non-negotiable, ethical considerations are critical, and cross-stakeholder collaboration will be especially powerful. Research librarians have a central role to play, leading through experimentation, continuous learning, and effective stakeholder management. The future of libraries in the age of AI will be defined by proactive leadership, ethical stewardship, and a commitment to equity.

These questions, how we implement AI responsibly, how we collaborate effectively, and how libraries lead, are explored in depth in our latest perspectives report. It brings together voices from across the research ecosystem to share insights into what’s next.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

How digital labs enhance reproducibility and accelerate innovation

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Jan 27 2026

Reproducibility is an essential element of progress in life science R&D. When experiments deliver consistent results, research advances faster, resources are used efficiently and innovation thrives. This blog explores how digitalisation and advanced lab technologies are making reproducibility a standard feature of modern research. From structured data capture and electronic lab notebooks to automated workflows, discover how digital labs create reliable processes and accelerate discovery.

Reproducibility is at the heart of good science, but in a 2016 Nature survey, 52% of researchers highlighted a significant reproducibility challenge and over 70% shared experiences of replicating experiments from other teams. Today, reproducibility is still a major challenge and also carries a real environmental cost.

In life science R&D reproducibility is seen as a key advantage. Research that is clear, well-documented and easy to replicate allows teams to collaborate effectively, build on prior work and deliver results that inspire confidence. Practises such as open data, standardised reporting, and detailed methodologies strengthen research integrity while keeping outputs audit-ready and compliant with regulations.

“R&D labs should recognise that investing in dedicated resources and committing to reproducible research isn’t a cost, it’s a strategic choice. Reproducibility isn’t a luxury; it’s a long-term efficiency strategy that drives sustainability, credibility and savings for every lab.” - Emma Ganley, Director Strategic Initiatives, protocols.io

Digital solutions in labs make reproducibility routine

There are many causes for irreproducibility, some of which are cultural or systemic, like the incentive structure in academia. But there are also other issues that negatively impact reproducibility, such as poor or incomplete documentation, human or technical errors, and lack of sufficient control experiments. These can be addressed and solved with the right tools. In response, labs are increasingly turning to digital solutions. 

Technological advances are transforming how labs uphold reproducibility in science and research. Researchers can improve data integrity and accelerate progress in both academic and industrial settings by streamlining workflows and adopting digital tools. For large corporate R&D teams, smaller biotech firms, or any research-driven organisations, these innovations offer an opportunity to make reproducibility part of everyday workflows, making research faster, more scalable and more reliable. Digital lab tools and process standardisation such as structured data capture, electronic lab notebooks and automated workflows are central to the efforts to promote reproducibility.

Digital lab tools: Infrastructure to support reproducibility in R&D

Reliable protocols and standardised processes are essential for reproducible research. Digital labs are leading this transformation by combining advanced technologies with process automation to reduce variability and improve data integrity. They use a range of technologies to digitise, automate and connect lab work. Among the most impactful are structured data capture, electronic lab notebooks (ELNs), and automated workflows, key enablers that make reproducibility part of everyday operations. 

Viewed together, these technologies represent different stages of the digital lab journey. The three examples below illustrate how labs move from creating a reliable data foundation, to managing and enriching that data through ELNs, and finally leveraging it for automation and more advanced applications.

1. Structured data capture

Structured data capture is a key feature of digital labs that supports reproducibility. It is the foundation for all digital lab functionalities, because organised, standardised data is essential for automation and digital integration. Recording data in a standardised format ensures it is comprehensive, consistent, and easy to use. In the age of advanced analytics and AI, insights are only as good as the data that feeds these applications.

Structured data includes metadata, providing all the details needed to accurately reconstruct experiments. This standardisation also enables seamless integration across ELNs, LIMS, and automated workflows, improving traceability and reliability throughout the research process.

2. Digital platforms connecting data and documentation

Working within digital platforms like electronic lab notebooks (ELNs) and laboratory information management systems (LIMS) creates a transparent, organised record of experiments, reducing variability and making replication easier. ELNs allow researchers to log every step of an experiment, from planning and execution to results, in a structured, searchable format. Alongside them, laboratory information management systems (LIMS) help standardise, track, and organise data such as samples and inventory, ensuring accuracy and reliability. These systems reduce error and improve transparency.

Nowadays, many platforms combine the various capabilities and services of ELNs and LIMS, reducing the need for multiple systems, which makes digital lab adoption easier. The additional integration of protocol management and method tracking modules or involving standalone repositories for protocols and methods means that these digital platforms offer a unified approach to standardising, organising and sharing data. This supports collaboration, enhances reproducibility, and makes experiments easier to repeat across the research process.

3. Automated workflows

Automation is a cornerstone of the digital lab, especially in quality control environments where standardised protocols make automation easier and cost-effective. Automated processes streamline workflows, capture data directly and reduce human error such as omissions or transcription mistakes. This promotes consistency and transparency, enabling experiments to be repeated exactly and ensuring standardisation and reliability, even across multiple sites. At the cutting edge, fully automated labs take automation further by integrating robotics, AI, and advanced data systems to design, execute and analyse experiments autonomously, setting the stage for a new era of fully automated research.

“Digital labs are driving innovation today, making reproducibility routine! The value of integrated systems and platforms and how they support experimental reproducibility is already transforming how research is done.” - Robin Padilla, Director of Product Management, Springer Nature

Making reproducibility the foundation for innovation

Digital labs that rely on digital lab tools and standardisation procedures, including structured data capture, ELNs, and automated workflows, have a competitive advantage. With these tools, benefits like time saved on manual data entry, reduced reagent waste, and faster or easier data analyses will become standard, explains Robin Padilla, Director of Product Management at Springer Nature. “But the pace of change must be noted,” he reflects. “This digital transformation is much more evolution than revolution. Research labs are complex and the shift to digital labs is as much cultural as it is technological. Labs will look and operate very differently in the coming years, with far greater reproducibility as their foundation.”

As this evolution continues, the impact of digital labs is becoming increasingly tangible. Lab digitisation is a steady trend, and in corporate R&D, digital labs are already delivering real benefits. Reproducible results make experiments more reliable, reduce wasted resources, and make collaboration easier. With consistent, verifiable data, digital labs also help speed up innovation.

To realise these benefits at scale, organisations need reliable methods and data‑driven insight. Collaborating with Springer Nature can support reproducible and effective R&D. Springer Nature Experiments provides trusted methods and protocols to strengthen research workflows, while text and data mining (TDM) can reveal patterns and connections across large datasets, enabling deeper insights and supporting semantic analysis. More information is available at springernature.com/gp/rd.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts

Twenty years of eBooks: How libraries turned a quiet shift into a global revolution in digital access

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Jan 13 2026

I remember conversations in the early 2000s with librarians who had spent careers honing selection policies, comparing binding quality, and marking up catalog cards with near ritual precision. The move from shelf to screen didn’t feel profound at that moment, it was a new idea which came to fruition slowly. A trial purchase here, a small collection there, a cautious pilot to learn whether digital “books” would really serve students and researchers. Looking back, that idea reshaped access, to the point where eBooks have become foundational to how academic communities learn, teach and advance discovery.  

As we look back on "When the shelf went digital" and twenty years of eBooks collections, it’s worth pausing on what changed, why it worked and how libraries themselves, often unsung, made it possible.

The moment access outpaced inventory 

If you ask librarians what tipped the balance, many will point to a practical reality: students and researchers needed authoritative content faster than physical supply chains could deliver. eBooks changed the pace of access. What once required weeks of interlibrary loan or special ordering became minutes, authenticated, permanent and ready to annotate. The change was not just convenience, it was continuity. Collections could expand without adding shelves, and campus libraries could serve their communities wherever those communities were learning, on campus, on placement or across continents.  

When Springer’s eBook program launched in 2006, librarians began licensing curated collections across subject areas, and archives soon followed, digitizing decades of book content and making foundational texts discoverable at scale. That early curation mattered. For selectors accustomed to title by title scrutiny, collection reliability became the trust bridge. Year after year, comprehensive sets arrived on schedule, coverage deepened and metadata improved, reducing administrative burden while widening access to disciplines, many institutions previously covered only in part. Today, Springer Nature’s portfolio spans 260,000+ eBooks across STM and HSS with thousands added annually.  

The DRM‑free advantage for unlimited library access

A pivotal library benefit, often overlooked by non-librarians, was the shift to DRM-free, multiuser access. In practice, that meant fewer barriers: no simultaneous user caps, no opaque use limits and file formats designed for real research behavior (downloading, excerpting, citing and reading). For librarians, this removed friction from peak demand periods; seminar weeks, exam seasons, lab rotations, when dozens might need the same chapter at the same time.  

The policy was and remains simple: institutional licenses allow unlimited concurrent use, PDFs are DRM-free, and many titles include EPUB for accessible, reflowable reading. For libraries and research offices, that clarity matters as much as the content, because it turns “Will my patrons be blocked?” into “How can we best promote equitable access?” the question that truly drives service design. 

Accessibility as a core of scholarly communication

Accessibility has been a central priority for libraries for many years, and in 2025 it became further enshrined as a legal requirement. Springer Nature has likewise treated accessibility as a core responsibility long before the European Accessibility Act (EAA) came into force, investing in accessible formats, inclusive design, and readerfriendly digital experiences. With the EAA beginning enforcement on June 28, 2025, digital products, including eBooks, must now meet defined accessibility standards. In response, libraries, publishers and digital platforms are aligning with WCAG based practices to ensure that content is fully navigable by screen readers, correctly structured with semantic tagging, and supported by meaningful alternative text for images.  

For academic institutions, this shift affirms something librarians have long advocated: access must serve every reader. EPUB standards, accessible PDFs, and platform improvements are becoming part of baseline expectations, not special projects. That alignment with policy is not just compliance; it’s community stewardship, ensuring that students and researchers with print impairments can participate in scholarship without extraordinary effort or delay.

Editorial expertise and AI protect research integrity

As eBooks scaled, research integrity has remained central. All books, including monographs, reference works and contributed volumes, undergo editorial assessment, peer review and checks for references and originality. Springer Nature has invested in transparency and tooling to support editors and authors, from integrity training to automated checks that flag potential issues early.   

Recent innovations include AI-assisted quality checks that verify ethics statements, data availability and compliance before peer review, streamlining workflows while keeping human editors in control of final decisions. For librarians and research offices, the takeaway is simple: digital scale should not dilute rigor. The systems now embedded in editorial pipelines exist to ensure the content your communities rely on can be trusted.   

What libraries gained and what they taught us

Looking back, a few library-centered lessons stand out:

  • Selection shifted from scarcity to sufficiency: With curated collections, librarians could focus less on gatekeeping individual titles and more on aligning disciplines with curriculum and research priorities, then use usage analytics to refine holdings over time.   
  • Metadata became a service in its own right: MARC records, discoverability improvements, and stable identifiers turned collections into navigable ecosystems rather than static lists. Accessible catalog integration and reliable preservation partnerships are now expected features.  
  • Archives changed pedagogy: Digitizing backlists made “out of print” a historical concept, so faculty could assign seminal chapters, and students could trace ideas across decades without leaving the library platform.  

Perhaps most importantly, libraries modeled cultural change. They helped campuses embrace the idea that a book’s “place” is where the reader needs it, on any device, at any hour and that service quality is measured not by proximity to shelves but by continuity of access.

Why two centuries of scholarly publishing matter

Context helps. Springer’s book publishing heritage dates to 1842, evolving across journals, monographs, and reference works, and eventually to early online platforms like LINK (now Springer Nature Link). That long arc made the eBook transition less of a replacement and more of an integration: the format changed, but the function of scholarly books to connect ideas, synthesize evidence and teach complex concepts remained constant.   

For academic institutions, this continuity explains why books continue to complement articles. Journal literature often advances a single finding with precision; books interpret, frame and teach. eBooks didn’t shrink that role, they expanded their reach. 

The future of customizable scholarly book services

One emerging frontier is reader level customization, not in the sense of fragmenting books, but in aligning navigation and format with research tasks. Imagine assembling a course pack from chapters across multiple titles or enabling students to move seamlessly from summaries to full treatments as their understanding deepens. Many libraries already support this pedagogical flexibility with reserve systems; digital formats open new possibilities for transparent, rights aware compilation. As platforms and licensing mature, expect more options that match how researchers actually learn, while retaining the editorial coherence that gives books their enduring value. Today’s ecosystem already includes subject collections spanning STM and HSS, with interdisciplinary coverage built in.  

We are also in the process of streamlining and improving services for authors, ensuring our systems are integrated and that authors can easily see with one login, where they are in their journey towards book publication. Our goal is to deliver a fully transparent, end-to-end author portal that simplifies the process and makes authors’ lives easier. 

What twenty years of digital books have made possible

If the first decade of eBooks were about proving feasibility, the second was about scaling responsibly. The next will likely be about refinement, ensuring every learner can use content fully, every researcher can trust it and every librarian has the data, tools and terms to steward collections confidently.  

For everyone committed to scholarly communication, the true achievement isn’t the technology, it’s the people and the possibilities it enables. This milestone marks two decades of progress built on trust, accessibility and collaboration. It belongs to everyone who plays a role in the eBook publishing process, researchers, authors, reviewers, editors, librarians and our own teams. Together, we ensure that knowledge completes its journey, circulating from the research community to academic libraries and back again.  

When the Shelf Went Digital not only highlights some of the most memorable moments of the past 20 years, it shows how research has been at the heart of it all. From milestones driven by scientific progress, such as the discovery of a super earth in the habitable zone, to events that like the launch of Twitter (now X), that have reshaped perspectives and opened up new fields of study. Research has been a constant thread and as throughout our 180-year history, our books have documented these advances to aid learning and discovery.  

In 2026, we’ll share with you stories from early-adopter librarians who have been part of this journey, the views of authors whose books captured the events and breakthroughs that shaped recent history and the Springer Nature colleagues who are bringing these milestones to your screens. 

Let us know what you remember from "When the shelf went digital" and what you think will come next for academia and scholarly communication.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Publish your SDG research as a Springer Nature book

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Wed Jan 7 2026

Your research related to the Sustainable Development Goals can impact policy and support efforts to achieve sustainable development. Publishing it as a book is one of the most impactful ways you can disseminate your insights and findings. In this post, Book Editors Sofia Costa and Éva Lőrinczi explain the benefits of publishing an SDG book and the advantages of publishing it open access and share some insight on what you can expect when you publish your SDG book with Springer Nature.

We’re well past the halfway mark toward the Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) deadline, yet at the moment the Goals are not on track to be achieved by their 2030 deadline. However, commitment to the Goals remains strong. The 2025 Sustainable Development Report, the global assessment of

countries' progress towards achieving the SDGs, reported that 190 out of 193 countries have presented national action plans for advancing sustainable development.  

Springer Nature is committed to supporting the SDGs. The SDGs provide a

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019
necessary framework to promote and work together towards sustainable development. And as a global academic publisher, a central contribution we can make is by publishing research related to the SDGs and amplifying it to reach far and wide, and serve to support the Goals and their targets.  

This research is essential to creating change. Reliable evidence is the basis of effective policymaking, and research on the SDGs impacts the Goals.  

Publishing and amplifying research that supports sustainable development

On the Springer Nature Sustainable Development Goals Programme hub you can browse a wealth of publications relating to the SDGs, along with other news and insights. Beyond this dedicated and evolving space, SDG publications are highlighted on Springer Nature’s platforms: from SDG badges for journals publishing extensively on the SDGs to SDG tags on Research Communities’ posts. And on Springer Nature Link, where you can access Springer Nature’s online collection of journals, eBooks, reference works, and protocols across a broad range of disciplines, you will find a dedicated search function for the SDGs, to filter your results by Goals.

Indeed, there are various publication options for SDG research at Springer Nature. Publishing your SDG research as a book is one of the most impactful ways you can disseminate your insights and findings relating to the Goals and their subject matters

"Books are a medium made for the SDGs, contributing to effectively addressing them, and even more so if published open access." 

Christina M. Brian, Vice President Books, and a member of the Springer Nature SDG Steering Group 

Why publish your SDG research as a book?

The SDGs cover an array of interconnected, complex challenges facing humanity. Which is why research on the SDGs can benefit from being published as a book, a medium that has the breadth and scope to cover such topic.

A book has the span to hold the in-depth overview required to holistically address issues relating to the SDGs. It offers the freedom to combine theoretical frameworks with practical insights, creating a resource that can meaningfully impact discourse and practice. 

By offering accessible, in-depth insights and practical guidance, often supported by real-world analyses and examples, books on the SDGs are especially relevant for policymakers and practitioners. This format is often more widely distributed and trusted, and can support policy development over time.

Open access books deliver real impact on the SDGs 

Books covering SDG research and published open access (OA) contribute to effectively addressing the SDGs. OA gives these books enhanced visibility and accessibility, which means that their findings and recommendations can be harnessed for actionable strategies on the SDGs.

OA books have 2.4 times more citations, 10 times more downloads, and 10 times more online mentions than non-OA books on average. They also have a more geographically diverse readership, reaching on average 61% more countries than non-OA books, most of which are underrepresented in global scholarship.

You can find more support for publishing an OA book with the OAPEN Open Access Books Toolkit, which offers a wealth of information to give you clarity and depth on OA books publishing.

“Springer Nature’s Sustainable Development Goals Series has developed into the most comprehensive research library on the SDGs. The inherently transdisciplinary nature of the SDGs is well reflected in the series, with its broad remit and contributions welcome from scientists, academics, policymakers, and researchers.” 

Rachael Ballard, Editorial Director, Palgrave Macmillan and Zachary Romano, Senior Publishing Editor, Springer 

The Sustainable Development Goals Series: A home for your SDG book 

A book series dedicated to the SDGs is a natural home for your SDG book. Springer Nature’s Sustainable Development Goals Series is just that: A series of books focused on interdisciplinary, policy-relevant research related to the SDGs.

When you publish your work in the Sustainable Development Goals Series, it enjoys an exceptionally broad reach to readership interested in the SDGs, well beyond your own discipline. Published alongside SDG-related research in a dedicated series increases its credibility and impact.

Because the Sustainable Development Goals Series intends to share research that is not only academically rigorous but also policy-relevant, your work stands to achieve real-world impact and generate engagement with audiences that can use it and rely on it.

You can choose to publish your book open access in the Sustainable Development Goals Series, which makes perfect sense because this format is made of SDG research. It means that anyone, anywhere can access your book in support of the SDGs.  

Things to consider when planning your SDG book 

Here are some recommendations for things to consider for your SDG book:

  1. Consider your audience and write effectively: Keep in mind the broader audience you want to reach, specifically policymakers and practitioners. Including a summary of key points for practitioners in each chapter or throughout the book could be particularly appealing to these readers.  
  2. Align with the SDG framework: Use or reference the language and indicators used in the SDGs to create affinity and clearly reflect relevance to the Goals.  
  3. Emphasise interconnectedness: Recognise the interaction between the various Goals, as well as potential synergies or incompatibilities when pursuing certain policies.  
  4. Implementation and long-term outlook: Consider strategies for implementation of recommendations or suggestions, possible contextual challenges, and potentially evolving priorities.  
  5. Consider publishing your book open access: Open access can make a huge difference, with 61% more countries reached and a sriking increase in access and visibility. Open access books have 2.4 times more citations, 10 times more downloads, and 10 times more online mentions than non-OA books on average. Funding may be available from your organisation or a government group. Get help with funding. 
  6. Consider publishing in a book series: Being part of a book series from a Springer Nature imprint such as Springer or Palgrave Macmillan gets your book the attention it deserves

For general information on the book publishing process, explore this detailed step-by-step guide.

Learn more about publishing a book with Springer Nature, including a step-by-step guide to walk you through the entire book publication journey. And once you’re ready, share your idea with a publishing editor.

Related content: 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source Monthly Digest!

What is a citation diversity statement?

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Thu Dec 18 2025

At Springer Nature, our commitment to excellence in science remains central to all we do. The quality of the science conducted is the most important factor in determining which content we publish.   

Scientific evidence (Yang et al., 2022; Hofstra et al., 2020) demonstrates that research drawing on a broad spectrum of perspectives and experiences is strongly associated with more novel insights, more innovative results and greater impact.  A citation diversity statement encourages authors to do just that – acting as a reminder to look anew at their underlying research and to expand their references rather than relying only on sources with which they are most familiar. We know that when citation practices concentrate on the same authors, institutions and regions, the result is in many instances, a skewed perspective that does not accurately reflect the breadth and state of a field of research.

For this reason, we allow authors to include along with their manuscript a citation diversity statement. This is purely optional and does not affect the evaluation of their research.

A citation diversity statement is a nudge that can help authors capture recent innovations, discoveries and breakthroughs, differing viewpoints and methods, and contributions from varying disciplines and regions. This encourages, though it does not require, authors to broaden the lens through which their research is undertaken. Literature that is more comprehensive and balanced can be of greater usefulness to readers and to science.

Citation diversity statements are not about quotas or identity. Rather, they are focused on helping to ensure a more rigorous scientific method and a more complete scientific record – a fuller picture. When new papers engage with the breadth of scientific understanding, including orthogonal views or contrary findings, everyone benefits. 

Science advances in part due to a researcher’s openness to new information and their engagement with as much relevant research as is available. When research encompasses a fuller scope of available literature, irrespective of what is familiar, scientists build a stronger foundation for future discoveries.


References:

  • Hofstra, B., Kulkarni, V. V., Munoz-Najar Galvez, S., He, B., Jurafsky, D., & McFarland, D. A. (2020). The diversity–innovation paradox in science. Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences, 117(17), 9284–9291. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.191537811
  • Yang, Y., Tian, T. Y., Woodruff, T. K., Jones, B. F., & Uzzi, B. (2022). Gender-diverse teams produce more novel and higher-impact scientific ideas. PNAS Proceedings of the National Academy of Sciences of the United States of America, 119(36), 1–8. https://doi.org/10.1073/pnas.2200841119

Digital twins in R&D: Bridging the GAP between simulation and experimentation

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Dec 16 2025

Over 50 years ago, Apollo 13’s safe return relied on simulators, a precursor to what we now call digital twins. Today, these virtual replicas are transforming R&D by bridging simulation and real-world experimentation. In this post, we explore how digital twins accelerate innovation, improve reproducibility and support decision-making. We’ll hear from Victor Richet, Nuclear Engineer at Assystem, on how this technology is shaping processes in one of the most complex and regulated industries.

The Apollo 13 mission faced a life-threatening crisis when its main engine was damaged. Engineers relied on simulators to model scenarios and guide the astronauts safely back to Earth, a pioneering glimpse into what we now call digital twins. Fast forward to today, and this concept has evolved into a powerful tool reshaping research and development across industries. But what makes digital twins powerful?

Digital twins are virtual representations of physical systems, processes or objects, continuously updated with real-time data. They act as a dynamic bridge between simulation and experimentation, enabling researchers and engineers to predict outcomes, optimise designs, and make informed decisions before committing to costly physical trials. By integrating AI and automation, digital twins create standardised environments that improve reproducibility, accelerate innovation and reduce time-to-market.

Their impact is particularly significant in sectors where precision, safety and compliance are non-negotiable, such as nuclear engineering. Here, the stakes are high, and experimentation is expensive and heavily regulated. Digital twins can help minimize risk, streamline workflows and support compliance with stringent safety standards while improving efficiency.

To understand how this technology is being applied in one of the most challenging engineering environments, we spoke with Victor Richet, Nuclear Engineer and Head of Digital at Assystem. In the conversation that follows, Victor shares how digital twins are transforming R&D in the nuclear industry, the benefits and limitations of this approach, and what the future holds for this technology.

How does Assystem define a digital twin in the context of its work, and what prompted you to adopt this technology?

Digital twins are a model which is fed with data in order to provide added value to processes. Our processes in the nuclear industry aren’t as up-to-date as those in, say, the automotive sector, which has fewer regulatory barriers and faster iteration. Our industry is heavily regulated for reasons of safety, and this makes us less agile in the adoption of new methods. Assystem were one of the industry’s first movers in the digital twin space as we recognised the huge scope this technology has to offer. Our mission is to accelerate the energy transition throughout the world and digital twin technologies play a major part in this, they advance digital transformation by addressing challenges throughout the full life-cycle of complex systems.

Digital twins are often described as the bridge between simulation and experimentation. How do you see that playing out in practice at Assystem?

At Assystem, digital twins aren’t just virtual simulations. They are digital ecosystems that integrate simulation tools, real-world data, and life-cycle management into one collaborative environment. In the specific case of nuclear engineering, the cost of experimenting is huge compared with other industries. Digital twin technologies aren’t a replacement for experiments, but they do reduce trial and error, they’re a way of increasing the likelihood of getting things right the first time.

How do you validate your digital twin models to ensure confidence in their predictions?

We run extensive test case processes to ensure the data provided by digital twin models is relevant and accurate. A good illustration of this is a project we carried out in the South of France to redesign a decommissioned nuclear facility. It involved moving potentially contaminated flows and irradiated materials out of the facility to be treated elsewhere and establishing temporary barriers, all in a seamless process. There are specific regulatory constraints which the safety authority issues for rooms in a nuclear facility, depending on the amount of radioactivity, red, orange or green zones. To complete this project, a 2D digital twin of the facility was built so that we could quickly, efficiently and reliably know where a barrier should be established, and what the radioactive zones of the rooms we then created would be. We validated the digital twin early in its development by comparing its results with the engineers’ calculations.

How do AI and machine learning enhance the predictive power and adaptability of your digital twin models?

The use of AI in the nuclear industry is still limited due to its probabilistic nature, precision and explicability are strict requirements for the safety authorities. Nevertheless, putting safety-related applications aside, there are several ways to use AI within the framework of digital twins. It’s mainly used to generate synthetic datasets and produce expected outputs, these don’t of course constitute proofs, but they are key insights for the early stages of the twin’s development. In a nutshell, we can generate synthetic data for a test case, use AI to simulate a wide range of results, and identify any key flaws in the twin.

When we’re developing and refining our digital twin models, access to trusted research and scientific data is absolutely crucial. The nuclear industry is not the most advanced, so there’s a strong consensus that it would benefit heavily from research conducted in other industries.

What measurable impact have digital twins had on your R&D process?

Digital twins have had a significant impact on our R&D process. They’ve contributed to reduced time to market and improved reproducibility by making processes more consistent and traceable. They’re also enabling us to achieve traceability and improve the quality of our experiments, which are long and extremely expensive.

Can you share an example of how collaboration with academia or industry partners has helped refine your digital twin models?

At Assystem we collaborate a lot with academia. Our partnership with the prestigious French School of Engineering IMT Mines Alès is a good example of this. In 2019 we set up a five-year R&D programme together dedicated to Model-Based Systems Engineering (MBSE), to refine and establish common methodologies (a ‘grammar’) for nuclear modelling systems. This model-based approach facilitates the handling of complex and stringent requirements in critical infrastructure projects, ultimately forming the basis for the use of digital twins industry-wide.

What are the biggest challenges in integrating digital twins in the R&D process, and what have you learned from this?

Surprisingly, the biggest challenges we’ve seen are not related to technology. Regulation, complexity, high cost and long timelines means there aren’t as many projects per year in nuclear as there are in other industries. Change management and the ability to integrate existing engineering processes is therefore the biggest challenge.

Secondly, nuclear is still a heavily siloed industry by discipline. You need seamless access to quality data, but as soon as you bridge silos is where difficulties arise.

There are three things we learned about the successful adoption of digital twins in our processes. Sponsorship and endorsement are critical; you need strong support to navigate the high-level safety requirements and regulatory barriers we face. It’s also crucial to have a clear vision of what you want to achieve, and what this would unlock in quantifiable terms.

Lastly, there’s no magic wand. With digital twins there’s no ‘plug-and-play’. Every project has different requirements, so you need to align your vision, resources (such as data and subject matter experts) and sponsorship, not to mention regulatory pathways and change management plans.

Where do you see digital twin technology heading in the next 3–5 years for R&D?

Digital twins will become more prevalent, regardless of industry. In nuclear the experiments are long, inefficient and expensive, so there will be a gradual increase in their relevance in the design process. For instance, the digital twin for the last generation of Advanced Modular Reactors (AMR) should facilitate the TRL evolution management and the move from First of a kind to Nth of a Kind. On another side, Digital twin will facilitate the simulation acceleration through the concept of PINN Physic Informed Neural Network. In a nutshell, there won’t be a digital twin revolution, this will happen gradually - all journeys start with a single step.

For those looking to adopt digital twin technologies, my advice would be to start small and ensure you have your sponsorship in place, being overly ambitious can increase the risk of failure and lead to significant cost. There are also a wide range of actors involved in the digital twin journey. The most successful projects I’ve seen have resulted from the efficient collaboration of stakeholders all working in their own area of expertise, whether that’s engineers, facility operators, solution providers or tools integrators. Digital twins are like a puzzle, everything and everyone, has to be in the right place.

Digital twins bridging simulation and experimentation

As Victor emphasized, adopting digital twin technology is a progressive journey that thrives on clear objectives, strong sponsorship and collaboration across disciplines. In highly regulated industries such as nuclear engineering, these virtual models can deliver substantial value by helping enhance reproducibility, accelerate design cycles and support informed decision-making.

The benefits for R&D are significant: streamlined timelines, improved traceability, and greater confidence in experimental outcomes. Assystem’s experience shows that success comes from starting with focused goals, aligning resources effectively and building partnerships with academia and industry experts to realise the full potential of this technology.

For those ready to explore digital twins further and strengthen research workflows, access to trusted methods and protocols is essential. Springer Nature Experiments offers a comprehensive portfolio of reliable resources to support innovation and reproducibility. Text and data mining (TDM) can also help by revealing patterns and connections across large research datasets, enabling deeper insights, identifying relationships and supporting semantic analysis. You can also discover more about the rise of digital twins and their growing role in sectors from healthcare to advanced engineering.

Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts

Are we entering a new renaissance in innovation, one grounded in responsibility and collaboration? Reflections on the 2025 Innovation Tournament

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Thu Dec 11 2025

Discover how Springer Nature’s 2025 Innovation Tournament celebrates curiosity, collaboration, and people-first ideas shaping the future of research.

Springer Nature’s Innovation Tournament is more than an annual initiative; it is a reflection of our culture. Now in its sixth year, it’s an employee-led initiative that invites staff across the globe to showcase their innovations that improve how we work, support researchers, and serve our communities. It offers a moment to step back and consider: What does innovation look like when it is driven by curiosity, collaboration, and the needs of our communities and colleagues?  

At this year’s finals, keynote speaker and guest judge, Jude Pullen1, helped frame the tournament’s broader significance. His talk invited jury members and finalists to consider: Are we living through a new Renaissance? The keynote at finals is designed to spark reflection and connect our innovation efforts to a wider context. Drawing on historical parallels, he reminded us that true innovation stems not just from technology, but from human insight and curiosity - as well as our proximity to other industries which may seem tangential, but in time, unlock new potential. The Renaissance was an era defined by exploration, learning, and cross-disciplinary thinking. Our Innovation Tournament showcases how creativity and collaboration can lead to meaningful change. It’s a reminder that innovation is not just about new tools, but equally about new ways of seeing and solving.   

What began as a small initiative has grown into a global event within Springer Nature for sharing ideas, solving problems, and celebrating creativity. In 2025, we received over 100 entries representing a strong range of ideas: from responsible AI tools that enhance editorial workflows while supporting, not replacing, the expertise of our colleagues and researchers to grassroots initiatives that promote wellbeing, and process improvements that save time and resources. 

Amongst the winners this year were projects that exemplify our people-first approach. One introduced a live chat function via WeChat to support open access authors in China, meeting researchers where they are, on platforms they already use. Another improved accessibility by offering a cleaner, more intuitive reading view. These innovations are practical, people-first solutions developed from a deep understanding of researchers and community needs.   

What continues to stand out is the breadth of ideas; from the bold and transformative to the small but powerful in their impact. That’s why we recently introduced the Little Gem Award, to recognise those clever, often quiet innovations that make a real difference. These are the kinds of ideas that improve workflows, enhance user experience, or help us make better use our content. They might not grab headlines, but they are no less important.  

Innovation, at its core, is about engagement with people, ideas and challenges. It begins with listening to the needs of our communities, users, and colleagues, and responding with solutions that resonate. When we innovate with purpose, we strengthen our role as a trusted source of knowledge and deepen our connection with the communities we serve.   

The Innovation Tournament is more than a showcase, it is a signal that innovation is everyone’s business, and that every contribution counts. It brings Springer Nature’s promise to life: with us, you can develop your curiosity, stretch your horizons, and be yourself. The tournament creates space for experimentation, encourages new thinking, and supports colleagues to grow. And, of course, not every idea can win, and that is okay. Innovation is a process of exploration and learning. 

As the research landscape continues to evolve, so too must the ways in which knowledge is discovered, accessed, used and built upon. Keeping pace with change means thoughtfully exploring new technologies and innovation where they can add value, while staying close to the people we serve and the problems they are trying to solve.  

So, are we in a new Renaissance? The signs are promising and what is clear is that we’re in a moment of opportunity. And if the 2025 Innovation Tournament is any indication, Springer Nature is well-positioned to meet it with creativity, insight, and a shared commitment to advancing discovery and serving our communities.  

--> Check out the highlights from our finals of the Innovation Tournament 2025 here 

Footnotes

1. Jude Pullen is a Creative Technologist and Prototyping Expert. He is a chartered engineer, and a featured inventor on BBC2’s Big Life Fix, is passionate about inclusive design, and helping companies shape their futures through design thinking, and novel use of technologies. His work includes medical, consumer goods, toys, automotive, education. He has worked with NHS, Dyson, Sugru, RS Group, IKEA, NVIDIA, LEGO. For more information visit: https://www.judepullen.com/

Related Tags:

Publishing with purpose: How quartile three and four journals support research in lower- and middle-income countries

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri Dec 5 2025

All validated, peer-reviewed research contributes to science even if the journal it appears in “doesn’t rank highly” in citation metrics. This can be especially true when the research comes from, or applies to, situations in lower- and middle-income countries (LMICs). This type of research might not be “buzzy” enough to generate outsized citation counts, but it really matters. That’s where journals — especially open access (OA) ones like BMC’s AIDS Research and Therapy — shine. Journals like these are platforms for the kinds of important, sometimes incremental, research that makes a difference but might not make a flash.

Why citation “rank” does not equal “importance”

A recent Springer Nature white paper, Demonstrating Journal Value Beyond Rankings, looked at the value that journals ranking in the third or fourth quartile (Q3/Q4 journals) by citations bring to the communities they serve. The white paper includes cases studies, and one of those case studies looked at the BMC journal, AIDS Research and Therapy.

To talk about this, and get some more context on that case study, I recently had the chance to catch up with AIDS Research and Therapy’s Editor-in-Chief, Dr. Barbara Castelnuovo, about how her journal does this. Born and trained in Italy, Dr. Castelnuovo now carries out research on AIDS and HIV, and treats patients in Uganda.

AIDS Research and Therapy, by “traditional citation measures,” ranks in the third or fourth quartile. Yet the research it publishes helps save lives on the ground in places like Uganda and other LMICs. For example, over the last two years, the journal has published important work on injectable antiretroviral therapy (ART) in LMICs. Says Dr. Castelnuovo, “[I]njectable ART from LMIC, particularly aimed to address patient preferences… is a very important topic as we advocate for access to injectable drugs.”

Serving research communities — regardless of size

Because a journal like AIDS Research and Therapy focuses on one specific topic, it, almost by definition, can’t earn the same scale of citation numbers that a broader-scope journal (like one publishing research broadly on all pathology-causing viruses) can. And because the work published here — and in journals of similar scope — gets used in the field by practitioners (who don’t in turn publish and cite), looking only at citation rankings can mask these journals’ true importance.

In the case study, Dr. Castelnuovo noted that, “A lot of data that comes out of Africa will be a single case study, with limited population sizes… But when there are 20 published [articles] showing differentiated service delivery is working well, then you can have countries or organisations adopting these practices.”

AIDS Research and Therapy serves a smaller, but critical, community which is itself more concentrated in LMICs. And as part of bigger OA imprint dedicated to serving these communities, a journal like this can offer more waivers so researchers from LMICs can publish OA. Dr. Castelnuovo told me:

I like to think our journal gives an opportunity for studies that cannot be published in journal[s] with very high impact factors but still provide very important information for clinicians and program managers… [S]cientists from LMIC[s] can request waivers for publication fees. This is a service that we provide because they will not otherwise have opportunities to publish their work [OA]… While research from LMICs may not always provide ground-breaking information, it is very relevant for those working in LMIC settings, where [the] majority of people living with HIV live. 

Publishing essential research

AIDS Research and Therapy is just one example of the important service these quartile three/quartile four journals provide to global research. Springer Nature recently published a white paper Demonstrating Journal Value Beyond Rankings, that goes into more depth and looks at journals across disciplines. (Dr. Castelnuovo contributed a case study for this white paper.)

Find out more in the white paper: Demonstrating Journal Value Beyond Rankings.

Related content

On the occasion of Human Rights Day

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Thu Dec 4 2025

There’s a cliché that says: It’s darkest before the dawn. Each year on 10 December, we commemorate the anniversary of the 1948 Universal Declaration of Human Rights. Today, 77 years later, this year’s Human Rights Day theme is, “Our Everyday Essentials.” And Springer Nature, as part of our

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019

focus on the UN Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs), actively supports researchers working directly on these issues.

The theme of this year’s Human Rights Day shows how human rights shape our daily lives. Human rights are far from abstract ideas but are essential elements of our everyday lives.

The 2025 Human Rights Day

The UN proclaimed the Universal Declaration of Human Rights on December 10th, 1948 — just three years after the end of World War II — and we celebrate Human Rights Day on the anniversary of that day each year. On this 77th anniversary, the theme of “Our Everyday Essentials” spotlights that human rights are positive, essential and attainable. In times of growing conflict and divided societies, “Our Everyday Essentials” seeks to reconnect people with human rights and bridge “the gap between human rights principles and everyday experiences”. The aims of this year’s Human Rights Day are threefold and strive to

  1. Strengthen the understanding of human rights, 
  2. Engage people to advocate for human rights, and
  3. Inspire and encourage individual and collective action.

The Intersection of Human Rights Day and SDG 16: Peace, Justice, and Strong Institutions 

The preamble of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights sets out that “recognition of the inherent dignity and of the equal and inalienable rights of all members of the human family is the foundation of freedom, justice and peace in the world”. This makes promoting human rights an inherent part of the Sustainable Development Goals’ (SDGs’) agenda, especially SDG 16. SDG 16 is dedicated to the promotion of peace, justice, and strong institutions.

Springer Nature’s Human Rights Portfolio

The researchers we work with (from across disciplines), and the work they publish with us, cover the whole range of research into human rights protection, tying directly into Human Rights Day 2025’s themes. Springer Nature’s portfolio reflects the importance and tangible nature of human rights. Some examples of the books we have published — some of which you will also find on this page —include research on (1) contemporary challenges to human rights, (2) foundations of human rights law and theory, (3) human rights in (everyday) practice and (4) regional human rights regimes.

In times of growing conflict and societies marked by divisions, our titles explore solution strategies to these contemporary Challenges to Human Rights from a scientific and often interdisciplinary lens. Titles include: 

Foundations of Human Rights Law and Theory: This theme covers titles that offer foundational texts on human rights. Our titles cover conceptual approaches and philosophical aspects of human rights as well as legal institutions at the international level. Titles include:

Human Rights in (Everyday) Practice: Central to this year’s theme, our titles address human rights in (everyday) practice and spotlight the protection of specific human rights. Our titles span a wide range of human rights, including children’s rights, minority rights, participatory rights, and rights vis-à-vis the environment.

Regional Human Rights Regimes: Protecting human rights requires strong legal institutions. Our titles explore the protection of human rights not only at the international level but also spotlight regional protection regimes. Titles include:

You’ll also find even more essential research in Springer Nature’s ongoing book series, including: 

as well as in the journals we publish, for example:

Add your voice to Springer Nature’s Human Rights programme

The work that human rights researchers publish with Springer Nature are part of the efforts to create a better day. Editors from across Springer Nature have curated human rights-related research on a dedicated hub, which I invite you to explore.

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019
Here you’ll also read about how you can work with our editors to publish your research, too. Partner with a publisher that is committed to amplifying SDG research— we would look forward to working with you.


Explore human rights-related publications and more on our dedicated hub.

Related content: 

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source!

Research integrity audits - the routine check-up for journals

R
Research Publishing
By: undefined, Wed Dec 3 2025

Every year, millions of us take our vehicles for an annual check-up, and that check-up is far more than just a mechanic kicking the tyres and asking us whether we’ve heard any funny noises.  Not only do we not want to break down on a motorway, we want to catch problems early, before they turn into bigger issues (and bigger bills). That requires a comprehensive service that looks at all parts of the machine. And this applies whether we are talking about a racing bike that offers transport to a few, or a mighty double-decker bus that carries thousands every day.     

The same principle of taking a careful look at how things are running is true when it comes to research integrity and our journals.  Last year we established our Assurance team, an audit team within the Springer Nature Research Integrity Group (SN RIG) that reviews how research integrity-related policies and procedures are applied across journals.  SN RIG Assurance audits are independent from the teams being audited, they are modelled on methods used by SN Internal Audit team, and they're designed to provide a strong layer of accountability.  Our audits benchmark against internal policies and industry standards such as COPE.  They assess the submission to publication process, including editorial and collection management, and aim to reduce research integrity risks, identify areas for improvement and share best practice.      

Case Study: Cureus Journal of Medical Science

One of Assurance’s first projects was a four-month audit of the Cureus Journal of Medical Science (Cureus JMS). Springer Nature acquired Cureus in late 2022, recognising its potential to expand open access, peer-reviewed research, in particular clinical case reports, and support improved health outcomes globally. Cureus JMS follows a unique publishing model that helps researchers from underserved communities to publish their findings rapidly in a freely accessible format and allows approved institutions to showcase research through Academic Channels that are fully overseen by Cureus JMS’ independent editors.

As a relatively recent acquisition, we decided that it would be a good place to begin our work. The audit reviewed a representative sample of published Cureus JMS articles from 2023 to 2024, including both Academic Channel and non-Channel content. We examined submission processes, peer review management, editorial oversight and channel management to identify gaps and opportunities for improvement. To ensure that our work was reliable and accurately represented the journal, we used a sample size large enough to provide 95% confidence in our findings, giving us strong evidence to guide recommendations. In agreement with Cureus JMS, we then undertook an audit of an even larger sample to provide us with an 99.9% confidence in our findings, which supported the same findings and recommendations.

Findings and improvements: From Tune-up to Upgrade

The audit confirmed that Cureus JMS operates with robust controls and effectively safeguards research integrity in the vast majority of cases. These controls include: 

  • rigorous single-blind peer review by at least two independent reviewers 
  • strong editorial oversight throughout the publishing process 
  • established systems that effectively mitigate research integrity risks.

However, much like a mechanic's full service, we identified opportunities to fine-tune performace, and Cureus JMS was receptive to our recommendations. 

Clarifying Processes and Strengthening Transparency

The audit highlighted opportunities to make Cureus JMS’ processes clearer for authors, reviewers, and Channel staff—particularly around declarations for ethics, informed consent, and conflict of interest disclosures. While authors were prompted to submit declarations during the submission process, we occasionally found them to be incorrect or missing. Cureus JMS acted quickly by refining author guidelines, improving submission workflows to capture accurate disclosures, and strengthening training for editors and Academic Channel teams.

Addressing Misconceptions

One important finding was that some terminology used by Cureus JMS - in relation to Academic Channels ‘article adviser’ roles - could lead to misconceptions about rigour and bias. Channel processes were found to be robust and, to remove any ambiguity, Cureus JMS publicly clarified:

  • Channel operations:  Each submission is managed by an independent Cureus JMS editor, who oversees peer review using vetted reviewers. Safeguards are in place to prevent Channel members from accessing manuscripts and influencing decisions.
  • Channel roles: Channel Admins manage the channel homepage. Curators, who are specialists in their field, perform an initial screening for scope, language, and formatting before manuscripts enter formal peer review.
  • Adviser roles: Authors can invite peers for feedback while their manuscript undergoes independent peer review. This advisory input is separate from the formal peer review process, which remains managed by Cureus JMS editors and conducted by vetted reviewers.

These refinements, alongside enhanced training, reinforce Cureus JMS’ strong foundation and commitment to transparency.

Strengthening Channel Governance

Academic Channels allow institutions to showcase research with added visibility. All content published through Channels undergoes independent peer review managed by Cureus JMS editors, who retain final publication decisions.

Assurance recommended additional vetting for institutions and Channel staff prior to participation, and committing these checks to written guidance documents, so that vetting would be consistently accurate. Cureus JMS acted promptly and created internal guidance that includes up-to-date integrity checks. Today, all institutions and Channel staff are verified against integrity checks, and Cureus JMS maintains oversight of Channel conduct and content.

Looking Ahead

Research integrity is not a one-time effort — it’s a continuous journey. Like regular check-ups keep vehicles safe, audits help journals run smoothly and reliably. By working collaboratively and transparently, we help journals like Cureus JMS strengthen their processes and continue to uphold high standards. This reflects Springer Nature’s broader approach: investing in technology and expert teams, harnessing new AI and other tools, and continually evolving. At the heart of this is a focus on building and maintaining trust—through openness and working together.

Learn more about our research integrity work here.


Insights from USRAC with David Rosowsky on research and innovation

T
The Link
By: undefined, Tue Dec 2 2025

As the research ecosystem undergoes rapid transformation, from the rise of AI to the push for open science, institutions and publishers are rethinking how knowledge is created, shared and valued. This blog features insights from David Rosowsky, Senior Advisor to the President at Arizona State University and member of Springer Nature’s US Research Advisory Council (USRAC), as he explores how AI is reshaping scholarly communication, the importance of rebuilding public trust and the role of early career researchers in leading change toward a more inclusive and innovative research future.

The pace of change in the global research landscape is accelerating, driven by technological breakthroughs, shifting funding models and a growing demand for openness and accountability. Against this backdrop, academic institutions and publishers are rethinking their roles in shaping the future of science. At the heart of this transformation is a renewed focus on collaboration, innovation and trust.

Springer Nature’s US Research Advisory Council (USRAC), launched in 2021, was created to foster dialogue between publishers and key stakeholders across the research ecosystem, including funders, institutions, policymakers, scholarly societies, and early career researchers. The council provides a platform to share perspectives on research culture and the societal impact of science, helping Springer Nature align its publishing activities with the evolving priorities of the academic community.

David Rosowsky, Senior Advisor to the President at Arizona State University and a member of USRAC, brings a unique perspective to these challenges. His reflections build on themes explored in recent blogs on The Link, such as the growing role of open science in reshaping research culture and the urgent need to rebuild public trust in science. From transparency in peer review to empowering early career researchers, these blogs have spotlighted how institutions and publishers can work together to foster a more inclusive and impactful research ecosystem. In this interview, Rosowsky adds his voice to that conversation, sharing insights on AI, innovation and the future of scholarly communication.

What’s your role at Arizona State University?

I serve as Senior Advisor to President Michael Crow and as Senior Fellow in the University Design Institute (UDI) at ASU. As senior advisor, I assist the president in visioning and planning for several enterprise-level design and implementation strategies. This is a fascinating role and opportunity for me, at this stage in my career, to be part of a truly remarkable institution. In addition to getting to work with a remarkable university president and his leadership team, helping to vision and build an ever more innovative and impactful “New American University,” I am here at a time of great challenge and change for higher education. In my role at ASU, I am leveraging all of my experience as a faculty member, researcher, department head, dean, provost, and VPR. Being at ASU also provides a unique and powerful platform from which I continue to write and speak about higher U.S. higher education.

What led you to join USRAC, and what’s your experience been like?

I was invited to join and was quickly compelled by the opportunity to join other university leaders in advising and perhaps guiding one of the world’s leading scientific publishers as they, too, evolve vision and strategies for a rapidly changing world. This includes how to work most effectively in partnership with research institutions and researchers, but also how respond responsibly to political and technological shifts affecting both the conduct of research and the dissemination of new knowledge. I am impressed to see Springer-Nature getting out in front of the real challenges that lie ahead for researchers, research institutions, and the broader scientific community. My experience to-date (my first year on the USRAC) has been wonderful. My thinking has evolved, my views have expanded, and my professional network has grown thanks to this opportunity to serve as a member of the USRAC.

The latest USRAC theme explored AI and open science. What impact are you seeing on research practice?

The introduction of AI is a once-in-a-lifetime phenomenon, one that is quickly impacting (and will forever alter) the entire scientific research landscape. Everything from the conduct of research to the dissemination of results to grant-writing to information/data access and even the once human-only endeavors of discovery and innovation are being upended. This is something to celebrate and be excited about, not to be resisted or feared. What an exciting time. Open science is the future, and it’s here. And scientific communication will be radically different in this new world of AI and open science.

What challenges do researchers face today, and how can institutions help?

Researchers are understandably nervous about securing the resources they need, now more than ever. There is considerable uncertainty and angst. Universities will not be able to make up the projected decline in federal support for research. Neither will philanthropy or the private sector (business). Institutions will need to approach the expected new reality from both sides: (1) assist researchers and research teams in identifying sources of support (traditional and new) and putting the best proposals forward, and (2) adjusting performance expectations and Review, Promotion, and Tenure (RPT) requirements to reflect the radically altered federal funding opportunity space. Other policies and practices that may require changes include those around university-industry partnerships, priority placed on (and support for) IP and tech transfer activities, and acknowledging the new vectors for scientific communication beyond the peer-reviewed journal article that can and should be counted in RPT decisions.

What inspires you about the future of research, and how can early career researchers and publishers help shape it?

Everything inspires me! I am a science geek first and foremost. I get excited every time I see a new technology, and new gadget, or a new discovery. And my brain quickly goes to “what does this make it possible to achieve NOW or NEXT?”. But we have serious work to do. First, we need to rebuild some very important relationships with the broader public. Whether it’s science, research, universities, or higher education broadly, all have lost public trust and confidence. So, while we all figure out how to continue to drive research and discovery in a changed world, we also must commit to restoring public trust and public support.

Our newest researchers are the ones who will show their colleagues not only the newest technologies and techniques, but also the newest ways of sharing both excitement and the findings from their work. They are also going to be explorers, pioneers and first-adopters in leveraging new sources of funding and new partnerships to conduct their research.

Great publishers, those that are both forward-looking (seeing changes on the horizon for their industry and for the scientific communities that support them) and genuinely committed to the success of faculty and researchers, can help respond to all the issues I mentioned above. I am honored to be part of the USRAC and, I hope, helping to make these partnerships happen, succeed, and matter.

P_David Rosowsky_140x140 px © Springer Nature 2025
About David Rosowsky

David Rosowsky is Senior Advisor to the President at Arizona State University, Senior Fellow at the University Design Institute, and Foundation Professor in the Ira A. Fulton Schools of Engineering. With over 20 years in senior leadership roles, including Provost at the University of Vermont, Vice President for Research at Kansas State University, and Dean of Engineering at Rensselaer Polytechnic Institute, he brings deep expertise in institutional strategy, research innovation, and academic leadership.

As a frequent speaker and writer, Rosowsky focuses on topics such as higher education governance, change management, research strategy, public university transformation and the future of scholarly publishing. His work has been featured in Forbes, The Chronicle of Higher Education, Inside Higher Ed, and AGB Trusteeship magazine.


Related content

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!

Four Things to Know about Springer Nature's New Preprint Policy

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Fri Nov 28 2025

This article was originally published in 2019 and was last updated in November 2025.

Preprints are known to provide a number of benefits for the research community and that is why their usage and sharing is rapidly growing in the field; from getting community feedback on your work as a researcher, enabling you to claim priority for a discovery to granting you with free and speedy access to research findings.

At Springer Nature we always supported preprint sharing in our imprints, and now we are pushing the envelope even further to make it easier for researchers and the community to use and share preprints by introducing a new unified policy across all Springer Nature journals.

Here are the four essential things to know about our new policy:


You can choose the license you prefer for your preprint: We support all varieties of licenses for preprints including Creative Commons (CC) licenses. The type of CC-license chosen will affect how the preprint may be shared and reused. More information to help guide licensing choices can be found in these resource documents developed by an ASAPbio licensing taskforce.


You should cite preprints as per scholarly norms for citation: Preprints may be cited in the reference list of articles under consideration at Springer Nature journals, as shown here;  Babichev, S. A., Ries, J. & Lvovsky, A. I. Quantum scissors: teleportation of single-mode optical states by means of a nonlocal single photon. Preprint at http://arxiv.org/abs/quant-ph/0208066 (2002).


You can submit your preprint to any legal preprint sharing platform of your choice: Publishing your research manuscript on a preprint server will not affect the way your article is handled when it is submitted: Posting of preprints of research manuscripts is not considered prior publication and will not jeopardize consideration at Springer Nature journals. Furthermore, research manuscripts posted on preprint servers will not be taken into account when determining the advance provided by a research study under consideration at a Springer Nature journal.


You are free to respond or clarify if the media ask you questions about a preprint manuscript: We advise you to be clear with journalists that preprints are not peer reviewed so the claims made in the research manuscript are provisional and may change. Researchers should also be aware that media coverage of preprint material may reduce or pre-empt coverage by other media at the time of publication.


Preprints are a great way to share your research early and get feedback from the community. Start sharing and track your manuscript’s review progress with our In Review service.

How SDG research drives policy: A special report

T
The Researcher's Source
By: undefined, Mon Nov 24 2025

The Sustainable Development Goals (SDGs) have become a powerful lens through which we understand and address society’s most urgent challenges. SDG research has grown faster than the broader research market, with SDG-related articles currently accounting for almost 25% of all research published. But does SDG research have impact beyond academia?

A new Springer Nature report, titled From publications to policy: the impact of research towards achieving the Sustainable Development Goals, explores how SDG research is cited in policy. It draws on more than 19 million policy documents, and offers a new perspective on the relationship between science and real-world decision-making.  

The results are encouraging, as Ritu Dhand, Springer Nature’s Chief Scientific Officer, tells us. 

What is the significance of the Sustainable Development Goals and how much published research is related to one of the 17 SDGs?

SN SDG logo © Springer Nature 2019
The SDGs address some of our biggest global societal challenges - these include public health, climate change, renewable energy, environmental protection, economic growth, and societal inequality. All of these were already active areas of academic research long before the introduction of the SDGs in 2015. The Goals provide a common framework for researchers, funders, policymakers, and institutions to measure progress and to demonstrate the real-world impact of research. Nearly one quarter of all published research is related to the SDGs, and this area is expanding at a faster pace than the overall research landscape. Indeed, in 2024 over 1.2M articles contributing to resolving our global societal challenges were published - an increase of ~1000% since 2000.

Is SDG research used and cited more than non-SDG research? 

Yes, our own publishing data, as outlined in the report, shows that SDG-related research is used, cited, and downloaded more, especially when published open access. In other words, SDG research demonstrates higher academic impact. This trend reflects the global relevance and urgency of SDG topics such as health, climate, and social development, which attract significant scholarly engagement and visibility.  

Recent research from Springer Nature has also shown that a majority of researchers would like “public good” to be taken into account in assessments of their research contributions, in terms of the effect of their work on society, the economy, or global challenges more broadly. 

What about the impact of SDG research beyond academia?

When we consider research impact we usually think article citations and journal impact factors, however surely the highest measure of research is when it is seen to have societal impact and lead to new policy measures. The UN’s 2030 Agenda also calls for science to inform policy and deliver societal outcomes, but, until now, there has been limited evidence showing how published research is actually taken up in policy. The report from publications to policy, published in partnership with Overton, is groundbreaking, focusing on how research is being used. 

And the results are encouraging! Academic research is cited in SDG-related policy more often than in wider policy, and we see think tanks, Non-Governmental Organizations (NGOs), and Intergovernmental Organisations (IGOs) playing an important role in bridging the gap between research and policy. This is significant, because it can be challenging for research to find its way into policy. In this light, we are more than proud of our SDG journals when >50% of the published articles are directly addressing one or more of the UN Sustainable Development Goals.

"This new report offers a new perspective on the relationship between science and real-world decision-making. The results are encouraging: Academic research is cited in SDG-related policy more often than in wider policy.” 

You mentioned that when SDG research is published open access, it is used, cited, and downloaded more. Can you elaborate on the role of open access with regard to the SDGs?

Publishing open access makes research accessible to anyone, anywhere. Open access supports the UN 2030 Agenda by ensuring that knowledge essential to sustainable development is accessible, reusable, and actionable. It removes barriers to knowledge, increasing visibility.  

The report shows that SDG-related research is more likely to be published open access and that open access articles are more likely to be cited, with a higher average number of policy citations. Our findings indicate that the visibility and reach of SDG research in policy is amplified when published open access. 

Findings from the report show that other editorial models influence SDG policy impact. What’s the story there?

I’ve just touched on the role open access plays, but we see that other factors play a role too. For instance, inclusive journals play a critical role in advancing the Goals. As the report shows, from a sample of 100,000 articles from Springer Nature’s journals, inclusive journal articles received slightly more SDG policy citations than comparative selective journal articles. This is a notable finding, as it suggests that while selective journals are more highly cited in academia than inclusive journals, they are not necessarily more influential in policy. 

We also saw that policy documents cite a high proportion of non-primary research content, including reviews, letters, and news, indicating that summaries and syntheses are valued in policymaking.

The report discusses the underrepresentation of research from the Global South. What is the issue and which factors have contributed to it?

Indeed, a major challenge is the underrepresentation of research from the Global South and low- and middle-income countries (LMICs) in policy, even within their own domestic contexts. Most SDG-related policy documents in these regions rely heavily on research from high-income countries, particularly the US and UK, while South-to-South knowledge exchange remains minimal.  

This imbalance reflects structural barriers such as limited visibility of Southern research, linguistic divides, and systemic inequalities in global publishing systems. As a result, policies often lack contextually relevant evidence, reducing their effectiveness in addressing local priorities and lived realities. 

How can Springer Nature work to strengthen the research-policy connection for the SDGs and address some of the recommendations from the report?

We are actively working to strengthen the research-to-policy connection by expanding open access publishing, supporting inclusive journals, and commissioning content such as reviews that policymakers value.  

We also invest in training, widening geographic representation to amplify research from the Global South, and partnerships with think tanks, NGOs, and IGOs.  

Through initiatives like the Science for a Sustainable Future event series, Springer Nature brings together policymakers and researchers to foster collaboration and ensure that evidence-based science informs decisions aligned with the UN’s 2030 Agenda. 

And from the side of researchers, how can they help their research inform policy decisions? 

Researchers can improve the chances of their work influencing policy by focusing on accessibility, inclusivity, and relevance.  

The report shows that open access significantly accelerates and amplifies policy impact, with open access articles cited in SDG-related policy both sooner and more frequently than non-open access articles. Inclusive journals are cited in policy at similar or even higher rates than selective journals, making them a valuable route for impact.  

Policymakers also favour synthesised and accessible formats, such as reviews, commentaries, and summaries, over lengthy primary research. Finally, building partnerships with knowledge brokers such as think tanks, NGOs, and IGOs can help bridge the gap between research and decision-making, ensuring evidence is translated into actionable policy.

Read the report: From publications to policy: the impact of research towards achieving the Sustainable Development Goals

Ritu Dhand © springernature 2023
Ritu Dhand, Chief Scientific Officer, Springer Nature

Ritu Dhand is responsible for championing our editors, focusing on promoting and driving external editorial excellence, in partnership with all the journal publishers across Springer and BMC journals.

Before taking on the role of Chief Scientific Officer in January 2022, Ritu served as VP Nature Editorial, overseeing editorial strategy and management of Nature, Nature Communications, and the Nature Research and Review Journals.

Ritu holds a PhD in cancer research from University College, London.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news and blogs, sign up to The Researcher's Source!

Solving complex problems in logistics and transportation with Operations Research

T
The Link
By: undefined, Mon Nov 24 2025

Operations Research is a field focused on solving complex, real-world problems using analytical methods. From transportation and logistics to healthcare and supply chains, its applications are wide-ranging and increasingly important. This blog introduces Springer Nature’s new Operations Research eBook collection and explores how it supports teaching, research and professional practice across disciplines.

Operations Research helps industries manage complexity and make smarter decisions. It’s especially valuable in logistics, transportation, supply chains, manufacturing and energy, fields where systems are interconnected and data-driven decisions matter. Also known as Management Science, it uses analytical methods and modelling to solve real-world problems, from pricing and financial planning to healthcare and disaster response. It’s also central to business education: around 30% of Springer Nature’s Operations Research portfolio includes professional books used in MBA case studies, and 11% are textbooks used in core curricula.

As its relevance grows, Operations Research is gaining fresh attention. Springer Nature’s new eBook collection brings together content from business, mathematics, computer science and engineering, making it one of the most interdisciplinary resources available. We spoke with editorial directors William Achauer and Christian Rauscher about the thinking behind the collection and why it’s a timely resource for academic libraries, research offices and corporate teams.

What motivated the launch of the Operations Research eBook collection and who is it for?

Operations Research is a core sub-discipline within Springer Nature’s business and management publishing portfolio. The decision to launch a dedicated eBook collection was driven by the success of the broader business and management collection and the opportunity to serve a growing audience focused on quantitative, data-driven approaches. With contributions from applied mathematics, computer science and engineering, the collection is highly interdisciplinary and reflects the expanding relevance of Operations Research across sectors.

This collection is designed for a wide range of users: researchers in business, logistics, supply chain management, analytics, economics (especially Game Theory), applied mathematics and engineering; professionals working in industries such as healthcare, manufacturing, sports and tourism; and students studying these disciplines. It supports both academic inquiry and practical application, making it a valuable resource for institutions and individuals alike.

Which research areas and expert contributors shape the Operations Research eBook collection?

The Operations Research eBook collection covers a wide range of research areas, including industrial production, logistics, routing and scheduling, supply chain management, multicriteria decision making, game theory and the management of large complex systems. It also explores cutting-edge topics such as artificial intelligence, big data, distributed ledger technology, smart grids, and adaptive systems, reflecting the latest trends in both research and industry.

The collection features contributions from leading experts in the field, including:

  • Frederick Hillier (Stanford), founding editor of the flagship series ISORMS
  • Michel Gendreau (Montreal), current ISORMS editor and top-cited scholar in operations research
  • Grazia Speranza (Brescia), former president of EURO
  • Panos Pardalos (Florida), EURO Gold Medal winner
  • Dmitry Ivanov (Berlin), co-author of Global Supply Chain and Operations Management
  • Gilbert Laporte (Montreal), Order of Canada recipient and one of Canada’s most influential management researchers

Together, these contributors help shape a collection that is both academically rigorous and practically relevant.

Which subject areas are closely related to Operations Research and why do they matter?

Operations Research overlaps significantly with applied mathematics, computer science and engineering, disciplines that provide the analytical and technical foundation for its models and methods. These connections enable the development of tools for optimization, decision-making and systems analysis across industries.

Its interdisciplinary nature also links it to several other subject areas. Research into the fields of production, logistics and supply chain can be expanded by the Springer Nature Business & Management eBook collection, applied science has crossovers with the Mathematics collection, the field of big data analytics is also covered by the Computer Science collection, industrial management is an interdisciplinary field within Mechanical Engineering and game theory, financial management and investment and distributed ledger technology (DLT) are also part of the Economics & Finance collection.

These crossovers make Operations Research a powerful framework for tackling complex challenges across academic and professional domains.

What content will the first books in the Operations Research eBook collection cover?

The initial titles in this new eBook collection bring together core works from the business and management program, alongside key contributions from applied mathematics, computer science and engineering. The content reflects the breadth of the field, with applications in mobility, retail, healthcare management, disaster response and more.

Covering nearly every product category, from SpringerBriefs and Palgrave Pivots to monographs, proceedings and textbooks, the collection supports undergraduate, graduate and advanced learning, as well as professional practice through case studies and applied research. As William Achauer, Editorial Director for eBooks in Operations Research, notes:

“Springer Nature is the leading publisher of Operations Research, both in terms of journals and in books. This eBook collection represents the largest set of contributions of methods, cases, and applications in Operations Research there is on the planet.”

This collection offers a unique opportunity to access high-quality, interdisciplinary content that supports teaching, research and innovation. To explore the full scope of the Operations Research eBook collection or to discuss how it can enhance your library’s offerings, visit the collection or get in touch.

Related content:

Don't miss the latest news & blogs, subscribe to The Link Alerts!